The Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1590 et seq., 29 U.S.C. 651 et seq. ) requires, in part, that every employer covered under the Act furnish to his employees employment and a place of employment which are free from recognized hazards that are causing or are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to his employees. The Act also requires that employers comply with occupational safety and health standards promulgated under the Act, and that employees comply with standards, rules, regulations and orders issued under the Act which are applicable to their own actions and conduct. The Act authorizes the Department of Labor to conduct inspections, and to issue citations and proposed penalties for alleged violations. The Act, under section 20(b), also authorizes the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare to conduct inspections and to question employers and employees in connection with research and other related activities. The Act contains provisions for adjudication of violations, periods prescribed for the abatement of violations, and proposed penalties by the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission, if contested by an employer or by an employee or authorized representative of employees, and for judicial review. The purpose of this part 1903 is to prescribe rules and to set forth general policies for enforcement of the inspection, citation, and proposed penalty provisions of the Act. In situations where this part 1903 sets forth general enforcement policies rather than substantive or procedural rules, such policies may be modified in specific circumstances where the Secretary or his designee determines that an alternative course of action would better serve the objectives of the Act.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 39 FR 39036, Nov. 5, 1974; 80 FR 49904, Aug. 18, 2015; 81 FR 43452, July 1, 2016]
[45 FR 65923, Oct. 3, 1980]
Any permission to enter, inspect, review records, or question any person, shal not imply or be conditioned upon a waiver of any cause of action, citation, or penalty under the Act. Compliance Safety and Health Officers are not authorized to grant any such waiver.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 81 FR 43452, July 1, 2016]
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 14, 1971, as amended at 47 FR 6533, Feb. 12, 1982; 47 FR 55481, Dec. 10, 1982]
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 89 FR 22601, Apr. 1, 2024]
“All information reported to or otherwise obtained by the Secretary or his representative in connection with any inspection or proceeding under this Act which contains or which might reveal a trade secret referred to in section 1905 of title 18 of the United States Code shall be considered confidential for the purpose of that section, except that such information may be disclosed to other officers or employees concerned with carrying out this Act or when relevant in any proceeding under this Act. In any such proceeding the Secretary, the Commission, or the court shall issue such orders as may be appropriate to protect the confidentiality of trade secrets.” Section 15 of the Act is considered a statute within the meaning of section 552(b)(3) of title 5 of the United States Code, which exempts from the disclosure requirements matters that are “specifically exempted from disclosure by statute.”
Compliance Safety and Health Officers may consult with employees concerning matters of occupational safety and health to the extent they deem necessary for the conduct of an effective and thorough inspection. During the course of an inspection, any employee shall be afforded an opportunity to bring any violation of the Act which he has reason to believe exists in the workplace to the attention of the Compliance Safety and Health Officer.
“No person shall discharge or in any manner discriminate against any employee because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding under or related to this Act or has testified or is about to testify in any such proceeding or because of the exercise by such employee on behalf of himself or others of any right afforded by this Act.”
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1973, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989]
Whenever and as soon as a Compliance Safety and Health Officer concludes on the basis of an inspection that conditions or practices exist in any place of employment which could reasonably be expected to cause death or serious physical harm immediately or before the imminence of such danger can be eliminated through the enforcement procedures otherwise provided by the Act, he shall inform the affected employees and employers of the danger and that he is recommending a civil action to restrain such conditions or practices and for other appropriate relief in accordance with the provisions of section 13(a) of the Act. Appropriate citations and notices of proposed penalties may be issued with respect to an imminent danger even though, after being informed of such danger by the Compliance Safety and Health Officer, the employer immediately eliminates the imminence of the danger and initiates steps to abate such danger.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 59 FR 66613, Dec. 27, 1994]
[40 FR 6334, Feb. 11, 1975; 40 FR 11351, Mar. 11, 1975]
The adjusted civil penalties for penalties proposed after January 15, 2025 are as follows:
The penalty per willful violation under section 17(a) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(a), shall not be less than $11,823 and shall not exceed $165,514.
The penalty per repeated violation under section 17(a) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(a), shall not exceed $165,514.
The penalty for a serious violation under section 17(b) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(b), shall not exceed $16,550.
The penalty for an other-than-serious violation under section 17(c) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(c), shall not exceed $16,550.
The penalty for a failure to correct a violation under section 17(d) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(d), shall not exceed $16,550 per day.
The penalty for a posting requirement violation under section 17(i) of the Act, 29 U.S.C. 666(i), shall not exceed $16,550.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 81 FR 43453, July 1, 2016; 82 FR 5382, Jan. 18, 2017; 83 FR 14, Jan. 2, 2018; 84 FR 219, Jan. 23, 2019; 85 FR 2298, Jan. 15, 2020; 86 FR 2969, Jan. 14, 2021; 87 FR 2336, Jan. 14, 2022; 88 FR 2217, Jan. 13, 2023; 89 FR 1817, Jan. 11, 2024; 90 FR 1861, Jan. 10, 2025]
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 81 FR 43453, July 1, 2016]
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 81 FR 43453, July 1, 2016]
Purpose. OSHA's inspections are intended to result in the abatement of violations of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (the OSH Act). This section sets forth the procedures OSHA will use to ensure abatement. These procedures are tailored to the nature of the violation and the employer's abatement actions.
This section applies to employers who receive a citation for a violation of the Occupational Safety and Health Act.
Appendix A to Section 1903.19—Sample Abatement-Certification Letter (Nonmandatory)
U. S. Department of Labor—OSHA
Address of the Area Office (on the citation)
[Company's Name]
[Company's Address]
The hazard referenced in Inspection Number [insert 9-digit #] for violation identified as:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on insert date by:
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was corrected on [insert date] by:
I attest that the information contained in this document is accurate.
Signature
Typed or Printed Name
Appendix B to Section 1903.19—Sample Abatement Plan or Progress Report (Nonmandatory)
U. S. Department of Labor—OSHA
Address of Area Office (on the citation)
[Company's Name]
[Company's Address]
Check one:
Abatement Plan [ ]
Progress Report [ ]
Inspection Number
Page __ of ____
Citation Number(s)*
Item Number(s)*
| Action | Proposed Completion Date (for abatement plans only) | Completion Date (for progress reports only) |
|---|---|---|
| 1. | ||
| 2. | ||
| 3. | ||
| 4. | ||
| 5. | ||
| 6. | ||
| 7. |
Date required for final abatement:
I attest that the information contained in this document is accurate.
Signature
Typed or Printed Name
Name of primary point of contact for questions: [optional]
Telephone number:
*Abatement plans or progress reports for more than one citation item may be combined in a single abatement plan or progress report if the abatement actions, proposed completion dates, and actual completion dates (for progress reports only) are the same for each of the citation items.
At the request of an affected employer, employee, or representative of employees, the Assistant Regional Director may hold an informal conference for the purpose of discussing any issues raised by an inspection, citation, notice of proposed penalty, or notice of intention to contest. The settlement of any issue at such conference shall be subject to the rules of procedure prescribed by the Review Commission. If the conference is requested by the employer, an affected employee or his representative shall be afforded an opportunity to participate, at the discretion of the Assistant Regional Director. If the conference is requested by an employee or representative of employees, the employer shall be afforded an opportunity to participate, at the discretion of the Assistant Regional Director. Any party may be represented by counsel at such conference. No such conference or request for such conference shall operate as a stay of any 15-working-day period for filing a notice of intention to contest as prescribed in § 1903.17.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971. Redesignated at 62 FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997]
Nothing in this part 1903 shall preempt the authority of any State to conduct inspections, to initiate enforcement proceedings or otherwise to implement the applicable provisions of State law with respect to State occupational safety and health standards in accordance with agreements and plans under section 18 of the Act and parts 1901 and 1902 of this chapter.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971. Redesignated at 62 FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997]
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 38 FR 22624, Aug. 23, 1973. Redesignated at 62 FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997]
The purpose of this rule (part 1904) is to require employers to record and report work-related fatalities, injuries, and illnesses.
[82 FR 20548, May 3, 2017]
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 85 FR 8731, Feb. 18, 2020]
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 79 FR 56186, Sept. 18, 2014]
If you create records to comply with another government agency's injury and illness recordkeeping requirements, OSHA will consider those records as meeting OSHA's part 1904 recordkeeping requirements if OSHA accepts the other agency's records under a memorandum of understanding with that agency, or if the other agency's records contain the same information as this part 1904 requires you to record. You may contact your nearest OSHA office or State agency for help in determining whether your records meet OSHA's requirements.
Employers are not required to keep OSHA injury and illness records for any establishment classified in the following North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) codes, unless they are asked in writing to do so by OSHA, the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), or a state agency operating under the authority of OSHA or the BLS. All employers, including those partially exempted by reason of company size or industry classification, must report to OSHA any employee's fatality, in-patient hospitalization, amputation, or loss of an eye (see § 1904.39).
| NAICS Code | Industry |
|---|---|
| 4412 | Other Motor Vehicle Dealers. |
| 4431 | Electronics and Appliance Stores. |
| 4461 | Health and Personal Care Stores. |
| 4471 | Gasoline Stations. |
| 4481 | Clothing Stores. |
| 4482 | Shoe Stores. |
| 4483 | Jewelry, Luggage, and Leather Goods Stores. |
| 4511 | Sporting Goods, Hobby, and Musical Instrument Stores. |
| 4512 | Book, Periodical, and Music Stores. |
| 4531 | Florists. |
| 4532 | Office Supplies, Stationery, and Gift Stores. |
| 4812 | Nonscheduled Air Transportation. |
| 4861 | Pipeline Transportation of Crude Oil. |
| 4862 | Pipeline Transportation of Natural Gas. |
| 4869 | Other Pipeline Transportation. |
| 4879 | Scenic and Sightseeing Transportation, Other. |
| 4885 | Freight Transportation Arrangement. |
| 5111 | Newspaper, Periodical, Book, and Directory Publishers. |
| 5112 | Software Publishers. |
| 5121 | Motion Picture and Video Industries. |
| 5122 | Sound Recording Industries. |
| 5151 | Radio and Television Broadcasting. |
| 5172 | Wireless Telecommunications Carriers (except Satellite). |
| 5173 | Telecommunications Resellers. |
| 5179 | Other Telecommunications. |
| 5181 | Internet Service Providers and Web Search Portals. |
| 5182 | Data Processing, Hosting, and Related Services. |
| 5191 | Other Information Services. |
| 5211 | Monetary Authorities—Central Bank. |
| 5221 | Depository Credit Intermediation. |
| 5222 | Nondepository Credit Intermediation. |
| 5223 | Activities Related to Credit Intermediation. |
| 5231 | Securities and Commodity Contracts Intermediation and Brokerage. |
| 5232 | Securities and Commodity Exchanges. |
| 5239 | Other Financial Investment Activities. |
| 5241 | Insurance Carriers. |
| 5242 | Agencies, Brokerages, and Other Insurance Related Activities. |
| 5251 | Insurance and Employee Benefit Funds. |
| 5259 | Other Investment Pools and Funds. |
| 5312 | Offices of Real Estate Agents and Brokers. |
| 5331 | Lessors of Nonfinancial Intangible Assets (except Copyrighted Works). |
| 5411 | Legal Services. |
| 5412 | Accounting, Tax Preparation, Bookkeeping, and Payroll Services. |
| 5413 | Architectural, Engineering, and Related Services. |
| 5414 | Specialized Design Services. |
| 5415 | Computer Systems Design and Related Services. |
| 5416 | Management, Scientific, and Technical Consulting Services. |
| 5417 | Scientific Research and Development Services. |
| 5418 | Advertising and Related Services. |
| 5511 | Management of Companies and Enterprises. |
| 5611 | Office Administrative Services. |
| 5614 | Business Support Services. |
| 5615 | Travel Arrangement and Reservation Services. |
| 5616 | Investigation and Security Services. |
| 6111 | Elementary and Secondary Schools. |
| 6112 | Junior Colleges. |
| 6113 | Colleges, Universities, and Professional Schools. |
| 6114 | Business Schools and Computer and Management Training. |
| 6115 | Technical and Trade Schools. |
| 6116 | Other Schools and Instruction. |
| 6117 | Educational Support Services. |
| 6211 | Offices of Physicians. |
| 6212 | Offices of Dentists. |
| 6213 | Offices of Other Health Practitioners. |
| 6214 | Outpatient Care Centers. |
| 6215 | Medical and Diagnostic Laboratories. |
| 6244 | Child Day Care Services. |
| 7114 | Agents and Managers for Artists, Athletes, Entertainers, and Other Public Figures. |
| 7115 | Independent Artists, Writers, and Performers. |
| 7213 | Rooming and Boarding Houses. |
| 7221 | Full-Service Restaurants. |
| 7222 | Limited-Service Eating Places. |
| 7224 | Drinking Places (Alcoholic Beverages). |
| 8112 | Electronic and Precision Equipment Repair and Maintenance. |
| 8114 | Personal and Household Goods Repair and Maintenance. |
| 8121 | Personal Care Services. |
| 8122 | Death Care Services. |
| 8131 | Religious Organizations. |
| 8132 | Grantmaking and Giving Services. |
| 8133 | Social Advocacy Organizations. |
| 8134 | Civic and Social Organizations. |
| 8139 | Business, Professional, Labor, Political, and Similar Organizations. |
[79 FR 56186, Sept. 18, 2014]
Each employer required by this part to keep records of fatalities, injuries, and illnesses must record each fatality, injury and illness that:
See § 1904.5.
See § 1904.6.
See § 1904.7.
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 81 FR 91809, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20548, May 3, 2017]
You must consider an injury or illness to be work-related if an event or exposure in the work environment either caused or contributed to the resulting condition or significantly aggravated a pre-existing injury or illness. Work-relatedness is presumed for injuries and illnesses resulting from events or exposures occurring in the work environment, unless an exception in § 1904.5(b)(2) specifically applies.
| 1904.5(b)(2) | You are not required to record injuries and illnesses if . . . |
|---|---|
| (i) | At the time of the injury or illness, the employee was present in the work environment as a member of the general public rather than as an employee. |
| (ii) | The injury or illness involves signs or symptoms that surface at work but result solely from a non-work-related event or exposure that occurs outside the work environment. |
| (iii) | The injury or illness results solely from voluntary participation in a wellness program or in a medical, fitness, or recreational activity such as blood donation, physical examination, flu shot, exercise class, racquetball, or baseball. |
| (iv) | The injury or illness is solely the result of an employee eating, drinking, or preparing food or drink for personal consumption (whether bought on the employer's premises or brought in). For example, if the employee is injured by choking on a sandwich while in the employer's establishment, the case would not be considered work-related. |
| Note: If the employee is made ill by ingesting food contaminated by workplace contaminants (such as lead), or gets food poisoning from food supplied by the employer, the case would be considered work-related. | |
| (v) | The injury or illness is solely the result of an employee doing personal tasks (unrelated to their employment) at the establishment outside of the employee's assigned working hours. |
| (vi) | The injury or illness is solely the result of personal grooming, self medication for a non-work-related condition, or is intentionally self-inflicted. |
| (vii) | The injury or illness is caused by a motor vehicle accident and occurs on a company parking lot or company access road while the employee is commuting to or from work. |
| (viii) | The illness is the common cold or flu (Note: contagious diseases such as tuberculosis, brucellosis, hepatitis A, or plague are considered work-related if the employee is infected at work). |
| (ix) | The illness is a mental illness. Mental illness will not be considered work-related unless the employee voluntarily provides the employer with an opinion from a physician or other licensed health care professional with appropriate training and experience (psychiatrist, psychologist, psychiatric nurse practitioner, etc.) stating that the employee has a mental illness that is work-related. |
Injuries or illnesses that occur when the employee is on travel status do not have to be recorded if they meet one of the exceptions listed below.
| 1904.5 (b)(6) | If the employee has . . . | You may use the following to determine if an injury or illness is work-related |
|---|---|---|
| (i) | checked into a hotel or motel for one or more days | When a traveling employee checks into a hotel, motel, or into an other temporary residence, he or she establishes a “home away from home.” You must evaluate the employee's activities after he or she checks into the hotel, motel, or other temporary residence for their work-relatedness in the same manner as you evaluate the activities of a non-traveling employee. When the employee checks into the temporary residence, he or she is considered to have left the work environment. When the employee begins work each day, he or she re-enters the work environment. If the employee has established a “home away from home” and is reporting to a fixed worksite each day, you also do not consider injuries or illnesses work-related if they occur while the employee is commuting between the temporary residence and the job location. |
| (ii) | taken a detour for personal reasons | Injuries or illnesses are not considered work-related if they occur while the employee is on a personal detour from a reasonably direct route of travel ( e.g., has taken a side trip for personal reasons). |
You must consider an injury or illness to be a “new case” if:
You must consider an injury or illness to meet the general recording criteria, and therefore to be recordable, if it results in any of the following: death, days away from work, restricted work or transfer to another job, medical treatment beyond first aid, or loss of consciousness. You must also consider a case to meet the general recording criteria if it involves a significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it does not result in death, days away from work, restricted work or job transfer, medical treatment beyond first aid, or loss of consciousness.
See § 1904.7(b)(2).
See § 1904.7(b)(3).
See § 1904.7(b)(4).
See § 1904.7(b)(5).
See § 1904.7(b)(6).
You must record all work-related needlestick injuries and cuts from sharp objects that are contaminated with another person's blood or other potentially infectious material (as defined by 29 CFR 1910.1030). You must enter the case on the OSHA 300 Log as an injury. To protect the employee's privacy, you may not enter the employee's name on the OSHA 300 Log (see the requirements for privacy cases in paragraphs 1904.29(b)(6) through 1904.29(b)(9)).
If an employee is medically removed under the medical surveillance requirements of an OSHA standard, you must record the case on the OSHA 300 Log.
If an employee's hearing test (audiogram) reveals that the employee has experienced a work-related Standard Threshold Shift (STS) in hearing in one or both ears, and the employee's total hearing level is 25 decibels (dB) or more above audiometric zero (averaged at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz) in the same ear(s) as the STS, you must record the case on the OSHA 300 Log.
If the employee has never previously experienced a recordable hearing loss, you must compare the employee's current audiogram with that employee's baseline audiogram. If the employee has previously experienced a recordable hearing loss, you must compare the employee's current audiogram with the employee's revised baseline audiogram (the audiogram reflecting the employee's previous recordable hearing loss case).
Audiometric test results reflect the employee's overall hearing ability in comparison to audiometric zero. Therefore, using the employee's current audiogram, you must use the average hearing level at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz to determine whether or not the employee's total hearing level is 25 dB or more.
[67 FR 44047, July 1, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 77170, Dec. 17, 2002; 84 FR 21457, May 14, 2019]
If any of your employees has been occupationally exposed to anyone with a known case of active tuberculosis (TB), and that employee subsequently develops a tuberculosis infection, as evidenced by a positive skin test or diagnosis by a physician or other licensed health care professional, you must record the case on the OSHA 300 Log by checking the “respiratory condition” column.
You must use OSHA 300, 300-A, and 301 forms, or equivalent forms, for recordable injuries and illnesses. The OSHA 300 form is called the Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses, the 300-A is the Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses, and the OSHA 301 form is called the Injury and Illness Incident Report.
infection, hepatitis, or tuberculosis;
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 66 FR 52034, Oct. 12, 2001; 67 FR 77170, Dec. 17, 2002; 68 FR 38607, June 30, 2003; 81 FR 91809, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20548, May 3, 2017]
You must keep a separate OSHA 300 Log for each establishment that is expected to be in operation for one year or longer.
You must record on the OSHA 300 Log the recordable injuries and illnesses of all employees on your payroll, whether they are labor, executive, hourly, salary, part-time, seasonal, or migrant workers. You also must record the recordable injuries and illnesses that occur to employees who are not on your payroll if you supervise these employees on a day-to-day basis. If your business is organized as a sole proprietorship or partnership, the owner or partners are not considered employees for recordkeeping purposes.
At the end of each calendar year, you must:
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 81 FR 91810, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20548, May 3, 2017; 85 FR 8731, Feb. 18, 2020]
You must save the OSHA 300 Log, the privacy case list (if one exists), the annual summary, and the OSHA 301 Incident Report forms for five (5) years following the end of the calendar year that these records cover.
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 81 FR 91810, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20548, May 3, 2017]
If your business changes ownership, you are responsible for recording and reporting work-related injuries and illnesses only for that period of the year during which you owned the establishment. You must transfer the part 1904 records to the new owner. The new owner must save all records of the establishment kept by the prior owner, as required by § 1904.33 of this part, but need not update or correct the records of the prior owner.
[82 FR 20549, May 3, 2017]
Your employees and their representatives must be involved in the recordkeeping system in several ways.
[81 FR 29691, May 12, 2016; 81 FR 31854, May 20, 2016, as amended at 81 FR 91810, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20549, May 3, 2017]
In addition to § 1904.35, section 11(c) of the OSH Act also prohibits you from discriminating against an employee for reporting a work-related fatality, injury, or illness. That provision of the Act also protects the employee who files a safety and health complaint, asks for access to the part 1904 records, or otherwise exercises any rights afforded by the OSH Act.
[81 FR 29692, May 12, 2016]
Some States operate their own OSHA programs, under the authority of a State plan as approved by OSHA. States operating OSHA-approved State plans must have occupational injury and illness recording and reporting requirements that are substantially identical to the requirements in this part (see 29 CFR 1902.3(j), 29 CFR 1902.7, and 29 CFR 1956.10(i)).
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 80 FR 49904, Aug. 18, 2015]
If you wish to keep records in a different manner from the manner prescribed by the part 1904 regulations, you may submit a variance petition to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. You can obtain a variance only if you can show that your alternative recordkeeping system:
, fatality, in-patient hospitalization, amputation, or loss of an eye);
[79 FR 56187, Sept. 18, 2014]
When an authorized government representative asks for the records you keep under part 1904, you must provide copies of the records within four (4) business hours.
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 81 FR 91810, Dec. 19, 2016; 82 FR 20549, May 3, 2017]
Upon notification, you must electronically submit the requested information from your part 1904 records to OSHA or OSHA's designee.
For each establishment that is subject to these reporting requirements, you must provide the EIN used by the establishment.
Employee name (field 1), employee address (field 2), name of physician or other health care professional (field 6), facility name and address if treatment was given away from the worksite (field 7).
Establishments that are required to submit under paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section must submit all of the required information by March 2 of the year after the calendar year covered by the form(s) (for example, by March 2, 2024, for the forms covering 2023).
[81 FR 29692, May 12, 2016, as amended at 82 FR 55765, Nov. 24, 2017; 84 FR 405, Jan. 25, 2019; 88 FR 47346, July 21, 2023]
If you receive a Survey of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Form from the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), or a BLS designee, you must promptly complete the form and return it following the instructions contained on the survey form.
If you were required to keep OSHA 200 Logs in 2001, you must post a 2000 annual summary from the OSHA 200 Log of occupational injuries and illnesses for each establishment.
You must save your copies of the OSHA 200 and 101 forms for five years following the year to which they relate and continue to provide access to the data as though these forms were the OSHA 300 and 301 forms. You are not required to update your old 200 and 101 forms.
The following sections each contain a collection of information requirement which has been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number listed
| 29 CFR citation | OMB Control No. |
|---|---|
| 1904.4-35 | 1218-0176 |
| 1904.39-41 | 1218-0176 |
| 1904.42 | 1220-0045 |
| 1904.43-44 | 1218-0176 |
The Act. The Act means the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq. ). The definitions contained in section 3 of the Act (29 U.S.C. 652) and related interpretations apply to such terms when used in this part 1904.
Establishment. An establishment is a single physical location where business is conducted or where services or industrial operations are performed. For activities where employees do not work at a single physical location, such as construction; transportation; communications, electric, gas and sanitary services; and similar operations, the establishment is represented by main or branch offices, terminals, stations, etc. that either supervise such activities or are the base from which personnel carry out these activities.
Injury or illness. An injury or illness is an abnormal condition or disorder. Injuries include cases such as, but not limited to, a cut, fracture, sprain, or amputation. Illnesses include both acute and chronic illnesses, such as, but not limited to, a skin disease, respiratory disorder, or poisoning. (Note: Injuries and illnesses are recordable only if they are new, work-related cases that meet one or more of the part 1904 recording criteria.)
Physician or Other Licensed Health Care Professional. A physician or other licensed health care professional is an individual whose legally permitted scope of practice ( i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently perform, or be delegated the responsibility to perform, the activities described by this regulation.
You. “You” means an employer as defined in section 3 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 652).
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 85 FR 8731, Feb. 18, 2020]
As used in this part, unless the context clearly requires otherwise:
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]
Government, and organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions ( i.e., provisions containing the word “shall” or other mandatory language) of standards incorporated by reference are adopted as standards under the Occupational Safety and Health Act.
A Manual of Recommended Practice” (22nd ed., 1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iii).
Emblem for Identifying Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2 (1968), IBR approved for § 1910.145(d)(10).
Specifications for Anhydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(8)(i).
A11.1-65 (R 70) Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for §§ 1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), (c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2).
A11.1-65 Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for §§ 1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a).
A13.1-56 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, IBR approved for §§ 1910.253(d)(4)(ii); 1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7).
A14.1-68 Safety Code for Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.1a-77, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).
A14.2-56 Safety Code for Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented by ANSI A14.2a-77, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i).
A14.3-56 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for §§ 1910.68(b)(4); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and (c)(3)(i).
A17.1-65 Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d (1970), IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4).
A17.2-60 Practice for the Inspection of Elevators, Including Supplements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967), IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(viii).
A90.1-69 Safety Standard for Manlifts, IBR approved for § 1910.68(b)(3).
A92.2-69 Standard for Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms, IBR approved for § 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and 1910.268(s)(1)(v).
A120.1-70 Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, IBR approved for § 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d).
B7.1-70 Safety Code for the Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for §§ 1910.215(b)(12) and 1910.218(j).
B15.1-53 (R 58) Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, IBR approved for §§ 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix), (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv), (k)(12), and (l)(3).
B20.1-57 Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1), (c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); 1910.265(c)(18)(i).
B30.2-43 (R 52) Safety Code for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), (c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv).
B30.2.0-67 Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR approved for §§ 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv).
B30.5-68 Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, IBR approved for §§ 1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii).
B30.6-69 Safety Code for Derricks, IBR approved for §§ 1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E) and (H).
B31.1-55 Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
B31.1-67, IBR approved for § 1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A)
B31.1a-63 Addenda to ANSI B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
B31.1-67 and Addenda B31.1 (1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b); 1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and (e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and (g)(18)(iii).
B31.2-68 Fuel Gas Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
B31.3-66 Petroleum Refinery Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b).
B31.5-66 Addenda B31.5a (1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB approved for §§ 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and 1910.111(b)(7)(iii).
B56.1-69 Safety Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for §§ 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and (m)(5)(iii).
B57.1-65 Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, IBR approved for § 1910.253(b)(1)(iii).
B175.1-1991, Safety Requirements for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i).
C33.2-56 Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.254(b)(1).
H23.1-70 Seamless Copper Water Tube Specification, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and (13)(ii)(b)(1).
H38.7-69 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(8)(i).
J6.4-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets, IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(v).
J6.6-71 Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR approved for § 1910.268 (f)(1) and (n)(11)(iv).
K13.1-67 Identification of Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii).
K61.1-60 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
K61.1-66 Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for § 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
O1.1-54 (R 61) Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7), and (i)(2).
S1.4-71 (R 76) Specification for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved for § 1910.95 appendixes D and I.
S1.11-71 (R 76) Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved for § 1910.95 appendix D.
S3.6-69 Specifications for Audiometers, IBR approved for § 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D.
Z4.1-68 Requirements for Sanitation in Places of Employment, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii) and (g)(15)(vi).
Z9.1-51 Safety Code for Ventilation and Operation of Open Surface Tanks, IBR approved for 1910.261(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and (h)(2)(i).
Z9.1-71 Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-Surface Tanks, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
Z9.2-60 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text, (a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), (b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a); 1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and (h)(2)(ii).
Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(i).
Z12.12-68 Standard for the Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explosions, IBR approved for § 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and (g)(1)(i).
Z12.20-62 (R 69) Code for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in Woodworking and Wood Flour Manufacturing Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.265(c)(20)(i).
Z21.30-64 Requirements for Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Installations, IBR approved for § 1910.265(c)(15).
Z24.22-57 Method of Measurement of Real-Ear Attenuation of Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii).
Z33.1-61 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i).
Z33.1-66 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, IBR approved for § 1910.94(a)(2)(ii).
Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for § 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1999 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org.
American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.136(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z41-1991 are available for purchase only from the National Safety Council, P.O. Box 558, Itasca, IL 60143-0558; telephone: 1-800-621-7619; fax: 708-285-0797; Web site: http://www.nsc.org.
Z49.1-67 Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved for § 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B).
Z53.1-1967 (also referred to as ANSI Z53.1-1967), Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved October 9, 1967; IBR approved for § 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
Z535.1-2006 (R2011), Safety Colors, reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for §§ 1910.97(a) and 1910.145(d). Copies available for purchase from the:
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; or
Z535.2-2011, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs, published September 15, 2011; IBR approved for § 1910.261(c). Copies available for purchase from the:
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: 877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com; or
Z54.1-63 Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for § 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii).
Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, Approved April 13, 2010; IBR approved for § 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from:
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; or
Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Personal Protection Devices Approved June 19, 2003; IBR approved for §§ 1910.133(b). Copies available for purchase from the:
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; or
Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, Reaffirmation approved January 4, 1999; IBR approved for § 1910.133(b). Copies are available for purchase from:
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; telephone: (877) 413-5184; Web site: http://global.ihs.com; or
Z88.2-1969, Practices for Respiratory Protection; IBR approved for §§ 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)( a ), 1910.134(c); and 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5), (g)(15)(v), (h)(2)(iii), (h)(2)(iv), and (i)(4).
Z41.1-1967 Men's Safety Toe Footwear; IBR approved for § 1910.261(i)(4).
Z87.1-1968 Practice of Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection; IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5), (g)(1), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4).
Z89.1-1969 Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(3)(xxvii), (b)(2), (g)(15)(v), and (i)(4).
Z89.2-1971 Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B; IBR approved for § 1910.268(i)(1).
1957) Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks, 7th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a )( 3 ).
1961) Specification for Small Welded Production Tanks, 5th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(i)( a )( 3 ).
Fourth Ed.
VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H-26), (d)(2) (Table H-31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H-32), (h)(2) (Table H-34); and 1910.111(b)(2)(vi);
Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Ed., IBR approved for §§ 1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)( b )( 2 ); and 1910.217(b)(12);
VIII, 1968, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106 (b)(1)(iv)( b )( 2 ) and ( i )(3)(ii); 1910.107; 1910.110(b)(11) (i)( b ) and (iii)( a )( 1 ); 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and 1910.169(a)(2) (i) and (ii);
VIII, Paragraph UG-84, 1968, IBR approved for § 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and (b)(5)(iii);
VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR approved for §§ 1910.261; 1910.262; 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);
B56.6-1992 (with addenda), Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(4).
International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959; phone: (610) 832-9585; email: [email protected]; website: www.astm.org.
Malleable Iron Castings, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe, IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 and 1910.111.
Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
Ductile Iron for Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR approved for § 1910.111.
Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.252.
Seamless Copper Water Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110.
Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved for § 1910.110.
Standard Specifications for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved for § 1910.110.
Test for Penetration by Bituminous Materials, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester, Approved May 1, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106 and 1910.119.
86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure, Approved April 1, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Test for Saybolt Viscosity, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Test for Flash Point by Pensky Martens, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester, Approved Oct. 15, 2008, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Standard Test Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method), IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Test for Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids, Approved May 15, 2005, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Test for Flammability of Plastic Sheeting and Cellular Plastics, IBR approved for § 1910.103.
Conversion Tables for SUS, IBR approved for § 1910.106.
Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus, Approved November 1, 2004, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Cup Tester, Approved July 15, 2007, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection, IBR approved for § 1910.136.
Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective Footwear, IBR approved for § 1910.136.
B3.0-41 Standard Qualification Procedure, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(i).
D1.0-1966 Code for Welding in Building Construction, IBR approved for § 1910.27(b)(6).
D2.0-69 Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iv).
D8.4-61 Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(ii).
D10.9-69 Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, IBR approved for § 1910.67(c)(5)(iii).
Acetylene, Twelfth Edition, IBR approved for § 1910.102(a). Copies of CGA Pamphlet G-1-2009 are available for purchase from the: Compressed Gas Association, Inc., 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA 20151; telephone: (703) 788-2700; fax: (703) 961-1831; email: [email protected].
G-7.1 (1966) Commodity Specification, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(1).
G-8.1 (1964) Standard for the Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for § 1910.105.
Safety Release Device Standards—Cylinders for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for §§ 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ).
S-1.2 (1963) Safety Release Device Standards, Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR approved for §§ 1910.101(c); 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ).
S-1.3 (1959) Safety Release Device Standards-Compressed Gas Storage Containers, IBR approved for §§ 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)( a )( 2 ); 1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and 1910.111(d)(4)(ii)( b ).
Standard Hose Connection Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii).
and RMA (Rubber Manufacturer's Association) Specification for Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR approved for § 1910.253(e)(5)(i).
Regulator Connection Standard, IBR approved for § 1910.253(e) (4)(iv) and (6).
Specification 1B61, Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, IBR approved for § 1910.179(b)(6)(i).
51794:2003-05—Determining the ignition temperature of petroleum products, May 2003, IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
GG-B-0067b, Air Compressed for Breathing Purposes, or Interim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(4).
Explosive atmospheres—Part 20-1: Material characteristics for gas and vapor classification—Test methods and data, Edition 1.0, 2010-01; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
International Fire Code, copyright 2009, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.
76-120 (1975), List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data, IBR approved for § 1910.95 App. B.
17, 1960, Safety in the Handling and Use of Explosives, IBR approved for §§ 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii) and (c)(14)(ii).
817:2014(E), Refrigerants—Designation and safety classification, Third edition, 2014-04-15; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
10156:1996 (E), Gases and Gas Mixtures—Determination of Fire Potential and Oxidizing Ability for the Selection of Cylinder Valve Outlets, Second Edition, Feb. 15, 1996; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
10156:2017(E), Gas Cylinders—Gases and gas mixtures—Determination of fire potential and oxidizing ability for the selection of cylinder valve outlets, Fourth edition, 2017-07; IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
10156-2:2005 (E), Gas cylinders—Gases and Gas Mixtures—Part 2: Determination of Oxidizing Ability of Toxic and Corrosive Gases and Gas Mixtures, First Edition, Aug. 1, 2005; IBR approved for appendix B to subpart Z.
13943:2000 (E/F); Fire Safety—Vocabulary, First Edition, April, 15, 2000, IBR approved for appendix B to § 1910.1200.
Standard for Dry Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(i).
Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Material, IBR approved for § 1910.94(c)(2).
Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.124(b)(4)(ii).
Standard for the Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(ii).
Standard for Solvent Extraction Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.106(j)(6)(iii).
Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11).
Standard for Fire Protection in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, IBR approved for § 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text.
Standard for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a).
Standard for the Installation of Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and Certain Other Premises, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b).
Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (ANSI Z106.1-1970), IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2).
Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, IBR approved for §§ 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and (i)(2)(iv).
Standard for the Prevention of Dust Explosions in the Production, Packaging, and Handling of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR approved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
Guide for Explosion Venting, IBR approved for § 1910.94(a)(2)(iii).
Lightning Protection Code, IBR approved for § 1910.109(i)(6)(ii).
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for § 1910.106(d)(4)(i).
Standard for the Installation of Fire Doors and Windows, IBR approved for § 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I).
Standard for Oven and Furnaces Design, Location and Equipment, IBR approved for §§ 1910.107 (j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and (d)(2).
Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.1-61), IBR approved for § 1910.107(d)(1).
Standards for Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR approved for § 1910.108(b)(1).
Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, IBR approved for § 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d).
Code for Life Safety From Fire in Buildings and Structures, IBR approved for § 1910.261(a)(4)(ii).
Life Safety Code, 2009 edition, IBR approved for §§ 1910.34, 1910.35, 1910.36, and 1910.37.
Manual on Roof Coverings, IBR approved for § 1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c).
Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, IBR approved for §§ 1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text and (d)(4)(i).
Fire Protection Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and Commercial), IBR approved for § 1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text.
Recommended Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1).
Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations, IBR approved for § 1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1).
Standard for Type Designations, Areas of Use, Maintenance, and Operation of Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved for § 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).
Standard for the Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for §§ 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v).
Code for the Prevention of Dust Ignition in Spice Grinding Plants, IBR approved for § 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR approved for § 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introductory text.
Code for the Manufacture and Storage of Aerosol Products, 2007 Edition, Approved August 17, 2006, IBR approved for Appendix B to § 1910.1200.
1964), IBR approved for § 1910.109 Table H-22, ftn. 3.
1987), IBR approved for § 1910.120 PEL definition.
Pharmacopeia, IBR approved for § 1910.134(d)(1).
934 (1962), Food Service Sanitation Ordinance and Code, part V of the Food Service Sanitation Manual, IBR approved for § 1910.142(i)(1).
June 1988, Recommended Practice for Access Systems for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(5)(i).
January 1981, Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
June 1985, Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(d)(3)(iv).
April 1988, Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(iv).
Crane Loading Stability Test Code, IBR approved for § 1910.180 (c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)( a ).
April 1988, Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines, IBR approved for § 1910.266(f)(3)(ii).
Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).
Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).
Steel Above Ground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for § 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)( a )( 1 ).
Box 960 Herndon, VA 20172; phone: (703) 661-1571;; email: [email protected] ; website: https://shop.un.org/.
European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road; Annex A: General provisions and provisions concerning dangerous substances and articles; (Volumes I and II) including December 2018 corrigendum to Volume II, applicable January 1, 2019; IBR approved for § 1910.1200.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974]
Editorial Note:
Federal Register
www.govinfo.gov.
This section shall apply only when the term nationally recognized testing laboratory is used in other sections of this part.
The term nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) means an organization which is recognized by OSHA in accordance with appendix A of this section and which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment or materials and which meets all of the following criteria:
An appropriate test standard referred to in § 1910.7(b)(1) (i) and (ii) is a document which specifies the safety requirements for specific equipment or class of equipment and is:
If a testing laboratory desires to use a test standard other than one allowed under paragraph (c) of this section, then the Assistant Secretary of Labor shall evaluate the proposed standard to determine that it provides an adequate level of safety before it is used.
A testing organization desiring recognition by OSHA as an NRTL shall request that OSHA evaluate its testing and control programs against the requirements in this section for any equipment or material it may specify. The recognition procedure shall be conducted in accordance with appendix A to this section.
Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual) Hours to Complete the Activity × Staff Costs per Hour] + Average (or Actual) Travel Costs
will review the full costs periodically and will propose a revised fee schedule, if warranted. In its review, OSHA will apply the formula established in paragraph (f)(2) of this section to the current estimated full costs for the NRTL Program. If a change is warranted, OSHA will follow the implementation shown in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
will publish all fee schedules in the Federal Register. Once published, a fee schedule remains in effect until it is superseded by a new fee schedule. Any member of the public may request a change to the fees included in the current fee schedule. Such a request must include appropriate documentation in support of the suggested change. OSHA will consider such requests during its annual review of the fee schedule.
will implement periodic review, and fee assessment, collection, and payment, as follows:
| Milestones/Dates | Action required |
|---|---|
| I. Periodic Review of Fee Schedule | |
| When review completed | OSHA will publish any proposed new fee schedule in the Federal Register if OSHA determines that costs warrant changes in the fee schedule. |
| Fifteen days after publication | Comments due on the proposed new fee schedule. |
| When OSHA approves the fee schedule | OSHA will publish the final fee schedule in the Federal Register, making the fee schedule effective on a specific date. |
| II. Application Processing Fees | |
| Time of application | Applicant must pay the applicable fees in the fee schedule that are due when submitting an application; OSHA will not begin processing the application until it receives the fees. |
| Before assessment performed | Applicant must pay the estimated staff time and travel costs for its assessment based on the fees in effect at the time of the assessment. Applicant also must pay the fees for the final report and Federal Register notice, and other applicable fees, as specified in the fee schedule. OSHA may cancel an application if the applicant does not pay these fees, or any balance of these fees, when due. |
| III. Audit Fees | |
| Before audit performed | NRTL must pay the estimated staff time and travel costs for its audit based on the fees in effect at the time of the audit. NRTL also must pay other applicable fees, as specified in the fee schedule. After the audit, OSHA adjusts the audit fees to account for the actual costs for travel and staff time. |
| On due date | NRTL must pay the estimated audit fees, or any balance due, by the due date established by OSHA; OSHA will assess a late fee if NRTL does not pay audit fees (or any balance of fees due) by the due date. OSHA may still perform the audit when an NRTL does not pay the fees or does not pay them on time. |
| Thirty days after due date or, if earlier, date NRTL refuses to pay | OSHA will begin processing a notice for publication in the Federal Register announcing its plan to revoke recognition for NRTLs that do not pay the estimated audit fees and any balance of audit fees due. |
| Note: For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.7(f)(4), “days” means “calendar days,” and “applicant” means “the NRTL” or “an applicant for NRTL recognition.” |
will provide details about how to pay the fees through appropriate OSHA Program Directives, which will be available on the OSHA web site.
Appendix A to § 1910.7—OSHA Recognition Process for Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories
Introduction
This appendix provides requirements and criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). This process will include the evaluation of the product evaluation and control programs being operated by the NRTL, as well as the NRTL's testing facilities being used in its program. In the evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use either consensus-based standards currently in use nationally, or other standards or criteria which may be considered appropriate. This appendix implements the definition of NRTL in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria that a laboratory must meet to be recognized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing basis). The appendix is broader in scope, providing procedures for renewal, expansion and revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as otherwise provided, the burden is on the applicant to establish by a preponderance of the evidence that it is entitled to recognition as an NRTL. If further detailing of these requirements and criteria will assist the NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.
I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition
A. Applications.
1. Eligibility. a. Any testing agency or organization considering itself to meet the definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory as specified in § 1910.7 may apply for OSHA recognition as an NRTL.
b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based testing agency or organization, OSHA shall take into consideration the policy of the foreign government regarding both the acceptance in that country of testing data, equipment acceptances, and listings, and labeling, which are provided through nationally recognized testing laboratories recognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the accessibility to government recognition or a similar system in that country by U.S.-based safety-related testing agencies, whether recognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if such recognition or a similar system is required by that country.
2. Content of application. a. The applicant shall provide sufficient information and detail demonstrating that it meets the requirements set forth in § 1910.7, in order for an informed decision concerning recognition to be made by the Assistant Secretary.
b. The applicant also shall identify the scope of the NRTL-related activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized. This will include identifying the testing methods it will use to test or judge the specific equipment and materials for which recognition is being requested, unless such test methods are already specified in the test standard. If requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant shall provide documentation of the efficacy of these testing methods.
c. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.
3. Filing office location. The application shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Program, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.
4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of activity under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.
b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appendix.
B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or Renewal.
1. Acceptance and on-site review. a. Applications submitted by eligible testing agencies will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition has been omitted.
b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an on-site review of the testing facilities of the applicant, as well as the applicant's administrative and technical practices, and, if necessary, review any additional documentation underlying the application.
c. These on-site reviews will be conducted by qualified individuals technically expert in these matters, including, as appropriate, non-Federal consultants/contractors acceptable to OSHA. The protocol for each review will be based on appropriate national consensus standards or international guides, with such additions, changes, or deletions as may be considered necessary and appropriate in each case by OSHA. A written report shall be made of each on-site review and a copy shall be provided to the applicant.
2. Positive finding by staff. If, after review of the application, and additional information, and the on-site review report, the applicant appears to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary that the application be approved, accompanied by a supporting explanation.
3. Negative finding by staff. —a. Notification to applicant. If, after review of the application, any additional information and the on-site review report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the responsible OSHA personnel shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of § 1910.7 and this appendix which the applicant has not met, and allow a reasonable period for response.
b. Revision of application.
4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary. a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary finding as to whether the applicant has or has not met the requirements for recognition, based on the completed application file, the written staff recommendation, and the statement of reasons supplied by the applicant if there remains a staff recommendation of disapproval.
b. Notification of this preliminary finding will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the Federal Register.
c. This preliminary finding shall not be considered an official decision by the Assistant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer any change in status or any interim or temporary recognition for the applicant.
5. Public review and comment period —a. The Federal Register notice of preliminary finding will provide a period of not less than 30 calendar days for written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
b. Any member of the public, including the applicant, may supply detailed reasons and evidence supporting or challenging the sufficiency of the applicant's having met the requirements of the definition in 29 CFR § 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of pertinent documents and exhibits shall be made in writing by the close of the comment period.
6. Action after public comment —a. Final decision by Assistant Secretary. Where the public review and comment record supports the Assistant Secretary's preliminary finding concerning the application, i.e., absent any serious objections or substantive claims contrary to the preliminary finding having been received in writing from the public during the comment period, the Assistant Secretary will proceed to final written decision on the application. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, and the written comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period.
b. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant. Subsequently, a notification of the final decision shall be published in the Federal Register. The publication date will be the effective date of the recognition.
c. Review of final decision. There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.
7. Action after public objection —a. Review of negative information. At the discretion of the Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA may authorize Federal or contract personnel to initiate a special review of any information provided in the public comment record which appears to require resolution, before a final decision can be made.
b. Supplementation of record. The contents and results of special reviews will be made part of this record by the Assistant Secretary by either:
c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary. The Assistant Secretary shall issue a decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of the evidence, that the applicant meets the requirements for recognition. The reasons supporting this decision shall be derived from the evidence available as a result of the full application, the supporting documentation, the staff finding, the comments and evidence presented during the public review and comment period, and written to transcribed evidence received during any subsequent reopening of the written comment period or informal public hearing held.
d. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the Federal Register subsequently announcing the decision.
e. Review of final decision. There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.
C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition.
1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:
a. Letter of recognition. The recognition by OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition, including the specific equipment or materials for which OSHA recognition has been granted, as well as any specific conditions imposed by OSHA.
b. Period of recognition. The recognition by OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five years, unless terminated before the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.
c. Constancy in operations. The recognized NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the requirements or limitations in the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.
d. Accurate publicity. The OSHA-recognized NRTL shall not engage in or permit others to engage in misrepresentation of the scope or conditions of its recognition.
2. [Reserved]
II. Supplementary Procedures.
A. Test standard changes.
A recognized NRTL may change a testing standard or elements incorporated in the standard such as testing methods or pass-fail criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised standard will be at least as effective as the prior standard, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant Secretary of minor deviations from a test standard such as the use of new instrumentation that is more accurate or sensitive than originally called for in the standard. The NRTL also need not inform the Assistant Secretary of its adoption of revisions to third-party testing standards meeting the requirements of § 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions have been developed by the standards developing organization, or of its adoption of revisions to other third-party test standards which the developing organization has submitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assistant Secretary or his designee determines that the proposed revised standard is not “substantially equivalent” to the previous version with regard to the level of safety obtained, OSHA will not accept the proposed testing standard by the recognized NRTL, and will initiate discontinuance of that aspect of OSHA-recognized activity by the NRTL by modification of the official letter of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce this action and the NRTL will be required to communicate this OSHA decision directly to affected manufacturers.
B. Expansion of current recognition
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of NRTL testing in addition to those included in the current recognition.
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and process the application for expansion in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.
b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to conduct an on-site review, where the substantive scope of the request to expand recognition is closely related to the current area of recognition.
c. The expiration date for each expansion of recognition shall coincide with the expiration date of the current basic recognition period.
C. Renewal of OSHA recognition
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix not less than nine months, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition.
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the renewal request in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, except that the period for written comments, specified in paragraph 5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be not less than 15 calendar days.
b. In that process, OSHA may determine not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a. where appropriate.
c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a timely and sufficient renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made by OSHA on the request.
d. After the first renewal has been granted to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a continuation of its recognition status every five years by submitting a renewal request. In lieu of submitting a renewal request after the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
3. Alternative procedure. After the initial recognition and before the expiration thereof, OSHA may (for good cause) determine that there is a sufficient basis to dispense with the renewal requirement for a given laboratory and will so notify the laboratory of such a determination in writing. In lieu of submitting a renewal request, any laboratory so notified shall certify its continuing compliance with the terms of its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7.
D. Voluntary termination of recognition.
At any time, a recognized NRTL may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA. The written notice shall state the date as of which the termination is to take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall inform the public of any voluntary termination by Federal Register notice.
E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA.
1. Potential causes. If an NRTL either has failed to continue to substantially satisfy the requirements of § 1910.7 or this appendix, or has not been reasonably performing the NRTL testing requirements encompassed within its letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or misrepresented the scope or conditions of its recognition, the Assistant Secretary may revoke the recognition of a recognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA may initiate revocation procedures on the basis of information provided by any interested person.
2. Procedure. a. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized NRTL in writing, giving it the opportunity to rebut or correct the alleged deficiencies which would form the basis of the proposed revocation, within a reasonable period.
b. If the alleged deficiencies are not corrected or reconciled within a reasonable period, OSHA will propose, in writing to the recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If deemed appropriate, no other announcement need be made by OSHA.
c. The revocation shall be effective in 60 days unless within that period the recognized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or requests a hearing in writing.
d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
e. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may allow other interested persons to participate in these hearings if such participation would contribute to the resolution of issues germane to the proceeding and not cause undue delay.
f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to demonstrate by a preponderance of the evidence that the recognition should be revoked because the NRTL is not meeting the requirements for recognition, has not been reasonably performing the product testing functions as required by § 1910.7, this appendix A, or the letter of recognition, or has materially misrepresented itself in its applications or publicity.
3. Final decision. a. After the hearing, the Administrative Law Judge shall issue a decision stating the reasons based on the record as to whether it has been demonstrated, based on a preponderance of evidence, that the applicant does not continue to meet the requirements for its current recognition.
b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party to the hearing may file exceptions within 20 days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no exceptions are filed, this decision is the final decision of the Assistant Secretary. If objections are filed, the Administrative Law Judge shall forward the decision, exceptions and record to the Assistant Secretary for the final decision on the proposed revocation.
c. The Assistant Secretary will review the record, the decision by the Administrative Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision as to whether it has been demonstrated, by a preponderance of evidence, that the recognized NRTL has not continued to meet the requirements for OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Secretary finds that the NRTL does not meet the NRTL recognition requirements, the recognition will be revoked.
4. Public announcement. A copy of the Assistant Secretary's final decision will be provided to the applicant, and a notification will be published in the Federal Register announcing the decision, and the availability of the complete record of this proceeding at OSHA. The effective date of any revocation will be the date the final decision copy is sent to the NRTL.
5. Review of final decision. There will be no further review activity available within the Department of Labor from the final decision of the Assistant Secretary.
[53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000; 76 FR 10515, Feb. 25, 2011; 85 FR 8732, Feb. 18, 2020]
The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of information requirement which has been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the control number listed.
| 29 CFR citation | OMB control No. |
|---|---|
| 1910.7 | 1218-0147 |
| 1910.23 | 1218-0199 |
| 1910.27 | 1218-0199 |
| 1910.28 | 1218-0199 |
| 1910.66 | 1218-0121 |
| 1910.67(b) | 1218-0230 |
| 1910.68 | 1218-0226 |
| 1910.95 | 1218-0048 |
| 1910.111 | 1218-0208 |
| 1910.119 | 1218-0200 |
| 1910.120 | 1218-0202 |
| 1910.132 | 1218-0205 |
| 1910.134 | 1218-0099 |
| 1910.137 | 1218-0190 |
| 1910.142 | 1218-0096 |
| 1910.145 | 1218-0132 |
| 1910.146 | 1218-0203 |
| 1910.147 | 1218-0150 |
| 1910.156 | 1218-0075 |
| 1910.157(e)(3) | 1218-0210 |
| 1910.157(f)(16) | 1218-0218 |
| 1910.177(d)(3)(iv) | 1218-0219 |
| 1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv) | 1218-0224 |
| 1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2) | 1218-0224 |
| 1910.180(d)(6) | 1218-0221 |
| 1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii) | 1218-0221 |
| 1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3) | 1218-0222 |
| 1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii) | 1218-0223 |
| 1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii) | 1218-0229 |
| 1910.217(g) | 1218-0070 |
| 1910.217(h) | 1218-0143 |
| 1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii) | 1218-0228 |
| 1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)( c ) | 1218-0207 |
| 1910.255(e) | 1218-0207 |
| 1910.266 | 1218-0198 |
| 1910.268 | 1218-0225 |
| 1910.269 | 1218-0190 |
| 1910.272 | 1218-0206 |
| 1910.302 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.303 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.304 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.305 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.306 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.307 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.308 | 1218-0256 |
| 1910.420 | 1218-0069 |
| 1910.421 | 1218-0069 |
| 1910.423 | 1218-0069 |
| 1910.430 | 1218-0069 |
| 1910.440 | 1218-0069 |
| 1910.1001 | 1218-0133 |
| 1910.1003 | 1218-0085 |
| 1910.1004 | 1218-0084 |
| 1910.1006 | 1218-0086 |
| 1910.1007 | 1218-0083 |
| 1910.1008 | 1218-0087 |
| 1910.1009 | 1218-0089 |
| 1910.1010 | 1218-0082 |
| 1910.1011 | 1218-0090 |
| 1910.1012 | 1218-0080 |
| 1910.1013 | 1218-0079 |
| 1910.1014 | 1218-0088 |
| 1910.1015 | 1218-0044 |
| 1910.1016 | 1218-0081 |
| 1910.1017 | 1218-0010 |
| 1910.1018 | 1218-0104 |
| 1910.1020 | 1218-0065 |
| 1910.1024 | 1218-0267 |
| 1910.1025 | 1218-0092 |
| 1910.1026 | 1218-0252 |
| 1910.1027 | 1218-0185 |
| 1910.1028 | 1218-0129 |
| 1910.1029 | 1218-0128 |
| 1910.1030 | 1218-0180 |
| 1910.1043 | 1218-0061 |
| 1910.1044 | 1218-0101 |
| 1910.1045 | 1218-0126 |
| 1910.1047 | 1218-0108 |
| 1910.1048 | 1218-0145 |
| 1910.1050 | 1218-0184 |
| 1910.1051 | 1218-0170 |
| 1910.1052 | 1218-0179 |
| 1910.1053 | 1218-0266 |
| 1910.1096 | 1218-0103 |
| 1910.1200 | 1218-0072 |
| 1910.1450 | 1218-0131 |
[61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8, 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203, Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17093, Apr. 8, 1998; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 72 FR 40075, July 23, 2007; 81 FR 48710, July 26, 2016; 82 FR 31253, July 6, 2017; 83 FR 9702, Mar. 7, 2018]
Standards in this part requiring the employer to provide personal protective equipment (PPE), including respirators and other types of PPE, because of hazards to employees impose a separate compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the requirement. The employer must provide PPE to each employee required to use the PPE, and each failure to provide PPE to an employee may be considered a separate violation.
Standards in this part requiring training on hazards and related matters, such as standards requiring that employees receive training or that the employer train employees, provide training to employees, or institute or implement a training program, impose a separate compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the requirement. The employer must train each affected employee in the manner required by the standard, and each failure to train an employee may be considered a separate violation.
[73 FR 75583, Dec. 12, 2008]
The standards prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter are adopted as occupational safety and health standards under section 6 of the Act and shall apply, according to the provisions thereof, to every employment and place of employment of every employee engaged in construction work. Each employer shall protect the employment and places of employment of each of his employees engaged in construction work by complying with the appropriate standards prescribed in this paragraph.
For purposes of this section, Construction work means work for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating. See discussion of these terms in § 1926.13 of this title.
This section adopts as occupational safety and health standards under section 6 of the Act the standards which are prescribed in part 1926 of this chapter. Thus, the standards (substantive rules) published in subpart C and the following subparts of part 1926 of this chapter are applied. This section does not incorporate subparts A and B of part 1926 of this chapter. Subparts A and B have pertinence only to the application of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Construction Safety Act). For example, the interpretation of the term “subcontractor” in paragraph (c) of § 1926.13 of this chapter is significant in discerning the coverage of the Construction Safety Act and duties thereunder. However, the term “subcontractor” has no significance in the application of the Act, which was enacted under the Commerce Clause and which establishes duties for “employers” which are not dependent for their application upon any contractual relationship with the Federal Government or upon any form of Federal financial assistance.
For purposes of this section:
[58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993]
Subpart Z, § 1910.1020;
Subpart T;
Subpart S when shore-based electrical installations provide power for use aboard vessels;
Subpart Z, § 1910.1200;
Subpart Z, § 1910.1096;
Subpart G, § 1910.95;
Subpart G, § 1910.97;
Subpart I, § 1910.134;
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo handling activities except for the following:
1 The International Maritime Organization publishes the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the international legal requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.
Part 1917 of this chapter shall apply exclusively, according to the provisions thereof, to employment within a marine terminal, except as follows:
Subpart G, § 1910.94(a);
Subpart Z, § 1910.1020;
Subpart T;
Subpart S;
Subpart R, § 1910.272;
Subpart Z, § 1910.1200;
Subpart Z, § 1910.1096;
Subpart G, § 1910.95;
Subpart G, § 1910.97.
Subpart I, § 1910.134.
Subpart D, § 1910.28;
Subpart N, § 1910.177;
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo handling activities except for the following:
2 The International Maritime Organization publishes the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code to aid compliance with the international legal requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960.
For purposes of this section:
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48 FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998]
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
Whenever an occupational safety and health standard adopted and incorporated by reference in this subpart B is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of the Act and the statute under which the standard was originally promulgated, and in accordance with part 1911 of this chapter, the standard shall be deemed changed for purposes of that statute and this subpart B, and shall apply under this subpart B. For the purposes of this section, a change in a standard includes any amendment, addition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of any standard.
Section 1910.1017 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to vinyl chloride in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to vinyl chloride which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.
Section 1910.1045 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to acrylonitrile in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to acrylonitrile which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.
Section 1910.1018 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to inorganic arsenic in every employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to inorganic arsenic which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of any of those sections.
Section 1910.1025 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to lead in every employment and place of employment covered by §§ 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to lead which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1047 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to ethylene oxide in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to ethylene oxide which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1050 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to MDA in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to MDA which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1048 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to formaldehyde in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15 or § 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposure to formaldehyde which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1027 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to cadmium in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposures to cadmium that would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1051 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to BD in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.12, § 1910.13, § 1910.14, § 1910.15, or § 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard on exposure to BD which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of those sections.
Section 1910.1052 shall apply to the exposure of every employee to MC in every employment and place of employment covered by § 1910.16 in lieu of any different standard on exposure to MC which would otherwise be applicable by virtue of that section when it is not present in sealed, intact containers.
[43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, 1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR 51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987; 57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept. 14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997]
This subpart applies to all general industry workplaces. It covers all walking-working surfaces unless specifically excluded by an individual section of this subpart.
The following definitions apply in this subpart:
Alternating tread-type stair means a type of stairway consisting of a series of treads that usually are attached to a center support in an alternating manner such that an employee typically does not have both feet on the same level while using the stairway.
Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for equipment such as lifelines, lanyards, deceleration devices, and rope descent systems.
Authorized means an employee who the employer assigns to perform a specific type of duty, or allows in a specific location or area.
Cage means an enclosure mounted on the side rails of a fixed ladder or fastened to a structure behind the fixed ladder that is designed to surround the climbing space of the ladder. A cage also is called a “cage guard” or “basket guard.”
Carrier means the track of a ladder safety system that consists of a flexible cable or rigid rail attached to the fixed ladder or immediately adjacent to it.
Combination ladder means a portable ladder that can be used as a stepladder, extension ladder, trestle ladder, or stairway ladder. The components of a combination ladder also may be used separately as a single ladder.
Dangerous equipment means equipment, such as vats, tanks, electrical equipment, machinery, equipment or machinery with protruding parts, or other similar units, that, because of their function or form, may harm an employee who falls into or onto the equipment.
Designated area means a distinct portion of a walking-working surface delineated by a warning line in which employees may perform work without additional fall protection.
Dockboard means a portable or fixed device that spans a gap or compensates for a difference in elevation between a loading platform and a transport vehicle. Dockboards include, but are not limited to, bridge plates, dock plates, and dock levelers.
Equivalent means alternative designs, equipment, materials, or methods, that the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees compared to the designs, equipment, materials, or methods specified in this subpart.
Extension ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder that is adjustable in length.
Failure means a load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. A load refusal is the point at which the ultimate strength of a component or object is exceeded.
Fall hazard means any condition on a walking-working surface that exposes an employee to a risk of harm from a fall on the same level or to a lower level.
Fall protection means any equipment, device, or system that prevents an employee from falling from an elevation or mitigates the effect of such a fall.
Fixed ladder means a ladder with rails or individual rungs that is permanently attached to a structure, building, or equipment. Fixed ladders include individual-rung ladders, but not ship stairs, step bolts, or manhole steps.
Grab bar means an individual horizontal or vertical handhold installed to provide access above the height of the ladder.
Guardrail system means a barrier erected along an unprotected or exposed side, edge, or other area of a walking-working surface to prevent employees from falling to a lower level.
Handrail means a rail used to provide employees with a handhold for support.
Hoist area means any elevated access opening to a walking-working surface through which equipment or materials are loaded or received.
Hole means a gap or open space in a floor, roof, horizontal walking-working surface, or similar surface that is at least 2 inches (5 cm) in its least dimension.
Individual-rung ladder means a ladder that has rungs individually attached to a building or structure. An individual-rung ladder does not include manhole steps.
Ladder means a device with rungs, steps, or cleats used to gain access to a different elevation.
Ladder safety system means a system designed to eliminate or reduce the possibility of falling from a ladder. A ladder safety system usually consists of a carrier, safety sleeve, lanyard, connectors, and body harness. Cages and wells are not ladder safety systems.
Low-slope roof means a roof that has a slope less than or equal to a ratio of 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
Lower level means a surface or area to which an employee could fall. Such surfaces or areas include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, materials, water, equipment, and similar surfaces and structures, or portions thereof.
Manhole steps means steps that are individually attached to, or set into, the wall of a manhole structure.
Maximum intended load means the total load (weight and force) of all employees, equipment, vehicles, tools, materials, and other loads the employer reasonably anticipates to be applied to a walking-working surface at any one time.
Mobile means manually propelled or moveable.
Mobile ladder stand (ladder stand) means a mobile, fixed-height, self-supporting ladder that usually consists of wheels or casters on a rigid base and steps leading to a top step. A mobile ladder stand also may have handrails and is designed for use by one employee at a time.
Mobile ladder stand platform means a mobile, fixed-height, self-supporting unit having one or more standing platforms that are provided with means of access or egress.
Open riser means the gap or space between treads of stairways that do not have upright or inclined members (risers).
Opening means a gap or open space in a wall, partition, vertical walking-working surface, or similar surface that is at least 30 inches (76 cm) high and at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide, through which an employee can fall to a lower level.
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a walking-working surface. It consists of a body harness, anchorage, and connector. The means of connection may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or a suitable combination of these.
Personal fall protection system means a system (including all components) an employer uses to provide protection from falling or to safely arrest an employee's fall if one occurs. Examples of personal fall protection systems include personal fall arrest systems, positioning systems, and travel restraint systems.
Platform means a walking-working surface that is elevated above the surrounding area.
Portable ladder means a ladder that can readily be moved or carried, and usually consists of side rails joined at intervals by steps, rungs, or cleats.
Positioning system (work-positioning system) means a system of equipment and connectors that, when used with a body harness or body belt, allows an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall or window sill, and work with both hands free. Positioning systems also are called “positioning system devices” and “work-positioning equipment.”
Qualified describes a person who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Ramp means an inclined walking-working surface used to access another level.
Riser means the upright (vertical) or inclined member of a stair that is located at the back of a stair tread or platform and connects close to the front edge of the next higher tread, platform, or landing.
Rope descent system means a suspension system that allows an employee to descend in a controlled manner and, as needed, stop at any point during the descent. A rope descent system usually consists of a roof anchorage, support rope, a descent device, carabiner(s) or shackle(s), and a chair (seatboard). A rope descent system also is called controlled descent equipment or apparatus. Rope descent systems do not include industrial rope access systems.
Rung, step, or cleat means the cross-piece of a ladder on which an employee steps to climb up and down.
Runway means an elevated walking-working surface, such as a catwalk, a foot walk along shafting, or an elevated walkway between buildings.
Scaffold means any temporary elevated or suspended platform and its supporting structure, including anchorage points, used to support employees, equipment, materials, and other items. For purposes of this subpart, a scaffold does not include a crane-suspended or derrick-suspended personnel platform or a rope descent system.
Ship stair (ship ladder) means a stairway that is equipped with treads, stair rails, and open risers, and has a slope that is between 50 and 70 degrees from the horizontal.
Side-step ladder means a type of fixed ladder that requires an employee to step sideways from it in order to reach a walking-working surface, such as a landing.
Spiral stairs means a series of treads attached to a vertical pole in a winding fashion, usually within a cylindrical space.
Stair rail or stair rail system means a barrier erected along the exposed or open side of stairways to prevent employees from falling to a lower level.
Stairway (stairs) means risers and treads that connect one level with another, and includes any landings and platforms in between those levels. Stairways include standard, spiral, alternating tread-type, and ship stairs.
Standard stairs means a fixed or permanently installed stairway. Ship, spiral, and alternating tread-type stairs are not considered standard stairs.
Step bolt (pole step) means a bolt or rung attached at intervals along a structural member used for foot placement and as a handhold when climbing or standing.
Stepladder means a self-supporting, portable ladder that has a fixed height, flat steps, and a hinged back.
Stepstool means a self-supporting, portable ladder that has flat steps and side rails. For purposes of the final rule, stepstool includes only those ladders that have a fixed height, do not have a pail shelf, and do not exceed 32 inches (81 cm) in overall height to the top cap, although side rails may extend above the top cap. A stepstool is designed so an employee can climb and stand on all of the steps and the top cap.
Through ladder means a type of fixed ladder that allows the employee to step through the side rails at the top of the ladder to reach a walking-working surface, such as a landing.
Tieback means an attachment between an anchorage ( e.g., structural member) and a supporting device ( e.g., parapet clamp or cornice hook).
Toeboard means a low protective barrier that is designed to prevent materials, tools, and equipment from falling to a lower level, and protect employees from falling.
Travel restraint system means a combination of an anchorage, anchorage connector, lanyard (or other means of connection), and body support that an employer uses to eliminate the possibility of an employee going over the edge of a walking-working surface.
Tread means a horizontal member of a stair or stairway, but does not include landings or platforms.
Unprotected sides and edges mean any side or edge of a walking-working surface (except at entrances and other points of access) where there is no wall, guardrail system, or stair rail system to protect an employee from falling to a lower level.
Walking-working surface means any horizontal or vertical surface on or through which an employee walks, works, or gains access to a work area or workplace location.
Warning line means a barrier erected to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected side or edge, and which designates an area in which work may take place without the use of other means of fall protection.
Well means a permanent, complete enclosure around a fixed ladder.
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure that each walking-working surface can support the maximum intended load for that surface.
The employer must provide, and ensure each employee uses, a safe means of access and egress to and from walking-working surfaces.
The employer must ensure that each ladder used meets the requirements of this section. This section covers all ladders, except when the ladder is:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019]
The employer must ensure:
This section covers all stairways (including standard, spiral, ship, and alternating tread-type stairs), except for articulated stairs (stairs that change pitch due to change in height at the point of attachment) such as those serving floating roof tanks, stairs on scaffolds, stairs designed into machines or equipment, and stairs on self-propelled motorized equipment.
The employer must ensure:
In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure standard stairs:
In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure spiral stairs:
In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure ship stairs (see Figure D-9 of this section):
In addition to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer must ensure alternating tread-type stairs:
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68795, Dec. 17, 2019]
The employer must ensure that each dockboard used meets the requirements of this section. The employer must ensure:
When the employer demonstrates there is no hazard of transfer vehicles running off the dockboard edge, the employer may use dockboards that do not have run-off protection.
Scaffolds used in general industry must meet the requirements in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart L (Scaffolds).
The employer must ensure:
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019]
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure that each employee on a walking-working surface near an opening, including one with a chute attached, where the inside bottom edge of the opening is less than 39 inches (99 cm) above that walking-working surface and the outside bottom edge of the opening is 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by the use of:
Each fixed ladder installed before November 19, 2018 is equipped with a personal fall arrest system, ladder safety system, cage, or well;
Each fixed ladder installed on and after November 19, 2018, is equipped with a personal fall arrest system or a ladder safety system;
When a fixed ladder, cage, or well, or any portion of a section thereof, is replaced, a personal fall arrest system or ladder safety system is installed in at least that section of the fixed ladder, cage, or well where the replacement is located; and
On and after November 18, 2036, all fixed ladders are equipped with a personal fall arrest system or a ladder safety system.
The employer must ensure:
The employer must ensure:
Except as provided elsewhere in this section or by other subparts of this part, the employer must ensure each employee on a walking-working surface 4 feet (1.2 m) or more above a lower level is protected from falling by:
When an employee is exposed to falling objects, the employer must ensure that each employee wears head protection that meets the requirements of subpart I of this part. In addition, the employer must protect employees from falling objects by implementing one or more of the following:
The employer must:
The employer must ensure guardrail systems meet the following requirements:
The employer must ensure each safety net system meets the requirements in 29 CFR part 1926, subpart M.
The employer must ensure each cover for a hole in a walking-working surface:
The employer must ensure:
The minimum clearance between handrails and any other object is 2.25 inches (5.7 cm).
Handrails and stair rail systems are smooth-surfaced to protect employees from injury, such as punctures or lacerations, and to prevent catching or snagging of clothing.
No opening in a stair rail system exceeds 19 inches (48 cm) at its least dimension.
Handrails have the shape and dimension necessary so that employees can grasp the handrail firmly.
The ends of handrails and stair rail systems do not present any projection hazards.
Handrails and the top rails of stair rail systems are capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied in any downward or outward direction within 2 inches (5 cm) of any point along the top edge of the rail.
This paragraph (h) applies only to employers engaged in outdoor advertising operations (see § 1910.28(b)(10)). Employers must ensure that each employee who climbs a fixed ladder without fall protection:
The employer must ensure:
Body belts, harnesses, and other components used in personal fall arrest systems, work positioning systems, and travel restraint systems must meet the requirements of § 1910.140.
The employer must ensure each grab handle:
[81 FR 82981, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68796, Dec. 17, 2019]
The employer must retrain an employee when the employer has reason to believe the employee does not have the understanding and skill required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. Situations requiring retraining include, but are not limited to, the following:
This section lists the sections and paragraph headings contained in §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39.
§ 1910.34 Coverage and definitions.
§ 1910.35 Compliance with Alternate Exit Route Codes.
§ 1910.36 Design and construction requirements for exit routes.
§ 1910.37 Maintenance, safeguards, and operational features for exit routes.
§ 1910.38 Emergency action plans.
§ 1910.39 Fire prevention plans.
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
Sections 1910.34 through 1910.39 apply to workplaces in general industry except mobile workplaces such as vehicles or vessels.
The rules in §§ 1910.34 through 1910.39 cover the minimum requirements for exit routes that employers must provide in their workplace so that employees may evacuate the workplace safely during an emergency. Sections 1910.34 through 1910.39 also cover the minimum requirements for emergency action plans and fire prevention plans.
Electroluminescent means a light-emitting capacitor. Alternating current excites phosphor atoms when placed between the electrically conductive surfaces to produce light. This light source is typically contained inside the device.
Exit means that portion of an exit route that is generally separated from other areas to provide a protected way of travel to the exit discharge. An example of an exit is a two-hour fire resistance-rated enclosed stairway that leads from the fifth floor of an office building to the outside of the building.
Exit access means that portion of an exit route that leads to an exit. An example of an exit access is a corridor on the fifth floor of an office building that leads to a two-hour fire resistance-rated enclosed stairway (the Exit).
Exit discharge means the part of the exit route that leads directly outside or to a street, walkway, refuge area, public way, or open space with access to the outside. An example of an exit discharge is a door at the bottom of a two-hour fire resistance-rated enclosed stairway that discharges to a place of safety outside the building.
Exit route means a continuous and unobstructed path of exit travel from any point within a workplace to a place of safety (including refuge areas). An exit route consists of three parts: The exit access; the exit; and, the exit discharge. (An exit route includes all vertical and horizontal areas along the route.)
High hazard area means an area inside a workplace in which operations include high hazard materials, processes, or contents.
Occupant load means the total number of persons that may occupy a workplace or portion of a workplace at any one time. The occupant load of a workplace is calculated by dividing the gross floor area of the workplace or portion of the workplace by the occupant load factor for that particular type of workplace occupancy. Information regarding the “Occupant load” is located in NFPA 101-2009, Life Safety Code, and in IFC-2009, International Fire Code (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6).
Refuge area means either:
Self-luminous means a light source that is illuminated by a self-contained power source ( e.g., tritium) and that operates independently from external power sources. Batteries are not acceptable self-contained power sources. The light source is typically contained inside the device.
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
OSHA will deem an employer demonstrating compliance with the exit-route provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2009 edition, or the exit-route provisions of the International Fire Code, 2009 edition, to be in compliance with the corresponding requirements in §§ 1910.34, 1910.36, and 1910.37 (incorporated by reference, see section § 1910.6).
[76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
Exit routes must meet the following design and construction requirements:
At least two exit routes must be available in a workplace to permit prompt evacuation of employees and other building occupants during an emergency, except as allowed in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The exit routes must be located as far away as practical from each other so that if one exit route is blocked by fire or smoke, employees can evacuate using the second exit route.
More than two exit routes must be available in a workplace if the number of employees, the size of the building, its occupancy, or the arrangement of the workplace is such that all employees would not be able to evacuate safely during an emergency.
A single exit route is permitted where the number of employees, the size of the building, its occupancy, or the arrangement of the workplace is such that all employees would be able to evacuate safely during an emergency.
Each outdoor exit route must meet the minimum height and width requirements for indoor exit routes and must also meet the following requirements:
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002, as amended at 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011]
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002]
An employer must have an emergency action plan whenever an OSHA standard in this part requires one. The requirements in this section apply to each such emergency action plan.
An emergency action plan must be in writing, kept in the workplace, and available to employees for review. However, an employer with 10 or fewer employees may communicate the plan orally to employees.
An emergency action plan must include at a minimum:
An employer must have and maintain an employee alarm system. The employee alarm system must use a distinctive signal for each purpose and comply with the requirements in § 1910.165.
An employer must designate and train employees to assist in a safe and orderly evacuation of other employees.
An employer must review the emergency action plan with each employee covered by the plan:
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002]
An employer must have a fire prevention plan when an OSHA standard in this part requires one. The requirements in this section apply to each such fire prevention plan.
A fire prevention plan must be in writing, be kept in the workplace, and be made available to employees for review. However, an employer with 10 or fewer employees may communicate the plan orally to employees.
A fire prevention plan must include:
An employer must inform employees upon initial assignment to a job of the fire hazards to which they are exposed. An employer must also review with each employee those parts of the fire prevention plan necessary for self-protection.
[67 FR 67961, Nov. 7, 2002]
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers in complying with the appropriate requirements of subpart E.
§ 1910.38 Employee emergency plans.
1. Emergency action plan elements. The emergency action plan should address emergencies that the employer may reasonably expect in the workplace. Examples are: fire; toxic chemical releases; hurricanes; tornadoes; blizzards; floods; and others. The elements of the emergency action plan presented in paragraph 1910.38(c) can be supplemented by the following to more effectively achieve employee safety and health in an emergency. The employer should list in detail the procedures to be taken by those employees who have been selected to remain behind to care for essential plant operations until their evacuation becomes absolutely necessary. Essential plant operations may include the monitoring of plant power supplies, water supplies, and other essential services which cannot be shut down for every emergency alarm. Essential plant operations may also include chemical or manufacturing processes which must be shut down in stages or steps where certain employees must be present to assure that safe shut down procedures are completed.
The use of floor plans or workplace maps which clearly show the emergency escape routes should be included in the emergency action plan. Color coding will aid employees in determining their route assignments.
The employer should also develop and explain in detail what rescue and medical first aid duties are to be performed and by whom. All employees are to be told what actions they are to take in these emergency situations that the employer anticipates may occur in the workplace.
2. Emergency evacuation. At the time of an emergency, employees should know what type of evacuation is necessary and what their role is in carrying out the plan. In some cases where the emergency is very grave, total and immediate evacuation of all employees is necessary. In other emergencies, a partial evacuation of nonessential employees with a delayed evacuation of others may be necessary for continued plant operation. In some cases, only those employees in the immediate area of the fire may be expected to evacuate or move to a safe area such as when a local application fire suppression system discharge employee alarm is sounded. Employees must be sure that they know what is expected of them in all such emergency possibilities which have been planned in order to provide assurance of their safety from fire or other emergency.
The designation of refuge or safe areas for evacuation should be determined and identified in the plan. In a building divided into fire zones by fire walls, the refuge area may still be within the same building but in a different zone from where the emergency occurs.
Exterior refuge or safe areas may include parking lots, open fields or streets which are located away from the site of the emergency and which provide sufficient space to accommodate the employees. Employees should be instructed to move away from the exit discharge doors of the building, and to avoid congregating close to the building where they may hamper emergency operations.
3. Emergency action plan training. The employer should assure that an adequate number of employees are available at all times during working hours to act as evacuation wardens so that employees can be swiftly moved from the danger location to the safe areas. Generally, one warden for each twenty employees in the workplace should be able to provide adequate guidance and instruction at the time of a fire emergency. The employees selected or who volunteer to serve as wardens should be trained in the complete workplace layout and the various alternative escape routes from the workplace. All wardens and fellow employees should be made aware of handicapped employees who may need extra assistance, such as using the buddy system, and of hazardous areas to be avoided during emergencies. Before leaving, wardens should check rooms and other enclosed spaces in the workplace for employees who may be trapped or otherwise unable to evacuate the area.
After the desired degree of evacuation is completed, the wardens should be able to account for or otherwise verify that all employees are in the safe areas.
In buildings with several places of employment, employers are encouraged to coordinate their plans with the other employers in the building. A building-wide or standardized plan for the whole building is acceptable provided that the employers inform their respective employees of their duties and responsibilities under the plan. The standardized plan need not be kept by each employer in the multi-employer building, provided there is an accessible location within the building where the plan can be reviewed by affected employees. When multi-employer building-wide plans are not feasible, employers should coordinate their plans with the other employers within the building to assure that conflicts and confusion are avoided during times of emergencies. In multi-story buildings where more than one employer is on a single floor, it is essential that these employers coordinate their plans with each other to avoid conflicts and confusion.
4. Fire prevention housekeeping. The standard calls for the control of accumulations of flammable and combustible waste materials.
It is the intent of this standard to assure that hazardous accumulations of combustible waste materials are controlled so that a fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic smoke, or an explosion will not occur. This does not necessarily mean that each room has to be swept each day. Employers and employees should be aware of the hazardous properties of materials in their workplaces, and the degree of hazard each poses. Certainly oil soaked rags have to be treated differently than general paper trash in office areas. However, large accumulations of waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can pose a significant fire hazard. Accumulations of materials which can cause large fires or generate dense smoke that are easily ignited or may start from spontaneous combustion, are the types of materials with which this standard is concerned. Such combustible materials may be easily ignited by matches, welder's sparks, cigarettes and similar low level energy ignition sources.
5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire prevention plan. Certain equipment is often installed in workplaces to control heat sources or to detect fuel leaks. An example is a temperature limit switch often found on deep-fat food fryers found in restaurants. There may be similar switches for high temperature dip tanks, or flame failure and flashback arrester devices on furnaces and similar heat producing equipment. If these devices are not properly maintained or if they become inoperative, a definite fire hazard exists. Again employees and supervisors should be aware of the specific type of control devices on equipment involved with combustible materials in the workplace and should make sure, through periodic inspection or testing, that these controls are operable. Manufacturers' recommendations should be followed to assure proper maintenance procedures.
[45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980]
This section covers powered platform installations permanently dedicated to interior or exterior building maintenance of a specific structure or group of structures. This section does not apply to suspended scaffolds (swinging scaffolds) used to service buildings on a temporary basis and covered under subpart D of this part, nor to suspended scaffolds used for construction work and covered under subpart L of 29 CFR part 1926. Building maintenance includes, but is not limited to, such tasks as window cleaning, caulking, metal polishing and reglazing.
This section applies to all permanent installations completed after July 23, 1990. Major modifications to existing installations completed after that date are also considered new installations under this section.
Anemometer means an instrument for measuring wind velocity.
Angulated roping means a suspension method where the upper point of suspension is inboard from the attachments on the suspended unit, thus causing the suspended unit to bear against the face of the building.
Building face roller means a rotating cylindrical member designed to ride on the face of the building wall to prevent the platform from abrading the face of the building and to assist in stabilizing the platform.
Building maintenance means operations such as window cleaning, caulking, metal polishing, reglazing, and general maintenance on building surfaces.
Cable means a conductor, or group of conductors, enclosed in a weatherproof sheath, that may be used to supply electrical power and/or control current for equipment or to provide voice communication circuits.
Carriage means a wheeled vehicle used for the horizontal movement and support of other equipment.
Certification means a written, signed and dated statement confirming the performance of a requirement of this section.
Combination cable means a cable having both steel structural members capable of supporting the platform, and copper or other electrical conductors insulated from each other and the structural members by nonconductive barriers.
Competent person means a person who, because of training and experience, is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in powered platform installations and of training employees to identify such conditions.
Continuous pressure means the need for constant manual actuation for a control to function.
Control means a mechanism used to regulate or guide the operation of the equipment.
Davit means a device, used singly or in pairs, for suspending a powered platform from work, storage and rigging locations on the building being serviced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts its operating load into a single roof socket or carriage attachment.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials or methods which the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in the standard.
Ground rigging means a method of suspending a working platform starting from a safe surface to a point of suspension above the safe surface.
Ground rigged davit means a davit which cannot be used to raise a suspended working platform above the building face being serviced.
Guide button means a building face anchor designed to engage a guide track mounted on a platform.
Guide roller means a rotating cylindrical member, operating separately or as part of a guide assembly, designed to provide continuous engagement between the platform and the building guides or guideways.
Guide shoe means a device attached to the platform designed to provide a sliding contact between the platform and the building guides.
Hoisting machine means a device intended to raise and lower a suspended or supported unit.
Hoist rated load means the hoist manufacturer's maximum allowable operating load.
Installation means all the equipment and all affected parts of a building which are associated with the performance of building maintenance using powered platforms.
Interlock means a device designed to ensure that operations or motions occur in proper sequence.
Intermittent stabilization means a method of platform stabilization in which the angulated suspension wire rope(s) are secured to regularly spaced building anchors.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope or strap which is used to secure the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline or anchorage.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.
Live load means the total static weight of workers, tools, parts, and supplies that the equipment is designed to support.
Obstruction detector means a control that will stop the suspended or supported unit in the direction of travel if an obstruction is encountered, and will allow the unit to move only in a direction away from the obstruction.
Operating control means a mechanism regulating or guiding the operation of equipment that ensures a specific operating mode.
Operating device means a device actuated manually to activate a control.
Outrigger means a device, used singly or in pairs, for suspending a working platform from work, storage, and rigging locations on the building being serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger reacts its operating moment load as at least two opposing vertical components acting into two or more distinct roof points and/or attachments.
Platform rated load means the combined weight of workers, tools, equipment and other material which is permitted to be carried by the working platform at the installation, as stated on the load rating plate.
Poured socket means the method of providing wire rope terminations in which the ends of the rope are held in a tapered socket by means of poured spelter or resins.
Primary brake means a brake designed to be applied automatically whenever power to the prime mover is interrupted or discontinued.
Prime mover means the source of mechanical power for a machine.
Rated load means the manufacturer's recommended maximum load.
Rated strength means the strength of wire rope, as designated by its manufacturer or vendor, based on standard testing procedures or acceptable engineering design practices.
Rated working load means the combined static weight of men, materials, and suspended or supported equipment.
Registered professional engineer means a person who has been duly and currently registered and licensed by an authority within the United States or its territories to practice the profession of engineering.
Roof powered platform means a working platform where the hoist(s) used to raise or lower the platform is located on the roof.
Roof rigged davit means a davit used to raise the suspended working platform above the building face being serviced. This type of davit can also be used to raise a suspended working platform which has been ground-rigged.
Rope means the equipment used to suspend a component of an equipment installation, i.e., wire rope.
Safe surface means a horizontal surface intended to be occupied by personnel, which is so protected by a fall protection system that it can be reasonably assured that said occupants will be protected against falls.
Secondary brake means a brake designed to arrest the descent of the suspended or supported equipment in the event of an overspeed condition.
Self powered platform means a working platform where the hoist(s) used to raise or lower the platform is mounted on the platform.
Speed reducer means a positive type speed reducing machine.
Stability factor means the ratio of the stabilizing moment to the overturning moment.
Stabilizer tie means a flexible line connecting the building anchor and the suspension wire rope supporting the platform.
Supported equipment means building maintenance equipment that is held or moved to its working position by means of attachment directly to the building or extensions of the building being maintained.
Suspended equipment means building maintenance equipment that is suspended and raised or lowered to its working position by means of ropes or combination cables attached to some anchorage above the equipment.
Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold) means a scaffold supported on wire or other ropes, used for work on, or for providing access to, vertical sides of structures on a temporary basis. Such scaffold is not designed for use on a specific structure or group of structures.
Tail line means the nonsupporting end of the wire rope used to suspend the platform.
Tie-in guides means the portion of a building that provides continuous positive engagement between the building and a suspended or supported unit during its vertical travel on the face of the building.
Traction hoist means a type of hoisting machine that does not accumulate the suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum or sheave, and is designed to raise and lower a suspended load by the application of friction forces between the suspension wire rope and the drum or sheave.
Transportable outriggers means outriggers designed to be moved from one work location to another.
Trolley carriage means a carriage suspended from an overhead track structure.
Verified means accepted by design, evaluation, or inspection by a registered professional engineer.
Weatherproof means so constructed that exposure to adverse weather conditions will not affect or interfere with the proper use or functions of the equipment or component.
Winding drum hoist means a type of hoisting machine that accumulates the suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum.
Working platform means suspended or supported equipment intended to provide access to the face of a building and manned by persons engaged in building maintenance.
Wrap means one complete turn of the suspension wire rope around the surface of a hoist drum.
The following requirements apply to affected parts of buildings which utilize working platforms for building maintenance.
The system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. The system may be used together with continuous positive building guide systems using tie-in guides on the same building, provided the requirements for each system are met.
The system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. This system is acceptable only where the suspended portion of the equipment in use does not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe surface or ground level, and where the platform maintains no less than 10 pounds (44.4 n) angulation force on the building facade.
Operational areas for trackless type equipment shall be provided with structural stops, such as curbs, to prevent equipment from traveling outside its intended travel areas and to prevent a crushing or shearing hazard.
Means shall be provided to traverse all carriages and their suspended equipment to a safe area for maintenance and storage.
Imbedded tie-down anchors, fasteners, and affected structures shall be resistant to corrosion.
A written emergency action plan shall be developed and implemented for each kind of working platform operation. This plan shall explain the emergency procedures which are to be followed in the event of a power failure, equipment failure or other emergencies which may be encountered. The plan shall also explain that employees inform themselves about the building emergency escape routes, procedures and alarm systems before operating a platform. Upon initial assignment and whenever the plan is changed the employer shall review with each employee those parts of the plan which the employee must know to protect himself or herself in the event of an emergency.
Repairs or major maintenance of those building portions that provide primary support for the suspended equipment shall not affect the capability of the building to meet the requirements of this standard.
The following electrical requirements apply to buildings which utilize working platforms for building maintenance.
The following requirements apply to equipment which are part of a powered platform installation, such as platforms, stabilizing components, carriages, outriggers, davits, hoisting machines, wire ropes and electrical components.
Bolted connections shall be self-locking or shall otherwise be secured to prevent loss of the connections by vibration.
Elevated building maintenance equipment shall be suspended by a carriage, outriggers, davits or an equivalent method.
Carriages used for suspension of elevated building maintenance equipment shall comply with the following:
Where:
F = Design factor
S = Manufacturer's rated strength of one suspension rope
N = Number of suspension ropes under load
W = Rated working load on all ropes at any point of travel
All completed building maintenance equipment installations shall be inspected and tested in the field before being placed in initial service to determine that all parts of the installation conform to applicable requirements of this standard, and that all safety and operating equipment is functioning as required. A similar inspection and test shall be made following any major alteration to an existing installation. No hoist in an installation shall be subjected to a load in excess of 125 percent of its rated load.
Before lowering personnel below the top elevation of the building, the hoist shall be tested each day in the lifting direction with the intended load to make certain it has sufficient capacity to raise the personnel back to the boarding level.
All parts of the equipment affecting safe operation shall be maintained in proper working order so that they may perform the functions for which they were intended. The equipment shall be taken out of service when it is not in proper working order.
The hoisting ropes shall be reshackled at the nondrum ends at intervals not exceeding 24 months. When reshackling the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut from the end of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions.
Roof track systems, tie-downs, or similar equipment shall be maintained in proper working order so that they perform the function for which they were intended.
T-rails, indented mullions, or equivalent guides located in the face of a building shall be maintained in proper working order so that they perform the functions for which they were intended. Brackets for cable stabilizers shall similarly be maintained in proper working order.
No person shall render a required safety device or electrical protective device inoperative, except as necessary for tests, inspections, and maintenance. Immediately upon completion of such tests, inspections and maintenance, the device shall be restored to its normal operating condition.
Employees on working platforms shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part and as otherwise provided by this standard.
Appendix D to § 1910.66—Existing Installations (Mandatory)
Use of the Appendix
Appendix D sets out the mandatory building and equipment requirements for applicable permanent installations completed after August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, 1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs (a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this standard. The requirements in appendix D are essentially the same as unrevised building and equipment provisions which previously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), (b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on August 27, 1971.
A system of platform suspension in which the upper wire rope sheaves or suspension points are closer to the plane of the building face than the corresponding attachment points on the platform, thus causing the platform to press against the face of the building during its vertical travel.
American National Standards Institute.
The method of providing wire rope attachments in which the ends of the wire strands are bent back and are held in a tapered socket by means of poured molten babbitt metal.
A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by frictional resistance between one or more faces of discs keyed to the rotating member to be held and fixed discs keyed to the stationary or housing member (pressure between the discs being applied axially).
An essentially undirectional brake in which the holding effect is obtained by the snubbing action of a flexible band wrapped about a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotating member to be held, the connections and linkages being so arranged that the motion of the brake wheel or drum will act to increase the tension or holding force of the band.
A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by applying the direct pressure of two or more segmental friction elements held to a stationary member against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotating member to be held.
A specialized form of guide roller designed to contact a portion of the outer face or wall structure of the building, and to assist in stabilizing the operators' platform during vertical travel.
Operation by means of buttons or switches, any one of which may be used to control the movement of the working platform or roof car, only as long as the button or switch is manually maintained in the actuating position.
A system governing starting, stopping, direction, acceleration, speed, and retardation of moving members.
A device or group of devices, usually contained in a single enclosure, which serves to control in some predetermined manner the apparatus to which it is connected.
A conducting connection between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or some conducting body which serves in place of the earth.
A rotating, bearing-mounted, generally cylindrical member, operating separately or as part of a guide shoe assembly, attached to the platform, and providing rolling contact with building guideways, or other building contact members.
An assembly of rollers, slide members, or the equivalent, attached as a unit to the operators' platform, and designed to engage with the building members provided for the vertical guidance of the operators' platform.
A device actuated by the operation of some other device with which it is directly associated, to govern succeeding operations of the same or allied devices.
A pushbutton, lever, or other manual device used to actuate a control.
Equipment to provide access to the exterior of a building for maintenance, consisting of a suspended power-operated working platform, a roof car, or other suspension means, and the requisite operating and control devices.
The combined weight of employees, tools, equipment, and other material which the working platform is designed and installed to lift.
An electrically energized contactor responsive to an initiating control circuit, which in turn causes a moving member to travel in a particular direction.
A structure for the suspension of a working platform, providing for its horizontal movement to working positions.
A powered platform having the raising and lowering mechanism located on a roof car.
A powered platform having the raising and lowering mechanism located on the working platform.
A cable made up of electrical or communication conductors or both, and providing electrical connection between the working platform and the roof car or other fixed point.
Equipment so constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with its proper operation.
The suspended structure arranged for vertical travel which provides access to the exterior of the building or structure.
The stress at which the material exhibits a permanent set of 0.2 percent.
The method of providing wire rope attachments in which the splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a tapered socket by means of poured molten zinc.
All powered platform installations for exterior building maintenance completed as of August 27, 1971, but no later than [insert date, 180 days after the effective date], shall meet all of the design, construction and installation requirements of part II and III of the “American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance ANSI A120.1-1970” and of this appendix. References shall be made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1-1970 for detail specifications for equipment and special installations.
The requirements of this appendix apply only to electric powered platforms. It is not the intent of this appendix to prohibit the use of other types of power. Installation of powered platforms using other types of power is permitted, provided such platforms have adequate protective devices for the type of power used, and otherwise provide for reasonable safety of life and limb to users of equipment and to others who may be exposed.
Roof car stability shall be determined by either paragraph (c)(3) (i) or (ii) of this appendix, whichever is greater.
Safe access to the roof car and from the roof car to the working platform shall be provided. If the access to the roof car at any point of its travel is not over the roof area or where otherwise necessary for safety, then self-closing, self-locking gates shall be provided. Access to and from roof cars must comply with the requirements of subpart D of this part.
The working platform shall be of girder or truss construction and shall be adequate to support its rated load under any position of loading, and comply with the provisions set forth in section 10 of ANSI A120.1-1970, American National Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance.
Each working platform shall bear a manufacturer's load rating plate, conspicuously posted; stating the maximum permissible rated load. Load rating plates shall be made of noncorrosive material and shall have letters and figures stamped, etched, or cast on the surface. The minimum height of the letters and figures shall be one-fourth inch.
The working platform shall have a minimum net width of 24 inches.
Working platforms shall be furnished with permanent guard rails not less than 36 inches high, and not more than 42 inches high at the front (building side). At the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not be less than 42 inches high. An intermediate guardrail shall be provided around the entire platform between the top guardrail and the toeboard.
A four-inch toeboard shall be provided along all sides of the working platform.
The spaces between the intermediate guardrail and platform toeboard on the building side of the working platform, and between the top guardrail and the toeboard on other sides of the platform, shall be filled with metalic mesh or similar material that will reject a ball one inch in diameter. The installed mesh shall be capable of withstanding a load of 100 pounds applied horizontally over any area of 144 square inches. If the space between the platform and the building face does not exceed eight inches, and the platform is restrained by guides, the mesh may be omitted on the front side.
The platform flooring shall be of the nonskid type, and if of open construction, shall reject a 9/16 -inch diameter ball, or be provided with a screen below the floor to reject a 9/16 -inch diameter ball.
Where access gates are provided, they shall be self-closing and self-locking.
Emergency operation of the main drive machine may be provided to allow manual cranking. This provision for manual operation shall be designed so that not more than two persons will be required to perform this operation. The access to this provision shall include a means to automatically make the machine inoperative electrically while under the emergency manual operation. The design shall be such that the emergency brake is operative at or below governor tripping speed during manual operation.
The hoisting machine(s) shall have two independent braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with 125 percent of rated load.
F = S × N/W
Where
S = Manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one rope.
N = Number of ropes under load.
W = Maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated load at any point of its travel.
The requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
The requirements of paragraphs (c)(6) through (c)(16) of this appendix apply to Type T powered platforms.
The requirements of paragraphs (c) (17) and (18) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
Brakes requirements of paragraph (c)(19) of this appendix shall apply.
All the requirements of paragraph (c)(23) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
[54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 7190, Feb. 14, 2007; 81 FR 82998, Nov. 18, 2016]
Any vehicle—mounted device, telescoping or articulating, or both, which is used to position personnel.
An aerial device consisting of a single- or multiple-section extensible ladder.
An aerial device with two or more hinged boom sections.
An aerial device (except ladders) with a telescopic or extensible boom. Telescopic derricks with personnel platform attachments shall be considered to be extensible boom platforms when used with a personnel platform.
An aerial device designed for work on energized lines and apparatus.
A combination of an aerial device, its vehicle, and related equipment.
Any personnel-carrying device (basket or bucket) which is a component of an aerial device.
Any carrier that is not manually propelled.
An aerial device designed to elevate a platform in a substantially vertical axis.
Before the truck is moved for highway travel, aerial ladders shall be secured in the lower traveling position by the locking device above the truck cab, and the manually operated device at the base of the ladder, or by other equally effective means (e.g., cradles which prevent rotation of the ladder in combination with positive acting linear actuators).
Electrical tests shall be made in conformance with the requirements of ANSI A92.2—1969, Section 5. However, equivalent DC voltage tests may be used in lieu of the AC voltage test specified in A92.2—1969. DC voltage tests which are approved by the equipment manufacturer or equivalent entity shall be considered an equivalent test for the purpose of this paragraph (c)(3).
All critical hydraulic and pneumatic components shall comply with the provisions of the American National Standards Institute standard, ANSI A92.2—1969, Section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor. Critical components are those in which a failure would result in a free fall or free rotation of the boom. All noncritical components shall have a bursting safety factor of at least two to one.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 79 FR 37190, July 1, 2014; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
A handhold is a device attached to the belt which can be grasped by the passenger to provide a means of maintaining balance.
One which has a handgrip surface fully exposed and capable of being encircled by the passenger's fingers.
A cup-shaped device, open at the top in the direction of travel of the step for which it is to be used, and closed at the bottom, into which the passenger may place his fingers.
A device, the purpose of which is to cut off the power to the motor and apply the brake to stop the carrier in the event that a loaded step passes the terminal landing.
A device consisting of a power-driven endless belt moving in one direction only, and provided with steps or platforms and handholds attached to it for the transportation of personnel from floor to floor.
Rated speed is the speed for which the device is designed and installed.
An electric limit switch operated mechanically by the rollers on the manlift steps. It consists of an additional hinged or “split” rail, mounted on the regular guide rail, over which the step rollers pass. It is springloaded in the “split” position. If the step supports no load, the rollers will “bump” over the switch; if a loaded step should pass over the section, the split rail will be forced straight, tripping the switch and opening the electrical circuit.
A step is a passenger carrying unit.
The travel is the distance between the centers of the top and bottom pulleys.
This section applies to the construction, maintenance, inspection, and operation of manlifts in relation to accident hazards. Manlifts covered by this section consist of platforms or brackets and accompanying handholds mounted on, or attached to an endless belt, operating vertically in one direction only and being supported by, and driven through pulleys, at the top and bottom. These manlifts are intended for conveyance of persons only. It is not intended that this section cover moving stairways, elevators with enclosed platforms (“Paternoster” elevators), gravity lifts, nor conveyors used only for conveying material. This section applies to manlifts used to carry only personnel trained and authorized by the employer in their use.
The purpose of this section is to provide reasonable safety for life and limb.
All new manlift installations and equipment installed after the effective date of these regulations shall meet the design requirements of the “American National Safety Standard for Manlifts ANSI A90.1-1969”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, and the requirements of this section.
The following codes and subparts of this part are applicable to this section: Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, ANSI B15.1-1953 (R 1958); Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3-1956; and subparts D, O, and S. The preceding ANSI standards are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Floor openings for both the “up” and “down” runs shall be not less than 28 inches nor more than 36 inches in width for a 12-inch belt; not less than 34 inches nor more than 38 inches for a 14-inch belt; and not less than 36 inches nor more than 40 inches for a 16-inch belt and shall extend not less than 24 inches, nor more than 28 inches from the face of the belt.
All floor openings for a given manlift shall be uniform in size and shall be approximately circular, and each shall be located vertically above the opening below it.
The clearanace between the floor or mounting platform and the lower edge for the conical guard above it required by subparagraph (7) of this paragraph shall not be less than 7 feet 6 inches. Where this clearance cannot be obtained no access to the manlift shall be provided and the manlift runway shall be enclosed where it passes through such floor.
The landing space adjacent to the floor openings shall be free from obstruction and kept clear at all times. This landing space shall be at least 2 feet in width from the edge of the floor opening used for mounting and dismounting.
Adequate lighting, not less than 5-foot candles, shall be provided at each floor landing at all times when the lift is in operation.
The landing surfaces at the entrances and exits to the manlift shall be constructed and maintained as to provide safe footing at all times.
Where there is a travel of 50 feet or more between floor landings, one or more emergency landings shall be provided so that there will be a landing (either floor or emergency) for every 25 feet or less of manlift travel.
On the ascending side of the manlift floor openings shall be provided with a bevel guard or cone meeting the following requirements:
In lieu of the fixed guards specified in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph a floating type safety cone may be used, such floating cones to be mounted on hinges at least 6 inches below the underside of the floor and so constructed as to actuate a limit switch should a force of 2 pounds be applied on the edge of the cone closest to the hinge. The depth of this floating cone need not exceed 12 inches.
The entrances and exits at all floor landings affording access to the manlift shall be guarded by a maze (staggered railing) or a handrail equipped with self-closing gates.
The rails shall be standard guardrails with toeboards that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part.
Gates, if used, shall open outward and shall be self-closing. Corners of gates shall be rounded.
Maze or staggered openings shall offer no direct passage between enclosure and outer floor space.
The floor opening at each landing shall be guarded on sides not used for entrance or exit by a wall, a railing and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh of suitable strength.
Such rails or guards shall be at least 42 inches in height on the up-running side and 66 inches on the down-running side.
At the bottom landing the clear area shall be not smaller than the area enclosed by the guardrails on the floors above, and any wall in front of the down-running side of the belt shall be not less than 48 inches from the face of the belt. This space shall not be encroached upon by stairs or ladders.
The lower (boot) pulley shall be installed so that it is supported by the lowest landing served. The sides of the pulley support shall be guarded to prevent contact with the pulley or the steps.
A mounting platform shall be provided in front or to one side of the uprun at the lowest landing, unless the floor level is such that the following requirement can be met: The floor or platform shall be at or above the point at which the upper surface of the ascending step completes its turn and assumes a horizontal position.
To guard against persons walking under a descending step, the area on the downside of the manlift shall be guarded in accordance with subparagraph (8) of this paragraph. To guard against a person getting between the mounting platform and an ascending step, the area between the belt and the platform shall be protected by a guardrail.
A top clearance shall be provided of at least 11 feet above the top terminal landing. This clearance shall be maintained from a plane through each face of the belt to a vertical cylindrical plane having a diameter 2 feet greater than the diameter of the floor opening, extending upward from the top floor to the ceiling on the up-running side of the belt. No encroachment of structural or machine supporting members within this space will be permitted.
An emergency grab bar or rail and platform shall be provided at the head pulley when the distance to the head pulley is over 6 feet above the top landing, otherwise only a grab bar or rail is to be provided to permit the rider to swing free should the emergency stops become inoperative.
A fixed metal ladder accessible from both the “up” and “down” run of the manlift shall be provided for the entire travel of the manlift. Such ladders shall meet the requirements in subpart D of this part.
Manlift rails shall be secured in such a manner as to avoid spreading, vibration, and misalinement.
Both runs of the manlift shall be illuminated at all times when the lift is in operation. An intensity of not less than 1-foot candle shall be maintained at all points. (However, see subparagraph (6)(iii) of this paragraph for illumination requirements at landings.)
Lighting of manlift runways shall be by means of circuits permanently tied in to the building circuits (no switches), or shall be controlled by switches at each landing. Where separate switches are provided at each landing, any switch shall turn on all lights necessary to illuminate the entire runway.
The entire manlift and its driving mechanism shall be protected from the weather at all times.
Brakes provided for stopping and holding a manlift shall be inherently self-engaging, by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement. The brake shall be electrically released, and shall be applied to the motor shaft for direct-connected units or to the input shaft for belt-driven units. The brake shall be capable of stopping and holding the manlift when the descending side is loaded with 250 lb on each step.
No manlift designed for a speed in excess of 80 feet per minute shall be installed.
Steps or platforms shall be not less than 12 inches nor more than 14 inches deep, measured from the belt to the edge of the step or platform.
The width of the step or platform shall be not less than the width of the belt to which it is attached.
The distance between steps shall be equally spaced and not less than 16 feet measured from the upper surface of one step to the upper surface of the next step above it.
The surface of the step shall make approximately a right angle with the “up” and “down” run of the belt, and shall travel in the approximate horizontal position with the “up” and “down” run of the belt.
The upper or working surfaces of the step shall be of a material having inherent nonslip characteristics (coefficient of friction not less than 0.5) or shall be covered completely by a nonslip tread securely fastened to it.
When subjected to a load of 400 pounds applied at the approximate center of the step, step frames, or supports and their guides shall be of adequate strength to:
No steps shall be provided unless there is a corresponding handhold above or below it meeting the requirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this section. If a step is removed for repairs or permanently, the handholds immediately above and below it shall be removed before the lift is again placed in service.
Handholds attached to the belt shall be provided and installed so that they are not less than 4 feet nor more than 4 feet 8 inches above the step tread. These shall be so located as to be available on the both “up” and “down” run of the belt.
The grab surface of the handhold shall be not less than 4 1/2 inches in width, not less than 3 inches in depth, and shall provide 2 inches of clearance from the belt. Fastenings for handholds shall be located not less than 1 inch from the edge of the belt.
The handhold shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, a load of 300 pounds applied parallel to the run of the belt.
No handhold shall be provided without a corresponding step. If a handhold is removed permanently or temporarily, the corresponding step and handhold for the opposite direction of travel shall also be removed before the lift is again placed in service.
All handholds shall be of the closed type.
Two separate automatic stop devices shall be provided to cut off the power and apply the brake when a loaded step passes the upper terminal landing. One of these shall consist of a split-rail switch mechanically operated by the step roller and located not more than 6 inches above the top terminal landing. The second automatic stop device may consist of any of the following:
After the manlift has been stopped by a stop device it shall be necessary to reset the automatic stop manually. The device shall be so located that a person resetting it shall have a clear view of both the “up” and “down” runs of the manlift. It shall not be possible to reset the device from any step or platform.
The initial limit stop device shall function so that the manlift will be stopped before the loaded step has reached a point 24 inches above the top terminal landing.
An emergency stop means shall be provided.
This stop means shall be within easy reach of the ascending and descending runs of the belt.
This stop means shall be so connected with the control lever or operating mechanism that it will cut off the power and apply the brake when pulled in the direction of travel.
If rope is used, it shall be not less than three-eights inch in diameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-covered, shall not be used.
Signs of conspicuous and easily read style giving instructions for the use of the manlift shall be posted at each landing or stenciled on the belt.
Face the Belt.
Use the Handholds.
To Stop—Pull Rope.
“TOP FLOOR—GET OFF”
Signs shall be in block letters not less than 2 inches in height. This sign shall be located within easy view of an ascending passenger and not more than 2 feet above the top terminal landing.
A conspicuous sign having the following legend—AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY—shall be displayed at each landing.
No freight, packaged goods, pipe, lumber, or construction materials of any kind shall be handled on any manlift.
All manlifts shall be inspected by a competent designated person at intervals of not more than 30 days. Limit switches shall be checked weekly. Manlifts found to be unsafe shall not be operated until properly repaired.
This periodic inspection shall cover but is not limited to the following items:
Steps.
Step Fastenings.
Rails.
Rail Supports and Fastenings.
Rollers and Slides.
Belt and Belt Tension.
Handholds and Fastenings.
Floor Landings.
Guardrails.
Lubrication.
Limit Switches.
Warning Signs and Lights.
Illumination.
Drive Pulley.
Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance.
Pulley Supports.
Motor.
Driving Mechanism.
Brake.
Electrical Switches.
Vibration and Misalignment.
“Skip” on up or down run when mounting step (indicating worn gears).
A certification record shall be kept of each inspection which includes the date of the inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the manlift which was inspected. This record of inspection shall be made available to the Assistant Secretary of Labor or a duly authorized representative.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71068, Dec. 14, 2007; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
A solid substance used in an abrasive blasting operation.
A respirator constructed so that it covers the wearer's head, neck, and shoulders to protect the wearer from rebounding abrasive.
A complete enclosure which rotates on an axis, or which has an internal moving tread to tumble the parts, in order to expose various surfaces of the parts to the action of an automatic blast spray.
A complete enclosure in which blasting operations are performed and where the operator works inside of the room to operate the blasting nozzle and direct the flow of the abrasive material.
An enclosure where the operator stands outside and operates the blasting nozzle through an opening or openings in the enclosure.
Air of such purity that it will not cause harm or discomfort to an individual if it is inhaled for extended periods of time.
A device or combination of devices for separating dust from the air handled by an exhaust ventilation system.
A system for removing contaminated air from a space, comprising two or more of the following elements ( a ) enclosure or hood, ( b ) duct work, ( c ) dust collecting equipment, ( d ) exhauster, and ( e ) discharge stack.
An air purifying respirator, commonly referred to as a dust or a fume respirator, which removes most of the dust or fume from the air passing through the device.
Airborne dust in sizes capable of passing through the upper respiratory system to reach the lower lung passages.
An enclosure where the pieces to be cleaned are positioned on a rotating table and are passed automatically through a series of blast sprays.
The forcible application of an abrasive to a surface by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pressure, or centrifugal force.
Air for abrasive-blasting respirators must be free of harmful quantities of dusts, mists, or noxious gases, and must meet the requirements for supplied-air quality and use specified in 29 CFR 1910.134(i).
Dust shall not be permitted to accumulate on the floor or on ledges outside of an abrasive-blasting enclosure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be kept clear of steel shot or similar abrasive which may create a slipping hazard.
This paragraph (a) applies to all operations where an abrasive is forcibly applied to a surface by pneumatic or hydraulic pressure, or by centrifugal force. It does not apply to steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or hydraulic cleaning methods where work is done without the aid of abrasives.
Organic-bonded wheels, the thickness of which is not more than one forty-eighth of their diameter for those up to, and including, 20 inches in diameter, and not more than one-sixtieth of their diameter for those larger than 20 inches in diameter, used for a multitude of operations variously known as cutting, cutting off, grooving, slotting, coping, and jointing, and the like. The wheels may be “solid” consisting of organic-bonded abrasive material throughout, “steel centered” consisting of a steel disc with a rim of organic-bonded material moulded around the periphery, or of the “inserted tooth” type consisting of a steel disc with organic-bonded abrasive teeth or inserts mechanically secured around the periphery.
All power-driven, flexible, coated bands used for grinding, polishing, or buffing purposes.
The part of an exhaust system piping that is connected directly to the hood or enclosure.
A movable fixture, upon which the part to be ground or polished is placed.
All power-driven rotatable discs faced with abrasive materials, artificial or natural, and used for grinding or polishing on the side of the assembled disc.
The loss in static pressure caused by air flowing into a duct or hood. It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
A system consisting of branch pipes connected to hoods or enclosures, one or more header pipes, an exhaust fan, means for separating solid contaminants from the air flowing in the system, and a discharge stack to outside.
All power-driven rotatable grinding or abrasive wheels, except disc wheels as defined in this standard, consisting of abrasive particles held together by artificial or natural bonds and used for peripheral grinding.
A pipe into which one or more branch pipes enter and which connects such branch pipes to the remainder of the exhaust system.
The partial or complete enclosure around the wheel or disc through which air enters an exhaust system during operation.
A grinding machine carrying two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, horizontal spindles upon the inside ends of which are mounted abrasive disc wheels used for grinding two surfaces simultaneously.
A grinding machine carrying an abrasive disc wheel upon one or both ends of a power-driven, rotatable single horizontal spindle.
All power-driven rotatable wheels composed all or in part of textile fabrics, wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be coated with abrasives on the periphery of the wheel for purposes of polishing, buffing, and light grinding.
Any power-driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such manner that it may be manually manipulated.
All power-driven rotatable wheels made from wire or bristles, and used for scratch cleaning and brushing purposes.
Any power-driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such a manner that the wheel with its supporting framework can be manipulated over stationary objects.
The kinetic pressure in the direction of flow necessary to cause a fluid at rest to flow at a given velocity. It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
A grinding machine having a vertical, rotatable power-driven spindle carrying a horizontal abrasive disc wheel.
Wherever dry grinding, dry polishing or buffing is performed, and employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, exceeds the permissible exposure limits prescribed in § 1910.1000 or other sections of this part, a local exhaust ventilation system shall be provided and used to maintain employee exposures within the prescribed limits.
| Wheel diameter (inches) | Wheel width (inches) | Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 /min.) |
|---|---|---|
| To 9 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 220 |
| Over 9 to 16 | 2 | 390 |
| Over 16 to 19 | 3 | 500 |
| Over 19 to 24 | 4 | 610 |
| Over 24 to 30 | 5 | 880 |
| Over 30 to 36 | 6 | 1,200 |
For any wheel wider than wheel diameters shown in Table G-4, increase the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new width to the width shown.
Example:
1/2
4.5 ÷ 4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
| Wheel diameter (inches) | Wheel width (inches) | Minimum exhaust volume (feet 3 /min.) |
|---|---|---|
| To 9 | 2 | 300 |
| Over 9 to 16 | 3 | 500 |
| Over 16 to 19 | 4 | 610 |
| Over 19 to 24 | 5 | 740 |
| Over 24 to 30 | 6 | 1,040 |
| Over 30 to 36 | 6 | 1,200 |
| Disc diameter (inches) | Exhaust volume (ft. 3 /min.) |
|---|---|
| Up to 12 | 220 |
| Over 12 to 19 | 390 |
| Over 19 to 30 | 610 |
| Over 30 to 36 | 880 |
| Disc diameter (inches) | Exhaust volume (ft. 3 /min.) |
|---|---|
| Up to 19 | 610 |
| Over 19 to 25 | 880 |
| Over 25 to 30 | 1,200 |
| Over 30 to 53 | 1,770 |
| Over 53 to 72 | 6,280 |
| Disc diameter (inches) | One-half or more of disc covered | Disc not covered | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Number 1 | Exhaust foot 3 /min.) | Number 1 | Exhaust foot 3 /min. | |
| Up to 20 | 1 | 500 | 2 | 780 |
| Over 20 to 30 | 2 | 780 | 2 | 1,480 |
| Over 30 to 53 | 2 | 1,770 | 4 | 3,530 |
| Over 53 to 72 | 2 | 3,140 | 5 | 6,010 |
| 1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or equal distribution provided by other means. |
| Belts width (inches) | Exhaust volume (ft. 3 /min.) |
|---|---|
| Up to 3 | 220 |
| Over 3 to 5 | 300 |
| Over 5 to 7 | 390 |
| Over 7 to 9 | 500 |
| Over 9 to 11 | 610 |
| Over 11 to 13 | 740 |
Where cradles are used for handling the parts to be ground, polished, or buffed, requiring large partial enclosures to house the complete operation, a minimum average air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained over the entire opening of the enclosure. Swing-frame grinders shall also be exhausted in the same manner as provided for cradles. (See fig. G-3)
| Dia D. inches | Exhaust E | Volume Exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 /min | Note | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Min. | Max. | No Pipes | Dia. | |
| 20 | 1 | 4 1 ⁄ 4 | 500 | When one-half or more of the disc can be hooded, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left. |
| Over 20 | 30 | 2 | 4 | 780 |
| Over 30 | 72 | 2 | 6 | 1,770 |
| Over 53 | 72 | 2 | 8 | 3,140 |
| 20 | 2 | 4 | 780 | When no hood can be used over disc, use exhaust ducts as shown at left. |
| Over 20 | 20 | 2 | 4 | 780 |
| Over 30 | 30 | 2 | 5 1 ⁄ 2 | 1,480 |
| Over 53 | 53 | 4 | 6 | 3,530 |
| 72 | 5 | 7 | 6,010 | |
| Entry loss = 1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure. | ||||
| Minimum slot velocity = 2,000 ft/min— 1 ⁄ 2 -inch slot width. |
| Wheel dimension, inches | Exhaust outlet, inches E | Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Diameter | Width, Max | |||
| Min= d | Max= D | |||
| 9 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 | 220 | |
| Over 9 | 16 | 2 | 4 | 390 |
| Over 16 | 19 | 3 | 4 1 ⁄ 2 | 500 |
| Over 19 | 24 | 4 | 5 | 610 |
| Over 24 | 30 | 5 | 6 | 880 |
| Over 30 | 36 | 6 | 7 | 1,200 |
| Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. |
| Wheel dimension, inches | Exhaust outlet, inches E | Volume of air at 4,500 ft/min | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Diameter | Width, Max | |||
| Min= d | Max= D | |||
| 9 | 2 | 3 1 ⁄ 2 | 300 | |
| Over 9 | 16 | 3 | 4 | 500 |
| Over 16 | 19 | 4 | 5 | 610 |
| Over 19 | 24 | 5 | 5 1 ⁄ 2 | 740 |
| Over 24 | 30 | 6 | 6 1 ⁄ 2 | 1.040 |
| Over 30 | 36 | 6 | 7 | 1.200 |
| Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. |
| Dia D, inches | Exhaust E, dia. inches | Volume exhausted at 4,500 ft/min ft 3 /min | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Min. | Max. | ||
| 12 | 3 | 220 | |
| Over 12 | 19 | 4 | 390 |
| Over 19 | 30 | 5 | 610 |
| Over 30 | 36 | 6 | 880 |
| Note: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as described in 9.1. | |||
| Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. |
| Disc dia. inches | Exhaust E | Volume exhaust at 4,500 ft/min. ft 3 /min | Note | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Min. | Max. | No Pipes | Dia. | ||
| 19 | 1 | 5 | 610 | ||
| Over 19 | 25 | 1 | 6 | 880 | When width “W” permits, exhaust ducts should be as near heaviest grinding as possible. |
| Over 25 | 30 | 1 | 7 | 1,200 | |
| Over 30 | 53 | 2 | 6 | 1,770 | |
| Over 53 | 72 | 4 | 8 | 6,280 | |
| Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff. |
| Belt width W. Inches | Exhaust volume. ft. 1 /min |
|---|---|
| Up to 3 | 220 |
| 3 to 5 | 300 |
| 5 to 7 | 390 |
| 7 to 9 | 500 |
| 9 to 11 | 610 |
| 11 to 13 | 740 |
| Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min main. | |
| Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff. |
This paragraph (b), prescribes the use of exhaust hood enclosures and systems in removing dust, dirt, fumes, and gases generated through the grinding, polishing, or buffing of ferrous and nonferrous metals.
Spray-finishing operations are employment of methods wherein organic or inorganic materials are utilized in dispersed form for deposit on surfaces to be coated, treated, or cleaned. Such methods of deposit may involve either automatic, manual, or electrostatic deposition but do not include metal spraying or metallizing, dipping, flow coating, roller coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or spray washing and degreasing as conducted in self-contained washing and degreasing machines or systems.
Spray booths are defined and described in § 1910.107(a).
A spray room is a room in which spray-finishing operations not conducted in a spray booth are performed separately from other areas.
Minimum maintained velocity is the velocity of air movement which must be maintained in order to meet minimum specified requirements for health and safety.
Spray booths or spray rooms are to be used to enclose or confine all operations. Spray-finishing operations shall be located as provided in sections 201 through 206 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969.
| Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth | Crossdraft, f.p.m. | Airflow velocities, f.p.m. | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Design | Range | ||
| Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth without operator | Negligible | 50 large booth | 50-75 |
| 100 small booth | 75-125 | ||
| Air-operated guns, manual or automatic | Up to 50 | 100 large booth | 75-125 |
| 150 small booth | 125-175 | ||
| Air-operated guns, manual or automatic | Up to 100 | 150 large booth | 125-175 |
| 200 small booth | 150-250 | ||
| Notes: | |||
| (1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width. | |||
| (2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted. | |||
| (3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas. | |||
| (4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed “Design.” However, booths operating with velocities shown in the column headed “Range” are in compliance with this standard. |
Example:
To determine the lower explosive limits of the most common solvents used in spray finishing, see Table G-11. Column 1 gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by volume of air. Note that the quantity of solvent will be diminished by the quantity of solids and nonflammables contained in the finish.
To determine the volume of air in cubic feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gallon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower explosive limit, apply the following formula:
Dilution volume required per gallon of solvent = 4 (100−LEL) (cubic feet of vapor per gallon) ÷ LEL
Using toluene as the solvent.
of toluene from Table G-11, column 2, is 1.4 percent.
4 (100−1.4) 30.4 ÷ 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet.
| Solvent | Cubic feet per gallon of vapor of liquid at 70 °F. | Lower explosive limit in percent by volume of air at 70 °F |
|---|---|---|
| Column 1 | Column 2 | |
| Acetone | 44.0 | 2.6 |
| Amyl Acetate (iso) | 21.6 | 1 1.0 |
| Amyl Alcohol (n) | 29.6 | 1.2 |
| Amyl Alcohol (iso) | 29.6 | 1.2 |
| Benzene | 36.8 | 1 1.4 |
| Butyl Acetate (n) | 24.8 | 1.7 |
| Butyl Alcohol (n) | 35.2 | 1.4 |
| Butyl Cellosolve | 24.8 | 1.1 |
| Cellosolve | 33.6 | 1.8 |
| Cellosolve Acetate | 23.2 | 1.7 |
| Cyclohexanone | 31.2 | 1 1.1 |
| 1,1 Dichloroethylene | 42.4 | 5.9 |
| 1,2 Dichloroethylene | 42.4 | 9.7 |
| Ethyl Acetate | 32.8 | 2.5 |
| Ethyl Alcohol | 55.2 | 4.3 |
| Ethyl Lactate | 28.0 | 1 1.5 |
| Methyl Acetate | 40.0 | 3.1 |
| Methyl Alcohol | 80.8 | 7.3 |
| Methyl Cellosolve | 40.8 | 2.5 |
| Methyl Ethyl Ketone | 36.0 | 1.8 |
| Methyl n-Propyl Ketone | 30.4 | 1.5 |
| Naphtha (VM&P) (76° Naphtha) | 22.4 | 0.9 |
| Naphtha (100 °Flash) Safety Solvent—Stoddard Solvent | 23.2 | 1.0 |
| Propyl Acetate (n) | 27.2 | 2.8 |
| Propyl Acetate (iso) | 28.0 | 1.1 |
| Propyl Alcohol (n) | 44.8 | 2.1 |
| Propyl Alcohol (iso) | 44.0 | 2.0 |
| Toluene | 30.4 | 1.4 |
| Turpentine | 20.8 | 0.8 |
| Xylene (o) | 26.4 | 1.0 |
| 1 At 212 °F. |
Spray booths or spray rooms are to be used to enclose or confine all spray finishing operations covered by this paragraph (c). This paragraph does not apply to the spraying of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks, or similar structures, nor to small portable spraying apparatus not used repeatedly in the same location.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40 FR 24522, June 9, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009]
Equivalent sound level contours. Octave band sound pressure levels may be converted to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by plotting them on this graph and noting the A-weighted sound level corresponding to the point of highest penetration into the sound level contours. This equivalent A-weighted sound level, which may differ from the actual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is used to determine exposure limits from Table 1.G-16.
| Duration per day, hours | Sound level dBA slow response |
|---|---|
| 8 | 90 |
| 6 | 92 |
| 4 | 95 |
| 3 | 97 |
| 2 | 100 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 102 |
| 1 | 105 |
| 1 ⁄ 2 | 110 |
| 1 ⁄ 4 or less | 115 |
| 1 When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect should be considered, rather than the individual effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions: C 1 / T 1 + C 2 / T 2 C n / T n exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be considered to exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total time of exposure at a specified noise level, and Tn indicates the total time of exposure permitted at that level. | |
| Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB peak sound pressure level. |
The employer shall notify each employee exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring.
The employer shall provide affected employees or their representatives with an opportunity to observe any noise measurements conducted pursuant to this section.
Where mobile test vans are used to meet the audiometric testing obligation, the employer shall obtain a valid baseline audiogram within 1 year of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level. Where baseline audiograms are obtained more than 6 months after the employee's first exposure at or above the action level, employees shall wearing hearing protectors for any period exceeding six months after first exposure until the baseline audiogram is obtained.
At least annually after obtaining the baseline audiogram, the employer shall obtain a new audiogram for each employee exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels.
An annual audiogram may be substituted for the baseline audiogram when, in the judgment of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician who is evaluating the audiogram:
The employer shall maintain an accurate record of all employee exposure measurements required by paragraph (d) of this section.
The employer shall retain records required in this paragraph (m) for at least the following periods.
All records required by this section shall be provided upon request to employees, former employees, representatives designated by the individual employee, and the Assistant Secretary. The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1020 (a)-
If the employer ceases to do business, the employer shall transfer to the successor employer all records required to be maintained by this section, and the successor employer shall retain them for the remainder of the period prescribed in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
Paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section shall not apply to employers engaged in oil and gas well drilling and servicing operations.
Appendix A to § 1910.95—Noise Exposure Computation
This appendix is Mandatory
I. Computation of Employee Noise Exposure
1
1
2
2
n
n
where C n indicates the total time of exposure at a specific noise level, and T n indicates the reference duration for that level as given by Table G-16a.
| A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) | Reference duration, T (hour) |
|---|---|
| 80 | 32 |
| 81 | 27.9 |
| 82 | 24.3 |
| 83 | 21.1 |
| 84 | 18.4 |
| 85 | 16 |
| 86 | 13.9 |
| 87 | 12.1 |
| 88 | 10.6 |
| 89 | 9.2 |
| 90 | 8 |
| 91 | 7.0 |
| 92 | 6.1 |
| 93 | 5.3 |
| 94 | 4.6 |
| 95 | 4 |
| 96 | 3.5 |
| 97 | 3.0 |
| 98 | 2.6 |
| 99 | 2.3 |
| 100 | 2 |
| 101 | 1.7 |
| 102 | 1.5 |
| 103 | 1.3 |
| 104 | 1.1 |
| 105 | 1 |
| 106 | 0.87 |
| 107 | 0.76 |
| 108 | 0.66 |
| 109 | 0.57 |
| 110 | 0.5 |
| 111 | 0.44 |
| 112 | 0.38 |
| 113 | 0.33 |
| 114 | 0.29 |
| 115 | 0.25 |
| 116 | 0.22 |
| 117 | 0.19 |
| 118 | 0.16 |
| 119 | 0.14 |
| 120 | 0.125 |
| 121 | 0.11 |
| 122 | 0.095 |
| 123 | 0.082 |
| 124 | 0.072 |
| 125 | 0.063 |
| 126 | 0.054 |
| 127 | 0.047 |
| 128 | 0.041 |
| 129 | 0.036 |
| 130 | 0.031 |
In the above table the reference duration, T, is computed by
where L is the measured A-weighted sound level.
II. Conversion Between “Dose” and “8-Hour Time-Weighted Average” Sound Level
Compliance with paragraphs (c)-
In order to convert the reading of a dosimeter into TWA, see Table A-1, below. This table applies to dosimeters that are set by the manufacturer to calculate dose or percent exposure according to the relationships in Table G-16a. So, for example, a dose of 91 percent over an eight hour day results in a TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent corresponds to a TWA of 85 dB.
If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less than or greater than the values found in Table A-1, the TWA may be calculated by using the formula: TWA=16.61 log 10 (D/100) + 90 where TWA = 8-hour time-weighted average sound level and D = accumulated dose in percent exposure.
| Dose or percent noise exposure | TWA |
|---|---|
| 10 | 73.4 |
| 15 | 76.3 |
| 20 | 78.4 |
| 25 | 80.0 |
| 30 | 81.3 |
| 35 | 82.4 |
| 40 | 83.4 |
| 45 | 84.2 |
| 50 | 85.0 |
| 55 | 85.7 |
| 60 | 86.3 |
| 65 | 86.9 |
| 70 | 87.4 |
| 75 | 87.9 |
| 80 | 88.4 |
| 81 | 88.5 |
| 82 | 88.6 |
| 83 | 88.7 |
| 84 | 88.7 |
| 85 | 88.8 |
| 86 | 88.9 |
| 87 | 89.0 |
| 88 | 89.1 |
| 89 | 89.2 |
| 90 | 89.2 |
| 91 | 89.3 |
| 92 | 89.4 |
| 93 | 89.5 |
| 94 | 89.6 |
| 95 | 89.6 |
| 96 | 89.7 |
| 97 | 89.8 |
| 98 | 89.9 |
| 99 | 89.9 |
| 100 | 90.0 |
| 101 | 90.1 |
| 102 | 90.1 |
| 103 | 90.2 |
| 104 | 90.3 |
| 105 | 90.4 |
| 106 | 90.4 |
| 107 | 90.5 |
| 108 | 90.6 |
| 109 | 90.6 |
| 110 | 90.7 |
| 111 | 90.8 |
| 112 | 90.8 |
| 113 | 90.9 |
| 114 | 90.9 |
| 115 | 91.1 |
| 116 | 91.1 |
| 117 | 91.1 |
| 118 | 91.2 |
| 119 | 91.3 |
| 120 | 91.3 |
| 125 | 91.6 |
| 130 | 91.9 |
| 135 | 92.2 |
| 140 | 92.4 |
| 145 | 92.7 |
| 150 | 92.9 |
| 155 | 93.2 |
| 160 | 93.4 |
| 165 | 93.6 |
| 170 | 93.8 |
| 175 | 94.0 |
| 180 | 94.2 |
| 185 | 94.4 |
| 190 | 94.6 |
| 195 | 94.8 |
| 200 | 95.0 |
| 210 | 95.4 |
| 220 | 95.7 |
| 230 | 96.0 |
| 240 | 96.3 |
| 250 | 96.6 |
| 260 | 96.9 |
| 270 | 97.2 |
| 280 | 97.4 |
| 290 | 97.7 |
| 300 | 97.9 |
| 310 | 98.2 |
| 320 | 98.4 |
| 330 | 98.6 |
| 340 | 98.8 |
| 350 | 99.0 |
| 360 | 99.2 |
| 370 | 99.4 |
| 380 | 99.6 |
| 390 | 99.8 |
| 400 | 100.0 |
| 410 | 100.2 |
| 420 | 100.4 |
| 430 | 100.5 |
| 440 | 100.7 |
| 450 | 100.8 |
| 460 | 101.0 |
| 470 | 101.2 |
| 480 | 101.3 |
| 490 | 101.5 |
| 500 | 101.6 |
| 510 | 101.8 |
| 520 | 101.9 |
| 530 | 102.0 |
| 540 | 102.2 |
| 550 | 102.3 |
| 560 | 102.4 |
| 570 | 102.6 |
| 580 | 102.7 |
| 590 | 102.8 |
| 600 | 102.9 |
| 610 | 103.0 |
| 620 | 103.2 |
| 630 | 103.3 |
| 640 | 103.4 |
| 650 | 103.5 |
| 660 | 103.6 |
| 670 | 103.7 |
| 680 | 103.8 |
| 690 | 103.9 |
| 700 | 104.0 |
| 710 | 104.1 |
| 720 | 104.2 |
| 730 | 104.3 |
| 740 | 104.4 |
| 750 | 104.5 |
| 760 | 104.6 |
| 770 | 104.7 |
| 780 | 104.8 |
| 790 | 104.9 |
| 800 | 105.0 |
| 810 | 105.1 |
| 820 | 105.2 |
| 830 | 105.3 |
| 840 | 105.4 |
| 850 | 105.4 |
| 860 | 105.5 |
| 870 | 105.6 |
| 880 | 105.7 |
| 890 | 105.8 |
| 900 | 105.8 |
| 910 | 105.9 |
| 920 | 106.0 |
| 930 | 106.1 |
| 940 | 106.2 |
| 950 | 106.2 |
| 960 | 106.3 |
| 970 | 106.4 |
| 980 | 106.5 |
| 990 | 106.5 |
| 999 | 106.6 |
Appendix B to § 1910.95—Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protector Attenuation
This appendix is Mandatory
For employees who have experienced a significant threshold shift, hearing protector attenuation must be sufficient to reduce employee exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employers must select one of the following methods by which to estimate the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation.
The most convenient method is the Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). According to EPA regulation, the NRR must be shown on the hearing protector package. The NRR is then related to an individual worker's noise environment in order to assess the adequacy of the attenuation of a given hearing protector. This appendix describes four methods of using the NRR to determine whether a particular hearing protector provides adequate protection within a given exposure environment. Selection among the four procedures is dependent upon the employer's noise measuring instruments.
Instead of using the NRR, employers may evaluate the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation by using one of the three methods developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), which are described in the “List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Publication No. 76-120, 1975, pages 21-37. These methods are known as NIOSH methods #1B1, #1B2 and #1B3. The NRR described below is a simplification of NIOSH method #1B2. The most complex method is NIOSH method #1B1, which is probably the most accurate method since it uses the largest amount of spectral information from the individual employee's noise environment. As in the case of the NRR method described below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used, the selected method must be applied to an individual's noise environment to assess the adequacy of the attenuation. Employers should be careful to take a sufficient number of measurements in order to achieve a representative sample for each time segment.
When using the NRR to assess hearing protector adequacy, one of the following methods must be used:
Appendix C to § 1910.95—Audiometric Measuring Instruments
This appendix is Mandatory
1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiometers are used, they shall have a tone on-time of at least 200 milliseconds.
2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply with the following requirements:
Appendix D to § 1910.95—Audiometric Test Rooms
This appendix is Mandatory
Rooms used for audiometric testing shall not have background sound pressure levels exceeding those in Table D-1 when measured by equipment conforming at least to the Type 2 requirements of American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters, S1.4-1971 (R1976), and to the Class II requirements of American National Standard Specification for Octave, Half-Octave, and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.11-1971 (R1976).
| Octave-band center frequency (Hz) | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 4000 | 8000 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Sound pressure level (dB) | 40 | 40 | 47 | 57 | 62 |
Appendix E to § 1910.95—Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers
This appendix is Mandatory
Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically, at least annually, according to the procedures described in this appendix. The equipment necessary to perform these measurements is a sound level meter, octave-band filter set, and a National Bureau of Standards 9A coupler. In making these measurements, the accuracy of the calibrating equipment shall be sufficient to determine that the audiometer is within the tolerances permitted by American Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969.
A. Place the earphone coupler over the microphone of the sound level meter and place the earphone on the coupler.
B. Set the audiometer's hearing threshold level (HTL) dial to 70 dB.
C. Measure the sound pressure level of the tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz through 6000 Hz for each earphone.
D. At each frequency the readout on the sound level meter should correspond to the levels in Table E-1 or Table E-2, as appropriate, for the type of earphone, in the column entitled “sound level meter reading.”
A. With the earphone in place, set the frequency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the audiometer to 70 dB.
B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler at each 10-dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB, noting the sound level meter reading at each setting.
C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audiometer the sound level meter should indicate a corresponding 10 dB decrease.
D. This measurement may be made electrically with a voltmeter connected to the earphone terminals.
When any of the measured sound levels deviate from the levels in Table E-1 or Table E-2 by ±3 dB at any test frequency between 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at 6000 Hz, an exhaustive calibration is advised. An exhaustive calibration is required if the deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater at any test frequency.
| Frequency, Hz | Reference threshold level for TDH-39 earphones, dB | Sound level meter reading, dB |
|---|---|---|
| 500 | 11.5 | 81.5 |
| 1000 | 7 | 77 |
| 2000 | 9 | 79 |
| 3000 | 10 | 80 |
| 4000 | 9.5 | 79.5 |
| 6000 | 15.5 | 85.5 |
| Frequency, Hz | Reference threshold level for TDH-49 earphones, dB | Sound level meter reading, dB |
|---|---|---|
| 500 | 13.5 | 83.5 |
| 1000 | 7.5 | 77.5 |
| 2000 | 11 | 81.0 |
| 3000 | 9.5 | 79.5 |
| 4000 | 10.5 | 80.5 |
| 6000 | 13.5 | 83.5 |
Appendix F to § 1910.95—Calculations and Application of Age Corrections to Audiograms
This appendix Is Non-Mandatory
In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging to the change in hearing level by adjusting the most recent audiogram. If the employer chooses to adjust the audiogram, the employer shall follow the procedure described below. This procedure and the age correction tables were developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health in the criteria document entitled “Criteria for a Recommended Standard... Occupational Exposure to Noise,” ((HSM)-11001).
For each audiometric test frequency;
Example:
Employee is a 32-year-old male. The audiometric history for his right ear is shown in decibels below.
| Employee's age | Audiometric test frequency (Hz) | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 6000 | |
| 26 | 10 | 5 | 5 | 10 | 5 |
| *27 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 5 | 5 |
| 28 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 10 | 5 |
| 29 | 5 | 0 | 5 | 15 | 5 |
| 30 | 0 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 10 |
| 31 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 15 | 15 |
| *32 | 5 | 10 | 10 | 25 | 20 |
The audiogram at age 27 is considered the baseline since it shows the best hearing threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to identify the baseline and most recent audiogram. A threshold shift of 20 dB exists at 4000 Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 and 32.
The contribution of aging to this change in hearing may be estimated in the following manner:
Go to Table F-1 and find the age correction values (in dB) for 4000 Hz at age 27 and age 32.
| Frequency (Hz) | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 6000 | |
| Age 32 | 6 | 5 | 7 | 10 | 14 |
| Age 27 | 5 | 4 | 6 | 7 | 11 |
| Difference | 1 | 1 | 1 | 3 | 3 |
The difference represents the amount of hearing loss that may be attributed to aging in the time period between the baseline audiogram and the most recent audiogram. In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hearing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjustment. Then the hearing threshold in the baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is subtracted from the adjusted annual audiogram hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus the age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB (as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB without age correction).
| Years | Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 6000 | |
| 20 or younger | 5 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 8 |
| 21 | 5 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 8 |
| 22 | 5 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 8 |
| 23 | 5 | 3 | 4 | 6 | 9 |
| 24 | 5 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 9 |
| 25 | 5 | 3 | 5 | 7 | 10 |
| 26 | 5 | 4 | 5 | 7 | 10 |
| 27 | 5 | 4 | 6 | 7 | 11 |
| 28 | 6 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 11 |
| 29 | 6 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 12 |
| 30 | 6 | 4 | 6 | 9 | 12 |
| 31 | 6 | 4 | 7 | 9 | 13 |
| 32 | 6 | 5 | 7 | 10 | 14 |
| 33 | 6 | 5 | 7 | 10 | 14 |
| 34 | 6 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 15 |
| 35 | 7 | 5 | 8 | 11 | 15 |
| 36 | 7 | 5 | 9 | 12 | 16 |
| 37 | 7 | 6 | 9 | 12 | 17 |
| 38 | 7 | 6 | 9 | 13 | 17 |
| 39 | 7 | 6 | 10 | 14 | 18 |
| 40 | 7 | 6 | 10 | 14 | 19 |
| 41 | 7 | 6 | 10 | 14 | 20 |
| 42 | 8 | 7 | 11 | 16 | 20 |
| 43 | 8 | 7 | 12 | 16 | 21 |
| 44 | 8 | 7 | 12 | 17 | 22 |
| 45 | 8 | 7 | 13 | 18 | 23 |
| 46 | 8 | 8 | 13 | 19 | 24 |
| 47 | 8 | 8 | 14 | 19 | 24 |
| 48 | 9 | 8 | 14 | 20 | 25 |
| 49 | 9 | 9 | 15 | 21 | 26 |
| 50 | 9 | 9 | 16 | 22 | 27 |
| 51 | 9 | 9 | 16 | 23 | 28 |
| 52 | 9 | 10 | 17 | 24 | 29 |
| 53 | 9 | 10 | 18 | 25 | 30 |
| 54 | 10 | 10 | 18 | 26 | 31 |
| 55 | 10 | 11 | 19 | 27 | 32 |
| 56 | 10 | 11 | 20 | 28 | 34 |
| 57 | 10 | 11 | 21 | 29 | 35 |
| 58 | 10 | 12 | 22 | 31 | 36 |
| 59 | 11 | 12 | 22 | 32 | 37 |
| 60 or older | 11 | 13 | 23 | 33 | 38 |
| Years | Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 6000 | |
| 20 or younger | 7 | 4 | 3 | 3 | 6 |
| 21 | 7 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 6 |
| 22 | 7 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 6 |
| 23 | 7 | 5 | 4 | 4 | 7 |
| 24 | 7 | 5 | 4 | 4 | 7 |
| 25 | 8 | 5 | 4 | 4 | 7 |
| 26 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 4 | 8 |
| 27 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 8 |
| 28 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 8 |
| 29 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 9 |
| 30 | 8 | 6 | 5 | 5 | 9 |
| 31 | 8 | 6 | 6 | 5 | 9 |
| 32 | 9 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 10 |
| 33 | 9 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 10 |
| 34 | 9 | 6 | 6 | 6 | 10 |
| 35 | 9 | 6 | 7 | 7 | 11 |
| 36 | 9 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 11 |
| 37 | 9 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 12 |
| 38 | 10 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 12 |
| 39 | 10 | 7 | 8 | 8 | 12 |
| 40 | 10 | 7 | 8 | 8 | 13 |
| 41 | 10 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 13 |
| 42 | 10 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 13 |
| 43 | 11 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 14 |
| 44 | 11 | 8 | 9 | 9 | 14 |
| 45 | 11 | 8 | 10 | 10 | 15 |
| 46 | 11 | 9 | 10 | 10 | 15 |
| 47 | 11 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 16 |
| 48 | 12 | 9 | 11 | 11 | 16 |
| 49 | 12 | 9 | 11 | 11 | 16 |
| 50 | 12 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 17 |
| 51 | 12 | 10 | 12 | 12 | 17 |
| 52 | 12 | 10 | 12 | 13 | 18 |
| 53 | 13 | 10 | 13 | 13 | 18 |
| 54 | 13 | 11 | 13 | 14 | 19 |
| 55 | 13 | 11 | 14 | 14 | 19 |
| 56 | 13 | 11 | 14 | 15 | 20 |
| 57 | 13 | 11 | 15 | 15 | 20 |
| 58 | 14 | 12 | 15 | 16 | 21 |
| 59 | 14 | 12 | 16 | 16 | 21 |
| 60 or older | 14 | 12 | 16 | 17 | 22 |
Appendix G to § 1910.95—Monitoring Noise Levels Non-Mandatory Informational Appendix
This appendix provides information to help employers comply with the noise monitoring obligations that are part of the hearing conservation amendment.
What is the purpose of noise monitoring?
This revised amendment requires that employees be placed in a hearing conservation program if they are exposed to average noise levels of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour workday. In order to determine if exposures are at or above this level, it may be necessary to measure or monitor the actual noise levels in the workplace and to estimate the noise exposure or “dose” received by employees during the workday.
When is it necessary to implement a noise monitoring program?
It is not necessary for every employer to measure workplace noise. Noise monitoring or measuring must be conducted only when exposures are at or above 85 dB. Factors which suggest that noise exposures in the workplace may be at this level include employee complaints about the loudness of noise, indications that employees are losing their hearing, or noisy conditions which make normal conversation difficult. The employer should also consider any information available regarding noise emitted from specific machines. In addition, actual workplace noise measurements can suggest whether or not a monitoring program should be initiated.
How is noise measured?
Basically, there are two different instruments to measure noise exposures: the sound level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level meter is a device that measures the intensity of sound at a given moment. Since sound level meters provide a measure of sound intensity at only one point in time, it is generally necessary to take a number of measurements at different times during the day to estimate noise exposure over a workday. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of time noise remains at each of the various measured levels must be determined.
To estimate employee noise exposures with a sound level meter it is also generally necessary to take several measurements at different locations within the workplace. After appropriate sound level meter readings are obtained, people sometimes draw “maps” of the sound levels within different areas of the workplace. By using a sound level “map” and information on employee locations throughout the day, estimates of individual exposure levels can be developed. This measurement method is generally referred to as area noise monitoring.
A dosimeter is like a sound level meter except that it stores sound level measurements and integrates these measurements over time, providing an average noise exposure reading for a given period of time, such as an 8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a microphone is attached to the employee's clothing and the exposure measurement is simply read at the end of the desired time period. A reader may be used to read-out the dosimeter's measurements. Since the dosimeter is worn by the employee, it measures noise levels in those locations in which the employee travels. A sound level meter can also be positioned within the immediate vicinity of the exposed worker to obtain an individual exposure estimate. Such procedures are generally referred to as personal noise monitoring.
Area monitoring can be used to estimate noise exposure when the noise levels are relatively constant and employees are not mobile. In workplaces where employees move about in different areas or where the noise intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise exposure is generally more accurately estimated by the personal monitoring approach.
In situations where personal monitoring is appropriate, proper positioning of the microphone is necessary to obtain accurate measurements. With a dosimeter, the microphone is generally located on the shoulder and remains in that position for the entire workday. With a sound level meter, the microphone is stationed near the employee's head, and the instrument is usually held by an individual who follows the employee as he or she moves about.
Manufacturer's instructions, contained in dosimeter and sound level meter operating manuals, should be followed for calibration and maintenance. To ensure accurate results, it is considered good professional practice to calibrate instruments before and after each use.
How often is it necessary to monitor noise levels?
The amendment requires that when there are significant changes in machinery or production processes that may result in increased noise levels, remonitoring must be conducted to determine whether additional employees need to be included in the hearing conservation program. Many companies choose to remonitor periodically (once every year or two) to ensure that all exposed employees are included in their hearing conservation programs.
Where can equipment and technical advice be obtained?
Noise monitoring equipment may be either purchased or rented. Sound level meters cost about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range in price from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller companies may find it more economical to rent equipment rather than to purchase it. Names of equipment suppliers may be found in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under headings such as: “Safety Equipment,” “Industrial Hygiene,” or “Engineers-Acoustical.” In addition to providing information on obtaining noise monitoring equipment, many companies and individuals included under such listings can provide professional advice on how to conduct a valid noise monitoring program. Some audiological testing firms and industrial hygiene firms also provide noise monitoring services. Universities with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acoustical engineering departments may also provide information or may be able to help employers meet their obligations under this amendment.
Free, on-site assistance may be obtained from OSHA-supported state and private consultation organizations. These safety and health consultative entities generally give priority to the needs of small businesses.
Appendix H to § 1910.95—Availability of Referenced Documents
Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95 and the accompanying appendices contain provisions which incorporate publications by reference. Generally, the publications provide criteria for instruments to be used in monitoring and audiometric testing. These criteria are intended to be mandatory when so indicated in the applicable paragraphs of § 1910.95 and appendices.
It should be noted that OSHA does not require that employers purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Employers, however, may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced publications for their own information.
The designation of the paragraph of the standard in which the referenced publications appear, the titles of the publications, and the availability of the publications are as follows:
| Paragraph designation | Referenced publication | Available from— |
|---|---|---|
| Appendix B | “List of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Pub. No. 76-120, 1975. NTIS-PB267461 | National Technical Information Service, Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161. |
| Appendix D | “Specification for Sound Level Meters,” S1.4-1971 (R1976) | American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. |
| § 1910.95(k)(2), appendix E | “Specifications for Audiometers,” S3.6-1969 | American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. |
| Appendix D | “Specification for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets,” S1.11-1971 (R1976) | Back Numbers Department, Dept. STD, American Institute of Physics, 333 E. 45th St., New York, NY 10017; American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. |
The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications) are available for review at many universities and public libraries throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, (202) 219-7500 or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under United States Government—Labor Department).
Appendix I to § 1910.95—Definitions
These definitions apply to the following terms as used in paragraphs (c) through (n) of 29 CFR 1910.95.
Action level—An 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale, slow response, or equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
Audiogram—A chart, graph, or table resulting from an audiometric test showing an individual's hearing threshold levels as a function of frequency.
Audiologist—A professional, specializing in the study and rehabilitation of hearing, who is certified by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association or licensed by a state board of examiners.
Baseline audiogram—The audiogram against which future audiograms are compared.
Criterion sound level—A sound level of 90 decibels.
Decibel (dB)—Unit of measurement of sound level.
Hertz (Hz)—Unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to cycles per second.
Medical pathology—A disorder or disease. For purposes of this regulation, a condition or disease affecting the ear, which should be treated by a physician specialist.
Noise dose—The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of (1) the time integral, over a stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the measured SLOW exponential time-averaged, squared A-weighted sound pressure and (2) the product of the criterion duration (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the squared sound pressure corresponding to the criterion sound level (90 dB).
Noise dosimeter—An instrument that integrates a function of sound pressure over a period of time in such a manner that it directly indicates a noise dose.
Otolaryngologist—A physician specializing in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of the ear, nose and throat.
Representative exposure—Measurements of an employee's noise dose or 8-hour time-weighted average sound level that the employers deem to be representative of the exposures of other employees in the workplace.
Sound level—Ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the square of the measured A-weighted sound pressure to the square of the standard reference pressure of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For use with this regulation, SLOW time response, in accordance with ANSI S1.4-1971 (R1976), is required.
Sound level meter—An instrument for the measurement of sound level.
Time-weighted average sound level—That sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour exposure, would result in the same noise dose as is measured.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 46 FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 62845, Dec. 29, 1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, June 28, 1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008]
Pertains to the case in which part of the body is exposed to the incident electromagnetic energy.
Radiation level which should not be exceeded without careful consideration of the reasons for doing so.
Pertains to the case in which the entire body is exposed to the incident electromagnetic energy or in which the cross section of the body is smaller than the cross section of the incident radiation beam.
2
2
This guide applies whether the radiation is continuous or intermittent.
Z53.1-1967 or ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1910.6, is for use for color specification. All lettering and the border shall be of aluminum color.
This section applies to all radiations originating from radio stations, radar equipment, and other possible sources of electromagnetic radiation such as used for communication, radio navigation, and industrial and scientific purposes. This section does not apply to the deliberate exposure of patients by, or under the direction of, practitioners of the healing arts.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013]
§ 1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), (c)(3), (c)(4), (c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii), (d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and (d)(7).
Each employer shall determine that compressed gas cylinders under his control are in a safe condition to the extent that this can be determined by visual inspection. Visual and other inspections shall be conducted as prescribed in the Hazardous Materials Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR parts 171-179 and 14 CFR part 103). Where those regulations are not applicable, visual and other inspections shall be conducted in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlets C-6-1968 and C-8-1962, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The in-plant handling, storage, and utilization of all compressed gases in cylinders, portable tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks shall be in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1-1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Compressed gas cylinders, portable tanks, and cargo tanks shall have pressure relief devices installed and maintained in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlets S-1.1-1963 and 1965 addenda and S-1.2-1963, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
Employers must ensure that the in-plant transfer, handling, storage, and use of acetylene in cylinders comply with the provisions of CGA Pamphlet G-1-2009 (“Acetylene”) (incorporated by reference, see § 1910.6).
[74 FR 40447, Aug. 11, 2009, as amended at 76 FR 75786, Dec. 5, 2011]
As used in this section
Specifications—Regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
regulations—See § 1910.103 (a)(1)(v).
The hydrogen storage location shall be permanently placarded as follows: “HYDROGEN—FLAMMABLE GAS—NO SMOKING—NO OPEN FLAMES,” or equivalent.
After installations, all piping, tubing, and fittings shall be tested and proved hydrogen gas tight at maximum operating pressure.
| Nature of location | Size of hydrogen system | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Less than 3,000 CF | 3,000 CF to 15,000 CF | In excess of 15,000 CF | |
| Outdoors | I | IDI. | |
| In a separate building | II | II | II. |
| In a special room | III | III | Not permitted. |
| Inside buildings not in a special room and exposed to other occupancies | IV | Not permitted | Not permitted. |
| Type of outdoor exposure | Size of hydrogen system | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Less than 3,000 CF | 3,000 CF to 15,000 CF | In excess of 15,000 CF | ||
| 1. Building or structure | Wood frame construction 1 | 10 | 25 | 50 |
| Heavy timber, noncombustible or ordinary construction 1 | 0 | 10 | 2 25 | |
| Fire-resistive construction 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | |
| 2. Wall openings | Not above any part of a system | 10 | 10 | 10 |
| Above any part of a system | 25 | 25 | 25 | |
| 3. Flammable liquids above ground. | 0 to 1,000 gallons In excess of 1,000 gallons | 10 25 | 25 50 | 25 50 |
| 4. Flammable liquids below ground—0 to 1,000 gallons | Tank Vent or fill opening of tank | 10 25 | 10 25 | 10 25 |
| 5. Flammable liquids below ground—in excess of 1,000 gallons. | Tank Vent or fill opening of tank | 20 25 | 20 25 | 20 25 |
| 6. Flammable gas storage, either high pressure or low pressure. | 0 to 15,000 CF capacity In excess of 15,000 CF capacity | 10 25 | 25 50 | 25 50 |
| 7. Oxygen storage | 12,000 CF or less 4 | |||
| More than 12,000 CF 5 | ||||
| 8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper | 50 | 50 | 50 | |
| 9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal | 25 | 25 | 25 | |
| 10. Open flames and other sources of ignition | 25 | 25 | 25 | |
| 11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning equipment | 50 | 50 | 50 | |
| 12. Concentration of people 3 | 25 | 50 | 50 | |
| 1 Refer to NFPA No. 220 Standard Types of Building Construction for definitions of various types of construction. (1969 Ed.) | ||||
| 2 But not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure. | ||||
| 3 In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas. | ||||
| 4 Refer to NFPA No. 51, gas systems for welding and cutting (1969). | ||||
| 5 Refer to NFPA No. 566, bulk oxygen systems at consumer sites (1969). |
For installations which require any operation of equipment by the user, legible instructions shall be maintained at operating locations.
The equipment and functioning of each charged gaseous hydrogen system shall be maintained in a safe operating condition in accordance with the requirements of this section. The area within 15 feet of any hydrogen container shall be kept free of dry vegetation and combustible material.
Permanently installed containers shall be provided with substantial noncombustible supports securely anchored on firm noncombustible foundations. Steel supports in excess of 18 inches in height shall be protected with a protective coating having a 2-hour fire-resistance rating.
Each container shall be legibly marked to indicate “LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN—FLAMMABLE GAS.”
Department of Transportation Regulations shall be equipped with safety relief devices as required in the U.S. Department of Transportation Specifications and Regulations. Safety relief devices shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of CGA Pamphlet S-1, Safety Relief Device Standards, part 1, Compressed Gas Cylinders and part 2, Cargo and Portable Tank Containers.
496-1967, Standard for Purged Enclosures for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Locations,
The liquefied hydrogen container and associated piping shall be electrically bonded and grounded.
| Nature of location | Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons) | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 39.63 (150 liters) to 50 | 51 to 300 | 301 to 600 | In excess of 600 | |
| Outdoors | I | I | I | I. |
| In a separate building | II | II | II | Not permitted. |
| In a special room | III | III | Not permitted | Do. |
| Inside buildings not in a special room and exposed to other occupancies | IV | Not permitted | ......do | Do. |
| Note: This table does not apply to the storage in dewars of the type generally used in laboratories for experimental purposes. |
| Type of exposure | Liquefied hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons) | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 39.63 (150 liters) to 3,500 | 3,501 to 15,000 | 15,001 to 30,000 | |
| 1. Fire-resistive building and fire walls 3 | 5 | 5 | 5 |
| 2. Noncombustible building 3 | 25 | 50 | 75 |
| 3. Other buildings 3 | 50 | 75 | 100 |
| 4. Wall openings, air-compressor intakes, inlets for air-conditioning or ventilating equipment | 75 | 75 | 75 |
| 5. Flammable liquids (above ground and vent or fill openings if below ground) (see 513 and 514) | 50 | 75 | 100 |
| 6. Between stationary liquefied hydrogen containers | 5 | 5 | 5 |
| 7. Flammable gas storage | 50 | 75 | 100 |
| 8. Liquid oxygen storage and other oxidizers (see 513 and 514) | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 9. Combustible solids | 50 | 75 | 100 |
| 10. Open flames, smoking and welding | 50 | 50 | 50 |
| 11. Concentrations of people | 75 | 75 | 75 |
| 1 The distance in Nos. 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 12 in Table H-4 may be reduced where protective structures, such as firewalls equal to height of top of the container, to safeguard the liquefied hydrogen storage system, are located between the liquefied hydrogen storage installation and the exposure. | |||
| 2 Where protective structures are provided, ventilation and confinement of product should be considered. The 5-foot distance in Nos. 1 and 6 facilitates maintenance and enhances ventilation. | |||
| 3 Refer to Standard Types of Building Construction, NFPA No. 220-1969 for definitions of various types of construction. | |||
| In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas. |
For installation which require any operation of equipment by the user, legible instructions shall be maintained at operating locations.
A qualified person shall be in attendance at all times while the mobile hydrogen supply unit is being unloaded.
Each mobile liquefied hydrogen supply unit used as part of a hydrogen system shall be adequately secured to prevent movement.
The mobile liquefied hydrogen supply unit shall be grounded for static electricity.
The equipment and functioning of each charged liquefied hydrogen system shall be maintained in a safe operating condition in accordance with the requirements of this section. Weeds or similar combustibles shall not be permitted within 25 feet of any liquefied hydrogen equipment.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31881, June 8, 2004; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
This section applies to the installation of bulk oxygen systems on industrial and institutional consumer premises. This section does not apply to oxygen manufacturing plants or other establishments operated by the oxygen supplier or his agent for the purpose of storing oxygen and refilling portable containers, trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank cars, nor to systems having capacities less than those stated in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
A bulk oxygen system is an assembly of equipment, such as oxygen storage containers, pressure regulators, safety devices, vaporizers, manifolds, and interconnecting piping, which has storage capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet of oxygen, Normal Temperature and Pressure (NTP), connected in service or ready for service, or more than 25,000 cubic feet of oxygen (NTP) including unconnected reserves on hand at the site. The bulk oxygen system terminates at the point where oxygen at service pressure first enters the supply line. The oxygen containers may be stationary or movable, and the oxygen may be stored as gas or liquid.
Bulk oxygen storage systems shall be located above ground out of doors, or shall be installed in a building of noncombustible construction, adequately vented, and used for that purpose exclusively. The location selected shall be such that containers and associated equipment shall not be exposed by electric power lines, flammable or combustible liquid lines, or flammable gas lines.
The system shall be located so that it is readily accessible to mobile supply equipment at ground level and to authorized personnel.
Where oxygen is stored as a liquid, noncombustible surfacing shall be provided in an area in which any leakage of liquid oxygen might fall during operation of the system and filling of a storage container. For purposes of this paragraph, asphaltic or bituminous paving is considered to be combustible.
When locating bulk oxygen systems near above-ground flammable or combustible liquid storage which may be either indoors or outdoors, it is advisable to locate the system on ground higher than the flammable or combustible liquid storage.
Where it is necessary to locate a bulk oxygen system on ground lower than adjacent flammable or combustible liquid storage suitable means shall be taken (such as by diking, diversion curbs, or grading) with respect to the adjacent flammable or combustible liquid storage to prevent accumulation of liquids under the bulk oxygen system.
The minimum distance from any bulk oxygen storage container to exposures, measured in the most direct line except as indicated in paragraphs (b)(3) (vi) and (viii) of this section, shall be as indicated in paragraphs (b)(3) (ii) to (xviii) of this section inclusive.
Fifty feet from any combustible structures.
Twenty-five feet from any structures with fire-resistive exterior walls or sprinklered buildings of other construction, but not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure.
At least 10 feet from any opening in adjacent walls of fire resistive structures. Spacing from such structures shall be adequate to permit maintenance, but shall not be less than 1 foot.
| Distance (feet) | Capacity (gallons) |
|---|---|
| 50 | 0 to 1000. |
| 90 | 1001 or more. |
| Distance measured horizontally from oxygen storage container to flammable liquid tank (feet) | Distance from oxygen storage container to filling and vent connections or openings to flammable liquid tank (feet) | Capacity gallons |
|---|---|---|
| 15 | 50 | 0 to 1000. |
| 30 | 50 | 1001 or more. |
| Distance (feet) | Capacity (gallons) |
|---|---|
| 25 | 0 to 1000. |
| 50 | 1001 or more. |
| Distance measured horizontally from oxygen storage container to combustible liquid tank (feet) | Distance from oxygen storage container to filling and vent connections or openings to combustible liquid tank (feet) |
|---|---|
| 15 | 40. |
| Distance (feet) | Capacity (cu. ft. NTP) |
|---|---|
| 50 | Less than 5000. |
| 90 | 5000 or more. |
Fifty feet from solid materials which burn rapidly, such as excelsior or paper.
Twenty-five feet from solid materials which burn slowly, such as coal and heavy timber.
Seventy-five feet in one direction and 35 feet in approximately 90° direction from confining walls (not including firewalls less than 20 feet high) to provide adequate ventilation in courtyards and similar confining areas.
Twenty-five feet from congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time clock areas, and similar locations where people may congregate.
The distances in paragraphs (b)(3) (ii), (iii), (v) to (xi) inclusive, of this section do not apply where protective structures such as firewalls of adequate height to safeguard the oxygen storage systems are located between the bulk oxygen storage installation and the exposure. In such cases, the bulk oxygen storage installation may be a minimum distance of 1 foot from the firewall.
Permanently installed containers shall be provided with substantial noncombustible supports on firm noncombustible foundations.
Liquid oxygen storage containers shall be fabricated from materials meeting the impact test requirements of paragraph UG-84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. Containers operating at pressures above 15 pounds per square inch gage (p.s.i.g.) shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with appropriate requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section VII—Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968. Insulation surrounding the liquid oxygen container shall be noncombustible.
High- pressure gaseous oxygen containers shall comply with one of the following:
Piping, tubing, and fittings shall be suitable for oxygen service and for the pressures and temperatures involved.
Piping and tubing shall conform to section 2—Gas and Air Piping Systems of Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI, B31.1-1967 with addenda B31.10a-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Piping or tubing for operating temperatures below −20 °F. shall be fabricated from materials meeting the impact test requirements of paragraph UG-84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, when tested at the minimum operating temperature to which the piping may be subjected in service.
Bulk oxygen storage containers, regardless of design pressure shall be equipped with safety relief devices as required by the ASME code or the DOT specifications and regulations.
Bulk oxygen storage containers designed and constructed in accordance with DOT specification shall be equipped with safety relief devices as required thereby.
Bulk oxygen storage containers designed and constructed in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section VIII—Unfired Pressure Vessel—1968 shall be equipped with safety relief devices meeting the provisions of the Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet “Safety Relief Device Standards for Compressed Gas Storage Containers,” S-1, part 3, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Insulation casings on liquid oxygen containers shall be equipped with suitable safety relief devices.
All safety relief devices shall be so designed or located that moisture cannot collect and freeze in a manner which would interfere with proper operation of the device.
The vaporizer shall be anchored and its connecting piping be sufficiently flexible to provide for the effect of expansion and contraction due to temperature changes.
The vaporizer and its piping shall be adequately protected on the oxygen and heating medium sections with safety relief devices.
Heat used in an oxygen vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied only through media such as steam, air, water, or water solutions which do not react with oxygen.
If electric heaters are used to provide the primary source of heat, the vaporizing system shall be electrically grounded.
Equipment making up a bulk oxygen system shall be cleaned in order to remove oil, grease or other readily oxidizable materials before placing the system in service.
Joints in piping and tubing may be made by welding or by use of flanged, threaded, slip, or compression fittings. Gaskets or thread sealants shall be suitable for oxygen service.
Valves, gages, regulators, and other accessories shall be suitable for oxygen service.
Installation of bulk oxygen systems shall be supervised by personnel familiar with proper practices with reference to their construction and use.
After installation all field erected piping shall be tested and proved gas tight at maximum operating pressure. Any medium used for testing shall be oil free and nonflammable.
Storage containers, piping, valves, regulating equipment, and other accessories shall be protected against physical damage and against tampering.
Any enclosure containing oxygen control or operating equipment shall be adequately vented.
The bulk oxygen storage location shall be permanently placarded to indicate: “OXYGEN—NO SMOKING—NO OPEN FLAMES”, or an equivalent warning.
Bulk oxygen installations are not hazardous locations as defined and covered in subpart S of this part. Therefore, general purpose or weatherproof types of electrical wiring and equipment are acceptable depending upon whether the installation is indoors or outdoors. Such equipment shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of subpart S of this part.
For installations which require any operation of equipment by the user, legible instructions shall be maintained at operating locations.
The equipment and functioning of each charged bulk oxygen system shall be maintained in a safe operating condition in accordance with the requirements of this section. Wood and long dry grass shall be cut back within 15 feet of any bulk oxygen storage container.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
The piped systems for the in-plant transfer and distribution of nitrous oxide shall be designed, installed, maintained, and operated in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet G-8.1-1964, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
As used in this section:
Flammable liquids shall be stored in a tank or in a container that complies with paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
means Saybolt Universal Seconds as determined by the Standard Method of Test for Saybolt Viscosity (ASTM D-88-56), and may be determined by use of the SUS conversion tables specified in ASTM Method D2161-66 following determination of viscosity in accordance with the procedures specified in the Standard Method of Test for Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids (ASTM D445-65).
142, Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Third Edition, 1966.
12B, Specification for Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks, Seventh Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Specification for Small Welded Production Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. Tanks built in accordance with these standards shall be used only as production tanks for storage of crude petroleum in oil-producing areas.
620. Recommended Rules for the Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.
When tanks are not designed in accordance with the American Petroleum Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, or the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.'s, standards, or if corrosion is anticipated beyond that provided for in the design formulas used, additional metal thickness or suitable protective coatings or linings shall be provided to compensate for the corrosion loss expected during the design life of the tank.
Tanks of 3,000 bbls (barrels). capacity or less containing crude petroleum in crude-producing areas and outside aboveground atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons capacity containing other than Category 1 flammable liquids may have open vents. ( See paragraph (b)(2)(vi)( b ) of this section.)
| Square feet | CFH | Square feet | CFH | Square feet | CFH |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20 | 21,100 | 200 | 211,000 | 1,000 | 524,000 |
| 30 | 31,600 | 250 | 239,000 | 1,200 | 557,000 |
| 40 | 42,100 | 300 | 265,000 | 1,400 | 587,000 |
| 50 | 52,700 | 350 | 288,000 | 1,600 | 614,000 |
| 60 | 63,200 | 400 | 312,000 | 1,800 | 639,000 |
| 70 | 73,700 | 500 | 354,000 | 2,000 | 662,000 |
| 80 | 84,200 | 600 | 392,000 | 2,400 | 704,000 |
| 90 | 94,800 | 700 | 428,000 | 2,800 | 742,000 |
| 100 | 105,000 | 800 | 462,000 | and | |
| 120 | 126,000 | 900 | 493,000 | over | |
| 140 | 147,000 | 1,000 | 524,000 | ||
| 160 | 168,000 | ||||
| 180 | 190,000 | ||||
| 200 | 211,000 |
0.82
Where;
CFH
A
L√M
V
L
M
0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivision (vii)( b ) of this subparagraph for tanks over 200 square feet of wetted area.
0.3 for approved water spray.
0.3 for approved insulation.
0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation.
The area surrounding a tank or a group of tanks shall be provided with drainage as in subdivision ( b ) of this subdivision, or shall be diked as provided in subdivision ( c ) of this subdivision, to prevent accidental discharge of liquid from endangering adjoining property or reaching waterways.
Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is by means of a natural or manmade drainage system, such systems shall comply with the following:
Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is accomplished by retaining the liquid around the tank by means of a dike, the volume of the diked area shall comply with the following requirements:
Excavation for underground storage tanks shall be made with due care to avoid undermining of foundations of existing structures. Underground tanks or tanks under buildings shall be so located with respect to existing building foundations and supports that the loads carried by the latter cannot be transmitted to the tank. The distance from any part of a tank storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), to the nearest wall of any basement or pit shall be not less than 1 foot, and to any property line that may be built upon, not less than 3 feet. The distance from any part of a tank storing Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids to the nearest wall of any basement, pit or property line shall be not less than 1 foot.
Underground tanks shall be set on firm foundations and surrounded with at least 6 inches of noncorrosive, inert materials such as clean sand, earth, or gravel well tamped in place. The tank shall be placed in the hole with care since dropping or rolling the tank into the hole can break a weld, puncture or damage the tank, or scrape off the protective coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be covered with a minimum of 2 feet of earth, or shall be covered with not less than 1 foot of earth, on top of which shall be placed a slab of reinforced concrete not less than 4 inches thick. When underground tanks are, or are likely to be, subject to traffic, they shall be protected against damage from vehicles passing over them by at least 3 feet of earth cover, or 18 inches of well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches of reinforced concrete or 8 inches of asphaltic concrete. When asphaltic or reinforced concrete paving is used as part of the protection, it shall extend at least 1 foot horizontally beyond the outline of the tank in all directions.
Corrosion protection for the tank and its piping shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:
Each tank shall be vented through piping adequate in size to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid at the fill opening while the tank is being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch nominal inside diameter.
| Maximum flow GPM | Pipe length 1 | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 50 feet | 100 feet | 200 feet | |
| Inches | Inches | Inches | |
| 100 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 200 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 300 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 400 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 2 |
| 500 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 2 |
| 600 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 2 | 2 |
| 700 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
| 800 | 2 | 2 | 3 |
| 900 | 2 | 2 | 3 |
| 1,000 | 2 | 2 | 3 |
| 1 Vent lines of 50 ft., 100 ft., and 200 ft. of pipe plus 7 ells. |
Tanks shall not be permitted inside of buildings except as provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or (i) of this section.
Vents for tanks inside of buildings shall be as provided in subparagraphs (2) (iv), (v), (vi)( b ), and (3)(iv) of this paragraph, except that emergency venting by the use of weak roof seams on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents shall discharge vapors outside the buildings.
Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
Tank supports shall be installed on firm foundations. Tank supports shall be of concrete, masonry, or protected steel. Single wood timber supports (not cribbing) laid horizontally may be used for outside aboveground tanks if not more than 12 inches high at their lowest point.
Steel supports or exposed piling shall be protected by materials having a fire resistance rating of not less than 2 hours, except that steel saddles need not be protected if less than 12 inches high at their lowest point. Water spray protection or its equivalent may be used in lieu of fire-resistive materials to protect supports.
The design of the supporting structure for tanks such as spheres shall receive special engineering consideration.
Every tank shall be so supported as to prevent the excessive concentration of loads on the supporting portion of the shell.
Tanks shall rest on the ground or on foundations made of concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. Tank foundations shall be designed to minimize the possibility of uneven settling of the tank and to minimize corrosion in any part of the tank resting on the foundation.
Where a tank is located in an area that may be subjected to flooding, the applicable precautions outlined in this subdivision shall be observed.
The Assistant Secretary or his designated representative shall make periodic inspections of all plants where the storage of flammable liquids is such as to require compliance with the foregoing requirements, in order to assure the following:
In areas subject to earthquakes, the tank supports and connections shall be designed to resist damage as a result of such shocks.
In locations where flammable vapors may be present, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition by eliminating or controlling sources of ignition. Sources of ignition may include open flames, lightning, smoking, cutting and welding, hot surfaces, frictional heat, sparks (static, electrical, and mechanical), spontaneous ignition, chemical and physical-chemical reactions, and radiant heat.
All tanks, whether shop built or field erected, shall be strength tested before they are placed in service in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of the code under which they were built. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) code stamp, American Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, or the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evidence of compliance with this strength test. Tanks not marked in accordance with the above codes shall be strength tested before they are placed in service in accordance with good engineering principles and reference shall be made to the sections on testing in the codes listed in subparagraphs (1) (iii)( a ), (iv)( b ), or (v)( b ) of this paragraph.
When the vertical length of the fill and vent pipes is such that when filled with liquid the static head imposed upon the bottom of the tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch, the tank and related piping shall be tested hydrostatically to a pressure equal to the static head thus imposed.
In addition to the strength test called for in subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, all tanks and connections shall be tested for tightness. Except for underground tanks, this tightness test shall be made at operating pressure with air, inert gas, or water prior to placing the tank in service. In the case of field-erected tanks the strength test may be considered to be the test for tank tightness. Underground tanks and piping, before being covered, enclosed, or placed in use, shall be tested for tightness hydrostatically, or with air pressure at not less than 3 pounds per square inch and not more than 5 pounds per square inch.
All leaks or deformations shall be corrected in an acceptable manner before the tank is placed in service. Mechanical caulking is not permitted for correcting leaks in welded tanks except pinhole leaks in the roof.
Tanks to be operated at pressures below their design pressure may be tested by the applicable provisions of subdivision (i) or (ii) of this subparagraph, based upon the pressure developed under full emergency venting of the tank.
The design (including selection of materials) fabrication, assembly, test, and inspection of piping systems containing flammable liquids shall be suitable for the expected working pressures and structural stresses. Conformity with the applicable provisions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provisions of this paragraph, shall be considered prima facie evidence of compliance with the foregoing provisions.
This paragraph does not apply to any of the following:
As used in this paragraph, piping systems consist of pipe, tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, fittings, the pressure containing parts of other components such as expansion joints and strainers, and devices which serve such purposes as mixing, separating, snubbing, distributing, metering, or controlling flow.
Materials for piping, valves, or fittings shall be steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron, except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Materials other than steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron may be used underground, or if required by the properties of the flammable liquid handled. Material other than steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron shall be designed to specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering practices for the material used.
Piping, valves, and fittings may have combustible or noncombustible linings.
When low-melting point materials such as aluminum and brass or materials that soften on fire exposure such as plastics, or non-ductile materials such as cast iron, are necessary, special consideration shall be given to their behavior on fire exposure. If such materials are used in above ground piping systems or inside buildings, they shall be suitably protected against fire exposure or so located that any spill resulting from the failure of these materials could not unduly expose persons, important buildings or structures or can be readily controlled by remote valves.
Joints shall be made liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints or approved connectors shall be used. Threaded joints and connections shall be made up tight with a suitable lubricant or piping compound. Pipe joints dependent upon the friction characteristics of combustible materials for mechanical continuity of piping shall not be used inside buildings. They may be used outside of buildings above or below ground. If used above ground, the piping shall either be secured to prevent disengagement at the fitting or the piping system shall be so designed that any spill resulting from such disengagement could not unduly expose persons, important buildings or structures, and could be readily controlled by remote valves.
Piping systems shall be substantially supported and protected against physical damage and excessive stresses arising from settlement, vibration, expansion, or contraction.
All piping for flammable liquids, both aboveground and underground, where subject to external corrosion, shall be painted or otherwise protected.
Piping systems shall contain a sufficient number of valves to operate the system properly and to protect the plant. Piping systems in connection with pumps shall contain a sufficient number of valves to control properly the flow of liquid in normal operation and in the event of physical damage. Each connection to pipelines, by which equipments such as tankcars or tank vehicles discharge liquids by means of pumps into storage tanks, shall be provided with a check valve for automatic protection against backflow if the piping arrangement is such that backflow from the system is possible.
All piping before being covered, enclosed, or placed in use shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 percent of the maximum anticipated pressure of the system, or pneumatically tested to 110 percent of the maximum anticipated pressure of the system, but not less than 5 pounds per square inch gage at the highest point of the system. This test shall be maintained for a sufficient time to complete visual inspection of all joints and connections, but for at least 10 minutes.
This paragraph shall apply only to the storage of flammable liquids in drums or other containers (including flammable aerosols) not exceeding 60 gallons individual capacity and those portable tanks not exceeding 660 gallons individual capacity.
This paragraph shall not apply to the following:
Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used. Metal containers and portable tanks meeting the requirements of and containing products authorized by chapter I, title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations (regulations issued by the Hazardous Materials Regulations Board, Department of Transportation), shall be deemed to be acceptable.
Each portable tank shall be provided with one or more devices installed in the top with sufficient emergency venting capacity to limit internal pressure under fire exposure conditions to 10 p.s.i.g., or 30 percent of the bursting pressure of the tank, whichever is greater. The total venting capacity shall be not less than that specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(v) ( c ) or ( e ) of this section. At least one pressure-activated vent having a minimum capacity of 6,000 cubic feet of free air (14.7 p.s.i.a. and 60 °F.) shall be used. It shall be set to open at not less than 5 p.s.i.g. If fusible vents are used, they shall be actuated by elements that operate at a temperature not exceeding 300 °F.
Flammable liquid containers shall be in accordance with Table H-12, except that glass or plastic containers of no more than 1-gallon capacity may be used for a Category 1 or 2 flammable liquid if:
| Container type | Category 1 | Category 2 | Category 3 | Category 4 |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Glass or approved plastic | 1 pt | 1 qt | 1 gal | 1 gal. |
| Metal (other than DOT drums) | 1 gal | 5 gal | 5 gal | 5 gal. |
| Safety cans | 2 gal | 5 gal | 5 gal | 5 gal. |
| Metal drums (DOT specifications) | 60 gal | 60 gal | 60 gal | 60 gal. |
| Approved portable tanks | 660 gal | 660 gal | 660 gal | 660 gal. |
| Note: Container exemptions: (a) Medicines, beverages, foodstuffs, cosmetics, and other common consumer items, when packaged according to commonly accepted practices, shall be exempt from the requirements of 1910.106(d)(2)(i) and (ii). |
Not more than 60 gallons of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, nor more than 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable liquids may be stored in a storage cabinet.
Storage cabinets shall be designed and constructed to limit the internal temperature to not more than 325 °F. when subjected to a 10-minute fire test using the standard time-temperature curve as set forth in Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 251-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. All joints and seams shall remain tight and the door shall remain securely closed during the fire test. Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering, “Flammable—Keep Fire Away.”
Inside storage rooms shall be constructed to meet the required fire-resistive rating for their use. Such construction shall comply with the test specifications set forth in Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 251-1969. Where an automatic sprinkler system is provided, the system shall be designed and installed in an acceptable manner. Openings to other rooms or buildings shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in height, or the floor in the storage area shall be at least 4 inches below the surrounding floor. Openings shall be provided with approved self-closing fire doors. The room shall be liquid-tight where the walls join the floor. A permissible alternate to the sill or ramp is an open-grated trench inside of the room which drains to a safe location. Where other portions of the building or other properties are exposed, windows shall be protected as set forth in the Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA No. 80-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, for Class E or F openings. Wood at least 1 inch nominal thickness may be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar installations.
Storage in inside storage rooms shall comply with Table H-13.
| Fire protection 1 provided | Fire resistance | Maximum size | Total allowable quantities (gals./sq. ft./floor area) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Yes | 2 hours | 500 sq. ft | 10 |
| No | 2 hours | 500 sq. ft | 5 |
| Yes | 1 hour | 150 sq. ft | 4 |
| No | 1 hour | 150 sq. ft | 2 |
| 1 Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide, or other system. |
Electrical wiring and equipment located in inside storage rooms used for Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be approved under subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations; for Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flammable liquids, shall be approved for general use.
Every inside storage room shall be provided with either a gravity or a mechanical exhaust ventilation system. Such system shall be designed to provide for a complete change of air within the room at least six times per hour. If a mechanical exhaust system is used, it shall be controlled by a switch located outside of the door. The ventilating equipment and any lighting fixtures shall be operated by the same switch. A pilot light shall be installed adjacent to the switch if Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are dispensed within the room. Where gravity ventilation is provided, the fresh air intake, as well as the exhaust outlet from the room, shall be on the exterior of the building in which the room is located.
In every inside storage room there shall be maintained one clear aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons capacity shall not be stacked one upon the other. Dispensing shall be by approved pump or self-closing faucet only.
Flammable liquids, including stock for sale, shall not be stored so as to limit use of exits, stairways, or areas normally used for the safe egress of people.
The storage of flammable liquids in containers or portable tanks shall comply with subdivisions (iii) through (v) of this subparagraph.
Storage shall be prohibited except that which is required for maintenance and operation of building and operation of equipment. Such storage shall be kept in closed metal containers stored in a storage cabinet or in safety cans or in an inside storage room not having a door that opens into that portion of the building used by the public.
A maximum of 1,100 gallons of flammable liquids may be located adjacent to buildings located on the same premises and under the same management provided the provisions of subdivisions ( a ) and ( b ) of this subdivision are complied with.
The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible spills away from buildings or other exposures or shall be surrounded by a curb at least 6 inches high. When curbs are used, provisions shall be made for draining of accumulations of ground or rain water or spills of flammable liquids. Drains shall terminate at a safe location and shall be accessible to operation under fire conditions.
The storage area shall be protected against tampering or trespassers where necessary and shall be kept free of weeds, debris and other combustible material not necessary to the storage.
When sprinklers are provided, they shall be installed in accordance with § 1910.159.
Open flames and smoking shall not be permitted in flammable liquid storage areas.
Materials which will react with water shall not be stored in the same room with flammable liquids.
This paragraph shall apply to those industrial plants where:
Where portions of such plants involve chemical reactions such as oxidation, reduction, halogenation, hydrogenation, alkylation, polymerization, and other chemical processes, those portions of the plant shall be in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
This subparagraph shall be applicable to those portions of an industrial plant where the use and handling of flammable liquids is only incidental to the principal business, such as automobile assembly, construction of electronic equipment, furniture manufacturing, or other similar activities.
Flammable liquids shall be stored in tanks or closed containers.
Areas in which flammable liquids are transferred from one tank or container to another container shall be separated from other operations in the building by adequate distance or by construction having adequate fire resistance. Drainage or other means shall be provided to control spills. Adequate natural or mechanical ventilation shall be provided.
This subparagraph shall be applicable in those portions of industrial plants where flammable liquids are handled or used in unit physical operations such as mixing, drying, evaporating, filtering, distillation, and similar operations which do not involve chemical change. Examples are plants compounding cosmetics, pharmaceuticals, solvents, cleaning fluids, insecticides, and similar types of activities.
Industrial plants shall be located so that each building or unit of equipment is accessible from at least one side for firefighting and fire control purposes. Buildings shall be located with respect to lines of adjoining property which may be built upon as set forth in paragraph (h)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section except that the blank wall referred to in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section shall have a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours.
Areas where unstable liquids are handled or small scale unit chemical processes are carried on shall be separated from the remainder of the plant by a fire wall of 2-hour minimum fire resistance rating.
The storage, transfer, and handling of liquid shall comply with paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
Portable fire extinguishment and control equipment shall be provided in such quantities and types as are needed for the special hazards of operation and storage.
Water shall be available in volume and at adequate pressure to supply water hose streams, foam-producing equipment, automatic sprinklers, or water spray systems as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation, dispensing and storage.
Special extinguishing equipment such as that utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical shall be provided as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation dispensing and storage.
Where the need is indicated by special hazards of operation, flammable liquid processing equipment, major piping, and supporting steel shall be protected by approved water spray systems, deluge systems, approved fire-resistant coatings, insulation, or any combination of these.
All plant fire protection facilities shall be adequately maintained and periodically inspected and tested to make sure they are always in satisfactory operating condition, and they will serve their purpose in time of emergency.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent the ignition of flammable vapors. Sources of ignition include but are not limited to open flames; lightning; smoking; cutting and welding; hot surfaces; frictional heat; static, electrical, and mechanical sparks; spontaneous ignition, including heat-producing chemical reactions; and radiant heat.
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be dispensed into containers unless the nozzle and container are electrically interconnected. Where the metallic floorplate on which the container stands while filling is electrically connected to the fill stem or where the fill stem is bonded to the container during filling operations by means of a bond wire, the provisions of this section shall be deemed to have been complied with.
Hot work, such as welding or cutting operations, use of spark-producing power tools, and chipping operations shall be permitted only under supervision of an individual in responsible charge. The individual in responsible charge shall make an inspection of the area to be sure that it is safe for the work to be done and that safe procedures will be followed for the work specified.
Maintenance and operating practices shall be in accordance with established procedures which will tend to control leakage and prevent the accidental escape of flammable liquids. Spills shall be cleaned up promptly.
Adequate aisles shall be maintained for unobstructed movement of personnel and so that fire protection equipment can be brought to bear on any part of flammable liquid storage, use, or any unit physical operation.
Combustible waste material and residues in a building or unit operating area shall be kept to a minimum, stored in covered metal receptacles and disposed of daily.
Ground area around buildings and unit operating areas shall be kept free of weeds, trash, or other unnecessary combustible materials.
Containers of flammable liquids when piled one upon the other shall be separated by dunnage sufficient to provide stability and to prevent excessive stress on container walls. The height of the pile shall be consistent with the stability and strength of containers.
Rooms in which flammable liquids are stored or handled by pumps shall have exit facilities arranged to prevent occupants from being trapped in the event of fire.
Rooms in which Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are stored or handled shall be heated only by means not constituting a source of ignition, such as steam or hot water. Rooms containing heating appliances involving sources of ignition shall be located and arranged to prevent entry of flammable vapors.
Tank vehicle and tank car loading or unloading facilities shall be separated from aboveground tanks, warehouses, other plant buildings or nearest line of adjoining property that may be built upon by a distance of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), and 15 feet for Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flammable liquids measured from the nearest position of any fill spout. Buildings for pumps or shelters for personnel may be a part of the facility.
Equipment such as piping, pumps, and meters used for the transfer of Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), between storage tanks and the fill stem of the loading rack shall not be used for the transfer of Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids.
Valves used for the final control for filling tank vehicles shall be of the self-closing type and manually held open except where automatic means are provided for shutting off the flow when the vehicle is full or after filling of a preset amount.
Tank car loading facilities where Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are loaded through open domes shall be protected against stray currents by bonding the pipe to at least one rail and to the rack structure if of metal. Multiple lines entering the rack area shall be electrically bonded together. In addition, in areas where excessive stray currents are known to exist, all pipe entering the rack area shall be provided with insulating sections to electrically isolate the rack piping from the pipelines. No bonding between the tank car and the rack or piping is required during either loading or unloading of Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids.
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be dispensed into containers unless the nozzle and container are electrically interconnected. Where the metallic floorplate on which the container stands while filling is electrically connected to the fill stem or where the fill stem is bonded to the container during filling operations by means of a bond wire, the provisions of this section shall be deemed to have been complied with.
The term wharf shall mean any wharf, pier, bulkhead, or other structure over or contiguous to navigable water used in conjunction with a bulk plant, the primary function of which is the transfer of flammable liquid cargo in bulk between the bulk plant and any tank vessel, ship, barge, lighter boat, or other mobile floating craft; and this subparagraph shall apply to all such installations except Marine Service Stations as covered in paragraph (g) of this section.
Substructure and deck shall be substantially designed for the use intended. Deck may employ any material which will afford the desired combination of flexibility, resistance to shock, durability, strength, and fire resistance. Heavy timber construction is acceptable.
Loading pumps capable of building up pressures in excess of the safe working pressure of cargo hose or loading arms shall be provided with bypasses, relief valves, or other arrangement to protect the loading facilities against excessive pressure. Relief devices shall be tested at not more than yearly intervals to determine that they function satisfactorily at the pressure at which they are set.
All pressure hoses and couplings shall be inspected at intervals appropriate to the service. The hose and couplings shall be tested with the hose extended and using the “inservice maximum operating pressures.” Any hose showing material deteriorations, signs of leakage, or weakness in its carcass or at the couplings shall be withdrawn from service and repaired or discarded.
Piping, valves, and fittings shall be in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, with the following exceptions and additions:
Suitable portable fire extinguishers with a rating of not less than 12-BC shall be located within 75 feet of those portions of the facility where fires are likely to occur, such as hose connections, pumps, and separator tanks.
Loading or discharging shall not commence until the wharf superintendent and officer in charge of the tank vessel agree that the tank vessel is properly moored and all connections are properly made. Mechanical work shall not be performed on the wharf during cargo transfer, except under special authorization based on a review of the area involved, methods to be employed, and precautions necessary.
This paragraph (f)(5)(i) shall apply to areas where Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For areas where only Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids are stored or handled, the electrical equipment may be installed in accordance with the provisions of Subpart S of this part, for ordinary locations.
All electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a type specified by and shall be installed in accordance with subpart S of this part.
So far as it applies Table H-18 shall be used to delineate and classify hazardous areas for the purpose of installation of electrical equipment under normal circumstances. In Table H-18 a classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or other solid partition. The area classifications listed shall be based on the premise that the installation meets the applicable requirements of this section in all respects.
Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall not be handled, drawn, or dispensed where flammable vapors may reach a source of ignition. Smoking shall be prohibited except in designated localities. “No Smoking” signs shall be conspicuously posted where hazard from flammable liquid vapors is normally present.
Provision shall be made to prevent flammable liquids which may be spilled at loading or unloading points from entering public sewers and drainage systems, or natural waterways. Connection to such sewers, drains, or waterways by which flammable liquids might enter shall be provided with separator boxes or other approved means whereby such entry is precluded. Crankcase drainings and flammable liquids shall not be dumped into sewers, but shall be stored in tanks or tight drums outside of any building until removed from the premises.
Suitable fire-control devices, such as small hose or portable fire extinguishers, shall be available to locations where fires are likely to occur. Additional fire-control equipment may be required where a tank of more than 50,000 gallons individual capacity contains Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), and where an unusual exposure hazard exists from surrounding property. Such additional fire-control equipment shall be sufficient to extinguish a fire in the largest tank. The design and amount of such equipment shall be in accordance with approved engineering standards.
| Location | Class I Group D division | Extent of classified area |
|---|---|---|
| Tank vehicle and tank car: 1 | ||
| Loading through open dome | 1 | Within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions. |
| 2 | Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from edge of dome, extending in all directions. | |
| Loading through bottom connections with atmospheric venting | 1 | Within 3 feet of point of venting to atmosphere extending in all directions. |
| 2 | Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from point of venting to atmosphere, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point of loading connection. | |
| Loading through closed dome with atmospheric venting | 1 2 | Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions. Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from open end of vent, extending in all directions. Also within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions. |
| Loading through closed dome with vapor recovery | 2 | Within 3 feet of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines, extending in all directions. |
| Bottom loading with vapor recovery or any bottom unloading | 2 | Within 3 feet of point of connections extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade with in a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point of connection. |
| Drum and container filling: | ||
| Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation | 1 | Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all directions. |
| 2 | Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or fill opening. | |
| Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation | 1 | Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all directions. |
| 2 | Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or fill opening. | |
| Tank—Aboveground: | ||
| Shell, ends, or roof and dike area | 2 | Within 10 feet from shell, ends, or roof of tank, Area inside dikes to level of top of dike. |
| Vent | 1 | Within 5 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions. |
| 2 | Area between 5 feet and 10 feet from open end of vent, extending in all directions. | |
| Floating roof | 1 | Area above the roof and within the shell. |
| Pits: | ||
| Without mechanical ventilation | 1 | Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2 classified area. |
| With mechanical ventilation | 2 | Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2 classified area. |
| Containing valves, fittings or piping, and not within a Division 1 or 2 classified area | 2 | Entire pit. |
| Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, meters and similar devices: | ||
| Indoors | 2 | Within 5 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions. Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within 25 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices. |
| Outdoors | 2 | Within 3 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices. |
| Storage and repair garage for tank vehicles | 1 | All pits or spaces below floor level. |
| 2 | Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level for entire storage or repair garage. | |
| Drainage ditches, separators, impounding basins | 2 | Area up to 18 inches above ditch, separator or basin. Also up to 18 inches above grade within 15 feet horizontally from any edge. |
| Garages for other than tank vehicles | ( 2 ) | If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an outdoor classified area, the entire room shall be classified the same as the area classification at the point of the opening. |
| Outdoor drum storage | ( 2 ) | |
| Indoor warehousing where there is no flammable liquid transfer | ( 2 ) | If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an indoor classified are, the room shall be classified the same as if the wall, curb or partition did not exist. |
| Office and rest rooms | ( 2 ) | |
| 1 When classifying the extent of the area, consideration shall be given to the fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spotted at varying points. Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading positions shall be used. | ||
| 2 Ordinary. |
No delivery of any Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be made into portable containers unless the container is constructed of metal, has a tight closure with screwed or spring cover, and is fitted with a spout or so designed so the contents can be poured without spilling.
Dispensing devices at automotive service stations shall be so located that all parts of the vehicle being served will be on the premises of the service station.
Approved dispensing units may be located inside of buildings. The dispensing area shall be separated from other areas in an approved manner. The dispensing unit and its piping shall be mounted either on a concrete island or protected against collision damage by suitable means and shall be located in a position where it cannot be struck by a vehicle descending a ramp or other slope out of control. The dispensing area shall be provided with an approved mechanical or gravity ventilation system. When dispensing units are located below grade, only approved mechanical ventilation shall be used and the entire dispensing area shall be protected by an approved automatic sprinkler system. Ventilating systems shall be electrically interlocked with gasoline dispensing units so that the dispensing units cannot be operated unless the ventilating fan motors are energized.
A clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) or a circuit breaker(s) shall be provided at a location remote from dispensing devices, including remote pumping systems, to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of an emergency.
After the completion of the installation, including any paving, that section of the pressure piping system between the pump discharge and the connection for the dispensing facility shall be tested for at least 30 minutes at the maximum operating pressure of the system. Such tests shall be repeated at 5-year intervals thereafter.
This paragraph (g)(5) shall apply to areas where Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are stored or handled. For areas where Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liquids are stored or handled the electrical equipment may be installed in accordance with the provisions of subpart S of this part, for ordinary locations.
Heating equipment shall be installed as provided in paragraphs (g)(6) (ii) through (v) of this section.
Heating equipment may be installed in the conventional manner in an area except as provided in paragraph (g)(6) (iii), (iv), or (v) of this section.
Heating equipment may be installed in a special room separated from an area classified by Table H-19 by walls having a fire resistance rating of at least 1 hour and without any openings in the walls within 8 feet of the floor into an area classified in Table H-19. This room shall not be used for combustible storage and all air for combustion purposes shall come from outside the building.
Heating equipment using gas or oil fuel may be installed in the lubrication, sales, or service room where there is no dispensing or transferring of Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids or 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), provided the bottom of the combustion chamber is at least 18 inches above the floor and the heating equipment is protected from physical damage by vehicles. Heating equipment using gas or oil fuel listed for use in garages may be installed in the lubrication or service room where Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are dispensed provided the equipment is installed at least 8 feet above the floor.
Electrical heating equipment shall conform to paragraph (g)(5) of this section.
Provision shall be made in the area where Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), are dispensed to prevent spilled liquids from flowing into the interior of service station buildings. Such provision may be by grading driveways, raising door sills, or other equally effective means. Crankcase drainings and flammable liquids shall not be dumped into sewers but shall be stored in tanks or drums outside of any building until removed from the premises.
In addition to the previous restrictions of this paragraph, the following shall apply: There shall be no smoking or open flames in the areas used for fueling, servicing fuel systems for internal combustion engines, receiving or dispensing of flammable liquids. Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted within sight of the customer being served. The motors of all equipment being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operation.
Each service station shall be provided with at least one fire extinguisher having a minimum approved classification of 6 B, C, located so that an extinguisher, will be within 75 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service room.
This paragraph shall apply to those plants or buildings which contain chemical operations such as oxidation, reduction, halogenation, hydrogenation, alkylation, polymerization, and other chemical processes but shall not apply to chemical plants, refineries or distilleries.
The location of each processing vessel shall be based upon its flammable liquid capacity.
Areas where Category 1 or unstable liquids are processed shall have explosion venting through one or more of the following methods:
Tank vehicle and tank car loading or unloading facilities shall be separated from aboveground tanks, warehouses, other plant buildings, or nearest line of adjoining property which may be built upon by a distance of 25 feet for Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), and 15 feet for Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) and Category 4 flammable liquids measured from the nearest position of any fill stem. Buildings for pumps or shelters for personnel may be a part of the facility. Operations of the facility shall comply with the appropriate portions of paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
Approved portable fire extinguishers of appropriate size, type, and number shall be provided.
Where the special hazards of operation or exposure indicate a need, the following fire control provision shall be provided.
An approved means for prompt notification of fire to those within the plant and any public fire department available shall be provided. It may be advisable to connect the plant system with the public system where public fire alarm system is available.
All plant fire protection facilities shall be adequately maintained and periodically inspected and tested to make sure they are always in satisfactory operating condition and that they will serve their purpose in time of emergency.
Maintenance and operating practices shall be in accordance with established procedures which will tend to control leakage and prevent the accidental escape of flammable liquids. Spills shall be cleaned up promptly.
Adequate aisles shall be maintained for unobstructed movement of personnel and so that fire protection equipment can be brought to bear on any part of the processing equipment.
Combustible waste material and residues in a building or operating area shall be kept to a minimum, stored in closed metal waste cans, and disposed of daily.
Ground area around buildings and operating areas shall be kept free of tall grass, weeds, trash, or other combustible materials.
Flammable liquids shall be stored in tanks, in containers, or in portable tanks. Tanks shall be installed in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section. Tanks for the storage of flammable liquids in tank farms and in locations other than process areas shall be located in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section.
Wharves handling flammable liquids shall be in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
Fired pressure vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the Code for Fired Pressure Vessels, Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968.
Process units shall be located so that they are accessible from at least one side for the purpose of fire control.
Portable fire extinguishment and control equipment shall be provided in such quantities and types as are needed for the special hazards of operation and storage.
Water shall be available in volume and at adequate pressure to supply water hose streams, foam producing equipment, automatic sprinklers, or water spray systems as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation and storage.
Special extinguishing equipment such as that utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical shall be provided as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation and storage.
This section applies to the handling, storage, and use of flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C) unless otherwise noted. This section does not apply to:
32-1970;
36-1967; or
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40 FR 23743, June 2, 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, 1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 77 FR 17765, Mar. 26, 2012]
Aerated powders shall mean any powdered material used as a coating material which shall be fluidized within a container by passing air uniformly from below. It is common practice to fluidize such materials to form a fluidized powder bed and then dip the part to be coated into the bed in a manner similar to that used in liquid dipping. Such beds are also used as sources for powder spray operations.
Any area in which dangerous quantities of flammable vapors or mists, or combustible residues, dusts, or deposits are present due to the operation of spraying processes.
A power-ventilated structure provided to enclose or accommodate a spraying operation to confine and limit the escape of spray, vapor, and residue, and to safely conduct or direct them to an exhaust system.
A spray booth equipped with a water washing system designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts and to permit the recovery of overspray finishing material.
A spray booth not equipped with a water washing system as described in subparagraph (4) of this paragraph. A dry spray booth may be equipped with (i) distribution or baffle plates to promote an even flow of air through the booth or cause the deposit of overspray before it enters the exhaust duct; or (ii) overspray dry filters to minimize dusts; or (iii) overspray dry filters to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv) overspray dry filter rolls designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust ducts; or (v) where dry powders are being sprayed, with powder collection systems so arranged in the exhaust to capture oversprayed material.
A container holding powder coating material which is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported expanded cloud of such material through which the preheated object to be coated is immersed and transported.
A container holding powder coating material which is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported expanded cloud of such material which is electrically charged with a charge opposite to the charge of the object to be coated; such object is transported, through the container immediately above the charged and aerated materials in order to be coated.
Shall mean approved and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to § 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.
See “approved” in § 1910.107(a)(8).
Spray booths shall be substantially constructed of steel, securely and rigidly supported, or of concrete or masonry except that aluminum or other substantial noncombustible material may be used for intermittent or low volume spraying. Spray booths shall be designed to sweep air currents toward the exhaust outlet.
The interior surfaces of spray booths shall be smooth and continuous without edges and otherwise designed to prevent pocketing of residues and facilitate cleaning and washing without injury.
The floor surface of a spray booth and operator's working area, if combustible, shall be covered with noncombustible material of such character as to facilitate the safe cleaning and removal of residues.
Distribution or baffle plates, if installed to promote an even flow of air through the booth or cause the deposit of overspray before it enters the exhaust duct, shall be of noncombustible material and readily removable or accessible on both sides for cleaning. Such plates shall not be located in exhaust ducts.
In conventional dry type spray booths, overspray dry filters or filter rolls, if installed, shall conform to the following:
Each spray booth having a frontal area larger than 9 square feet shall have a metal deflector or curtain not less than 2 1/2 inches deep installed at the upper outer edge of the booth over the opening.
Where conveyors are arranged to carry work into or out of spray booths, the openings therefor shall be as small as practical.
Each spray booth shall be separated from other operations by not less than 3 feet, or by a greater distance, or by such partition or wall as to reduce the danger from juxtaposition of hazardous operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
Spray booths shall be so installed that all portions are readily accessible for cleaning. A clear space of not less than 3 feet on all sides shall be kept free from storage or combustible construction.
When spraying areas are illuminated through glass panels or other transparent materials, only fixed lighting units shall be used as a source of illumination. Panels shall effectively isolate the spraying area from the area in which the lighting unit is located, and shall be of a noncombustible material of such a nature or so protected that breakage will be unlikely. Panels shall be so arranged that normal accumulations of residue on the exposed surface of the panel will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction from the source of illumination.
All electrical equipment, open flames and other sources of ignition shall conform to the requirements of this paragraph, except as follows:
There shall be no open flame or spark producing equipment in any spraying area nor within 20 feet thereof, unless separated by a partition.
Space-heating appliances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall not be located in a spraying area where deposits of combustible residues may readily accumulate.
Electrical wiring and equipment shall conform to the provisions of this paragraph and shall otherwise be in accordance with subpart S of this part.
Unless specifically approved for locations containing both deposits of readily ignitable residue and explosive vapors, there shall be no electrical equipment in any spraying area, whereon deposits of combustible residues may readily accumulate, except wiring in rigid conduit or in boxes or fittings containing no taps, splices, or terminal connections.
Electrical wiring and equipment not subject to deposits of combustible residues but located in a spraying area as herein defined shall be of explosion-proof type approved for Class I, group D locations and shall otherwise conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part, for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations. Electrical wiring, motors, and other equipment outside of but within twenty (20) feet of any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by partitions, shall not produce sparks under normal operating conditions and shall otherwise conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
Electric lamps outside of, but within twenty (20) feet of any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by a partition, shall be totally enclosed to prevent the falling of hot particles and shall be protected from mechanical injury by suitable guards or by location.
Portable electric lamps shall not be used in any spraying area during spraying operations. Portable electric lamps, if used during cleaning or repairing operations, shall be of the type approved for hazardous Class I locations.
Ventilating and exhaust systems shall be in accordance with the Standard for Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor Removal, NFPA No. 91-1961, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, where applicable and shall also conform to the provisions of this section.
All spraying areas shall be provided with mechanical ventilation adequate to remove flammable vapors, mists, or powders to a safe location and to confine and control combustible residues so that life is not endangered. Mechanical ventilation shall be kept in operation at all times while spraying operations are being conducted and for a sufficient time thereafter to allow vapors from drying coated articles and drying finishing material residue to be exhausted.
Each spray booth shall have an independent exhaust duct system discharging to the exterior of the building, except that multiple cabinet spray booths in which identical spray finishing material is used with a combined frontal area of not more than 18 square feet may have a common exhaust. If more than one fan serves one booth, all fans shall be so interconnected that one fan cannot operate without all fans being operated.
The fan-rotating element shall be nonferrous or nonsparking or the casing shall consist of or be lined with such material. There shall be ample clearance between the fan-rotating element and the fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, necessary allowance being made for ordinary expansion and loading to prevent contact between moving parts and the duct or fan housing. Fan blades shall be mounted on a shaft sufficiently heavy to maintain perfect alignment even when the blades of the fan are heavily loaded, the shaft preferably to have bearings outside the duct and booth. All bearings shall be of the self-lubricating type, or lubricated from the outside duct.
Electric motors driving exhaust fans shall not be placed inside booths or ducts. See also paragraph (c) of this section.
Belts shall not enter the duct or booth unless the belt and pulley within the duct or booth are thoroughly enclosed.
Exhaust ducts shall be constructed of steel and shall be substantially supported. Exhaust ducts without dampers are preferred; however, if dampers are installed, they shall be maintained so that they will be in a full open position at all times the ventilating system is in operation.
| ( a ) 28-gage sheet metal on 1 ⁄ 4 -inch asbestos mill board | 12 inches. |
|---|---|
| ( b ) 28-gage sheet metal on 1 ⁄ 8 -inch asbestos mill board spaced out 1 inch on noncombustible spacers | 9 inches. |
| ( c ) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool batts reinforced with wire mesh or the equivalent | 3 inches. |
| ( d ) Where ducts are protected with an approved automatic sprinkler system, properly maintained, the clearance required in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph may be reduced to 6 inches |
Unless the spray booth exhaust duct terminal is from a water-wash spray booth, the terminal discharge point shall be not less than 6 feet from any combustible exterior wall or roof nor discharge in the direction of any combustible construction or unprotected opening in any noncombustible exterior wall within 25 feet.
Air exhaust from spray operations shall not be directed so that it will contaminate makeup air being introduced into the spraying area or other ventilating intakes, nor directed so as to create a nuisance. Air exhausted from spray operations shall not be recirculated.
When necessary to facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall be provided with an ample number of access doors.
Air intake openings to rooms containing spray finishing operations shall be adequate for the efficient operation of exhaust fans and shall be so located as to minimize the creation of dead air pockets.
Freshly sprayed articles shall be dried only in spaces provided with adequate ventilation to prevent the formation of explosive vapors. In the event adequate and reliable ventilation is not provided such drying spaces shall be considered a spraying area. See also paragraph (j) of this section.
The storage of flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) in connection with spraying operations shall conform to the requirements of § 1910.106, where applicable.
The quantity of flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) kept in the vicinity of spraying operations shall be the minimum required for operations and should ordinarily not exceed a supply for 1 day or one shift. Bulk storage of portable containers of flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) shall be in a separate, constructed building detached from other important buildings or cut off in a standard manner.
Original closed containers, approved portable tanks, approved safety cans or a properly arranged system of piping shall be used for bringing flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) into spray finishing room. Open or glass containers shall not be used.
Except as provided in paragraph (e)(5) of this section the withdrawal of flammable liquids and liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers having a capacity of greater than 60 gallons shall be by approved pumps. The withdrawal of flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) from containers and the filling of containers, including portable mixing tanks, shall be done only in a suitable mixing room or in a spraying area when the ventilating system is in operation. Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect against liquid spillage and sources of ignition.
Containers supplying spray nozzles shall be of closed type or provided with metal covers kept closed. Containers not resting on floors shall be on metal supports or suspended by wire cables. Containers supplying spray nozzles by gravity flow shall not exceed 10 gallons capacity. Original shipping containers shall not be subject to air pressure for supplying spray nozzles. Containers under air pressure supplying spray nozzles shall be of limited capacity, not exceeding that necessary for 1 day's operation; shall be designed and approved for such use; shall be provided with a visible pressure gage; and shall be provided with a relief valve set to operate in conformance with the requirements of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. Containers under air pressure supplying spray nozzles, air-storage tanks and coolers shall conform to the standards of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code—1968 for construction, tests, and maintenance.
Electrically powered spray liquid heaters shall be approved and listed for the specific location in which used (see paragraph (c) of this section). Heaters shall not be located in spray booths nor other locations subject to the accumulation of deposits or combustible residue. If an electric motor is used, see paragraph (c) of this section.
If flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are supplied to spray nozzles by positive displacement pumps, the pump discharge line shall be provided with an approved relief valve discharging to a pump suction or a safe detached location, or a device provided to stop the prime mover if the discharge pressure exceeds the safe operating pressure of the system.
Whenever flammable liquids or liquids with a flashpoint greater than 199.4 °F (93 °C) are transferred from one container to another, both containers shall be effectively bonded and grounded to prevent discharge sparks of static electricity.
In sprinklered buildings, the automatic sprinkler system in rooms containing spray finishing operations shall conform to the requirements of § 1910.159. In unsprinklered buildings where sprinklers are installed only to protect spraying areas, the installation shall conform to such standards insofar as they are applicable. Sprinkler heads shall be located so as to provide water distribution throughout the entire booth.
Automatic sprinklers protecting each spray booth (together with its connecting exhaust) shall be under an accessibly located separate outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) subcontrol valve.
Sprinklers protecting spraying areas shall be kept as free from deposits as practical by cleaning daily if necessary. (See also paragraph (g) of this section.)
An adequate supply of suitable portable fire extinguishers shall be installed near all spraying areas.
Spraying shall not be conducted outside of predetermined spraying areas.
All spraying areas shall be kept as free from the accumulation of deposits of combustible residues as practical, with cleaning conducted daily if necessary. Scrapers, spuds, or other such tools used for cleaning purposes shall be of nonsparking material.
Residue scrapings and debris contaminated with residue shall be immediately removed from the premises and properly disposed of. Approved metal waste cans shall be provided wherever rags or waste are impregnated with finishing material and all such rags or waste deposited therein immediately after use. The contents of waste cans shall be properly disposed of at least once daily or at the end of each shift.
Spray finishing employees' clothing shall not be left on the premises overnight unless kept in metal lockers.
The use of solvents for cleaning operations shall be restricted to those having flashpoints not less than 100 °F.; however, for cleaning spray nozzles and auxiliary equipment, solvents having flashpoints not less than those normally used in spray operations may be used. Such cleaning shall be conducted inside spray booths and ventilating equipment operated during cleaning.
Spray booths shall not be alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the combination of the materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition, unless all deposits of the first used material are removed from the booth and exhaust ducts prior to spraying with the second used material.
“No smoking” signs in large letters on contrasting color background shall be conspicuously posted at all spraying areas and paint storage rooms.
Where installation and use of electrostatic spraying equipment is used, such installation and use shall conform to all other paragraphs of this section, and shall also conform to the requirements of this paragraph.
Electrostatic apparatus and devices used in connection with coating operations shall be of approved types.
Transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and all other electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of high-voltage grids, electrodes, and electrostatic atomizing heads and their connections, shall be located outside of the spraying area, or shall otherwise conform to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads shall be adequately supported in permanent locations and shall be effectively insulated from the ground. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads which are permanently attached to their bases, supports, or reciprocators, shall be deemed to comply with this section. Insulators shall be nonporous and noncombustible.
High-voltage leads to electrodes shall be properly insulated and protected from mechanical injury or exposure to destructive chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing heads shall be effectively and permanently supported on suitable insulators and shall be effectively guarded against accidental contact or grounding. An automatic means shall be provided for grounding the electrode system when it is electrically deenergized for any reason. All insulators shall be kept clean and dry.
A safe distance shall be maintained between goods being painted and electrodes or electrostatic atomizing heads or conductors of at least twice the sparking distance. A suitable sign indicating this safe distance shall be conspicuously posted near the assembly.
Goods being painted using this process are to be supported on conveyors. The conveyors shall be so arranged as to maintain safe distances between the goods and the electrodes or electrostatic atomizing heads at all times. Any irregularly shaped or other goods subject to possible swinging or movement shall be rigidly supported to prevent such swinging or movement which would reduce the clearance to less than that specified in paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
This process is not acceptable where goods being coated are manipulated by hand. When finishing materials are applied by electrostatic equipment which is manipulated by hand, see paragraph (i) of this section for applicable requirements.
Electrostatic apparatus shall be equipped with automatic controls which will operate without time delay to disconnect the power supply to the high voltage transformer and to signal the operator under any of the following conditions:
Adequate booths, fencing, railings, or guards shall be so placed about the equipment that they, either by their location or character or both, assure that a safe isolation of the process is maintained from plant storage or personnel. Such railings, fencing, and guards shall be of conducting material, adequately grounded.
Where electrostatic atomization is used the spraying area shall be so ventilated as to insure safe conditions from a fire and health standpoint.
All areas used for spraying, including the interior of the booth, shall be protected by automatic sprinklers where this protection is available. Where this protection is not available, other approved automatic extinguishing equipment shall be provided.
This paragraph shall apply to any equipment using electrostatically charged elements for the atomization and/or, precipitation of materials for coatings on articles, or for other similar purposes in which the atomizing device is hand held and manipulated during the spraying operation.
Electrostatic hand spraying equipment shall conform with the other provisions of this section.
Electrostatic hand spray apparatus and devices used in connection with coating operations shall be of approved types. The high voltage circuits shall be designed so as to not produce a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite any vapor-air mixtures nor result in appreciable shock hazard upon coming in contact with a grounded object under all normal operating conditions. The electrostatically charged exposed elements of the handgun shall be capable of being energized only by a switch which also controls the coating material supply.
Transformers, powerpacks, control apparatus, and all other electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of the handgun itself and its connections to the power supply shall be located outside of the spraying area or shall otherwise conform to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
The handle of the spraying gun shall be electrically connected to ground by a metallic connection and to be so constructed that the operator in normal operating position is in intimate electrical contact with the grounded handle.
All electrically conductive objects in the spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This requirement shall apply to paint containers, wash cans, and any other objects or devices in the area. The equipment shall carry a prominent permanently installed warning regarding the necessity for this grounding feature.
Objects being painted or coated shall be maintained in metallic contact with the conveyor or other grounded support. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to insure this contact and areas of contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible. Points of support of the object shall be concealed from random spray where feasible and where the objects being sprayed are supported from a conveyor, the point of attachment to the conveyor shall be so located as to not collect spray material during normal operation.
The electrical equipment shall be so interlocked with the ventilation of the spraying area that the equipment cannot be operated unless the ventilation fans are in operation.
The spraying operation shall take place within a spray area which is adequately ventilated to remove solvent vapors released from the operation.
Drying, curing, or fusion apparatus in connection with spray application of flammable and combustible finishes shall conform to the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, NFPA 86A-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, where applicable and shall also conform with the following requirements of this paragraph.
Spray booths, rooms, or other enclosures used for spraying operations shall not alternately be used for the purpose of drying by any arrangement which will cause a material increase in the surface temperature of the spray booth, room, or enclosure.
Except as specifically provided in paragraph (j)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or fusion units utilizing a heating system having open flames or which may produce sparks shall not be installed in a spraying area, but may be installed adjacent thereto when equipped with an interlocked ventilating system arranged to:
Automobile refinishing spray booths or enclosures, otherwise installed and maintained in full conformity with this section, may alternately be used for drying with portable electrical infrared drying apparatus when conforming with the following:
Automobile undercoating spray operations in garages, conducted in areas having adequate natural or mechanical ventilation, are exempt from the requirements pertaining to spray finishing operations, when using undercoating materials not more hazardous than kerosene (as listed by Underwriters' Laboratories in respect to fire hazard rating 30-40) or undercoating materials using only solvents listed as having a flash point in excess of 100 °F. Undercoating spray operations not conforming to these provisions are subject to all requirements of this section pertaining to spray finishing operations.
Electrical equipment and other sources of ignition shall conform to the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) (i)-
The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section and other subparagraphs of this paragraph shall apply to fixed electrostatic equipment, except that electrical equipment not covered therein shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
The provisions of paragraph (i) of this section and other subparagraphs of this paragraph, shall apply to electrostatic handguns when used in powder coating, except that electrical equipment not covered therein shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
All spraying operations involving the use of organic peroxides and other dual component coatings shall be conducted in approved sprinklered spray booths meeting the requirements of this section.
Smoking shall be prohibited and “No Smoking” signs shall be prominently displayed and only nonsparking tools shall be used in any area where organic peroxides are stored, mixed or applied.
This section applies to flammable and combustible finishing materials when applied as a spray by compressed air, “airless” or “hydraulic atomization,” steam, electrostatic methods, or by any other means in continuous or intermittent processes. The section also covers the application of combustible powders by powder spray guns, electrostatic powder spray guns, fluidized beds, or electrostatic fluidized beds. The section does not apply to outdoor spray application of buildings, tanks, or other similar structures, nor to small portable spraying apparatus not used repeatedly in the same location.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012]
Blasting agent—any material or mixture, consisting of a fuel and oxidizer, intended for blasting, not otherwise classified as an explosive and in which none of the ingredients are classified as an explosive, provided that the finished product, as mixed and packaged for use or shipment, cannot be detonated by means of a No. 8 test blasting cap when unconfined.
Explosive-actuated power device—any tool or special mechanized device which is actuated by explosives, but not including propellant-actuated power devices. Examples of explosive-actuated power devices are jet tappers and jet perforators.
Explosive—any chemical compound, mixture, or device, the primary or common purpose of which is to function by explosion, i.e., with substantially instantaneous release of gas and heat, unless such compound, mixture, or device is otherwise specifically classified by the U.S. Department of Transportation; see 49 CFR chapter I. The term “explosives” shall include all material which is classified as Class A, Class B, and Class C explosives by the U.S. Department of Transportation, and includes, but is not limited to dynamite, black powder, pellet powders, initiating explosives, blasting caps, electric blasting caps, safety fuse, fuse lighters, fuse igniters, squibs, cordeau detonant fuse, instantaneous fuse, igniter cord, igniters, small arms ammunition, small arms ammunition primers, smokeless propellant, cartridges for propellant-actuated power devices, and cartridges for industrial guns. Commercial explosives are those explosives which are intended to be used in commercial or industrial operations.
Possessing, detonating, or otherwise maximum hazard; such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, picric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury, black powder, blasting caps, and detonating primers.
Possessing flammable hazard, such as propellant explosives (including some smokeless propellants), photographic flash powders, and some special fireworks.
Includes certain types of manufactured articles which contain Class A or Class B explosives, or both, as components but in restricted quantities.
Explosives which are forbidden or not acceptable for transportation by common carriers by rail freight, rail express, highway, or water in accordance with the regulations of the U.S. Department of Transportation, 49 CFR chapter I.
Highway—any public street, public alley, or public road.
Magazine—any building or structure, other than an explosives manufacturing building, used for the storage of explosives.
Motor vehicle—any self-propelled vehicle, truck, tractor, semitrailer, or truck-full trailers used for the transportation of freight over public highways.
Propellant-actuated power devices—any tool or special mechanized device or gas generator system which is actuated by a smokeless propellant or which releases and directs work through a smokeless propellant charge.
Pyrotechnics—any combustible or explosive compositions or manufactured articles designed and prepared for the purpose of producing audible or visible effects which are commonly referred to as fireworks.
Semiconductive hose—a hose with an electrical resistance high enough to limit flow of stray electric currents to safe levels, yet not so high as to prevent drainage of static electric charges to ground; hose of not more than 2 megohms resistance over its entire length and of not less than 5,000 ohms per foot meets the requirement.
Small arms ammunition—any shotgun, rifle, pistol, or revolver cartridge, and cartridges for propellant-actuated power devices and industrial guns. Military-type ammunition containing explosive-bursting charges, incendiary, tracer, spotting, or pyrotechnic projectiles is excluded from this definition.
Small arms ammunition primers—small percussion-sensitive explosive charges, encased in a cup, used to ignite propellant powder.
Smokeless propellants—solid propellants, commonly called smokeless powders in the trade, used in small arms ammunition, cannon, rockets, propellant-actuated power devices, etc.
Special industrial explosives devices—explosive-actuated power devices and propellant-actuated power devices.
Special industrial explosives materials—shaped materials and sheet forms and various other extrusions, pellets, and packages of high explosives, which include dynamite, trinitrotoluene (TNT), pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN), hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-s-triazine (RDX), and other similar compounds used for high-energy-rate forming, expanding, and shaping in metal fabrication, and for dismemberment and quick reduction of scrap metal.
These comprise a wide variety of materials used for blasting. They all contain substantial proportions of water and high proportions of ammonium nitrate, some of which is in solution in the water. Two broad classes of water gels are (i) those which are sensitized by a material classed as an explosive, such as TNT or smokeless powder, (ii) those which contain no ingredient classified as an explosive; these are sensitized with metals such as aluminum or with other fuels. Water gels may be premixed at an explosives plant or mixed at the site immediately before delivery into the borehole.
Regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I.
No person shall store, handle, or transport explosives or blasting agents when such storage, handling, and transportation of explosives or blasting agents constitutes an undue hazard to life.
| Explosives | Distances in feet when storage is barricaded: Separation of magazines | |
|---|---|---|
| Pounds over | Pounds not over | |
| 2 | 5 | 6 |
| 5 | 10 | 8 |
| 10 | 20 | 10 |
| 20 | 30 | 11 |
| 30 | 40 | 12 |
| 40 | 50 | 14 |
| 50 | 75 | 15 |
| 75 | 100 | 16 |
| 100 | 125 | 18 |
| 125 | 150 | 19 |
| 150 | 200 | 21 |
| 200 | 250 | 23 |
| 250 | 300 | 24 |
| 300 | 400 | 27 |
| 400 | 500 | 29 |
| 500 | 600 | 31 |
| 600 | 700 | 32 |
| 700 | 800 | 33 |
| 800 | 900 | 35 |
| 900 | 1,000 | 36 |
| 1,000 | 1,200 | 39 |
| 1,200 | 1,400 | 41 |
| 1,400 | 1,600 | 43 |
| 1,600 | 1,800 | 44 |
| 1,800 | 2,000 | 45 |
| 2,000 | 2,500 | 49 |
| 2,500 | 3,000 | 52 |
| 3,000 | 4,000 | 58 |
| 4,000 | 5,000 | 61 |
| 5,000 | 6,000 | 65 |
| 6,000 | 7,000 | 68 |
| 7,000 | 8,000 | 72 |
| 8,000 | 9,000 | 75 |
| 9,000 | 10,000 | 78 |
| 10,000 | 12,000 | 82 |
| 12,000 | 14,000 | 87 |
| 14,000 | 16,000 | 90 |
| 16,000 | 18,000 | 94 |
| 18,000 | 20,000 | 98 |
| 20,000 | 25,000 | 105 |
| 25,000 | 30,000 | 112 |
| 30,000 | 35,000 | 119 |
| 35,000 | 40,000 | 124 |
| 40,000 | 45,000 | 129 |
| 45,000 | 50,000 | 135 |
| 50,000 | 55,000 | 140 |
| 55,000 | 60,000 | 145 |
| 60,000 | 65,000 | 150 |
| 65,000 | 70,000 | 155 |
| 70,000 | 75,000 | 160 |
| 75,000 | 80,000 | 165 |
| 80,000 | 85,000 | 170 |
| 85,000 | 90,000 | 175 |
| 90,000 | 95,000 | 180 |
| 95,000 | 100,000 | 185 |
| 100,000 | 110,000 | 195 |
| 110,000 | 120,000 | 205 |
| 120,000 | 130,000 | 215 |
| 130,000 | 140,000 | 225 |
| 140,000 | 150,000 | 235 |
| 150,000 | 160,000 | 245 |
| 160,000 | 170,000 | 255 |
| 170,000 | 180,000 | 265 |
| 180,000 | 190,000 | 275 |
| 190,000 | 200,000 | 285 |
| 200,000 | 210,000 | 295 |
| 210,000 | 230,000 | 315 |
| 230,000 | 250,000 | 335 |
| 250,000 | 275,000 | 360 |
| 275,000 | 300,000 | 385 |
| 1 “Natural barricade” means natural features of the ground, such as hills, or timber of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves. | ||
| 2 “Artificial barricade” means an artificial mound or revetted wall of earth of a minimum thickness of three feet. | ||
| 3 “Barricaded” means that a building containing explosives is effectually screened from a magazine, building, railway, or highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barricade of such height that a straight line from the top of any sidewall of the building containing explosives to the eave line of any magazine, or building, or to a point 12 feet above the center of a railway or highway, will pass through such intervening natural or artificial barricade. | ||
| 4 When two or more storage magazines are located on the same property, each magazine must comply with the minimum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways, and highways, and in addition, they should be separated from each other by not less than the distances shown for “Separation of Magazines,” except that the quantity of explosives contained in cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing of said cap magazines from magazines containing other explosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from each other by less than the specified “Separation of Magazines” distances, then such two or more magazines, as a group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total quantity of explosives stored in such group must be treated as if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any magazine of the group, and must comply with the minimum of distances specified from other magazines, inhabited buildings, railways, and highways. | ||
| 5 This table applies only to the permanent storage of commercial explosives. It is not applicable to transportation of explosives, or any handling or temporary storage necessary or incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projectiles, or other heavily encased explosives. |
| Commodity | Type of marking or placard |
|---|---|
| Explosives, Class A, any quantity or a combination of Class A and Class B explosives | Explosives A (Red letters on white background). |
| Explosives, Class B, and quantity | Explosives B (Red letters on white background). |
| Oxidizing material (blasting agents, ammonium nitrate, etc.), 1,000 pounds or more gross weight | Oxidizers (Yellow letters on black background). |
Before a blast is fired, the employer shall require that a loud warning signal be given by the person in charge, who has made certain that all surplus explosives are in a safe place, all persons and vehicles are at a safe distance or under sufficient cover, and that an adequate warning has been given.
Except in an emergency and with permission of the local authority, no person shall have or keep explosives in a railway car unless said car and contents and methods of loading are in accordance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Regulations for the Transportation of Explosives, 49 CFR chapter I.
No person shall deliver any explosive to any carrier unless such explosive conforms in all respects, including marking and packing, to the U.S. Department of Transportation Regulations for the Transportation of Explosives.
Every railway car containing explosives which has reached its designation, or is stopped in transit so as no longer to be in interstate commerce, shall have attached to both sides and ends of the car, cards with the words “Explosives—Handle Carefully—Keep Fire Away” in red letters at least 1 1/2 inches high on a white background.
Any explosives at a railway facility, truck terminal, pier, wharf harbor facility, or airport terminal whether for delivery to a consignee, or forwarded to some other destination shall be kept in a safe place, isolated as far as practicable and in such manner that they can be easily and quickly removed.
Explosives shall not be delivered to or received from any railway station, truck terminal, pier, wharf, harbor facility, or airport terminal between the hours of sunset and sunrise.
Unless otherwise set forth in this paragraph, blasting agents, excluding water gels, shall be transported, stored, and used in the same manner as explosives. Water gels are covered in paragraph (h) of this section.
| Donor weight | Minimum separation distance of receptor when barricaded 2 (ft.) | Minimum thickness of artificial barricades 5 (in.) | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Pounds over | Pounds not over | Ammonium nitrate 3 | Blasting agent 4 | |
| 100 | 3 | 11 | 12 | |
| 100 | 300 | 4 | 14 | 12 |
| 300 | 600 | 5 | 18 | 12 |
| 600 | 1,000 | 6 | 22 | 12 |
| 1,000 | 1,600 | 7 | 25 | 12 |
| 1,600 | 2,000 | 8 | 29 | 12 |
| 2,000 | 3,000 | 9 | 32 | 15 |
| 3,000 | 4,000 | 10 | 36 | 15 |
| 4,000 | 6,000 | 11 | 40 | 15 |
| 6,000 | 8,000 | 12 | 43 | 20 |
| 8,000 | 10,000 | 13 | 47 | 20 |
| 10,000 | 12,000 | 14 | 50 | 20 |
| 12,000 | 16,000 | 15 | 54 | 25 |
| 16,000 | 20,000 | 16 | 58 | 25 |
| 20,000 | 25,000 | 18 | 65 | 25 |
| 25,000 | 30,000 | 19 | 68 | 30 |
| 30,000 | 35,000 | 20 | 72 | 30 |
| 35,000 | 40,000 | 21 | 76 | 30 |
| 40,000 | 45,000 | 22 | 79 | 35 |
| 45,000 | 50,000 | 23 | 83 | 35 |
| 50,000 | 55,000 | 24 | 86 | 35 |
| 55,000 | 60,000 | 25 | 90 | 35 |
| 60,000 | 70,000 | 26 | 94 | 40 |
| 70,000 | 80,000 | 28 | 101 | 40 |
| 80,000 | 90,000 | 30 | 108 | 40 |
| 90,000 | 100,000 | 32 | 115 | 40 |
| 100,000 | 120,000 | 34 | 122 | 50 |
| 120,000 | 140,000 | 37 | 133 | 50 |
| 140,000 | 160,000 | 40 | 144 | 50 |
| 160,000 | 180,000 | 44 | 158 | 50 |
| 180,000 | 200,000 | 48 | 173 | 50 |
| 200,000 | 220,000 | 52 | 187 | 60 |
| 220,000 | 250,000 | 56 | 202 | 60 |
| 250,000 | 275,000 | 60 | 216 | 60 |
| 275,000 | 300,000 | 64 | 230 | 60 |
| 1 These distances apply to the separation of stores only. Table H-21 shall be used in determining separation distances from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public highways. | ||||
| 2 When the ammonium nitrate and/or blasting agent is not barricaded, the distances shown in the table shall be multiplied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies, sheet metal structures, metal container, and the like which may enclose the “donor”. Where storage is in bullet-resistant magazines recommended for explosives or where the storage is protected by a bullet-resistant wall, distances, and barricade thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in Table H-21 are not required. | ||||
| 3 The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that passes the insensitivity test prescribed in the definition of ammonium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant Food Institute*; and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test shall be stored at separation distances determined by competent persons. (*Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, November 1964.) | ||||
| 4 These distances apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting agents which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations. | ||||
| 5 Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the prescribed minimum thickness of earth or sand are acceptable artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen from the “donor” when the trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable. | ||||
| 6 When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in determining the distances to be maintained from inhabited buildings, passenger railways and public highways, it may be counted at one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is lower. | ||||
| Note 7: Guide to use of table of recommended separation distances of ammonium nitrate and blasting agents from explosives or blasting agents. | ||||
| (a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor materials together with the maximum mass of material to be allowed in that vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives, blasting agents, and combination of masses of detonating materials. Potential acceptors are high explosives, blasting agents, and ammonium nitrate.) | ||||
| (b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination with each acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table allowance (distances measured between nearest edges), the combination of masses becomes a new potential donor of weight equal to the total mass. When individual masses are considered as donors, distances to potential acceptors shall be measured between edges. When combined masses within propagating distance of each other are considered as a donor, the appropriate distance to the edge of potential acceptors shall be computed as a weighted distance from the combined masses. | ||||
| Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses: | ||||
| Let M 2 , M 3 . . . M n be donor masses to be combined. | ||||
| M 1 is a potential acceptor mass. | ||||
| D 1 2 is distance from M 1 to M 2 (edge to edge). | ||||
| D 1 3 is distance from M 1 to M 3 (edge to edge), etc. | ||||
| To find weighted distance [ D 1 ( 2 , 3 . . . n )] from combined masses to M 1 , add the products of the individual masses and distances and divide the total by the sum of the masses thus: | ||||
| D 1 ( 2 , 3 . . . n )= M 2 × D 12 + M 3 × D 12 . . . + M n × D 12 M 2 + M 3 . . . + M n | ||||
| Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is less than the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a combined mass is less than the weighted distance from an acceptor. | ||||
| (c) In determining the distances separating highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as prescribed in Table H-21), the sum of all masses which may propagate (i.e., lie at distances less than prescribed in the Table) from either individual or combined donor masses are included. However, when the ammonium nitrate must be included, only 50 percent of its weight shall be used because of its reduced blast effects. In applying Table H-21 to distances from highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings, distances are measured from the nearest edge of potentially explodable material as prescribed in Table H-21, Note 5. | ||||
| (d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Explosives Class A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in bullet-resistant magazines is required. Safe distances to stores in bullet-resistant magazines may be obtained from the intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H-21. | ||||
| (e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings between potential donors and acceptors which permit blast or missiles to move directly between masses. | ||||
| (f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained around any bin containing ammonium nitrate or blasting agent. This includes keeping weeds and other combustible materials cleared within 25 feet of such bin. Accumulation of spilled product on the ground shall be prevented. |
Persons using blasting agents shall comply with all of the applicable provisions of paragraph (e) of this section.
Unless otherwise set forth in this paragraph, water gels shall be transported, stored and used in the same manner as explosives or blasting agents in accordance with the classification of the product.
This paragraph does not apply to in-process storage and intraplant transportation during manufacture of small arms ammunition, small arms primers, and smokeless propellants.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
As used in this section:
container—A container constructed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section.
container—A container constructed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section.
container—A container constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1.
Specifications—regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I.
cylinders—cylinders meeting the requirements of 49 CFR chapter I.
| Water capacity per container | Minimum distances | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Containers | Between aboveground containers | ||
| Underground | Aboveground | ||
| Less than 125 gals. 1 | 10 feet | None | None. |
| 125 to 250 gals | 10 feet | 10 feet | None. |
| 251 to 500 gals | 10 feet | 10 feet | 3 feet. |
| 501 to 2,000 gals | 25 feet 2 | 25 feet 2 | 3 feet. |
| 2,001 to 30,000 gals | 50 feet | 50 feet | 5 feet. |
| 30,001 to 70,000 gals | 50 feet | 75 feet. 3 | |
| 70,001 to 90,000 gals | 50 feet | 100 feet. 3 | |
| 1 If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-container installation at a consumer site is 501 gallons or greater, the minimum distance shall comply with the appropriate portion of this table, applying the aggregate capacity rather than the capacity per container. If more than one installation is made, each installation shall be separated from another installation by at least 25 feet. Do not apply the MINIMUM DISTANCES BETWEEN ABOVE-GROUND CONTAINERS to such installations. | |||
| 2 The above distance requirements may be reduced to not less than 10 feet for a single container of 1,200 gallons water capacity or less, providing such a container is at least 25 feet from any other LP-Gas container of more than 125 gallons water capacity. | |||
| 3 1 ⁄ 4 of sum of diameters of adjacent containers. |
and all liquid piping shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe shall be at least Schedule 80 if joints are threaded or threaded and back welded. At least Schedule 40 (ASTM A-53-69 Grade B Electric Resistance Welded and Electric Flash Welded Pipe or equal) shall be used if joints are welded, or welded and flanged.
Aluminum alloy tubing shall be protected against external corrosion when it is in contact with dissimilar metals other than galvanized steel, or its location is subject to repeated wetting by liquids such as water (except rainwater), detergents, sewage, or leakage from other piping, or it passes through flooring, plaster, masonry, or insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be considered suitable protection. The maximum outside diameter for aluminum alloy tubing shall be three-fourths inch and shall not be used for pressures exceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tubing shall not be installed within 6 inches of the ground.
| Standard size (inches) | Nominal outside diameter (inches) | Nominal wall thickness (inches) | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Type K | Type L | ||
| 1 ⁄ 4 | 0.375 | 0.035 | 0.030 |
| 3 ⁄ 8 | 0.500 | 0.049 | 0.035 |
| 1 ⁄ 2 | 0.625 | 0.049 | 0.040 |
| 5 ⁄ 8 | 0.750 | 0.049 | 0.042 |
| 3 ⁄ 4 | 0.875 | 0.065 | 0.045 |
| 1 | 1.125 | 0.065 | 0.050 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1.375 | 0.065 | 0.055 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1.625 | 0.072 | 0.060 |
| 2 | 2.125 | 0.083 | 0.070 |
| 1 Based on data in Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube, ANSI H23.1-1970 (ASTM B-88-69). | |||
| Note: The standard size by which tube is designated is 1 ⁄ 8 inch smaller than its nominal outside diameter. |
| Outside diameter (inches) | Nominal wall thickness (inches) | |
|---|---|---|
| Type A | Type B | |
| 3 ⁄ 8 | 0.035 | 0.049 |
| 1 ⁄ 2 | 0.035 | 0.049 |
| 5 ⁄ 8 | 0.042 | 0.049 |
| 3 ⁄ 4 | 0.049 | 0.058 |
| 1 Based on data in Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Coiled Tubes for Special Purpose Applications, ASTM B210-68. |
or less, fittings shall be designed for a pressure of at least 125 p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above 125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed for a minimum of 250 p.s.i.g.
| Surface area (sq. ft.) | Flow rate CFM air |
|---|---|
| 20 or less | 626 |
| 25 | 751 |
| 30 | 872 |
| 35 | 990 |
| 40 | 1,100 |
| 45 | 1,220 |
| 50 | 1,330 |
| 55 | 1,430 |
| 60 | 1,540 |
| 65 | 1,640 |
| 70 | 1,750 |
| 75 | 1,850 |
| 80 | 1,950 |
| 85 | 2,050 |
| 90 | 2,150 |
| 95 | 2,240 |
| 100 | 2,340 |
| 105 | 2,440 |
| 110 | 2,530 |
| 115 | 2,630 |
| 120 | 2,720 |
| 125 | 2,810 |
| 130 | 2,900 |
| 135 | 2,990 |
| 140 | 3,080 |
| 145 | 3,170 |
| 150 | 3,260 |
| 155 | 3,350 |
| 160 | 3,440 |
| 165 | 3,530 |
| 170 | 3,620 |
| 175 | 3,700 |
| 180 | 3,790 |
| 185 | 3,880 |
| 190 | 3,960 |
| 195 | 4,050 |
| 200 | 4,130 |
| 210 | 4,300 |
| 220 | 4,470 |
| 230 | 4,630 |
| 240 | 4,800 |
| 250 | 4,960 |
| 260 | 5,130 |
| 270 | 5,290 |
| 280 | 5,450 |
| 290 | 5,610 |
| 300 | 5,760 |
| 310 | 5,920 |
| 320 | 6,080 |
| 330 | 6,230 |
| 340 | 6,390 |
| 350 | 6,540 |
| 360 | 6,690 |
| 370 | 6,840 |
| 380 | 7,000 |
| 390 | 7,150 |
| 400 | 7,300 |
| 450 | 8,040 |
| 500 | 8,760 |
| 550 | 9,470 |
| 600 | 10,170 |
| 650 | 10,860 |
| 700 | 11,550 |
| 750 | 12,220 |
| 800 | 12,880 |
| 850 | 13,540 |
| 900 | 14,190 |
| 950 | 14,830 |
| 1,000 | 15,470 |
| 1,050 | 16,100 |
| 1,100 | 16,720 |
| 1,150 | 17,350 |
| 1,200 | 17,960 |
| 1,250 | 18,570 |
| 1,300 | 19,180 |
| 1,350 | 19,780 |
| 1,400 | 20,380 |
| 1,450 | 20,980 |
| 1,500 | 21,570 |
| 1,550 | 22,160 |
| 1,600 | 22,740 |
| 1,650 | 23,320 |
| 1,700 | 23,900 |
| 1,750 | 24,470 |
| 1,800 | 25,050 |
| 1,850 | 25,620 |
| 1,900 | 26,180 |
| 1,950 | 26,750 |
| 2,000 | 27,310 |
Surface area = total outside surface area of container in square feet.
When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the marking is not legible, the area can be calculated by using one of the following formulas:
Area = Overall length × outside diameter × 3.1416.
Area = (Overall length + 0.3 outside diameter) × outside diameter × 3.1416.
| Container type | 100 | 125 | 150 | 175 | 200 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Air conversion factor | 1.162 | 1.142 | 1.113 | 1.078 | 1.010 |
The minimum required rate of discharge for safety relief valves shall be determined as follows:
Area = Outside diameter squared × 3.1416.
Flow Rate-CFM Air = Required flow capacity in cubic feet per minute of air at standard conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater than 2,000 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using the formula, Flow Rate-CFM Air = 53.632 A0.82.
A = total outside surface area of the container in square feet.
Valves not marked “Air” have flow rate marking in cubic feet per minute of liquefied petroleum gas. These can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per minute of air by multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas ratings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per minute of liquefied petroleum gas by dividing the air ratings by the factors listed below.
| Containers | Minimum (percent) | Maximum (percent) |
|---|---|---|
| ASME Code; Par. U-68, U-69—1949 and earlier editions | 110 | 1 25 |
| ASME Code; Par. U-200, U-201—1949 edition | 88 | 1 100 |
| ASME Code—1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965 and 1968 (Division I) editions | 88 | 1 100 |
| API—ASME Code—all editions | 88 | 1 100 |
| DOT—As prescribed in 49 CFR Chapter I | ||
| 1 Manufacturers of safety relief valves are allowed a plus tolerance not exceeding 10 percent of the set pressure marked on the valve. |
When vaporizing and/or mixing equipment is located in a structure or building not used exclusively for gas manufacturing or distribution, either attached to or within such a building, such structure or room shall be separated from the remainder of the building by a wall designed to withstand a static pressure of at least 100 pounds per square foot. This wall shall have no openings or pipe or conduit passing through it. Such structure or room shall be provided with adequate ventilation and shall have a roof or at least one exterior wall of lightweight construction.
Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of 15 gallons per hour or less vaporizing capacity.
Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity of 16 to 100 gallons per hour.
Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vaporizing capacity exceeding 100 gallons per hour.
Ten feet for storage containers of less than 500 gallons water capacity.
Twenty-five feet for storage containers of 500 to 1,200 gallons water capacity.
Fifty feet for storage containers of over 1,200 gallons water capacity.
| Water capacity per container (gallons) | Minimum distances (feet) |
|---|---|
| Less than 501 | 10 |
| 501 to 2,000 | 25 |
| Over 2,000 | 50 |
| Specific gravity at 60 °F. (15.6 °C.) | Above ground containers | Under ground containers, all capacities | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 to 1,200 U.S. gals. (1,000 imp. gal., 4,550 liters) total water cap. | Over 1,200 U.S. gals. (1,000 imp. gal., 4,550 liters) total water cap. | ||
| Percent | Percent | Percent | |
| 0 .496-0 .503 | 41 | 44 | 45 |
| .504- .510 | 42 | 45 | 46 |
| .511- .519 | 43 | 46 | 47 |
| .520- .527 | 44 | 47 | 48 |
| .528- .536 | 45 | 48 | 49 |
| .537- .544 | 46 | 49 | 50 |
| .545- .552 | 47 | 50 | 51 |
| .553- .560 | 48 | 51 | 52 |
| .561- .568 | 49 | 52 | 53 |
| .569- .576 | 50 | 53 | 54 |
| .577- .584 | 51 | 54 | 55 |
| .585- .592 | 52 | 55 | 56 |
| .593- .600 | 53 | 56 | 57 |
The employer shall assure that (i) at least one attendant shall remain close to the transfer connection from the time the connections are first made until they are finally disconnected, during the transfer of the product.
Personnel performing installation, removal, operation, and maintenance work shall be properly trained in such function.
| Part | Location | Extent of classified area 1 | Equipment shall be suitable for Class 1, Group D 2 |
|---|---|---|---|
| A | Storage containers other than DOT cylinders | Within 15 feet in all directions from connections, except connections otherwise covered in Table H-28 | Division 2. |
| B | Tank vehicle and tank car loading and unloading 3 | Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer | Division 1. |
| Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point where connections are regularly made or disconnected and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H-1) | Division 2. | ||
| C | Gage vent openings other than those on DOT cylinders | Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of discharge | Division 1. |
| Division 2. | |||
| D | Relief valve discharge other than those on DOT cylinders | Within direct path of discharge | Division 1. |
| Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge | Division 1. | ||
| Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of discharge except within the direct path of discharge | Division 2. | ||
| E | Pumps, compressors, gas-air mixers and vaporizers other than direct fired | ||
| Indoors without ventilation | Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition | Division 1. | |
| Within 15 feet of the exterior side of any exterior wall or roof that is not vaportight or within 15 feet of any exterior opening | Division 2. | ||
| Indoors with adequate ventilation 4 | Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition | Division 2. | |
| Outdoors in open air at or abovegrade | Within 15 feet in all directions from this equipment and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. See Figure H-1 | Division 2. | |
| F | Service Station Dispensing Units | Entire space within dispenser enclosure, and 18 inches horizontally from enclosure exterior up to an elevation 4 ft. above dispenser base. Entire pit or open space beneath dispenser | Division 1. |
| Up to 18 inches abovegrade within 20 ft. horizontally from any edge of enclosure | Division 2. | ||
| Note: For pits within this area, see part F of this table. | |||
| G | Pits or trenches containing or located beneath LP-Gas valves, pumps, compressors, regulators, and similar equipment | ||
| Without mechanical ventilation | Entire pit or trench | Division 1. | |
| Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition | Division 1. | ||
| Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located outdoors | Division 2. | ||
| With adequate mechanical ventilation | Entire pit or trench | Division 2. | |
| Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gastight partition | Division 2. | ||
| Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located outdoors | Division 2. | ||
| H | Special buildings or rooms for storage of portable containers | Entire room | Division 2. |
| Pipelines and connections containing operational bleeds, drips, vents or drains | Within 5 ft. in all directions from point of discharge Beyond 5 ft. from point of discharge, same as part E of this table | Division 1. | |
| J | Container filling: | ||
| Indoors without ventilation | Entire room | Division 1. | |
| Indoors with adequate ventilation 4 | Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer | Division 1. | |
| Beyond 5 feet and entire room | Division 2. | ||
| Outdoors in open air | Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made or disconnected for product transfer | Division 1. | |
| Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point where connections are regularly made or disconnected and within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H-1) | Division 2. | ||
| 1 The classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or solid vaportight partition. | |||
| 2 See subpart S of this part. | |||
| 3 When classifying extent of hazardous area, consideration shall be given to possible variations in the spotting of tank cars and tank vehicles at the unloading points and the effect these variations of actual spotting point may have on the point of connection. | |||
| 4 Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, is considered adequate when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does not exceed 25 percent of the lower flammable limit under normal operating conditions. |
Fixed electrical equipment and wiring installed within classified areas specified in Table H-28 shall comply with Table H-28 and shall be installed in accordance with subpart S of this part. This provision does not apply to fixed electrical equipment at residential or commercial installations of LP-Gas systems or to systems covered by paragraph (e) or (g) of this section.
[(Water capacity (gals.) of container* × filling density**) ÷ (Specific gravity of LP-Gas* × volume correction factor × 100)] = Maximum volume of LP-Gas
*Measured at 60 °F.
**From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph “Filling Densities.”
For aboveground containers the liquid temperature is assumed to be 40 °F. and for underground containers the liquid temperature is assumed to be 50 °F. To correct the liquid volumes at these temperatures to 60 °F. the following factors shall be used.
| Specific gravity | Aboveground | Underground |
|---|---|---|
| 0.500 | 1.033 | 1.017 |
| .510 | 1.031 | 1.016 |
| .520 | 1.029 | 1.015 |
| .530 | 1.028 | 1.014 |
| .540 | 1.026 | 1.013 |
| .550 | 1.025 | 1.013 |
| .560 | 1.024 | 1.012 |
| .570 | 1.023 | 1.011 |
| .580 | 1.021 | 1.011 |
| .590 | 1.020 | 1.010 |
Example:
Assume a 100-gallon total water capacity tank for aboveground storage of propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of 60 °F.
[(100 (gals.) × 42 (filling density from subparagraph (12) of this paragraph)) ÷ (0.510 × 1.031 (correction factor from Table H-29) × 100)] = (4200 ÷ 52.6)
b
| Aboveground, pounds per gallon | Underground, pounds per gallon | |
|---|---|---|
| Propane | 4.37 | 4.31 |
| N Butane | 4.97 | 4.92 |
This paragraph applies specifically to systems utilizing containers constructed in accordance with DOT Specifications. All requirements of paragraph (b) of this section apply to this paragraph unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section.
Containers shall be marked in accordance with DOT regulations. Additional markings not in conflict with DOT regulations may be used.
A system shall include the container base or bracket, containers, container valves, connectors, manifold valve assembly, regulators, and relief valves.
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the discharge from safety relief devices shall be located not less than 3 feet horizontally away from any building opening which is below the level of such discharge and shall not terminate beneath any building unless such space is well ventilated to the outside and is not enclosed on more than two sides.
The provisions of this paragraph ( h ) do not apply to tar kettle burners, torches, melting pots, nor do they apply to portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u.h. input when used with containers having a maximum water capacity of 2 1/2 pounds. Container valves, connectors, regulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters.
| Regulator delivery pressure | Relief valve start-to-discharge pressure setting (percent of regulator delivery pressure) | |
|---|---|---|
| Minimum | Maximum | |
| 1 p.s.i.g. or less | 200 | 300 |
| Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3 p.s.i.g | 140 | 200 |
| Above 3 p.s.i.g | 125 | 200 |
Containers shall not be reinstalled unless they are requalified in accordance with DOT regulations.
A product shall not be placed in a container marked with a service pressure less than four-fifths of the maximum vapor pressure of product at 130 °F.
This paragraph applies specifically to systems utilizing storage containers other than those constructed in accordance with DOT specifications. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section.
Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with Table H-31.
| Container type | For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) | Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) | 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 3 | ||
| 1 80 | 1 80 | 1 80 | 1 100 |
| 100 | 100 | 100 | 125 |
| 125 | 125 | 125 | 156 |
| 150 | 150 | 150 | 187 |
| 175 | 175 | 175 | 219 |
| 2 200 | 215 | 200 | 250 |
| 1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been authorized since Dec. 31, 1947. | |||
| 2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of the container type designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code. | |||
| 3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized after July 1, 1961. |
Where there is a probability of the manhole or housing becoming flooded, the discharge from regulator vent lines shall be above the highest probable water level. All manholes or housings shall be provided with ventilated louvers or their equivalent, the area of such openings equaling or exceeding the combined discharge areas of the safety relief valves and other vent lines which discharge their content into the manhole housing.
Containers may be reinstalled if they do not show any evidence of harmful external corrosion or other damage. Where containers are reinstalled underground, the corrosion resistant coating shall be put in good condition (see paragraph (c)(7)(vi) of this section). Where containers are reinstalled above ground, the safety devices and gaging devices shall comply with paragraph (c)(4) of this section and paragraph (b)(19) of this section respectively for aboveground containers.
A storage container shall not exceed 90,000 gallons water capacity.
It will not be necessary to cover the portion of the container to which manhole and other connections are affixed; however, where necessary, protection shall be provided against vehicular damage. When necessary to prevent floating, containers shall be securely anchored or weighted.
Where vaporized gas on the low-pressure side of the system may condense to a liquid at normal operating temperatures and pressures, suitable means shall be provided for revaporization of the condensate.
When damage to LP-Gas systems from vehicular traffic is a possibility, precautions against such damage shall be taken.
No drains or blowoff lines shall be directed into or in proximity to sewer systems used for other purposes.
Electrical equipment and installations shall conform to paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section.
The provisions of paragraph (e)(8) of this section shall apply.
| Container type | For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) | Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) | 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 2 | ||
| 1 200 | 215Z | 200 | 250 |
| 1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of the container type designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code. | |||
| 2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized after July 1, 1961. |
Stationary engines and gas turbines installed in buildings, including portable engines used instead of or to supplement stationary engines, shall comply with the Standard for the Institution and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, NFPA 37-1970, and the appropriate provisions of paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
This paragraph shall apply to the storage of portable containers not in excess of 1,000 pounds water capacity, filled or partially filled, at user location but not connected for use, or in storage for resale by dealers or resellers. This paragraph shall not apply to containers stored at charging plants or at plants devoted primarily to the storage and distribution of LP-Gas or other petroleum products.
| Quantity of LP-Gas Stored | Distance |
|---|---|
| 500 pounds or less | 0 |
| 501 to 2,500 pounds | 1 0 |
| 2,501 to 6,000 pounds | 10 feet |
| 6,001 to 10,000 pounds | 20 feet |
| Over 10,000 pounds | 25 feet |
| 1 Container or containers shall be at least 10 feet from any building on adjoining property, any sidewalk, or any of the exposures described in § 1910.110(f)(6)(i) ( c ) or ( d ) of this paragraph. |
Storage locations other than supply depots separated and located apart from dealer, reseller, or user establishments shall be provided with at least one approved portable fire extinguisher having a minimum rating of 8-B, C.
This paragraph applies to storage containers, and dispensing devices, and pertinent equipment in service stations where LP-Gas is stored and is dispensed into fuel tanks of motor vehicles. See paragraph (e) of this section for requirements covering use of LP-Gas as a motor fuel. All requirements of paragraph (b) of this section apply to this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with Table H-34.
| Container type | For gases with vapor press. Not to exceed lb. per sq. in. gage at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) | Minimum design pressure of container, lb. per sq. in. gage | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1949 and earlier editions of ASME Code (Par. U-68, U-69) | 1949 edition of ASME Code (Par. U-200, U-201); 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of ASME Code; All editions of API-ASME Code 2 | ||
| 1 200 | 215 | 200 | 250 |
| 1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100 percent of the container type designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125 percent of the container type designation when constructed under: (1) The 1949 ASME Code (Paragraphs U-200 and U-201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code. | |||
| 2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized after July 1, 1961. |
In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling connections may be fitted with a quick-closing internal valve, which shall remain closed except during operating periods. The mechanism for such valves may be provided with a secondary control which will cause it to close automatically in case of fire. When a fusible plug is used its melting point shall not exceed 220 °F.
Individual liquid storage containers shall not exceed 30,000 gallons water capacity.
| Water capacity per container (gallons) | Minimum distances | |
|---|---|---|
| Aboveground and underground (feet) | Between aboveground containers (feet) | |
| Up to 2,000 | 25 | 3 |
| Over 2,000 | 50 | 5 |
| Note: The above distances may be reduced to not less than 10 feet for service station buildings of other than wood frame construction. |
Valves, regulators, gages, and other container fittings shall be protected against tampering and physical damage.
All pumps and accessory equipment shall be suitable for LP-Gas service, and designed for not less than the maximum pressure to which they may be subjected. Accessories shall have a minimum rated working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Positive displacement pumps shall be equipped with suitable pressure actuated bypass valves permitting flow from pump discharge to storage container or pump suction.
There shall be no smoking on the driveway of service stations in the dispensing areas or transport truck unloading areas. Conspicuous signs prohibiting smoking shall be posted within sight of the customer being served. Letters on such signs shall be not less than 4 inches high. The motors of all vehicles being fueled shall be shut off during the fueling operations.
Electrical equipment and installations shall conform to paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this section.
Each service station shall be provided with at least one approved portable fire extinguisher having at least an 8-B, C, rating.
This section does not apply to:
The requirements of § 1910.253 shall apply to such use;
The National Fire Protection Association Standard for the Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No. 59-1968, shall apply to such use;
Unless otherwise stated, it is not intended that the provisions of this section be retroactive.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
As used in this section.
All devices such as pumps, compressors, safety relief devices, liquid-level gaging devices, valves and pressure gages.
A container of 1,000 pounds of water capacity or less constructed in accordance with Department of Transportation specifications.
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)—1968.
Includes all vessels, tanks, cylinders, or spheres used for transportation, storage, or application of anhydrous ammonia.
U.S. Department of Transportation.
A vehicle for use on a farm on which is mounted a container of not over 1,200 gallons water capacity.
the percent ratio of the weight of the gas in a container to the weight of water at 60 °F. that the container will hold.
Anhydrous ammonia in either the gaseous or liquefied state.
Gas masks must be approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 for use with anhydrous ammonia.
Total volume of the container in standard U.S. gallons.
specifications—Regulations of the Department of Transportation published in 49 CFR chapter I.
This paragraph applies to all paragraphs of this section unless otherwise noted.
Each appurtenance shall be approved in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) (i), (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this section.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
Under ground and above ground: System nameplate.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
Under ground: Container and system nameplate.
Above ground: Container.
Above ground and under ground: System nameplate or on liquid-level gaging device.
Under ground: System nameplate.
Above ground: No requirement.
Each refrigerated container shall be marked with nameplate on the outer covering in an accessible place as specified in the following:
“Anhydrous Ammonia” xxx p.s.i.g. (maximum working pressure), manufacturer's name or trademark, year of manufacture.
In lieu of this requirement the same information may be contained on a nameplate permanently attached to the hose.
| Surface area (sq. ft.) | Flow rate CFM air |
|---|---|
| 20 | 258 |
| 25 | 310 |
| 30 | 360 |
| 35 | 408 |
| 40 | 455 |
| 45 | 501 |
| 50 | 547 |
| 55 | 591 |
| 60 | 635 |
| 65 | 678 |
| 70 | 720 |
| 75 | 762 |
| 80 | 804 |
| 85 | 845 |
| 90 | 885 |
| 95 | 925 |
| 100 | 965 |
| 105 | 1,010 |
| 110 | 1,050 |
| 115 | 1,090 |
| 120 | 1,120 |
| 125 | 1,160 |
| 130 | 1,200 |
| 135 | 1,240 |
| 140 | 1,280 |
| 145 | 1,310 |
| 150 | 1,350 |
| 155 | 1,390 |
| 160 | 1,420 |
| 165 | 1,460 |
| 170 | 1,500 |
| 175 | 1,530 |
| 180 | 1,570 |
| 185 | 1,600 |
| 190 | 1,640 |
| 195 | 1,670 |
| 200 | 1,710 |
| 210 | 1,780 |
| 220 | 1,850 |
| 230 | 1,920 |
| 240 | 1,980 |
| 250 | 2,050 |
| 260 | 2,120 |
| 270 | 2,180 |
| 280 | 2,250 |
| 290 | 2,320 |
| 300 | 2,380 |
| 310 | 2,450 |
| 320 | 2,510 |
| 330 | 2,570 |
| 340 | 2,640 |
| 350 | 2,700 |
| 360 | 2,760 |
| 370 | 2,830 |
| 380 | 2,890 |
| 390 | 2,950 |
| 400 | 3,010 |
| 450 | 3,320 |
| 500 | 3,620 |
| 550 | 3,910 |
| 600 | 4,200 |
| 650 | 4,480 |
| 700 | 4,760 |
| 750 | 5,040 |
| 800 | 5,300 |
| 850 | 5,590 |
| 900 | 5,850 |
| 950 | 6,120 |
| 1,000 | 6,380 |
| 1,050 | 6,640 |
| 1,100 | 6,900 |
| 1,150 | 7,160 |
| 1,200 | 7,410 |
| 1,250 | 7,660 |
| 1,300 | 7,910 |
| 1,350 | 8,160 |
| 1,400 | 8,410 |
| 1,450 | 8,650 |
| 1,500 | 8,900 |
| 1,550 | 9,140 |
| 1,600 | 9,380 |
| 1,650 | 9,620 |
| 1,700 | 9,860 |
| 1,750 | 10,090 |
| 1,800 | 10,330 |
| 1,850 | 10,560 |
| 1,900 | 10,800 |
| 1,950 | 11,030 |
| 2,000 | 11,260 |
| 2,050 | 11,490 |
| 2,100 | 11,720 |
| 2,150 | 11,950 |
| 2,200 | 12,180 |
| 2,250 | 12,400 |
| 2,300 | 12,630 |
| 2,350 | 12,850 |
| 2,400 | 13,080 |
| 2,450 | 13,300 |
| 2,500 | 13,520 |
Surface Area = total outside surface area of container in square feet. When the surface area is not stamped on the nameplate or when the marking is not legible the area can be calculated by using one of the following formulas:
Area = overall length in feet times outside diameter in feet times 3.1416.
Area = (overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside diameter in feet) times outside diameter in feet times 3.1416.
Area = outside diameter in feet squared times 3.1416.
Flow Rate—CFM Air = cubic feet per minute of air required at standard conditions, 60 °F. and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
The rate of discharge may be interpolated for intermediate values of surface area. For containers with total outside surface area greater than 2,500 square feet, the required flow rate can be calculated using the formula: Flow Rate CFM Air = 22.11 A 0 82, where A = outside surface area of the container in square feet.
| Containers | Minimum (percent) | Maximum (percent) |
|---|---|---|
| ASME-U-68, U-69 | 110 | 125 |
| ASME-U-200, U-201 | 95 | 100 |
| ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962 | 95 | 100 |
| API-ASME | 95 | 100 |
| U.S. Coast Guard | 95 | 100 |
As required by DOT Regulations.
| Type of container | Percent by weight | Percent by volume |
|---|---|---|
| Aboveground-Uninsulated | 56 | 82 |
| Aboveground-Uninsulated | 87.5 | |
| Aboveground-Insulated | 57 | 83.5 |
| Underground-Uninsulated | 58 | 85 |
| DOT—In accord with DOT regulations. |
The minimum design pressure for nonrefrigerated containers shall be 250 p.s.i.g.
Precaution shall be taken against damage to ammonia systems from vehicles.
This paragraph applies to systems utilizing containers with the storage of anhydrous ammonia under refrigerated conditions. All applicable rules of paragraph (b) of this section apply to this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and the materials shall be selected from those listed in API Standard 620, Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2, R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
and less shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable requirements of API Standard 620 including its appendix R.
When operating conditions make it advisable, a check valve shall be installed on the fill connection and a remotely operated shutoff valve on other connections located below the maximum liquid level.
Appurtenances shall be protected against tampering and physical damage.
Containers of such size as to require field fabrication shall, when moved and reinstalled, be reconstructed and reinspected in complete accordance with the requirements under which they were constructed. The containers shall be subjected to a pressure retest and if rerating is necessary, rerating shall be in accordance with applicable requirements.
Precaution shall be taken against damage from vehicles.
The condenser system may be cooled by air or water or both. The condenser shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. Provision shall be made for purging noncondensibles either manually or automatically.
A receiver shall be provided with a liquid-level control to discharge the liquid ammonia to storage. The receiver shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. and be equipped with the necessary connections, safety valves, and gaging device.
Refrigerated containers and pipelines which are insulated shall be covered with a material of suitable quality and thickness for the temperatures encountered. Insulation shall be suitably supported and protected against the weather. Weatherproofing shall be of a type which will not support flame propagation.
Cylinders shall comply with DOT specifications and shall be maintained, filled, packaged, marked, labeled, and shipped to comply with 49 CFR chapter I and the marking requirements set forth in § 1910.253(b)(1)(ii).
Cylinders shall be stored in an area free from ignitable debris and in such manner as to prevent external corrosion. Storage may be indoors or outdoors.
Cylinders filled in accordance with DOT regulations will become liquid full at 145 °F. Cylinders shall be protected from heat sources such as radiant flame and steampipes. Heat shall not be applied directly to cylinders to raise the pressure.
Cylinders shall be stored in such manner as to protect them from moving vehicles or external damage.
Any cylinder which is designed to have a valve protection cap shall have the cap securely in place when the cylinder is not in service.
Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted. Containers and pertinent equipment for tank motor vehicles for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia, in addition to complying with the requirements of this section, shall also comply with the requirements of DOT.
At least two chock blocks shall be provided. These blocks shall be placed to prevent rolling of the vehicle whenever it is parked during loading and unloading operations.
Where portable tank containers are used for farm storage they shall comply with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. When portable tank containers are used in lieu of cargo tanks and are permanently mounted on tank motor vehicles for the transportation of ammonia, they shall comply with the requirements of this paragraph.
This paragraph applies to containers of 1,200 gallons capacity or less and pertinent equipment mounted on farm vehicles (implements of husbandry) and used other than for the application of ammonia to the soil. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
There shall appear on each side and on the rear end of the container in letters at least 4 inches high, the words, “Caution—Ammonia” or the container shall be marked in accordance with DOT regulations.
All containers and flow-control devices shall be securely mounted.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
Purpose. This section contains requirements for preventing or minimizing the consequences of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or explosive chemicals. These releases may result in toxic, fire or explosion hazards.
Atmospheric tank means a storage tank which has been designed to operate at pressures from atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa).
Boiling point means the boiling point of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). For the purposes of this section, where an accurate boiling point is unavailable for the material in question, or for mixtures which do not have a constant boiling point, the 10 percent point of a distillation performed in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Petroleum Products, ASTM D-86-62, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, may be used as the boiling point of the liquid.
Catastrophic release means a major uncontrolled emission, fire, or explosion, involving one or more highly hazardous chemicals, that presents serious danger to employees in the workplace.
Facility means the buildings, containers or equipment which contain a process.
Highly hazardous chemical means a substance possessing toxic, reactive, flammable, or explosive properties and specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
Hot work means work involving electric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or similar flame or spark-producing operations.
Normally unoccupied remote facility means a facility which is operated, maintained or serviced by employees who visit the facility only periodically to check its operation and to perform necessary operating or maintenance tasks. No employees are permanently stationed at the facility.
Facilities meeting this definition are not contiguous with, and must be geographically remote from all other buildings, processes or persons.
Process means any activity involving a highly hazardous chemical including any use, storage, manufacturing, handling, or the on-site movement of such chemicals, or combination of these activities. For purposes of this definition, any group of vessels which are interconnected and separate vessels which are located such that a highly hazardous chemical could be involved in a potential release shall be considered a single process.
Replacement in kind means a replacement which satisfies the design specification.
Trade secret means any confidential formula, pattern, process, device, information or compilation of information that is used in an employer's business, and that gives the employer an opportunity to obtain an advantage over competitors who do not know or use it. See Appendix E to § 1910.1200—Definition of a Trade Secret (which sets out the criteria to be used in evaluating trade secrets).
In accordance with the schedule set forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the employer shall complete a compilation of written process safety information before conducting any process hazard analysis required by the standard. The compilation of written process safety information is to enable the employer and the employees involved in operating the process to identify and understand the hazards posed by those processes involving highly hazardous chemicals. This process safety information shall include information pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals used or produced by the process, information pertaining to the technology of the process, and information pertaining to the equipment in the process.
interlocks, detection or suppression systems).
Refresher training shall be provided at least every three years, and more often if necessary, to each employee involved in operating a process to assure that the employee understands and adheres to the current operating procedures of the process. The employer, in consultation with the employees involved in operating the process, shall determine the appropriate frequency of refresher training.
The employer shall ascertain that each employee involved in operating a process has received and understood the training required by this paragraph. The employer shall prepare a record which contains the identity of the employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
This paragraph applies to contractors performing maintenance or repair, turnaround, major renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered process. It does not apply to contractors providing incidental services which do not influence process safety, such as janitorial work, food and drink services, laundry, delivery or other supply services.
Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of this section apply to the following process equipment:
The employer shall establish and implement written procedures to maintain the on-going integrity of process equipment.
The employer shall train each employee involved in maintaining the on-going integrity of process equipment in an overview of that process and its hazards and in the procedures applicable to the employee's job tasks to assure that the employee can perform the job tasks in a safe manner.
The employer shall correct deficiencies in equipment that are outside acceptable limits (defined by the process safety information in paragraph (d) of this section) before further use or in a safe and timely manner when necessary means are taken to assure safe operation.
The employer shall establish and implement an emergency action plan for the entire plant in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.38. In addition, the emergency action plan shall include procedures for handling small releases. Employers covered under this standard may also be subject to the hazardous waste and emergency response provisions contained in 29 CFR 1910.120 (a), (p) and (q).
Appendix A to § 1910.119—List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics and Reactives (Mandatory)
This appendix contains a listing of toxic and reactive highly hazardous chemicals which present a potential for a catastrophic event at or above the threshold quantity.
| Chemical name | CAS * | TQ ** |
|---|---|---|
| Acetaldehyde | 75-07-0 | 2500 |
| Acrolein (2-Propenal) | 107-02-8 | 150 |
| Acrylyl Chloride | 814-68-6 | 250 |
| Allyl Chloride | 107-05-1 | 1000 |
| Allylamine | 107-11-9 | 1000 |
| Alkylaluminums | Varies | 5000 |
| Ammonia, Anhydrous | 7664-41-7 | 10000 |
| Ammonia solutions (>44% ammonia by weight) | 7664-41-7 | 15000 |
| Ammonium Perchlorate | 7790-98-9 | 7500 |
| Ammonium Permanganate | 7787-36-2 | 7500 |
| Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride) | 7784-42-1 | 100 |
| Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether | 542-88-1 | 100 |
| Boron Trichloride | 10294-34-5 | 2500 |
| Boron Trifluoride | 7637-07-2 | 250 |
| Bromine | 7726-95-6 | 1500 |
| Bromine Chloride | 13863-41-7 | 1500 |
| Bromine Pentafluoride | 7789-30-2 | 2500 |
| Bromine Trifluoride | 7787-71-5 | 15000 |
| 3-Bromopropyne (also called Propargyl Bromide) | 106-96-7 | 100 |
| Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) | 75-91-2 | 5000 |
| Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) | 614-45-9 | 7500 |
| Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene) | 75-44-5 | 100 |
| Carbonyl Fluoride | 353-50-4 | 2500 |
| Cellulose Nitrate (concentration >12.6% nitrogen) | 9004-70-0 | 2500 |
| Chlorine | 7782-50-5 | 1500 |
| Chlorine Dioxide | 10049-04-4 | 1000 |
| Chlorine Pentrafluoride | 13637-63-3 | 1000 |
| Chlorine Trifluoride | 7790-91-2 | 1000 |
| Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called Diethylaluminum Chloride) | 96-10-6 | 5000 |
| 1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene | 97-00-7 | 5000 |
| Chloromethyl Methyl Ether | 107-30-2 | 500 |
| Chloropicrin | 76-06-2 | 500 |
| Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mixture | None | 1500 |
| Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mixture | None | 1500 |
| Cumene Hydroperoxide | 80-15-9 | 5000 |
| Cyanogen | 460-19-5 | 2500 |
| Cyanogen Chloride | 506-77-4 | 500 |
| Cyanuric Fluoride | 675-14-9 | 100 |
| Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentration >70%) | 110-22-5 | 5000 |
| Diazomethane | 334-88-3 | 500 |
| Dibenzoyl Peroxide | 94-36-0 | 7500 |
| Diborane | 19287-45-7 | 100 |
| Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) | 110-05-4 | 5000 |
| Dichloro Acetylene | 7572-29-4 | 250 |
| Dichlorosilane | 4109-96-0 | 2500 |
| Diethylzinc | 557-20-0 | 10000 |
| Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate | 105-64-6 | 7500 |
| Dilaluroyl Peroxide | 105-74-8 | 7500 |
| Dimethyldichlorosilane | 75-78-5 | 1000 |
| Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- | 57-14-7 | 1000 |
| Dimethylamine, Anhydrous | 124-40-3 | 2500 |
| 2,4-Dinitroaniline | 97-02-9 | 5000 |
| Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide; concentration >60%) | 1338-23-4 | 5000 |
| Ethyl Nitrite | 109-95-5 | 5000 |
| Ethylamine | 75-04-7 | 7500 |
| Ethylene Fluorohydrin | 371-62-0 | 100 |
| Ethylene Oxide | 75-21-8 | 5000 |
| Ethyleneimine | 151-56-4 | 1000 |
| Fluorine | 7782-41-4 | 1000 |
| Formaldehyde (Formalin) | 50-00-0 | 1000 |
| Furan | 110-00-9 | 500 |
| Hexafluoroacetone | 684-16-2 | 5000 |
| Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous | 7647-01-0 | 5000 |
| Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous | 7664-39-3 | 1000 |
| Hydrogen Bromide | 10035-10-6 | 5000 |
| Hydrogen Chloride | 7647-01-0 | 5000 |
| Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous | 74-90-8 | 1000 |
| Hydrogen Fluoride | 7664-39-3 | 1000 |
| Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or greater) | 7722-84-1 | 7500 |
| Hydrogen Selenide | 7783-07-5 | 150 |
| Hydrogen Sulfide | 7783-06-4 | 1500 |
| Hydroxylamine | 7803-49-8 | 2500 |
| Iron, Pentacarbonyl | 13463-40-6 | 250 |
| Isopropylamine | 75-31-0 | 5000 |
| Ketene | 463-51-4 | 100 |
| Methacrylaldehyde | 78-85-3 | 1000 |
| Methacryloyl Chloride | 920-46-7 | 150 |
| Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate | 30674-80-7 | 100 |
| Methyl Acrylonitrile | 126-98-7 | 250 |
| Methylamine, Anhydrous | 74-89-5 | 1000 |
| Methyl Bromide | 74-83-9 | 2500 |
| Methyl Chloride | 74-87-3 | 15000 |
| Methyl Chloroformate | 79-22-1 | 500 |
| Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (concentration >60%) | 1338-23-4 | 5000 |
| Methyl Fluoroacetate | 453-18-9 | 100 |
| Methyl Fluorosulfate | 421-20-5 | 100 |
| Methyl Hydrazine | 60-34-4 | 100 |
| Methyl Iodide | 74-88-4 | 7500 |
| Methyl Isocyanate | 624-83-9 | 250 |
| Methyl Mercaptan | 74-93-1 | 5000 |
| Methyl Vinyl Ketone | 78-94-4 | 100 |
| Methyltrichlorosilane | 75-79-6 | 500 |
| Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl) | 13463-39-3 | 150 |
| Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or greater) | 7697-37-2 | 500 |
| Nitric Oxide | 10102-43-9 | 250 |
| Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline | 100-01-6 | 5000 |
| Nitromethane | 75-52-5 | 2500 |
| Nitrogen Dioxide | 10102-44-0 | 250 |
| Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO 2 ; N204; N203) | 10102-44-0 | 250 |
| Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitrogen Peroxide) | 10544-72-6 | 250 |
| Nitrogen Trifluoride | 7783-54-2 | 5000 |
| Nitrogen Trioxide | 10544-73-7 | 250 |
| Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also called Fuming Sulfuric Acid) | 8014-95-7 | 1,000 |
| Osmium Tetroxide | 20816-12-0 | 100 |
| Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide) | 7783-41-7 | 100 |
| Ozone | 10028-15-6 | 100 |
| Pentaborane | 19624-22-7 | 100 |
| Peracetic Acid (concentration >60% Acetic Acid; also called Peroxyacetic Acid) | 79-21-0 | 1000 |
| Perchloric Acid (concentration >60% by weight) | 7601-90-3 | 5000 |
| Perchloromethyl Mercaptan | 594-42-3 | 150 |
| Perchloryl Fluoride | 7616-94-6 | 5000 |
| Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration >60% Acetic Acid; also called Peracetic Acid) | 79-21-0 | 1000 |
| Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chloride) | 75-44-5 | 100 |
| Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide) | 7803-51-2 | 100 |
| Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called Phosphoryl Chloride) | 10025-87-3 | 1000 |
| Phosphorus Trichloride | 7719-12-2 | 1000 |
| Phosphoryl Chloride (also called Phosphorus Oxychloride) | 10025-87-3 | 1000 |
| Propargyl Bromide | 106-96-7 | 100 |
| Propyl Nitrate | 627-3-4 | 2500 |
| Sarin | 107-44-8 | 100 |
| Selenium Hexafluoride | 7783-79-1 | 1000 |
| Stibine (Antimony Hydride) | 7803-52-3 | 500 |
| Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) | 7446-09-5 | 1000 |
| Sulfur Pentafluoride | 5714-22-7 | 250 |
| Sulfur Tetrafluoride | 7783-60-0 | 250 |
| Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric Anhydride) | 7446-11-9 | 1000 |
| Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur Trioxide) | 7446-11-9 | 1000 |
| Tellurium Hexafluoride | 7783-80-4 | 250 |
| Tetrafluoroethylene | 116-14-3 | 5000 |
| Tetrafluorohydrazine | 10036-47-2 | 5000 |
| Tetramethyl Lead | 75-74-1 | 1000 |
| Thionyl Chloride | 7719-09-7 | 250 |
| Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane | 1558-25-4 | 100 |
| Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane | 27137-85-5 | 2500 |
| Trichlorosilane | 10025-78-2 | 5000 |
| Trifluorochloroethylene | 79-38-9 | 10000 |
| Trimethyoxysilane | 2487-90-3 | 1500 |
| * Chemical Abstract Service Number. | ||
| ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be covered by this standard). |
Appendix C to § 1910.119—Compliance Guidelines and Recommendations for Process Safety Management (Nonmandatory)
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as provides other helpful recommendations and information. Examples presented in this appendix are not the only means of achieving the performance goals in the standard. This appendix neither adds nor detracts from the requirements of the standard.
1. Introduction to Process Safety Management. The major objective of process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous chemicals especially into locations which could expose employees and others to serious hazards. An effective process safety management program requires a systematic approach to evaluating the whole process. Using this approach the process design, process technology, operational and maintenance activities and procedures, nonroutine activities and procedures, emergency preparedness plans and procedures, training programs, and other elements which impact the process are all considered in the evaluation. The various lines of defense that have been incorporated into the design and operation of the process to prevent or mitigate the release of hazardous chemicals need to be evaluated and strengthened to assure their effectiveness at each level. Process safety management is the proactive identification, evaluation and mitigation or prevention of chemical releases that could occur as a result of failures in process, procedures or equipment.
The process safety management standard targets highly hazardous chemicals that have the potential to cause a catastrophic incident. This standard as a whole is to aid employers in their efforts to prevent or mitigate episodic chemical releases that could lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and possibly to the surrounding community. To control these types of hazards, employers need to develop the necessary expertise, experiences, judgement and proactive initiative within their workforce to properly implement and maintain an effective process safety management program as envisioned in the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is required by the Clean Air Act Amendments as is the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan. Employers, who merge the two sets of requirements into their process safety management program, will better assure full compliance with each as well as enhancing their relationship with the local community.
While OSHA believes process safety management will have a positive effect on the safety of employees in workplaces and also offers other potential benefits to employers (increased productivity), smaller businesses which may have limited resources available to them at this time, might consider alternative avenues of decreasing the risks associated with highly hazardous chemicals at their workplaces. One method which might be considered is the reduction in the inventory of the highly hazardous chemical. This reduction in inventory will result in a reduction of the risk or potential for a catastrophic incident. Also, employers including small employers may be able to establish more efficient inventory control by reducing the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals on site below the established threshold quantities. This reduction can be accomplished by ordering smaller shipments and maintaining the minimum inventory necessary for efficient and safe operation. When reduced inventory is not feasible, then the employer might consider dispersing inventory to several locations on site. Dispersing storage into locations where a release in one location will not cause a release in another location is a practical method to also reduce the risk or portential for catastrophic incidents.
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act Amendments states that employers are to consult with their employees and their representatives regarding the employers efforts in the development and implementation of the process safety management program elements and hazard assessments. Section 304 also requires employers to train and educate their employees and to inform affected employees of the findings from incident investigations required by the process safety management program. Many employers, under their safety and health programs, have already established means and methods to keep employees and their representatives informed about relevant safety and health issues and employers may be able to adapt these practices and procedures to meet their obligations under this standard. Employers who have not implemented an occupational safety and health program may wish to form a safety and health committee of employees and management representatives to help the employer meet the obligations specified by this standard. These committees can become a significant ally in helping the employer to implement and maintain an effective process safety management program for all employees.
3. Process Safety Information. Complete and accurate written information concerning process chemicals, process technology, and process equipment is essential to an effective process safety management program and to a process hazards analysis. The compiled information will be a necessary resource to a variety of users including the team that will perform the process hazards analysis as required under paragraph (e); those developing the training programs and the operating procedures; contractors whose employees will be working with the process; those conducting the pre-startup reviews; local emergency preparedness planners; and insurance and enforcement officials.
The information to be compiled about the chemicals, including process intermediates, needs to be comprehensive enough for an accurate assessment of the fire and explosion characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safety and health hazards to workers, and the corrosion and erosion effects on the process equipment and monitoring tools. Current safety data sheet (SDS) information can be used to help meet this requirement which must be supplemented with process chemistry information including runaway reaction and over pressure hazards if applicable.
Process technology information will be a part of the process safety information package and it is expected that it will include diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of this section as well as employer established criteria for maximum inventory levels for process chemicals; limits beyond which would be considered upset conditions; and a qualitative estimate of the consequences or results of deviation that could occur if operating beyond the established process limits. Employers are encouraged to use diagrams which will help users understand the process.
A block flow diagram is used to show the major process equipment and interconnecting process flow lines and show flow rates, stream composition, temperatures, and pressures when necessary for clarity. The block flow diagram is a simplified diagram.
Process flow diagrams are more complex and will show all main flow streams including valves to enhance the understanding of the process, as well as pressures and temperatures on all feed and product lines within all major vessels, in and out of headers and heat exchangers, and points of pressure and temperature control. Also, materials of construction information, pump capacities and pressure heads, compressor horsepower and vessel design pressures and temperatures are shown when necessary for clarity. In addition, major components of control loops are usually shown along with key utilities on process flow diagrams.
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) may be the more appropriate type of diagrams to show some of the above details and to display the information for the piping designer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are to be used to describe the relationships between equipment and instrumentation as well as other relevant information that will enhance clarity. Computer software programs which do P&IDs or other diagrams useful to the information package, may be used to help meet this requirement.
The information pertaining to process equipment design must be documented. In other words, what were the codes and standards relied on to establish good engineering practice. These codes and standards are published by such organizations as the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American Petroleum Institute, American National Standards Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American Society for Testing and Materials, National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National Association of Corrosion Engineers, American Society of Exchange Manufacturers Association, and model building code groups.
In addition, various engineering societies issue technical reports which impact process design. For example, the American Institute of Chemical Engineers has published technical reports on topics such as two phase flow for venting devices. This type of technically recognized report would constitute good engineering practice.
For existing equipment designed and constructed many years ago in accordance with the codes and standards available at that time and no longer in general use today, the employer must document which codes and standards were used and that the design and construction along with the testing, inspection and operation are still suitable for the intended use. Where the process technology requires a design which departs from the applicable codes and standards, the employer must document that the design and construction is suitable for the intended purpose.
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process hazard evaluation, is one of the most important elements of the process safety management program. A PHA is an organized and systematic effort to identify and analyze the significance of potential hazards associated with the processing or handling of highly hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides information which will assist employers and employees in making decisions for improving safety and reducing the consequences of unwanted or unplanned releases of hazardous chemicals. A PHA is directed toward analyzing potential causes and consequences of fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flammable chemicals and major spills of hazardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equipment, instrumentation, utilities, human actions (routine and nonroutine), and external factors that might impact the process. These considerations assist in determining the hazards and potential failure points or failure modes in a process.
The selection of a PHA methodology or technique will be influenced by many factors including the amount of existing knowledge about the process. Is it a process that has been operated for a long period of time with little or no innovation and extensive experience has been generated with its use? Or, is it a new process or one which has been changed frequently by the inclusion of innovative features? Also, the size and complexity of the process will influence the decision as to the appropriate PHA methodology to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to certain limitations. For example, the checklist methodology works well when the process is very stable and no changes are made, but it is not as effective when the process has undergone extensive change. The checklist may miss the most recent changes and consequently the changes would not be evaluated. Another limitation to be considered concerns the assumptions made by the team or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good judgement and the assumptions made during the study need to be documented and understood by the team and reviewer and kept for a future PHA.
The team conducting the PHA need to understand the methodology that is going to be used. A PHA team can vary in size from two people to a number of people with varied operational and technical backgrounds. Some team members may only be a part of the team for a limited time. The team leader needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper implementation of the PHA methodology that is to be used and should be impartial in the evaluation. The other full or part time team members need to provide the team with expertise in areas such as process technology, process design, operating procedures and practices, including how the work is actually performed, alarms, emergency procedures, instrumentation, maintenance procedures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, including how the tasks are authorized, procurement of parts and supplies, safety and health, and any other relevant subject as the need dictates. At least one team member must be familiar with the process.
The ideal team will have an intimate knowledge of the standards, codes, specifications and regulations applicable to the process being studied. The selected team members need to be compatible and the team leader needs to be able to manage the team, and the PHA study. The team needs to be able to work together while benefiting from the expertise of others on the team or outside the team, to resolve issues, and to forge a consensus on the findings of the study and recommendations.
The application of a PHA to a process may involve the use of different methodologies for various parts of the process. For example, a process involving a series of unit operation of varying sizes, complexities, and ages may use different methodologies and team members for each operation. Then the conclusions can be integrated into one final study and evaluation. A more specific example is the use of a checklist PHA for a standard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall process. Also, for batch type processes like custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a representative batch may be used where there are only small changes of monomer or other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is documented for the full range and ratio of batch ingredients. Another process that might consider using a generic type of PHA is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply moved from site to site and therefore, a generic PHA may be used for these movable plants. Also, when an employer has several similar size gas plants and no sour gas is being processed at the site, then a generic PHA is feasible as long as the variations of the individual sites are accounted for in the PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large continuous process which has several control rooms for different portions of the process such as for a distillation tower and a blending operation, the employer may wish to do each segment separately and then integrate the final results.
Additionally, small businesses which are covered by this rule, will often have processes that have less storage volume, less capacity, and less complicated than processes at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would anticipate that the less complex methodologies would be used to meet the process hazard analysis criteria in the standard. These process hazard analyses can be done in less time and with a few people being involved. A less complex process generally means that less data, P&IDs, and process information is needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
Many small businesses have processes that are not unique, such as cold storage lockers or water treatment facilities. Where employer associations have a number of members with such facilities, a generic PHA, evolved from a checklist or what-if questions, could be developed and used by each employer effectively to reflect his/her particular process; this would simplify compliance for them.
When the employer has a number of processes which require a PHA, the employer must set up a priority system of which PHAs to conduct first. A preliminary or gross hazard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the processes that the employer has determined are subject to coverage by the process safety management standard. Consideration should first be given to those processes with the potential of adversely affecting the largest number of employees. This prioritizing should consider the potential severity of a chemical release, the number of potentially affected employees, the operating history of the process such as the frequency of chemical releases, the age of the process and any other relevant factors. These factors would suggest a ranking order and would suggest either using a weighing factor system or a systematic ranking method. The use of a preliminary hazard analysis would assist an employer in determining which process should be of the highest priority and thereby the employer would obtain the greatest improvement in safety at the facility.
Detailed guidance on the content and application of process hazard analysis methodologies is available from the American Institute of Chemical Engineers' Center for Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Operating procedures describe tasks to be performed, data to be recorded, operating conditions to be maintained, samples to be collected, and safety and health precautions to be taken. The procedures need to be technically accurate, understandable to employees, and revised periodically to ensure that they reflect current operations. The process safety information package is to be used as a resource to better assure that the operating procedures and practices are consistent with the known hazards of the chemicals in the process and that the operating parameters are accurate. Operating procedures should be reviewed by engineering staff and operating personnel to ensure that they are accurate and provide practical instructions on how to actually carry out job duties safely.
Operating procedures will include specific instructions or details on what steps are to be taken or followed in carrying out the stated procedures. These operating instructions for each procedure should include the applicable safety precautions and should contain appropriate information on safety implications. For example, the operating procedures addressing operating parameters will contain operating instructions about pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow rates, what to do when an upset condition occurs, what alarms and instruments are pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and other subjects. Another example of using operating instructions to properly implement operating procedures is in starting up or shutting down the process. In these cases, different parameters will be required from those of normal operation. These operating instructions need to clearly indicate the distinctions between startup and normal operations such as the appropriate allowances for heating up a unit to reach the normal operating parameters. Also the operating instructions need to describe the proper method for increasing the temperature of the unit until the normal operating temperature parameters are achieved.
Computerized process control systems add complexity to operating instructions. These operating instructions need to describe the logic of the software as well as the relationship between the equipment and the control system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to the operator.
Operating procedures and instructions are important for training operating personnel. The operating procedures are often viewed as the standard operating practices (SOPs) for operations. Control room personnel and operating staff, in general, need to have a full understanding of operating procedures. If workers are not fluent in English then procedures and instructions need to be prepared in a second language understood by the workers. In addition, operating procedures need to be changed when there is a change in the process as a result of the management of change procedures. The consequences of operating procedure changes need to be fully evaluated and the information conveyed to the personnel. For example, mechanical changes to the process made by the maintenance department (like changing a valve from steel to brass or other subtle changes) need to be evaluated to determine if operating procedures and practices also need to be changed. All management of change actions must be coordinated and integrated with current operating procedures and operating personnel must be oriented to the changes in procedures before the change is made. When the process is shut down in order to make a change, then the operating procedures must be updated before startup of the process.
Training in how to handle upset conditions must be accomplished as well as what operating personnel are to do in emergencies such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline ruptures. Communication between operating personnel and workers performing work within the process area, such as nonroutine tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating personnel in accordance with established procedures and to those performing the actual tasks. When the work is completed, operating personnel should be informed to provide closure on the job.
6. Employee Training. All employees, including maintenance and contractor employees, involved with highly hazardous chemicals need to fully understand the safety and health hazards of the chemicals and processes they work with for the protection of themselves, their fellow employees and the citizens of nearby communities. Training conducted in compliance with § 1910.1200, the Hazard Communication standard, will help employees to be more knowledgeable about the chemicals they work with as well as familiarize them with reading and understanding SDSs. However, additional training in subjects such as operating procedures and safety work practices, emergency evacuation and response, safety procedures, routine and nonroutine work authorization activities, and other areas pertinent to process safety and health will need to be covered by an employer's training program.
In establishing their training programs, employers must clearly define the employees to be trained and what subjects are to be covered in their training. Employers in setting up their training program will need to clearly establish the goals and objectives they wish to achieve with the training that they provide to their employees. The learning goals or objectives should be written in clear measurable terms before the training begins. These goals and objectives need to be tailored to each of the specific training modules or segments. Employers should describe the important actions and conditions under which the employee will demonstrate competence or knowledge as well as what is acceptable performance.
Hands-on-training where employees are able to use their senses beyond listening, will enhance learning. For example, operating personnel, who will work in a control room or at control panels, would benefit by being trained at a simulated control panel or panels. Upset conditions of various types could be displayed on the simulator, and then the employee could go through the proper operating procedures to bring the simulator panel back to the normal operating parameters. A training environment could be created to help the trainee feel the full reality of the situation but, of course, under controlled conditions. This realistic type of training can be very effective in teaching employees correct procedures while allowing them to also see the consequences of what might happen if they do not follow established operating procedures. Other training techniques using videos or on-the-job training can also be very effective for teaching other job tasks, duties, or other important information. An effective training program will allow the employee to fully participate in the training process and to practice their skill or knowledge.
Employers need to periodically evaluate their training programs to see if the necessary skills, knowledge, and routines are being properly understood and implemented by their trained employees. The means or methods for evaluating the training should be developed along with the training program goals and objectives. Training program evaluation will help employers to determine the amount of training their employees understood, and whether the desired results were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it appears that the trained employees are not at the level of knowledge and skill that was expected, the employer will need to revise the training program, provide retraining, or provide more frequent refresher training sessions until the deficiency is resolved. Those who conducted the training and those who received the training should also be consulted as to how best to improve the training process. If there is a language barrier, the language known to the trainees should be used to reinforce the training messages and information.
Careful consideration must be given to assure that employees including maintenance and contract employees receive current and updated training. For example, if changes are made to a process, impacted employees must be trained in the changes and understand the effects of the changes on their job tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as already discussed the evaluation of the employee's absorption of training will certainly influence the need for training.
7. Contractors. Employers who use contractors to perform work in and around processes that involve highly hazardous chemicals, will need to establish a screening process so that they hire and use contractors who accomplish the desired job tasks without compromising the safety and health of employees at a facility. For contractors, whose safety performance on the job is not known to the hiring employer, the employer will need to obtain information on injury and illness rates and experience and should obtain contractor references. Additionally, the employer must assure that the contractor has the appropriate job skills, knowledge and certifications (such as for pressure vessel welders). Contractor work methods and experiences should be evaluated. For example, does the contractor conducting demolition work swing loads over operating processes or does the contractor avoid such hazards?
Maintaining a site injury and illness log for contractors is another method employers must use to track and maintain current knowledge of work activities involving contract employees working on or adjacent to covered processes. Injury and illness logs of both the employer's employees and contract employees allow an employer to have full knowledge of process injury and illness experience. This log will also contain information which will be of use to those auditing process safety management compliance and those involved in incident investigations.
Contract employees must perform their work safely. Considering that contractors often perform very specialized and potentially hazardous tasks such as confined space entry activities and nonroutine repair activities it is quite important that their activities be controlled while they are working on or near a covered process. A permit system or work authorization system for these activities would also be helpful to all affected employers. The use of a work authorization system keeps an employer informed of contract employee activities, and as a benefit the employer will have better coordination and more management control over the work being performed in the process area. A well run and well maintained process where employee safety is fully recognized will benefit all of those who work in the facility whether they be contract employees or employees of the owner.
8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes, the employer will find a PHA helpful in improving the design and construction of the process from a reliability and quality point of view. The safe operation of the new process will be enhanced by making use of the PHA recommendations before final installations are completed. P&IDs are to be completed along with having the operating procedures in place and the operating staff trained to run the process before startup. The initial startup procedures and normal operating procedures need to be fully evaluated as part of the pre-startup review to assure a safe transfer into the normal operating mode for meeting the process parameters.
For existing processes that have been shutdown for turnaround, or modification, etc., the employer must assure that any changes other than “replacement in kind” made to the process during shutdown go through the management of change procedures. P&IDs will need to be updated as necessary, as well as operating procedures and instructions. If the changes made to the process during shutdown are significant and impact the training program, then operating personnel as well as employees engaged in routine and nonroutine work in the process area may need some refresher or additional training in light of the changes. Any incident investigation recommendations, compliance audits or PHA recommendations need to be reviewed as well to see what impacts they may have on the process before beginning the startup.
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need to review their maintenance programs and schedules to see if there are areas where “breakdown” maintenance is used rather than an on-going mechanical integrity program. Equipment used to process, store, or handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to be designed, constructed, installed and maintained to minimize the risk of releases of such chemicals. This requires that a mechanical integrity program be in place to assure the continued integrity of process equipment. Elements of a mechanical integrity program include the identification and categorization of equipment and instrumentation, inspections and tests, testing and inspection frequencies, development of maintenance procedures, training of maintenance personnel, the establishment of criteria for acceptable test results, documentation of test and inspection results, and documentation of manufacturer recommendations as to meantime to failure for equipment and instrumentation.
The first line of defense an employer has available is to operate and maintain the process as designed, and to keep the chemicals contained. This line of defense is backed up by the next line of defense which is the controlled release of chemicals through venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or overflow tanks which are designed to receive such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense are the primary lines of defense or means to prevent unwanted releases. The secondary lines of defense would include fixed fire protection systems like sprinklers, water spray, or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, designed drainage systems, and other systems which would control or mitigate hazardous chemicals once an unwanted release occurs. These primary and secondary lines of defense are what the mechanical integrity program needs to protect and strengthen these primary and secondary lines of defenses where appropriate.
The first step of an effective mechanical integrity program is to compile and categorize a list of process equipment and instrumentation for inclusion in the program. This list would include pressure vessels, storage tanks, process piping, relief and vent systems, fire protection system components, emergency shutdown systems and alarms and interlocks and pumps. For the categorization of instrumentation and the listed equipment the employer would prioritize which pieces of equipment require closer scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of various instrumentation and equipment parts would be known from the manufacturers data or the employer's experience with the parts, which would then influence the inspection and testing frequency and associated procedures. Also, applicable codes and standards such as the National Board Inspection Code, or those from the American Society for Testing and Material, American Petroleum Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American National Standards Institute, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, and other groups, provide information to help establish an effective testing and inspection frequency, as well as appropriate methodologies.
The applicable codes and standards provide criteria for external inspections for such items as foundation and supports, anchor bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires, nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, grounding connections, protective coatings and insulation, and external metal surfaces of piping and vessels, etc. These codes and standards also provide information on methodologies for internal inspection, and a frequency formula based on the corrosion rate of the materials of construction. Also, erosion both internal and external needs to be considered along with corrosion effects for piping and valves. Where the corrosion rate is not known, a maximum inspection frequency is recommended, and methods of developing the corrosion rate are available in the codes. Internal inspections need to cover items such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metallic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness measurements for vessels and piping; inspection for erosion, corrosion, cracking and bulges; internal equipment like trays, baffles, sensors and screens for erosion, corrosion or cracking and other deficiencies. Some of these inspections may be performed by state of local government inspectors under state and local statutes. However, each employer needs to develop procedures to ensure that tests and inspections are conducted properly and that consistency is maintained even where different employees may be involved. Appropriate training is to be provided to maintenance personnel to ensure that they understand the preventive maintenance program procedures, safe practices, and the proper use amd application of special equipment or unique tools that may be required. This training is part of the overall training program called for in the standard.
A quality assurance system is needed to help ensure that the proper materials of construction are used, that fabrication and inspection procedures are proper, and that installation procedures recognize field installation concerns. The quality assurance program is an essential part of the mechanical integrity program and will help to maintain the primary and secondary lines of defense that have been designed into the process to prevent unwanted chemical releases or those which control or mitigate a release. “As built” drawings, together with certifications of coded vessels and other equipment, and materials of construction need to be verified and retained in the quality assurance documentation. Equipment installation jobs need to be properly inspected in the field for use of proper materials and procedures and to assure that qualified craftsmen are used to do the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and welding rods need to be verified in the field. Also procedures for installation of safety devices need to be verified, such as the torque on the bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform torque on flange bolts, proper installation of pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a problem, it may be appropriate to conduct audits of the equipment supplier's facilities to better assure proper purchases of required equipment which is suitable for its intended service. Any changes in equipment that may become necessary will need to go through the management of change procedures.
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonroutine work which is conducted in process areas needs to be controlled by the employer in a consistent manner. The hazards identified involving the work that is to be accomplished must be communicated to those doing the work, but also to those operating personnel whose work could affect the safety of the process. A work authorization notice or permit must have a procedure that describes the steps the maintenance supervisor, contractor representative or other person needs to follow to obtain the necessary clearance to get the job started. The work authorization procedures need to reference and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout procedures, line breaking procedures, confined space entry procedures and hot work authorizations. This procedure also needs to provide clear steps to follow once the job is completed in order to provide closure for those that need to know the job is now completed and equipment can be returned to normal.
11. Managing Change. To properly manage changes to process chemicals, technology, equipment and facilities, one must define what is meant by change. In this process safety management standard, change includes all modifications to equipment, procedures, raw materials and processing conditions other than “replacement in kind”. These changes need to be properly managed by identifying and reviewing them prior to implementation of the change. For example, the operating procedures contain the operating parameters (pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the importance of operating within these limits. While the operator must have the flexibility to maintain safe operation within the established parameters, any operation outside of these parameters requires review and approval by a written management of change procedure.
Management of change covers such as changes in process technology and changes to equipment and instrumentation. Changes in process technology can result from changes in production rates, raw materials, experimentation, equipment unavailability, new equipment, new product development, change in catalyst and changes in operating conditions to improve yield or quality. Equipment changes include among others change in materials of construction, equipment specifications, piping pre-arrangements, experimental equipment, computer program revisions and changes in alarms and interlocks. Employers need to establish means and methods to detect both technical changes and mechanical changes.
Temporary changes have caused a number of catastrophes over the years, and employers need to establish ways to detect temporary changes as well as those that are permanent. It is important that a time limit for temporary changes be established and monitored since, without control, these changes may tend to become permanent. Temporary changes are subject to the management of change provisions. In addition, the management of change procedures are used to insure that the equipment and procedures are returned to their original or designed conditions at the end of the temporary change. Proper documentation and review of these changes is invaluable in assuring that the safety and health considerations are being incorporated into the operating procedures and the process.
Employers may wish to develop a form or clearance sheet to facilitate the processing of changes through the management of change procedures. A typical change form may include a description and the purpose of the change, the technical basis for the change, safety and health considerations, documentation of changes for the operating procedures, maintenance procedures, inspection and testing, P&IDs, electrical classification, training and communications, pre-startup inspection, duration if a temporary change, approvals and authorization. Where the impact of the change is minor and well understood, a check list reviewed by an authorized person with proper communication to others who are affected may be sufficient. However, for a more complex or significant design change, a hazard evaluation procedure with approvals by operations, maintenance, and safety departments may be appropriate. Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw materials, operating procedures, mechanical integrity programs, electrical classifications, etc., need to be noted so that these revisions can be made permanent when the drawings and procedure manuals are updated. Copies of process changes need to be kept in an accessible location to ensure that design changes are available to operating personnel as well as to PHA team members when a PHA is being done or one is being updated.
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident investigation is the process of identifying the underlying causes of incidents and implementing steps to prevent similar events from occurring. The intent of an incident investigation is for employers to learn from past experiences and thus avoid repeating past mistakes. The incidents for whicn OSHA expects employers to become aware and to investigate are the types of events which result in or could reasonably have resulted in a catastrophic release. Some of the events are sometimes referred to as “near misses,” meaning that a serious consequence did not occur, but could have.
Employers need to develop in-house capability to investigate incidents that occur in their facilities. A team needs to be assembled by the employer and trained in the techniques of investigation including how to conduct interviews of witnesses, needed documentation and report writing. A multi-disciplinary team is better able to gather the facts of the event and to analyze them and develop plausible scenarios as to what happened, and why. Team members should be selected on the basis of their training, knowledge and ability to contribute to a team effort to fully investigate the incident. Employees in the process area where the incident occurred should be consulted, interviewed or made a member of the team. Their knowledge of the events form a significant set of facts about the incident which occurred. The report, its findings and recommendations are to be shared with those who can benefit from the information. The cooperation of employees is essential to an effective incident investigation. The focus of the investigation should be to obtain facts, and not to place blame. The team and the investigation process should clearly deal with all involved individuals in a fair, open and consistent manner.
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer must address what actions employees are to take when there is an unwanted release of highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency preparedness or the employer's tertiary (third) lines of defense are those that will be relied on along with the secondary lines of defense when the primary lines of defense which are used to prevent an unwanted release fail to stop the release. Employers will need to decide if they want employees to handle and stop small or minor incidental releases. Whether they wish to mobilize the available resources at the plant and have them brought to bear on a more significant release. Or whether employers want their employees to evacuate the danger area and promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone area, and allow the local community emergency response organizations to handle the release. Or whether the employer wants to use some combination of these actions. Employers will need to select how many different emergency preparedness or tertiary lines of defense they plan to have and then develop the necessary plans and procedures, and appropriately train employees in their emergency duties and responsibilities and then implement these lines of defense.
Employers at a minimum must have an emergency action plan which will facilitate the prompt evacuation of employees due to an unwanted release of a highly hazardous chemical. This means that the employer will have a plan that will be activated by an alarm system to alert employees when to evacuate and, that employees who are physically impaired, will have the necessary support and assistance to get them to the safe zone as well. The intent of these requirements is to alert and move employees to a safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing alarms are to be avoided. The use of process control centers or similar process buildings in the process area as safe areas is discouraged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a large life loss has occurred in these structures because of where they have been sited and because they are not necessarily designed to withstand over-pressures from shockwaves resulting from explosions in the process area.
Unwanted incidental releases of highly hazardous chemicals in the process area must be addressed by the employer as to what actions employees are to take. If the employer wants employees to evacuate the area, then the emergency action plan will be activated. For outdoor processes where wind direction is important for selecting the safe route to a refuge area, the employer should place a wind direction indicator such as a wind sock or pennant at the highest point that can be seen throughout the process area. Employees can move in the direction of cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to the refuge area by knowing the wind direction.
If the employer wants specific employees in the release area to control or stop the minor emergency or incidental release, these actions must be planned for in advance and procedures developed and implemented. Preplanning for handling incidental releases for minor emergencies in the process area needs to be done, appropriate equipment for the hazards must be provided, and training conducted for those employees who will perform the emergency work before they respond to handle an actual release. The employer's training program, including the Hazard Communication standard training is to address the training needs for employees who are expected to handle incidental or minor releases.
Preplanning for releases that are more serious than incidental releases is another important line of defense to be used by the employer. When a serious release of a highly hazardous chemical occurs, the employer through preplanning will have determined in advance what actions employees are to take. The evacuation of the immediate release area and other areas as necessary would be accomplished under the emergency action plan. If the employer wishes to use plant personnel such as a fire brigade, spill control team, a hazardous materials team, or use employees to render aid to those in the immediate release area and control or mitigate the incident, these actions are covered by § 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) standard. If outside assistance is necessary, such as through mutual aid agreements between employers or local government emergency response organizations, these emergency responders are also covered by HAZWOPER. The safety and health protections required for emergency responders are the responsibility of their employers and of the on-scene incident commander.
Responders may be working under very hazardous conditions and therefore the objective is to have them competently led by an on-scene incident commander and the commander's staff, properly equipped to do their assigned work safely, and fully trained to carry out their duties safely before they respond to an emergency. Drills, training exercises, or simulations with the local community emergency response planners and responder organizations is one means to obtain better preparedness. This close cooperation and coordination between plant and local community emergency preparedness managers will also aid the employer in complying with the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan criteria.
One effective way for medium to large facilities to enhance coordination and communication during emergencies for on plant operations and with local community organizations is for employers to establish and equip an emergency control center. The emergency control center would be sited in a safe zone area so that it could be occupied throughout the duration of an emergency. The center would serve as the major ccommunication link between the on-scene incident commander and plant or corporate management as well as with the local community officials. The communication equipment in the emergency control center should include a network to receive and transmit information by telephone, radio or other means. It is important to have a backup communication network in case of power failure or one communication means fails. The center should also be equipped with the plant layout and community maps, utility drawings including fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate reference materials such as a government agency notification list, company personnel phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety data sheets, emergency plans and procedures manual, a listing with the location of emergency response equipment, mutual aid information, and access to meteorological or weather condition data and any dispersion modeling data.
14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to select a trained individual or assemble a trained team of people to audit the process safety management system and program. A small process or plant may need only one knowledgeable person to conduct an audit. The audit is to include an evaluation of the design and effectiveness of the process safety management system and a field inspection of the safety and health conditions and practices to verify that the employer's systems are effectively implemented. The audit should be conducted or lead by a person knowledgeable in audit techniques and who is impartial towards the facility or area being audited. The essential elements of an audit program include planning, staffing, conduting the audit, evaluation and corrective action, follow-up and documentation.
Planning in advance is essential to the success of the auditing process. Each employer needs to establish the format, staffing, scheduling and verification methods prior to conducting the audit. The format should be designed to provide the lead auditor with a procedure or checklist which details the requirements of each section of the standard. The names of the audit team members should be listed as part of the format as well. The checklist, if properly designed, could serve as the verification sheet which provides the auditor with the necessary information to expedite the review and assure that no requirements of the standard are omitted. This verification sheet format could also identify those elements that will require evaluation or a response to correct deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for developing the follow-up and documentation requirements.
The selection of effective audit team members is critical to the success of the program. Team members should be chosen for their experience, knowledge, and training and should be familiar with the processes and with auditing techniques, practices and procedures. The size of the team will vary depending on the size and complexity of the process under consideration. For a large, complex, highly instrumented plant, it may be desirable to have team members with expertise in process engineering and design, process chemistry, instrumentation and computer controls, electrical hazards and classifications, safety and health disciplines, maintenance, emergency preparedness, warehousing or shipping, and process safety auditing. The team may use part-time members to provide for the depth of expertise required as well as for what is actually done or followed, compared to what is written.
An effective audit includes a review of the relevant documentation and process safety information, inspection of the physical facilities, and interviews with all levels of plant personnel. Utilizing the audit procedure and checklist developed in the preplanning stage, the audit team can systematically analyze compliance with the provisions of the standard and any other corporate policies that are relevant. For example, the audit team will review all aspects of the training program as part of the overall audit. The team will review the written training program for adequacy of content, frequency of training, effectiveness of training in terms of its goals and objectives as well as to how it fits into meeting the standard's requirements, documentation, etc. Through interviews, the team can determine the employee's knowledge and awareness of the safety procedures, duties, rules, emergency response assignments, etc. During the inspection, the team can observe actual practices such as safety and health policies, procedures, and work authorization practices. This approach enables the team to identify deficiencies and determine where corrective actions or improvements are necessary.
An audit is a technique used to gather sufficient facts and information, including statistical information, to verify compliance with standards. Auditors should select as part of their preplanning a sample size sufficient to give a degree of confidence that the audit reflects the level of compliance with the standard. The audit team, through this systematic analysis, should document areas which require corrective action as well as those areas where the process safety management system is effective and working in an effective manner. This provides a record of the audit procedures and findings, and serves as a baseline of operation data for future audits. It will assist future auditors in determining changes or trends from previous audits.
Corrective action is one of the most important parts of the audit. It includes not only addressing the identified deficiencies, but also planning, followup, and documentation. The corrective action process normally begins with a management review of the audit findings. The purpose of this review is to determine what actions are appropriate, and to establish priorities, timetables, resource allocations and requirements and responsibilities. In some cases, corrective action may involve a simple change in procedure or minor maintenance effort to remedy the concern. Management of change procedures need to be used, as appropriate, even for what may seem to be a minor change. Many of the deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while some may require engineering studies or indepth review of actual procedures and practices. There may be instances where no action is necessary and this is a valid response to an audit finding. All actions taken, including an explanation where no action is taken on a finding, needs to be documented as to what was done and why.
It is important to assure that each deficiency identified is addressed, the corrective action to be taken noted, and the audit person or team responsible be properly documented by the employer. To control the corrective action process, the employer should consider the use of a tracking system. This tracking system might include periodic status reports shared with affected levels of management, specific reports such as completion of an engineering study, and a final implementation report to provide closure for audit findings that have been through management of change, if appropriate, and then shared with affected employees and management. This type of tracking system provides the employer with the status of the corrective action. It also provides the documentation required to verify that appropriate corrective actions were taken on deficiencies identified in the audit.
Appendix D to § 1910.119—Sources of Further Information (Nonmandatory)
1. Center for Chemical Process Safety, American Institute of Chemical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, (212) 705-7319.
2. “Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures,” American Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017.
3. “Guidelines for Technical Management of Chemical Process Safety,” Center for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017.
4. “Evaluating Process Safety in the Chemical Industry,” Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
5. “Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,” Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
6. “Management of Process Hazards,” American Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
7. “Improving Owner and Contractor Safety Performance,” American Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API, 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
8. Chemical Manufacturers Association (CMA's Manager Guide), First Edition, September 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037.
9. “Improving Construction Safety Performance,” Report A-3, The Business Roundtable; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes criteria to evaluate contractor safety performance and criteria to enhance contractor safety performance).
10. “Recommended Guidelines for Contractor Safety and Health,” Texas Chemical Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534.
11. “Loss Prevention in the Process Industries,” Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, Butterworth; London 1983.
12. “Safety and Health Program Management Guidelines,” 1989; U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
13. “Safety and Health Guide for the Chemical Industry,” 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.
14. “Review of Emergency Systems,” June 1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Washington, DC 20460.
15. “Technical Guidance for Hazards Analysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely Hazardous Substances,” December 1987; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Federal Emergency Management Administration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460.
16. “Accident Investigation * * * A New Approach,” 1983, National Safety Council; 444 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611-3991.
17. “Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classification Guide,” 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674.
18. “Chemical Exposure Index,” May 1988, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674.
[57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 15102, Apr. 15, 2019]
This section covers the following operations, unless the employer can demonstrate that the operation does not involve employee exposure or the reasonable possibility for employee exposure to safety or health hazards:
Clean-up operation means an operation where hazardous substances are removed, contained, incinerated, neutralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in any other manner processed or handled with the ultimate goal of making the site safer for people or the environment.
Decontamination means the removal of hazardous substances from employees and their equipment to the extent necessary to preclude the occurrence of foreseeable adverse health affects.
Emergency response or responding to emergencies means a response effort by employees from outside the immediate release area or by other designated responders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence which results, or is likely to result, in an uncontrolled release of a hazardous substance. Responses to incidental releases of hazardous substances where the substance can be absorbed, neutralized, or otherwise controlled at the time of release by employees in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel are not considered to be emergency responses within the scope of this standard. Responses to releases of hazardous substances where there is no potential safety or health hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical exposure) are not considered to be emergency responses.
Facility means (A) any building, structure, installation, equipment, pipe or pipeline (including any pipe into a sewer or publicly owned treatment works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, impoundment, ditch, storage container, motor vehicle, rolling stock, or aircraft, or (B) any site or area where a hazardous substance has been deposited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or otherwise come to be located; but does not include any consumer product in consumer use or any water-borne vessel.
Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team means an organized group of employees, designated by the employer, who are expected to perform work to handle and control actual or potential leaks or spills of hazardous substances requiring possible close approach to the substance. The team members perform responses to releases or potential releases of hazardous substances for the purpose of control or stabilization of the incident. A HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT team. A HAZMAT team, however, may be a separate component of a fire brigade or fire department.
Hazardous substance means any substance designated or listed under paragraphs (A) through (D) of this definition, exposure to which results or may result in adverse affects on the health or safety of employees:
Department of Transportation as hazardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices; and
Hazardous waste means—
Hazardous waste operation means any operation conducted within the scope of this standard.
Hazardous waste site or Site means any facility or location within the scope of this standard at which hazardous waste operations take place.
Health hazard means a chemical or a pathogen where acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposed employees. It also includes stress due to temperature extremes. The term health hazard includes chemicals that are classified in accordance with the Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, as posing one of the following hazardous effects: Acute toxicity (any route of exposure); skin corrosion or irritation; serious eye damage or eye irritation; respiratory or skin sensitization; germ cell mutagenicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive toxicity; specific target organ toxicity (single or repeated exposure); aspiration toxicity or simple asphyxiant. ( See Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Hazard Criteria (Mandatory) for the criteria for determining whether a chemical is classified as a health hazard.)
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life or health means an atmospheric concentration of any toxic, corrosive or asphyxiant substance that poses an immediate threat to life or would cause irreversible or delayed adverse health effects or would interfere with an individual's ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Oxygen deficiency means that concentration of oxygen by volume below which atmosphere supplying respiratory protection must be provided. It exists in atmospheres where the percentage of oxygen by volume is less than 19.5 percent oxygen.
Permissible exposure limit means the exposure, inhalation or dermal permissible exposure limit specified in 29 CFR part 1910, subparts G and Z.
Published exposure level means the exposure limits published in “NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Health Standards” dated 1986, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6 or if none is specified, the exposure limits published in the standards specified by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists in their publication “Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for 1987-88” dated 1987, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Post emergency response means that portion of an emergency response performed after the immediate threat of a release has been stabilized or eliminated and clean-up of the site has begun. If post emergency response is performed by an employer's own employees who were part of the initial emergency response, it is considered to be part of the initial response and not post emergency response. However, if a group of an employer's own employees, separate from the group providing initial response, performs the clean-up operation, then the separate group of employees would be considered to be performing post-emergency response and subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this section.
Qualified person means a person with specific training, knowledge and experience in the area for which the person has the responsibility and the authority to control.
Site safety and health supervisor (or official) means the individual located on a hazardous waste site who is responsible to the employer and has the authority and knowledge necessary to implement the site safety and health plan and verify compliance with applicable safety and health requirements.
Small quantity qenerator means a generator of hazardous wastes who in any calendar month generates no more than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of hazardous waste in that month.
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, means an area identified as an uncontrolled hazardous waste site by a governmental body, whether Federal, state, local or other where an accumulation of hazardous substances creates a threat to the health and safety of individuals or the environment or both. Some sites are found on public lands such as those created by former municipal, county or state landfills where illegal or poorly managed waste disposal has taken place. Other sites are found on private property, often belonging to generators or former generators of hazardous substance wastes. Examples of such sites include, but are not limited to, surface impoundments, landfills, dumps, and tank or drum farms. Normal operations at TSD sites are not covered by this definition.
Site excavations created during initial site preparation or during hazardous waste operations shall be shored or sloped as appropriate to prevent accidental collapse in accordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part 1926.
An employer who retains contractor or sub-contractor services for work in hazardous waste operations shall inform those contractors, sub-contractors, or their representatives of the site emergency response procedures and any potential fire, explosion, health, safety or other hazards of the hazardous waste operation that have been identified by the employer, including those identified in the employer's information program.
The written safety and health program shall be made available to any contractor or subcontractor or their representative who will be involved with the hazardous waste operation; to employees; to employee designated representatives; to OSHA personnel, and to personnel of other Federal, state, or local agencies with regulatory authority over the site.
The comprehensive workplan part of the program shall address the tasks and objectives of the site operations and the logistics and resources required to reach those tasks and objectives.
The site safety and health plan, which must be kept on site, shall address the safety and health hazards of each phase of site operation and include the requirements and procedures for employee protection.
The site safety and health plan, as a minimum, shall address the following:
The site specific safety and health plan shall provide for pre-entry briefings to be held prior to initiating any site activity, and at such other times as necessary to ensure that employees are apprised of the site safety and health plan and that this plan is being followed. The information and data obtained from site characterization and analysis work required in paragraph (c) of this section shall be used to prepare and update the site safety and health plan.
Inspections shall be conducted by the site safety and health supervisor or, in the absence of that individual, another individual who is knowledgeable in occupational safety and health, acting on behalf of the employer as necessary to determine the effectiveness of the site safety and health plan. Any deficiencies in the effectiveness of the site safety and health plan shall be corrected by the employer.
Hazardous waste sites shall be evaluated in accordance with this paragraph to identify specific site hazards and to determine the appropriate safety and health control procedures needed to protect employees from the identified hazards.
A preliminary evaluation of a site's characteristics shall be performed prior to site entry by a qualified person in order to aid in the selection of appropriate employee protection methods prior to site entry. Immediately after initial site entry, a more detailed evaluation of the site's specific characteristics shall be performed by a qualified person in order to further identify existing site hazards and to further aid in the selection of the appropriate engineering controls and personal protective equipment for the tasks to be performed.
All suspected conditions that may pose inhalation or skin absorption hazards that are immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH), or other conditions that may cause death or serious harm, shall be identified during the preliminary survey and evaluated during the detailed survey. Examples of such hazards include, but are not limited to, confined space entry, potentially explosive or flammable situations, visible vapor clouds, or areas where biological indicators such as dead animals or vegetation are located.
The following information to the extent available shall be obtained by the employer prior to allowing employees to enter a site:
Personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be provided and used during initial site entry in accordance with the following requirements:
The following monitoring shall be conducted during initial site entry when the site evaluation produces information that shows the potential for ionizing radiation or IDLH conditions, or when the site information is not sufficient reasonably to eliminate these possible conditions:
Once the presence and concentrations of specific hazardous substances and health hazards have been established, the risks associated with these substances shall be identified. Employees who will be working on the site shall be informed of any risks that have been identified. In situations covered by the Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, training required by that standard need not be duplicated.
Any information concerning the chemical, physical, and toxicologic properties of each substance known or expected to be present on site that is available to the employer and relevant to the duties an employee is expected to perform shall be made available to the affected employees prior to the commencement of their work activities. The employer may utilize information developed for the hazard communication standard for this purpose.
Appropriate site control procedures shall be implemented to control employee exposure to hazardous substances before clean-up work begins.
A site control program for protecting employees which is part of the employer's site safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of this section shall be developed during the planning stages of a hazardous waste clean-up operation and modified as necessary as new information becomes available.
The site control program shall, as a minimum, include: A site map; site work zones; the use of a “buddy system”; site communications including alerting means for emergencies; the standard operating procedures or safe work practices; and, identification of the nearest medical assistance. Where these requirements are covered elsewhere they need not be repeated.
The training shall thoroughly cover the following:
On-site management and supervisors directly responsible for, or who supervise employees engaged in, hazardous waste operations shall receive 40 hours initial training, and three days of supervised field experience (the training may be reduced to 24 hours and one day if the only area of their responsibility is employees covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and at least eight additional hours of specialized training at the time of job assignment on such topics as, but not limited to, the employer's safety and health program and the associated employee training program, personal protective equipment program, spill containment program, and health hazard monitoring procedure and techniques.
Trainers shall be qualified to instruct employees about the subject matter that is being presented in training. Such trainers shall have satisfactorily completed a training program for teaching the subjects they are expected to teach, or they shall have the academic credentials and instructional experience necessary for teaching the subjects. Instructors shall demonstrate competent instructional skills and knowledge of the applicable subject matter.
Employees and supervisors that have received and successfully completed the training and field experience specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall be certified by their instructor or the head instructor and trained supervisor as having successfully completed the necessary training. A written certificate shall be given to each person so certified. Any person who has not been so certified or who does not meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited from engaging in hazardous waste operations.
Employees who are engaged in responding to hazardous emergency situations at hazardous waste clean-up sites that may expose them to hazardous substances shall be trained in how to respond to such expected emergencies.
Employees specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, and managers and supervisors specified in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall receive eight hours of refresher training annually on the items specified in paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this section, any critique of incidents that have occurred in the past year that can serve as training examples of related work, and other relevant topics.
Employers who can show by documentation or certification that an employee's work experience and/or training has resulted in training equivalent to that training required in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall not be required to provide the initial training requirements of those paragraphs to such employees and shall provide a copy of the certification or documentation to the employee upon request. However, certified employees or employees with equivalent training new to a site shall receive appropriate, site specific training before site entry and have appropriate supervised field experience at the new site. Equivalent training includes any academic training or the training that existing employees might have already received from actual hazardous waste site work experience.
Employers engaged in operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section and not covered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and employers of employees specified in paragraph (q)(9) shall institute a medical surveillance program in accordance with this paragraph.
The medical surveillance program shall be instituted by the employer for the following employees:
Medical examinations and consultations shall be made available by the employer to each employee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the following schedules:
All medical examinations and procedures shall be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, preferably one knowledgeable in occupational medicine, and shall be provided without cost to the employee, without loss of pay, and at a reasonable time and place.
The employer shall provide one copy of this standard and its appendices to the attending physician, and in addition the following for each employee:
A written personal protective equipment program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of this section or required in paragraph (p)(1) of this section and which is also a part of the site-specific safety and health plan shall be established. The PPE program shall address the elements listed below. When elements, such as donning and doffing procedures, are provided by the manufacturer of a piece of equipment and are attached to the plan, they need not be rewritten into the plan as long as they adequately address the procedure or element.
selection based upon site hazards,
use and limitations of the equipment,
maintenance and storage,
decontamination and disposal,
training and proper fitting,
donning and doffing procedures,
inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use,
Upon initial entry, representative air monitoring shall be conducted to identify any IDLH condition, exposure over permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels, exposure over a radioactive material's dose limits or other dangerous condition such as the presence of flammable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient environments.
Periodic monitoring shall be conducted when the possibility of an IDLH condition or flammable atmosphere has developed or when there is indication that exposures may have risen over permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels since prior monitoring. Situations where it shall be considered whether the possibility that exposures have risen are as follows:
After the actual clean-up phase of any hazardous waste operation commences; for example, when soil, surface water or containers are moved or disturbed; the employer shall monitor those employees likely to have the highest exposures to hazardous substances and health hazards likely to be present above permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels by using personal sampling frequently enough to characterize employee exposures. If the employees likely to have the highest exposure are over permissible exposure limits or published exposure limits, then monitoring shall continue to determine all employees likely to be above those limits. The employer may utilize a representative sampling approach by documenting that the employees and chemicals chosen for monitoring are based on the criteria stated above.
Employers shall develop and implement a program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of this section, to inform employees, contractors, and subcontractors (or their representative) actually engaged in hazardous waste operations of the nature, level and degree of exposure likely as a result of participation in such hazardous waste operations. Employees, contractors and subcontractors working outside of the operations part of a site are not covered by this standard.
Department of Transportation specified salvage drums or containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent shall be kept available and used in areas where spills, leaks, or ruptures may occur.
The following procedures shall be followed in areas where drums or containers are being opened:
Material handiing equipment used to transfer drums and containers shall be selected, positioned and operated to minimize sources of ignition related to the equipment from igniting vapors released from ruptured drums or containers.
Drums and containers containing radioactive wastes shall not be handled until such time as their hazard to employees is properly assessed.
As a minimum, the following special precautions shall be taken when drums and containers containing or suspected of containing shock-sensitive wastes are handled:
Caution: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes may be prohibited under U.S. Department of Transportation regulations. Employers and their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21 and 173.50.
In addition to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5) of this section, the following precautions shall be taken, as a minimum, in handling laboratory waste packs (lab packs):
Sampling of containers and drums shall be done in accordance with a sampling procedure which is part of the site safety and health plan developed for and available to employees and others at the specific worksite.
Procedures for all phases of decontamination shall be developed and implemented in accordance with this paragraph.
Decontamination shall be performed in geographical areas that will minimize the exposure of uncontaminated employees or equipment to contaminated employees or equipment.
All equipment and solvents used for decontamination shall be decontaminated or disposed of properly.
Unauthorized employees shall not remove protective clothing or equipment from change rooms.
Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate protective clothing or equipment shall be informed of the potentially harmful effects of exposures to hazardous substances.
Where the decontamination procedure indicates a need for regular showers and change rooms outside of a contaminated area, they shall be provided and meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141. If temperature conditions prevent the effective use of water, then other effective means for cleansing shall be provided and used.
The employer shall develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address, as a minimum, the following:
and emergency equipment.
Areas accessible to employees shall be lighted to not less than the minimum illumination intensities listed in the following Table H-120.1 while any work is in progress:
| Foot-candles | Area or operations |
|---|---|
| 5 | General site areas. |
| 3 | Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and field maintenance areas. |
| 5 | Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and exitways. |
| 5 | Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Administration approved cap lights shall be acceptable for use in the tunnel heading.) |
| 10 | General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) |
| 30 | First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. |
| Number of employees | Minimum number of facilities |
|---|---|
| 20 or fewer | One. |
| More than 20, fewer than 200 | One toilet seat and one urinal per 40 employees. |
| More than 200 | One toilet seat and one urinal per 50 employees. |
All food service facilities and operations for employees shall meet the applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations of the jurisdictions in which they are located.
When temporary sleeping quarters are provided, they shall be heated, ventilated, and lighted.
The employer shall provide adequate washing facilities for employees engaged in operations where hazardous substances may be harmful to employees. Such facilities shall be in near proximity to the worksite; in areas where exposures are below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels and which are under the controls of the employer; and shall be so equipped as to enable employees to remove hazardous substances from themselves.
When hazardous waste clean-up or removal operations commence on a site and the duration of the work will require six months or greater time to complete, the employer shall provide showers and change rooms for all employees exposed to hazardous substances and health hazards involved in hazardous waste clean-up or removal operations.
The employer shall develop and implement a written safety and health program for employees involved in hazardous waste operations that shall be available for inspection by employees, their representatives and OSHA personnel. The program shall be designed to identify, evaluate and control safety and health hazards in their facilities for the purpose of employee protection, to provide for emergency response meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this section and to address as appropriate site analysis, engineering controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous waste handling procedures and uses of new technologies.
The employer shall implement a hazard communication program meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as part of the employer's safety and program.
The employer shall develop and implement a medical surveillance program meeting the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section.
The employer shall develop and implement a decontamination procedure meeting the requirements of paragraph (k) of this section.
The employer shall develop and implement procedures meeting the requirements of paragraph (o) of this section for introducing new and innovative equipment into the workplace.
Where employees will be handling drums or containers, the employer shall develop and implement procedures meeting the requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) through (viii) and (xi) of this section, as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section prior to starting such work.
The employer shall develop and implement a training program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program, for employees exposed to health hazards or hazardous substances at TSD operations to enable the employees to perform their assigned duties and functions in a safe and healthful manner so as not endanger themselves or other employees. The initial training shall be for 24 hours and refresher training shall be for eight hours annually. Employees who have received the initial training required by this paragraph shall be given a written certificate attesting that they have successfully completed the necessary training.
Employers who can show by an employee's previous work experience and/or training that the employee has had training equivalent to the initial training required by this paragraph, shall be considered as meeting the initial training requirements of this paragraph as to that employee. Equivalent training includes the training that existing employees might have already received from actual site work experience. Current employees shall receive eight hours of refresher training annually.
Trainers who teach initial training shall have satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the subjects they are expected to teach or they shall have the academic credentials and instruction experience necessary to demonstrate a good command of the subject matter of the courses and competent instructional skills.
An emergency response plan shall be developed and implemented by all employers. Such plans need not duplicate any of the subjects fully addressed in the employer's contingency planning required by permits, such as those issued by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, provided that the contingency plan is made part of the emergency response plan. The emergency response plan shall be a written portion of the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (p)(1) of this section. Employers who will evacuate their employees from the worksite location when an emergency occurs and who do not permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) if they provide an emergency action plan complying with 29 CFR 1910.38.
The employer shall develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address, as a minimum, the following areas to the extent that they are not addressed in any specific program required in this paragraph:
and emergency equipment.
Exception #1: An employer need not train all employees to the degree specified if the employer divides the work force in a manner such that a sufficient number of employees who have responsibility to control emergencies have the training specified, and all other employees, who may first respond to an emergency incident, have sufficient awareness training to recognize that an emergency response situation exists and that they are instructed in that case to summon the fully trained employees and not attempt control activities for which they are not trained.
Exception #2: An employer need not train all employees to the degree specified if arrangements have been made in advance for an outside fully-trained emergency response team to respond in a reasonable period and all employees, who may come to the incident first, have sufficient awareness training to recognize that an emergency response situation exists and they have been instructed to call the designated outside fully-trained emergency response team for assistance.
This paragraph covers employers whose employees are engaged in emergency response no matter where it occurs except that it does not cover employees engaged in operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emergency response organizations who have developed and implemented programs equivalent to this paragraph for handling releases of hazardous substances pursuant to section 303 of the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, 42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have met the requirements of this paragraph.
An emergency response plan shall be developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies prior to the commencement of emergency response operations. The plan shall be in writing and available for inspection and copying by employees, their representatives and OSHA personnel. Employers who will evacuate their employees from the danger area when an emergency occurs, and who do not permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency, are exempt from the requirements of this paragraph if they provide an emergency action plan in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.38.
The employer shall develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address, as a minimum, the following to the extent that they are not addressed elsewhere:
and emergency equipment.
Personnel, not necessarily an employer's own employees, who are skilled in the operation of certain equipment, such as mechanized earth moving or digging equipment or crane and hoisting equipment, and who are needed temporarily to perform immediate emergency support work that cannot reasonably be performed in a timely fashion by an employer's own employees, and who will be or may be exposed to the hazards at an emergency response scene, are not required to meet the training required in this paragraph for the employer's regular employees. However, these personnel shall be given an initial briefing at the site prior to their participation in any emergency response. The initial briefing shall include instruction in the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment, what chemical hazards are involved, and what duties are to be performed. All other appropriate safety and health precautions provided to the employer's own employees shall be used to assure the safety and health of these personnel.
Employees who, in the course of their regular job duties, work with and are trained in the hazards of specific hazardous substances, and who will be called upon to provide technical advice or assistance at a hazardous substance release incident to the individual in charge, shall receive training or demonstrate competency in the area of their specialization annually.
Training shall be based on the duties and function to be performed by each responder of an emergency response organization. The skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders, those hired after the effective date of this standard, shall be conveyed to them through training before they are permitted to take part in actual emergency operations on an incident. Employees who participate, or are expected to participate, in emergency response, shall be given training in accordance with the following paragraphs:
First responders at the awareness level are individuals who are likely to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who have been trained to initiate an emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the release. They would take no further action beyond notifying the authorities of the release. First responders at the awareness level shall have sufficient training or have had sufficient experience to objectively demonstrate competency in the following areas:
First responders at the operations level are individuals who respond to releases or potential releases of hazardous substances as part of the initial response to the site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the environment from the effects of the release. They are trained to respond in a defensive fashion without actually trying to stop the release. Their function is to contain the release from a safe distance, keep it from spreading, and prevent exposures. First responders at the operational level shall have received at least eight hours of training or have had sufficient experience to objectively demonstrate competency in the following areas in addition to those listed for the awareness level and the employer shall so certify:
Hazardous materials technicians are individuals who respond to releases or potential releases for the purpose of stopping the release. They assume a more aggressive role than a first responder at the operations level in that they will approach the point of release in order to plug, patch or otherwise stop the release of a hazardous substance. Hazardous materials technicians shall have received at least 24 hours of training equal to the first responder operations level and in addition have competency in the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
Hazardous materials specialists are individuals who respond with and provide support to hazardous materials technicians. Their duties parallel those of the hazardous materials technician, however, those duties require a more directed or specific knowledge of the various substances they may be called upon to contain. The hazardous materials specialist would also act as the site liaison with Federal, state, local and other government authorities in regards to site activities. Hazardous materials specialists shall have received at least 24 hours of training equal to the technician level and in addition have competency in the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
Incident commanders, who will assume control of the incident scene beyond the first responder awareness level, shall receive at least 24 hours of training equal to the first responder operations level and in addition have competency in the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
Trainers who teach any of the above training subjects shall have satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the subjects they are expected to teach, such as the courses offered by the U.S. National Fire Academy, or they shall have the training and/or academic credentials and instructional experience necessary to demonstrate competent instructional skills and a good command of the subject matter of the courses they are to teach.
Chemical protective clothing and equipment to be used by organized and designated HAZMAT team members, or to be used by hazardous materials specialists, shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this section.
Upon completion of the emergency response, if it is determined that it is necessary to remove hazardous substances, health hazards, and materials contaminated with them (such as contaminated soil or other elements of the natural environment) from the site of the incident, the employer conducting the clean-up shall comply with one of the following:
Appendix A to § 1910.120—Personal Protective Equipment Test Methods
This appendix sets forth the non-mandatory examples of tests which may be used to evaluate compliance with § 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii) and (iii). Other tests and other challenge agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit pressure test
1.0—Scope
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit material, seams, and closures to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow the gas tight integrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit to be evaluated.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation by specific hazardous substances is not determined by this test method.
2.0—Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator; may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in combination with the wearer's gloves and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating parts of the body from direct contact with a potentially hazardous liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
3.0—Summary of test method
3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and modified for the test. The test apparatus is attached to the suit to permit inflation to the pre-test suit expansion pressure for removal of suit wrinkles and creases. The pressure is lowered to the test pressure and monitored for three minutes. If the pressure drop is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and is removed from service. The test is repeated after leak location and repair.
4.0—Required Supplies
4.1 Source of compressed air.
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, including a pressure measurement device with a sensitivity of at least 1/4 inch water gauge.
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing tape.
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush.
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing device.
5.0—Safety Precautions
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the correct pressure safety devices required for the source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall perform a visual inspection of the suit. Check the suit for seam integrity by visually examining the seams and gently pulling on the seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fittings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure and show no signs of deterioration.
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with any other normal inlet or exhaust points (such as umbilical air line fittings or face piece opening) with tape or other appropriate means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should be exercised in the sealing process not to damage any of the suit components.
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies.
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by providing an improvised connection point on the suit for connecting an airline. Attach the pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit suit inflation from a compressed air source equipped with a pressure indicating regulator. The leak tightness of the pressure test apparatus should be tested before and after each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the suit and assuring a pressure of three inches water gauge for three minutes can be maintained. If a component is removed for the test, that component shall be replaced and a second test conducted with another component removed to permit a complete test of the ensemble.
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) and the suit test pressure (B) shall be supplied by the suit manufacturer, but in no case shall they be less than: (A) = three inches water gauge; and (B) = two inches water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be no less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B).
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure inside is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test expansion suit pressure. Allow at least one minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pressure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the ending suit pressure. The difference between the suit test pressure and the ending suit test pressure (B − C) shall be defined as the suit pressure drop.
6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during the three-minute test period, the suit fails the test and shall be removed from service.
7.0—Retest Procedure
7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and brushing or wiping the entire suit (including seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solution. Observe the suit for the formation of soap bubbles, which is an indication of a leak. Repair all identified leaks.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0.
8.0—Report
8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded:
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique fit features, e.g., special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with the specific observation times. If the ending pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as failing the test. When possible, the specific leak location shall be identified in the test records. Retest pressure data shall be recorded as an additional test.
8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used shall be identified and the sensitivity of the pressure gauge shall be recorded.
8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pressure test even if repairs are being made at the test location.
Caution
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit qualitative leak test
1.0—Scope
1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit integrity by detecting inward leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modifications are made to the suit to carry out this test, the results from this practice provide a realistic test for the integrity of the entire suit.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and degradation is not determined by this test method. ASTM test methods are available to test suit materials for these characteristics and the tests are usually conducted by the manufacturers of the suits.
2.0—Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator; may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in combination with the wearer's gloves, and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating parts of the body from direct contact with a potentially hazardous liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number expressing the level of protection provided by a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is calculated by dividing the test room challenge agent concentration by the concentration of challenge agent found inside the suit. The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is dependent on the challenge agent monitoring methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient the greater the protection provided by the TECP suit.
3.0—Summary of recommended practice
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH 4 OH) required to generate the test atmosphere is determined using the directions outlined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person wearing the appropriate respiratory equipment (either a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air respirator) and worn inside the enclosed test room. The concentrated aqueous ammonia solution is taken by the suited individual into the test room and poured into an open plastic pan. A two-minute evaporation period is observed before the test room concentration is measured, using a high range ammonia length of stain detector tube. When the ammonia vapor reaches a concentration of between 1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual starts a standardized exercise protocol to stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is completed, the test room concentration is measured again. The suited individual exits the test room and his stand-by person measures the ammonia concentration inside the suit using a low range ammonia length of stain detector tube or other more sensitive ammonia detector. A stand-by person is required to observe the test individual during the test procedure; aid the person in donning and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the suit can be calculated by dividing the average test area concentration by the interior suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equivalent is placed on the inside of the suit face piece lens so that the suited individual is able to detect a color change and know if the suit has a significant leak. If a color change is observed the individual shall leave the test room immediately.
4.0—Required supplies
4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide (58% by weight).
4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indicating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5-10 ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 (blue)]
4.3 A supply of high range (0.5-10 volume percent) and low range (5-700 ppm) detector tubes for ammonia and the corresponding sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia detectors can be substituted for the low range detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of this practice.
4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volumetric measuring device of at least 50 milliliters in volume with an accuracy of at least ±1 milliliters.
5.0—Safety precautions
5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide, NH 4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liquid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory protection. The person conducting the test shall review the SDS for aqueous ammonia.
5.2 Since the established permissible exposure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15 minute STEL, only persons wearing a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air respirator shall be in the chamber. Normally only the person wearing the totally-encapsulating suit will be inside the chamber. A stand-by person shall have a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a positive pressure supplied air respirator available to enter the test area should the suited individual need assistance.
5.3 A method to monitor the suited individual must be used during this test. Visual contact is the simplest but other methods using communication devices are acceptable.
5.4 The test room shall be large enough to allow the exercise protocol to be carried out and then to be ventilated to allow for easy exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere after the test(s) are completed.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically screened for the use of respiratory protection and checked for allergies to ammonia before participating in this test procedure.
6.0—Test procedure
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milliliters of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution per cubic foot of test area volume to determine the approximate volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia required to generate 1000 ppm in the test area.
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place it into a closed plastic container.
6.1.3 Place the container, several high range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump in the clean test pan and locate it near the test area entry door so that the suited individual has easy access to these supplies.
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip and fasten one end of the strip to the inside of the suit face shield lens where it can be seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator strip with distilled water. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the detector part of the indicator paper by touching it. A small piece of masking tape or equivalent should be used to attach the indicator strip to the interior of the suit face shield.
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with this method of attachment, the indicator strip can be attached to the outside of the respirator face piece lens being used during the test.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device normally used with the suit, and then don the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure all openings which are intended to be sealed (zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting valves.
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should be exhausted from the chamber during the test because this will dilute the ammonia challenge concentrations.
6.5 Open the container with the pre-measured volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia within the enclosed test room, and pour the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. Wait two minutes to allow for adequate volatilization of the concentrated aqueous ammonia. A small mixing fan can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of the ammonia solution.
6.6 After two minutes a determination of the ammonia concentration within the chamber should be made using the high range colorimetric detector tube. A concentration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be generated before the exercises are started.
6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the following four minute exercise protocol should be followed:
6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising motions completed in one minute.
6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a one-minute period.
6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 complete motions of the arms from above the head to touching of the toes in a one-minute period.
6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete standing and squatting motions in a one-minute period.
6.8 If at any time during the test the colorimetric indicating paper should change colors, the test should be stopped and section 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
6.9 After completion of the test exercise, the test area concentration should be measured again using the high range colorimetric detector tube.
6.10 Exit the test area.
6.11 The opening created by the suit zipper or other appropriate suit penetration should be used to determine the ammonia concentration in the suit with the low range length of stain detector tube or other ammonia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be sampled far enough from the enclosed test area to prevent a false ammonia reading.
6.12 After completion of the measurement of the suit interior ammonia concentration the test is concluded and the suit is doffed and the respirator removed.
6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room should be turned on and allowed to run for enough time to remove the ammonia gas. The fan shall be vented to the outside of the building.
6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit interior (five ppm ammonia (NH 3 ) or more for the length of stain detector tube) indicates that the suit has failed the test. When other ammonia detectors are used a lower level of detection is possible, and it should be specified as the pass/fail criteria.
6.15 By following this test method, an intrusion coefficient of approximately 200 or more can be measured with the suit in a completely operational condition. If the intrusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the suit is suitable for emergency response and field use.
7.0—Retest procedures
7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for leaks by following the pressure test in test A above.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in the test procedure 6.0.
8.0—Report
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded.
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of purchase, material of construction, and unique suit features; e.g., special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 General description of test room used for test.
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of ammonia detector strips and color change data.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and expiration date of the length of stain ammonia detector tubes. The brand name and model of the sampling pump should also be recorded. If another type of ammonia detector is used, it should be identified along with its minimum detection limit for ammonia.
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two test area concentrations, their average, the interior suit concentration, and the calculated intrusion coefficient. Retest data shall be recorded as an additional test.
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be specified as “suit passed” or “suit failed,” and the date of the test. Any detectable ammonia (five ppm or greater for the length of stain detector tube) in the suit interior indicates the suit has failed this test. When other ammonia detectors are used, a lower level of detection is possible and it should be specified as the pass fail criteria.
Caution
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
Appendix B to § 1910.120—General Description and Discussion of the Levels of Protection and Protective Gear
This appendix sets forth information about personal protective equipment (PPE) protection levels which may be used to assist employers in complying with the PPE requirements of this section.
As required by the standard, PPE must be selected which will protect employees from the specific hazards which they are likely to encounter during their work on-site.
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a complex process which should take into consideration a variety of factors. Key factors involved in this process are identification of the hazards, or suspected hazards; their routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye or skin contact); and the performance of the PPE materials (and seams) in providing a barrier to these hazards. The amount of protection provided by PPE is material-hazard specific. That is, protective equipment materials will protect well against some hazardous substances and poorly, or not at all, against others. In many instances, protective equipment materials cannot be found which will provide continuous protection from the particular hazardous substance. In these cases the breakthrough time of the protective material should exceed the work durations.
Other factors in this selection process to be considered are matching the PPE to the employee's work requirements and task-specific conditions. The durability of PPE materials, such as tear strength and seam strength, should be considered in relation to the employee's tasks. The effects of PPE in relation to heat stress and task duration are a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some cases layers of PPE may be necessary to provide sufficient protection, or to protect expensive PPE inner garments, suits or equipment.
The more that is known about the hazards at the site, the easier the job of PPE selection becomes. As more information about the hazards and conditions at the site becomes available, the site supervisor can make decisions to up-grade or down-grade the level of PPE protection to match the tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an employer can use to begin the selection of the appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site information may suggest the use of combinations of PPE selected from the different protection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being more suitable to the hazards of the work. It should be cautioned that the listing below does not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in relation to the specific hazards at the job site, and that PPE selection, evaluation and re-selection is an ongoing process until sufficient information about the hazards and PPE performance is obtained.
Part A. Personal protective equipment is divided into four categories based on the degree of protection afforded. (See part B of this appendix for further explanation of Levels A, B, C, and D hazards.)
I. Level A —To be selected when the greatest level of skin, respiratory, and eye protection is required.
The following constitute Level A equipment; it may be used as appropriate;
1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Long underwear. 1
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank.
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit construction, may be worn over totally-encapsulating suit).
II. Level B —The highest level of respiratory protection is necessary but a lesser level of skin protection is needed.
The following constitute Level B equipment; it may be used as appropriate.
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1
8. Hard hat. 1
9. [Reserved]
10. Face shield. 1
III. Level C —The concentration(s) and type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and the criteria for using air purifying respirators are met.
The following constitute Level C equipment; it may be used as appropriate.
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. 1
1 Optional, as applicable.
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. 1
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) 1.
8. Hard hat. 1
9. Escape mask. 1
10. Face shield. 1
IV. Level D —A work uniform affording minimal protection, used for nuisance contamination only.
The following constitute Level D equipment; it may be used as appropriate:
1. Coveralls.
2. Gloves. 1
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). 1
5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles*.
6. Hard hat. 1
7. Escape mask. 1
8. Face shield. 1
Part B. The types of hazards for which levels A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate are described below:
I. Level A —Level A protection should be used when:
1. The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the highest level of protection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory system based on either the measured (or potential for) high concentration of atmospheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the site operations and work functions involve a high potential for splash, immersion, or exposure to unexpected vapors, gases, or particulates of materials that are harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin;
2. Substances with a high degree of hazard to the skin are known or suspected to be present, and skin contact is possible; or
3. Operations are being conducted in confined, poorly ventilated areas, and the absence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been determined.
II. Level B —Level B protection should be used when:
1. The type and atmospheric concentration of substances have been identified and require a high level of respiratory protection, but less skin protection;
2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent oxygen; or
3. The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-reading organic vapor detection instrument, but vapors and gases are not suspected of containing high levels of chemicals harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin.
III. Level C —Level C protection should be used when:
1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid splashes, or other direct contact will not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed skin;
2. The types of air contaminants have been identified, concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available that can remove the contaminants; and
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying respirators are met.
IV. Level D —Level D protection should be used when:
1. The atmosphere contains no known hazard; and
2. Work functions preclude splashes, immersion, or the potential for unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any chemicals.
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical protective clothing, it should be noted that the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical protective clothing. The standards that have been adopted by include:
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Clothing).
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations (EPA Level B Protective Clothing).
These standards apply documentation and performance requirements to the manufacture of chemical protective suits. Chemical protective suits meeting these requirements are labelled as compliant with the appropriate standard. It is recommended that chemical protective suits that meet these standards be used.
Appendix C to § 1910.120—Compliance Guidelines
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort will require an occupational safety and health program headed by the site coordinator or the employer's representative. The purpose of the program will be the protection of employees at the site and will be an extension of the employer's overall safety and health program. The program will need to be developed before work begins on the site and implemented as work proceeds as stated in paragraph (b). The program is to facilitate coordination and communication of safety and health issues among personnel responsible for the various activities which will take place at the site. It will provide the overall means for planning and implementing the needed safety and health training and job orientation of employees who will be working at the site. The program will provide the means for identifying and controlling worksite hazards and the means for monitoring program effectiveness. The program will need to cover the responsibilities and authority of the site coordinator or the employer's manager on the site for the safety and health of employees at the site, and the relationships with contractors or support services as to what each employer's safety and health responsibilities are for their employees on the site. Each contractor on the site needs to have its own safety and health program so structured that it will smoothly interface with the program of the site coordinator or principal contractor.
Also those employers involved with treating, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have implemented a safety and health program for their employees. This program is to include the hazard communication program required in paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the employers comprehensive overall safety and health program. This program is to be in writing.
Each site or workplace safety and health program will need to include the following: (1) Policy statements of the line of authority and accountability for implementing the program, the objectives of the program and the role of the site safety and health supervisor or manager and staff; (2) means or methods for the development of procedures for identifying and controlling workplace hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for the development and communication to employees of the various plans, work rules, standard operating procedures and practices that pertain to individual employees and supervisors; (4) means for the training of supervisors and employees to develop the needed skills and knowledge to perform their work in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the program and for improving the effectiveness of the program. The management and employees should be trying continually to improve the effectiveness of the program thereby enhancing the protection being afforded those working on the site.
Accidents on the site or workplace should be investigated to provide information on how such occurrences can be avoided in the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on the site or workplace, they will need to be investigated to determine what needs to be done to prevent this incident from occurring again. Such information will need to be used as feedback on the effectiveness of the program and the information turned into positive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Receipt of employee suggestions or complaints relating to safety and health issues involved with site or workplace activities is also a feedback mechanism that can be used effectively to improve the program and may serve in part as an evaluative tool(s).
For the development and implementation of the program to be the most effective, professional safety and health personnel should be used. Certified Safety Professionals, Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Registered Professional Safety Engineers are good examples of professional stature for safety and health managers who will administer the employer's program.
2. Training. The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of paragraph (e) of this standard should address: the safety and health hazards employees should expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up sites; what control measures or techniques are effective for those hazards; what monitoring procedures are effective in characterizing exposure levels; what makes an effective employer's safety and health program; what a site safety and health plan should include; hands on training with personal protective equipment and clothing they may be expected to use; the contents of the OSHA standard relevant to the employee's duties and function; and, employee's responsibilities under OSHA and other regulations. Supervisors will need training in their responsibilities under the safety and health program and its subject areas such as the spill containment program, the personal protective equipment program, the medical surveillance program, the emergency response plan and other areas.
The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of this standard should address: the employers safety and health program elements impacting employees; the hazard communication program; the medical surveillance program; the hazards and the controls for such hazards that employees need to know for their job duties and functions. All require annual refresher training.
The training programs for employees covered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of this standard should address those competencies required for the various levels of response such as: the hazards associated with hazardous substances; hazard identification and awareness; notification of appropriate persons; the need for and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; the decontamination procedures to be used; preplanning activities for hazardous substance incidents including the emergency reponse plan; company standard operating procedures for hazardous substance emergency responses; the use of the incident command system and other subjects. Hands-on training should be stressed whenever possible. Critiques done after an incident which include an evaluation of what worked and what did not and how could the incident be better handled the next time may be counted as training time.
For hazardous materials specialists (usually members of hazardous materials teams), the training should address the care, use and/or testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of plugging and patching equipment and other subject areas.
Officers and leaders who may be expected to be in charge at an incident should be fully knowledgeable of their company's incident command system. They should know where and how to obtain additional assistance and be familiar with the local district's emergency response plan and the state emergency response plan.
Specialist employees such as technical experts, medical experts or environmental experts that work with hazardous materials in their regular jobs, who may be sent to the incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer or governmental agency to advise and assist the person in charge of the incident should have training on an annual basis. Their training should include the care and use of personal protective equipment including respirators; knowledge of the incident command system and how they are to relate to it; and those areas needed to keep them current in their respective field as it relates to safety and health involving specific hazardous substances.
Those skilled support personnel, such as employees who work for public works departments or equipment operators who operate bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who may be called to the incident scene to provide emergency support assistance, should have at least a safety and health briefing before entering the area of potential or actual exposure. These skilled support personnel, who have not been a part of the emergency response plan and do not meet the training requirements, should be made aware of the hazards they face and should be provided all necessary protective clothing and equipment required for their tasks.
There are two National Fire Protection Association standards, NFPA 472—“Standard for Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous Material Incidents” and NFPA 471—“Recommended Practice for Responding to Hazardous Material Incidents”, which are excellent resource documents to aid fire departments and other emergency response organizations in developing their training program materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance on the skills and knowledge needed for first responder awareness level, first responder operations level, hazmat technicians, and hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for the officer corp who will be in charge of hazardous substance incidents.
3. Decontamination. Decontamination procedures should be tailored to the specific hazards of the site, and may vary in complexity and number of steps, depending on the level of hazard and the employee's exposure to the hazard. Decontamination procedures and PPE decontamination methods will vary depending upon the specific substance, since one procedure or method may not work for all substances. Evaluation of decontamination methods and procedures should be performed, as necessary, to assure that employees are not exposed to hazards by re-using PPE. References in appendix D may be used for guidance in establishing an effective decontamination program. In addition, the U.S. Coast Guard's Manual, “Policy Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chemical Releases,” U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing an effective decontamination program.
4. Emergency response plans. States, along with designated districts within the states, will be developing or have developed local emergency response plans. These state and district plans should be utilized in the emergency response plans called for in the standard. Each employer should assure that its emergency response plan is compatible with the local plan. The major reference being used to aid in developing the state and local district plans is the Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, NRT-1. The current Emergency Response Guidebook from the U.S. Department of Transportation, CMA's CHEMTREC and the Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook may also be used as resources.
Employers involved with treatment, storage, and disposal facilities for hazardous waste, which have the required contingency plan called for by their permit, would not need to duplicate the same planning elements. Those items of the emergency response plan that are properly addressed in the contingency plan may be substituted into the emergency response plan required in 1910.120 or otherwise kept together for employer and employee use.
5. Personal protective equipment programs. The purpose of personal protective clothing and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate individuals from the chemical, physical, and biologic hazards that may be encountered at a hazardous substance site.
As discussed in appendix B, no single combination of protective equipment and clothing is capable of protecting against all hazards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunction with other protective methods and its effectiveness evaluated periodically.
The use of PPE can itself create significant worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vision, mobility, and communication. For any given situation, equipment and clothing should be selected that provide an adequate level of protection. However, over-protection, as well as under-protection, can be hazardous and should be avoided where possible.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program should be to protect the wearer from safety and health hazards, and to prevent injury to the wearer from incorrect use and/or malfunction of the PPE. To accomplish these goals, a comprehensive PPE program should include hazard identification, medical monitoring, environmental surveillance, selection, use, maintenance, and decontamination of PPE and its associated training.
The written PPE program should include policy statements, procedures, and guidelines. Copies should be made available to all employees, and a reference copy should be made available at the worksite. Technical data on equipment, maintenance manuals, relevant regulations, and other essential information should also be collected and maintained.
6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph 1910.120(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach to effectively control and manage operations at an emergency incident. The individual in charge of the ICS is the senior official responding to the incident. The ICS is not much different than the “command post” approach used for many years by the fire service. During large complex fires involving several companies and many pieces of apparatus, a command post would be established. This enabled one individual to be in charge of managing the incident, rather than having several officers from different companies making separate, and sometimes conflicting, decisions. The individual in charge of the command post would delegate responsibility for performing various tasks to subordinate officers. Additionally, all communications were routed through the command post to reduce the number of radio transmissions and eliminate confusion. However, strategy, tactics, and all decisions were made by one individual.
The ICS is a very similar system, except it is implemented for emergency response to all incidents, both large and small, that involve hazardous substances.
For a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS may perform many tasks of the ICS. There may not be any, or little, delegation of tasks to subordinates. For example, in response to a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS, in addition to normal command activities, may become the safety officer and may designate only one employee (with proper equipment) as a back-up to provide assistance if needed. OSHA does recommend, however, that at least two employees be designated as back-up personnel since the assistance needed may include rescue.
To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the following scenario might develop during a small incident, such as an overturned tank truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
The first responding senior officer would implement and take command of the ICS. That person would size-up the incident and determine if additional personnel and apparatus were necessary; would determine what actions to take to control the leak; and, determine the proper level of personal protective equipment. If additional assistance is not needed, the individual in charge of the ICS would implement actions to stop and control the leak using the fewest number of personnel that can effectively accomplish the tasks. The individual in charge of the ICS then would designate himself as the safety officer and two other employees as a back-up in case rescue may become necessary. In this scenario, decontamination procedures would not be necessary.
A large complex incident may require many employees and difficult, time-consuming efforts to control. In these situations, the individual in charge of the ICS will want to delegate different tasks to subordinates in order to maintain a span of control that will keep the number of subordinates, that are reporting, to a manageable level.
Delegation of task at large incidents may be by location, where the incident scene is divided into sectors, and subordinate officers coordinate activities within the sector that they have been assigned.
Delegation of tasks can also be by function. Some of the functions that the individual in charge of the ICS may want to delegate at a large incident are: medical services; evacuation; water supply; resources (equipment, apparatus); media relations; safety; and, site control (integrate activities with police for crowd and traffic control). Also for a large incident, the individual in charge of the ICS will designate several employees as back-up personnel; and a number of safety officers to monitor conditions and recommend safety precautions.
Therefore, no matter what size or complexity an incident may be, by implementing an ICS there will be one individual in charge who makes the decisions and gives directions; and, all actions, and communications are coordinated through one central point of command. Such a system should reduce confusion, improve safety, organize and coordinate actions, and should facilitate effective management of the incident.
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety and security of response personnel and others in the area of an emergeny response incident site should be of primary concern to the incident commander. The use of a site safety and control plan could greatly assist those in charge of assuring the safety and health of employees on the site.
A comprehensive site safety and control plan should include the following: summary analysis of hazards on the site and a risk analysis of those hazards; site map or sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transition or decontamination zone, work or hot zone); use of the buddy system; site communications; command post or command center; standard operating procedures and safe work practices; medical assistance and triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air contaminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination procedures and area; and other relevant areas. This plan should be a part of the employer's emergency response plan or an extension of it to the specific site.
8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers handling hazardous substances may be exposed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, biologic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a medical surveillance program is essential to assess and monitor workers' health and fitness for employment in hazardous waste operations and during the course of work; to provide emergency and other treatment as needed; and to keep accurate records for future reference.
The Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities developed by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an excellent example of the types of medical testing that should be done as part of a medical surveillance program.
9. New Technology and Spill Containment Programs. Where hazardous substances may be released by spilling from a container that will expose employees to the hazards of the materials, the employer will need to implement a program to contain and control the spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well as use of absorbents like diatomaceous earth, are traditional techniques which have proven to be effective over the years. However, in recent years new products have come into the marketplace, the use of which complement and increase the effectiveness of these traditional methods. These new products also provide emergency responders and others with additional tools or agents to use to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
These agents can be rapidly applied over a large area and can be uniformly applied or otherwise can be used to build a small dam, thus improving the workers' ability to control spilled material. These application techniques enhance the intimate contact between the agent and the spilled material allowing for the quickest effect by the agent or quickest control of the spilled material. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled materials, to suppress vapor generation from spilled materials, and to do both. Some special agents, which when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, will react in a controlled manner with the spilled material to neutralize acids or caustics, or greatly reduce the level of hazard of the spilled material.
There are several modern methods and devices for use by emergency response personnel or others involved with spill control efforts to safely apply spill control agents to control spilled material hazards. These include portable pressurized applicators similar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar to portable fire fighting foam systems which allow the operator to apply the agent without having to come into contact with the spilled material. The operator is able to apply the agent to the spilled material from a remote position.
The solidification of liquids provides for rapid containment and isolation of hazardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-off points or at the edges of the spill, the reactant solid will automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of the material. Clean-up of hazardous substances is greatly improved when solidifying agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or activated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly applied, these agents can totally solidify liquid hazardous substances or neutralize or absorb them, which results in materials which are less hazardous and easier to handle, transport, and dispose of. The concept of spill treatment, to create less hazardous substances, will improve the safety and level of protection of employees working at spill clean-up operations or emergency response operations to spills of hazardous substances.
The use of vapor suppression agents for volatile hazardous substances, such as flammable liquids and those substances which present an inhalation hazard, is important for protecting workers. The rapid and uniform distribution of the agent over the surface of the spilled material can provide quick vapor knockdown. There are temporary and long-term foam-type agents which are effective on vapors and dusts, and activated carbon adsorption agents which are effective for vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. The proper use of hose lines or hand-held portable pressurized applicators provides good mobility and permits the worker to deliver the agent from a safe distance without having to step into the untreated spilled material. Some of these systems can be recharged in the field to provide coverage of larger spill areas than the design limits of a single charged applicator unit. Some of the more effective agents can solidify the liquid flammable hazardous substances and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 °F so the resulting substance may be handled as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particularly § 261.21).
All workers performing hazardous substance spill control work are expected to wear the proper protective clothing and equipment for the materials present and to follow the employer's established standard operating procedures for spill control. All involved workers need to be trained in the established operating procedures; in the use and care of spill control equipment; and in the associated hazards and control of such hazards of spill containment work.
These new tools and agents are the things that employers will want to evaluate as part of their new technology program. The treatment of spills of hazardous substances or wastes at an emergency incident as part of the immediate spill containment and control efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a permit exception is described in 40 CFR 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
Appendix D to § 1910.120—References
The following references may be consulted for further information on the subject of this standard:
1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—January 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Hazardous Waste Sites.
2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2-2.37A—January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous Waste Site Activities.
3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—January 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form, OSHA 175.
4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 1986.
5. Memorandum of Understanding Among the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the United States Coast Guard, and the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance for Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, October 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Revised periodically.
7. The Decontamination of Response Personnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support Division, December 1984.
8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support Division, April 1985.
9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support Division, Environmental Response Team; November 1984.
10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Hazardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9-85/006; September 1985.
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bulletin, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health; December 1982.
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Hazardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health; October 1984.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook, International Association of Fire Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, 1987.
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Materials Training, Planning and Preparedness, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, DC, July 1986.
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983.
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chemical Manufacturers Association, Washington, DC 20037, 1986.
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, NRT-1, Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987.
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, May 1983.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and Industry, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August 1987.
Appendix E to § 1910.120—Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following non-mandatory general criteria may be used for assistance in developing site-specific training curriculum used to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These are generic guidelines and they are not presented as a complete training curriculum for any specific employer. Site-specific training programs must be developed on the basis of a needs assessment of the hazardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response operation in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120.
It is noted that the legal requirements are set forth in the regulatory text of § 1910.120. The guidance set forth here presents a highly effective program that in the areas covered would meet or exceed the regulatory requirements. In addition, other approaches could meet the regulatory requirements.
Suggested General Criteria
Definitions:
“Competent” means possessing the skills, knowledge, experience, and judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as determined by the employer.
“Demonstration” means the showing by actual use of equipment or procedures.
“Hands-on training” means training in a simulated work environment that permits each student to have experience performing tasks, making decisions, or using equipment appropriate to the job assignment for which the training is being conducted.
“Initial training” means training required prior to beginning work.
“Lecture” means an interactive discourse with a class lead by an instructor.
“Proficient” means meeting a stated level of achievement.
“Site-specific” means individual training directed to the operations of a specific job site.
“Training hours” means the number of hours devoted to lecture, learning activities, small group work sessions, demonstration, evaluations, or hands-on experience.
Suggested core criteria:
1. Training facility. The training facility should have available sufficient resources, equipment, and site locations to perform didactic and hands-on training when appropriate. Training facilities should have sufficient organization, support staff, and services to conduct training in each of the courses offered.
2. Training Director. Each training program should be under the direction of a training director who is responsible for the program. The Training Director should have a minimum of two years of employee education experience.
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem competent on the basis of previous documented experience in their area of instruction, successful completion of a “train-the-trainer” program specific to the topics they will teach, and an evaluation of instructional competence by the Training Director.
Instructors should be required to maintain professional competency by participating in continuing education or professional development programs or by completing successfully an annual refresher course and having an annual review by the Training Director.
The annual review by the Training Director should include observation of an instructor's delivery, a review of those observations with the trainer, and an analysis of any instructor or class evaluations completed by the students during the previous year.
4. Course materials. The Training Director should approve all course materials to be used by the training provider. Course materials should be reviewed and updated at least annually. Materials and equipment should be in good working order and maintained properly.
All written and audio-visual materials in training curricula should be peer reviewed by technically competent outside reviewers or by a standing advisory committee.
Reviews should possess expertise in the following disciplines were applicable: occupational health, industrial hygiene and safety, chemical/environmental engineering, employee education, or emergency response. One or more of the peer reviewers should be an employee experienced in the work activities to which the training is directed.
5. Students. The program for accepting students should include:
a. Assurance that the student is or will be involved in work where chemical exposures are likely and that the student possesses the skills necessary to perform the work.
b. A policy on the necessary medical clearance.
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands-on activity requiring the use of personal protective equipment should have the following student-instructor ratios. For Level C or Level D personal protective equipment the ratio should be 10 students per instructor. For Level A or Level B personal protective equipment the ratio should be 5 students per instructor.
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should be evaluated and documented by the use of a written assessment and a skill demonstration selected and developed by the Training Director and training staff. The assessment and demonstration should evaluate the knowledge and individual skills developed in the course of training. The level of minimum achievement necessary for proficiency shall be specified in writing by the Training Director.
If a written test is used, there should be a minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is used in combination with a skills demonstration, a minimum of 25 questions should be used. If a skills demonstration is used, the tasks chosen and the means to rate successful completion should be fully documented by the Training Director.
The content of the written test or of the skill demonstration shall be relevant to the objectives of the course. The written test and skill demonstration should be updated as necessary to reflect changes in the curriculum and any update should be approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency assessment methods, regardless of the approach or combination of approaches used, should be justified, documented and approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency of those taking the additional courses for supervisors should be evaluated and documented by using proficiency assessment methods acceptable to the Training Director. These proficiency assessment methods must reflect the additional responsibilities borne by supervisory personnel in hazardous waste operations or emergency response.
8. Course certificate. Written documentation should be provided to each student who satisfactorily completes the training course. The documentation should include:
a. Student's name.
b. Course title.
c. Course date.
d. Statement that the student has successfully completed the course.
e. Name and address of the training provider.
f. An individual identification number for the certificate.
g. List of the levels of personal protective equipment used by the student to complete the course.
This documentation may include a certificate and an appropriate wallet-sized laminated card with a photograph of the student and the above information. When such course certificate cards are used, the individual identification number for the training certificate should be shown on the card.
9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should maintain records listing the dates courses were presented, the names of the individual course attenders, the names of those students successfully completing each course, and the number of training certificates issued to each successful student. These records should be maintained for a minimum of five years after the date an individual participated in a training program offered by the training provider. These records should be available and provided upon the student's request or as mandated by law.
10. Program quality control. The Training Director should conduct or direct an annual written audit of the training program. Program modifications to address deficiencies, if any, should be documented, approved, and implemented by the training provider. The audit and the program modification documents should be maintained at the training facility.
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
Factors listed here are suggested criteria for determining the quality and appropriateness of employee health and safety training for hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
A. Training Plan.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program's curriculum development, instructor training, distribution of course materials, and direct student training should be considered, including
1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/agendas;
2. The different training requirements of the various target populations, as specified in the appropriate generic training curriculum;
3. The process for the development of curriculum, which includes appropriate technical input, outside review, evaluation, program pretesting.
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction methods;
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, progress, and performance during the training.
B. Program management, Training Director, staff, and consultants.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff performance and delivering an effective training program should be considered, including
1. Demonstration of the training director's leadership in assuring quality of health and safety training.
2. Demonstration of the competency of the staff to meet the demands of delivering high quality hazardous waste employee health and safety training.
3. Organization charts establishing clear lines of authority.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the relationship of the training staff to the overall program.
5. Evidence that the training organizational structure suits the needs of the training program.
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the training methods used by the instructors.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by the training director and staff to the training program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to students.
9. Availability and commitment of the training program of adequate human and equipment resources in the areas of
a. Health effects,
b. Safety,
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE),
d. Operational procedures,
e. Employee protection practices/procedures.
10. Appropriateness of management controls.
11. Adequacy of the organization and appropriate resources assigned to assure appropriate training.
12. In the case of multiple-site training programs, adequacy of satellite centers management.
C. Training facilities and resources.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facilities and resources for supporting the training program should be considered, including,
1. Space and equipment to conduct the training.
2. Facilities for representative hands-on training.
3. In the case of multiple-site programs, equipment and facilities at the satellite centers.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement.
D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality control and evaluation plans for training programs should be considered, including:
1. A balanced advisory committee and/or competent outside reviewers to give overall policy guidance;
2. Clear and adequate definition of the composition and active programmatic role of the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of the advisory committee or outside reviewers' meetings or written communication.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback, updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations to provide feedback for training program improvement.
E. Students
Adequacy and appropriateness of the program for accepting students should be considered, including
1. Assurance that the student already possess the necessary skills for their job, including necessary documentation.
2. Appropriateness of methods the program uses to ensure that recruits are capable of satisfactorily completing training.
3. Review and compliance with any medical clearance policy.
F. Institutional Environment and Administrative Support
The adequacy and appropriateness of the institutional environment and administrative support system for the training program should be considered, including
1. Adequacy of the institutional commitment to the employee training program.
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the administrative structure and administrative support.
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions
Key questions for evaluating the quality and appropriateness of an overall training program should include the following:
1. Are the program objectives clearly stated?
2. Is the program accomplishing its objectives?
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff available?
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, demonstration, and hands-on training?
5. Is the program providing quality employee health and safety training that fully meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
6. What are the program's main strengths?
7. What are the program's main weaknesses?
8. What is recommended to improve the program?
9. Are instructors instructing according to their training outlines?
10. Is the evaluation tool current and appropriate for the program content?
11. Is the course material current and relevant to the target group?
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following training curriculum guidelines are for those operations specifically identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring training. Issues such as qualifications of instructors, training certification, and similar criteria appropriate to all categories of operations addressed in 1910.120 have been covered in the preceding section and are not re-addressed in each of the generic guidelines. Basic core requirements for training programs that are addressed include
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, and disposal facilities.
3. Emergency Response.
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and Site-specific Training
1. Off-site training. Training course content for hazardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR 1910.120(e), should include the following topics or procedures:
a. Regulatory knowledge.
b. Technical knowledge.
c. Technical skills.
d. Additional suggested items.
2. Refresher training.
The 8-hour annual refresher training required in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified training providers. Refresher training should include at a minimum the following topics and procedures:
3. On-site training.
a. The employer should provide employees engaged in hazardous waste site activities with information and training prior to initial assignment into their work area, as follows:
b. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training and should provide a review and access to the site safety and plan as follows:
c. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information and training on personal protective equipment used at the site, such as the following:
to be used based upon known or anticipated site hazards.
limitations of materials and construction; limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical considerations; use and limitations of respirator equipment as well as documentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134.
inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use.
donning and doffing procedures.
decontamination and disposal procedures.
maintenance and storage.
d. The employer should instruct the employee about the site medical surveillance program relative to the particular site, including
e. The employees will review and discuss the site safety plan as part of the training program. The location of the site safety plan and all written programs should be discussed with employees including a discussion of the mechanisms for access, review, and references described.
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities.
1. As a minimum, the training course required in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p) should include the following topics:
2. The individual employer should provide hazardous waste employees with information and training prior to an employee's initial assignment into a work area. The training and information should cover the following topics:
C. Emergency response training.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1910.120(q) are directed toward private sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix are directed toward that employee population. However, they also impact indirectly through State OSHA or USEPA regulations some public sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix may be applied to both employee populations.
States with OSHA state plans must cover their employees with regulations at least as effective as the Federal OSHA standards. Public employees in states without approved state OSHA programs covering hazardous waste operations and emergency response are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR 311, a regulation virtually identical to § 1910.120.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix and therefore not an enforceable standard, OSHA recommends that those employers, employees or volunteers in public sector emergency response organizations outside Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the following criteria in developing their own training programs. A unified approach to training at the community level between emergency response organizations covered by Federal OSHA and those not covered directly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an effective community response to the release or potential release of hazardous substances in the community.
a. General considerations.
Emergency response organizations are required to consider the topics listed in § 1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organizations may use some or all of the following topics to supplement those mandatory topics when developing their response training programs. Many of the topics would require an interaction between the response provider and the individuals responsible for the site where the response would be expected.
b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts, and other relevant sources of information addressing hazardous substance releases. Familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
The incident commander is the individual who, at any one time, is responsible for and in control of the response effort. This individual is the person responsible for the direction and coordination of the response effort. An incident commander's position should be occupied by the most senior, appropriately trained individual present at the response site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by the level of response provided, the position may be occupied by many individuals during a particular response as the need for greater authority, responsibility, or training increases. It is possible for the first responder at the awareness level to assume the duties of incident commander until a more senior and appropriately trained individual arrives at the response site.
Therefore, any emergency responder expected to perform as an incident commander should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the position at the level of response they will be providing including the following:
[54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56 FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991; 59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 76 FR 80738, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 17776, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9313, Feb. 8, 2013; 84 FR 21597, May 14, 2019]
This section lists the paragraph headings contained in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.126.
§ 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations: Coverage and definitions.
§ 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and coating operations.
§ 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping and coating operations that use flammable or combustible liquids.
§ 1910.126 Additional requirements for special dipping and coating operations.
Adjacent area means any area within 20 feet (6.1 m) of a vapor area that is not separated from the vapor area by tight partitions.
Approved means that the equipment so designated is listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, as defined by § 1910.7.
Autoignition temperature means the minimum temperature required to cause self-sustained combustion, independent of any other source of heat.
Dip tank means a container holding a liquid other than water and that is used for dipping or coating. An object may be immersed (or partially immersed) in a dip tank or it may be suspended in a vapor coming from the tank.
Flammable liquid means any liquid having a flashpoint at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C).
Flashpoint means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off a vapor in sufficient concentration to ignite if tested in accordance with the test methods in Appendix B to § 1910.1200—Physical Hazard Criteria.
Lower flammable limit (LFL) means the lowest concentration of a material that will propagate a flame. The LFL is usually expressed as a percent by volume of the material in air (or other oxidant).
Vapor area means any space containing a dip tank, including its drain boards, associated drying or conveying equipment, and any surrounding area where the vapor concentration exceeds 25% of the LFL of the liquid in the tank.
You means the employer, as defined by the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq. ).
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
Z9.2-1979, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems;
Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids;
A Manual of Recommended Practice” (22nd ed., 1995); or
Z9.1-1971, Practices for Ventilation and Operation of Open-Surface Tanks, and NFPA 34-1966, Standard for Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible Liquids.
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
If you use flammable liquids, you must comply with the requirements of this section as well as the requirements of §§ 1910.123, 1910.124, and 1910.126, as applicable.
| You must also comply with this section if: | And: |
|---|---|
| • The flashpoint of the liquid is 199.4 °F (93 °C) or above | • The liquid is heated as part of the operation; or • A heated object is placed in the liquid. |
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
In addition to the requirements in §§ 1910.123 through 1910.125, you must comply with any requirement in this section that applies to your operation.
[64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, as amended at 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
Protective equipment, including personal protective equipment for eyes, face, head, and extremities, protective clothing, respiratory devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall be provided, used, and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition wherever it is necessary by reason of hazards of processes or environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption, inhalation or physical contact.
Where employees provide their own protective equipment, the employer shall be responsible to assure its adequacy, including proper maintenance, and sanitation of such equipment.
All personal protective equipment shall be of safe design and construction for the work to be performed.
Defective or damaged personal protective equipment shall not be used.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 59 FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33910, July 1, 1994; 72 FR 64428, Nov. 15, 2007; 76 FR 33606, June 8, 2011; 81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016]
| Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Operations | Electrode Size 1 ⁄ 32 in. | Arc Current | Minimum* Protective Shade |
| Shielded metal arc welding | Less than 3 | Less than 60 | 7 |
| 3-5 | 60-160 | 8 | |
| 5-8 | 160-250 | 10 | |
| More than 8 | 250-550 | 11 | |
| Gas metal arc welding and flux cored arc welding | less than 60 | 7 | |
| 60-160 | 10 | ||
| 160-250 | 10 | ||
| 250-500 | 10 | ||
| Gas Tungsten arc welding | less than 50 | 8 | |
| 50-150 | 8 | ||
| 150-500 | 10 | ||
| Air carbon | (Light) | less than 500 | 10 |
| Arc cutting | (Heavy) | 500-1000 | 11 |
| Plasma arc welding | less than 20 | 6 | |
| 20-100 | 8 | ||
| 100-400 | 10 | ||
| 400-800 | 11 | ||
| Plasma arc cutting | (light)** | less than 300 | 8 |
| (medium)** | 300-400 | 9 | |
| (heavy)** | 400-800 | 10 | |
| Torch brazing | 3 | ||
| Torch soldering | 2 | ||
| Carbon arc welding | 14 |
| Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Operations | Plate thickness—inches | Plate thickness—mm | Minimum* Protective Shade |
| Gas Welding: | |||
| Light | Under 1/8 | Under 3.2 | 4 |
| Medium | 1/8 to 1/2 | 3.2 to 12.7 | 5 |
| Heavy | Over 1/2 | Over 12.7 | 6 |
| Oxygen cutting: | |||
| Light | Under 1 | Under 25 | 3 |
| Medium | 1 to 6 | 25 to 150 | 4 |
| Heavy | Over 6 | Over 150 | 5 |
| * As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation. | |||
| ** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece. |
Z87.1-2010, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6;
Z87.1-2003, Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or
Z87.1-1989 (R-1998), Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6;
[59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 81 FR 16090, Mar. 25, 2016]
This section applies to General Industry (part 1910), Shipyards (part 1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917), Longshoring (part 1918), and Construction (part 1926).
The following definitions are important terms used in the respiratory protection standard in this section.
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Assigned protection factor (APF) means the workplace level of respiratory protection that a respirator or class of respirators is expected to provide to employees when the employer implements a continuing, effective respiratory protection program as specified by this section.
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means a respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
Canister or cartridge means a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items, which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Demand respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece only when a negative pressure is created inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Emergency situation means any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release of an airborne contaminant.
Employee exposure means exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection.
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means a system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or is no longer effective.
Escape-only respirator means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Filter or air purifying element means a component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.
Fit factor means a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and typically estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration inside the respirator when worn.
Fit test means the use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
Helmet means a rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides head protection against impact and penetration.
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means a filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in removing monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Hood means a respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the head and neck and may also cover portions of the shoulders and torso.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means an atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual's ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Interior structural firefighting means the physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or both, inside of buildings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155)
Loose-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that is designed to form a partial seal with the face.
Maximum use concentration (MUC) means the maximum atmospheric concentration of a hazardous substance from which an employee can be expected to be protected when wearing a respirator, and is determined by the assigned protection factor of the respirator or class of respirators and the exposure limit of the hazardous substance. The MUC can be determined mathematically by multiplying the assigned protection factor specified for a respirator by the required OSHA permissible exposure limit, short-term exposure limit, or ceiling limit. When no OSHA exposure limit is available for a hazardous substance, an employer must determine an MUC on the basis of relevant available information and informed professional judgment.
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means a respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5% by volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means an individual whose legally permitted scope of practice ( i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the health care services required by paragraph (e) of this section.
Positive pressure respirator means a respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means an air-purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.
Pressure demand respirator means a positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece when the positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individual's response to the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator.
Respiratory inlet covering means that portion of a respirator that forms the protective barrier between the user's respiratory tract and an air-purifying device or breathing air source, or both. It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with nose clamp.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user.
Service life means the period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment provides adequate protection to the wearer.
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.
This section means this respiratory protection standard.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with the face.
User seal check means an action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face.
This paragraph requires the employer to develop and implement a written respiratory protection program with required worksite-specific procedures and elements for required respirator use. The program must be administered by a suitably trained program administrator. In addition, certain program elements may be required for voluntary use to prevent potential hazards associated with the use of the respirator. The Small Entity Compliance Guide contains criteria for the selection of a program administrator and a sample program that meets the requirements of this paragraph. Copies of the Small Entity Compliance Guide will be available on or about April 8, 1998 from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's Office of Publications, Room N 3101, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW, Washington, DC, 20210 (202-219-4667).
This paragraph requires the employer to evaluate respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace, identify relevant workplace and user factors, and base respirator selection on these factors. The paragraph also specifies appropriately protective respirators for use in IDLH atmospheres, and limits the selection and use of air-purifying respirators.
Employers must use the assigned protection factors listed in Table 1 to select a respirator that meets or exceeds the required level of employee protection. When using a combination respirator (e.g., airline respirators with an air-purifying filter), employers must ensure that the assigned protection factor is appropriate to the mode of operation in which the respirator is being used.
| Type of respirator 1 2 | Quarter mask | Half mask | Full facepiece | Helmet/hood | Loose-fitting facepiece |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Air-Purifying Respirator | 5 | 3 10 | 50 | ||
| 2. Powered Air-Purifying Respirator (PAPR) | 50 | 1,000 | 4 25/1,000 | 25 | |
| 3. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) or Airline Respirator | |||||
| • Demand mode | 10 | 50 | |||
| • Continuous flow mode | 50 | 1,000 | 4 25/1,000 | 25 | |
| • Pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode | 50 | 1,000 | |||
| 4. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) | |||||
| • Demand mode | 10 | 50 | 50 | ||
| • Pressure-demand or other positive-pressure mode (e.g., open/closed circuit) | 10,000 | 10,000 | |||
| Notes: | |||||
| 1 Employers may select respirators assigned for use in higher workplace concentrations of a hazardous substance for use at lower concentrations of that substance, or when required respirator use is independent of concentration. | |||||
| 2 The assigned protection factors in Table 1 are only effective when the employer implements a continuing, effective respirator program as required by this section (29 CFR 1910.134), including training, fit testing, maintenance, and use requirements. | |||||
| 3 This APF category includes filtering facepieces, and half masks with elastomeric facepieces. | |||||
| 4 The employer must have evidence provided by the respirator manufacturer that testing of these respirators demonstrates performance at a level of protection of 1,000 or greater to receive an APF of 1,000. This level of performance can best be demonstrated by performing a WPF or SWPF study or equivalent testing. Absent such testing, all other PAPRs and SARs with helmets/hoods are to be treated as loose-fitting facepiece respirators, and receive an APF of 25. | |||||
| 5 These APFs do not apply to respirators used solely for escape. For escape respirators used in association with specific substances covered by 29 CFR 1910 subpart Z, employers must refer to the appropriate substance-specific standards in that subpart. Escape respirators for other IDLH atmospheres are specified by 29 CFR 1910.134 (d)(2)(ii). |
| Altitude (ft.) | Oxygen deficient Atmospheres (% 0 2 ) for which the employer may rely on atmosphere-supplying respirators |
|---|---|
| Less than 3,001 | 16.0-19.5 |
| 3,001-4,000 | 16.4-19.5 |
| 4,001-5,000 | 17.1-19.5 |
| 5,001-6,000 | 17.8-19.5 |
| 6,001-7,000 | 18.5-19.5 |
| 7,001-8,000 1 | 19.3-19.5. |
| 1 Above 8,000 feet the exception does not apply. Oxygen-enriched breathing air must be supplied above 14,000 feet. |
Using a respirator may place a physiological burden on employees that varies with the type of respirator worn, the job and workplace conditions in which the respirator is used, and the medical status of the employee. Accordingly, this paragraph specifies the minimum requirements for medical evaluation that employers must implement to determine the employee's ability to use a respirator.
The employer shall provide a medical evaluation to determine the employee's ability to use a respirator, before the employee is fit tested or required to use the respirator in the workplace. The employer may discontinue an employee's medical evaluations when the employee is no longer required to use a respirator.
In determining the employee's ability to use a respirator, the employer shall:
At a minimum, the employer shall provide additional medical evaluations that comply with the requirements of this section if:
supervisor, or the respirator program administrator informs the employer that an employee needs to be reevaluated;
This paragraph requires that, before an employee may be required to use any respirator with a negative or positive pressure tight-fitting facepiece, the employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that will be used. This paragraph specifies the kinds of fit tests allowed, the procedures for conducting them, and how the results of the fit tests must be used.
may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-purifying respirators that must achieve a fit factor of 100 or less.
This paragraph requires employers to establish and implement procedures for the proper use of respirators. These requirements include prohibiting conditions that may result in facepiece seal leakage, preventing employees from removing respirators in hazardous environments, taking actions to ensure continued effective respirator operation throughout the work shift, and establishing procedures for the use of respirators in IDLH atmospheres or in interior structural firefighting situations.
For all IDLH atmospheres, the employer shall ensure that:
In addition to the requirements set forth under paragraph (g)(3), in interior structural fires, the employer shall ensure that:
This paragraph requires the employer to provide for the cleaning and disinfecting, storage, inspection, and repair of respirators used by employees.
The employer shall provide each respirator user with a respirator that is clean, sanitary, and in good working order. The employer shall ensure that respirators are cleaned and disinfected using the procedures in appendix B-2 of this section, or procedures recommended by the respirator manufacturer, provided that such procedures are of equivalent effectiveness. The respirators shall be cleaned and disinfected at the following intervals:
The employer shall ensure that respirators are stored as follows:
The employer shall ensure that respirators that fail an inspection or are otherwise found to be defective are removed from service, and are discarded or repaired or adjusted in accordance with the following procedures:
This paragraph requires the employer to provide employees using atmosphere-supplying respirators (supplied-air and SCBA) with breathing gases of high purity.
This paragraph requires the employer to provide effective training to employees who are required to use respirators. The training must be comprehensive, understandable, and recur annually, and more often if necessary. This paragraph also requires the employer to provide the basic information on respirators in appendix D of this section to employees who wear respirators when not required by this section or by the employer to do so.
This section requires the employer to conduct evaluations of the workplace to ensure that the written respiratory protection program is being properly implemented, and to consult employees to ensure that they are using the respirators properly.
This section requires the employer to establish and retain written information regarding medical evaluations, fit testing, and the respirator program. This information will facilitate employee involvement in the respirator program, assist the employer in auditing the adequacy of the program, and provide a record for compliance determinations by OSHA.
Records of medical evaluations required by this section must be retained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
Paragraphs (d)(3)(i)(A) and (d)(3)(i)(B) of this section become effective November 22, 2006.
Compliance with appendix A, appendix B-1, appendix B-2, appendix C, and appendix D to this section are mandatory.
Appendix A to § 1910.134—Fit Testing Procedures (Mandatory)
Part I. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols
A. Fit Testing Procedures—General Requirements
The employer shall conduct fit testing using the following procedures. The requirements in this appendix apply to all OSHA-accepted fit test methods, both QLFT and QNFT.
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick the most acceptable respirator from a sufficient number of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown how to put on a respirator, how it should be positioned on the face, how to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be available to assist the subject in evaluating the fit and positioning of the respirator. This instruction may not constitute the subject's formal training on respirator use, because it is only a review.
3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to select the respirator that provides the most acceptable fit. Each respirator represents a different size and shape, and if fitted and used properly, will provide adequate protection.
4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and eliminate those that obviously do not give an acceptable fit.
5. The more acceptable facepieces are noted in case the one selected proves unacceptable; the most comfortable mask is donned and worn at least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort can be given by discussing the points in the following item A.6. If the test subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the test subject shall be directed to don the mask several times and to adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper tension on the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following points with the test subject and allowing the test subject adequate time to determine the comfort of the respirator:
7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the adequacy of the respirator fit:
8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the negative and positive pressure seal checks described in appendix B-1 of this section or those recommended by the respirator manufacturer which provide equivalent protection to the procedures in appendix B-1. Before conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall be told to seat the mask on the face by moving the head from side-to-side and up and down slowly while taking in a few slow deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be selected and retested if the test subject fails the user seal check tests.
9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth between the skin and the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the respirator sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with a satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, she or he shall be referred to a physician or other licensed health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his duties.
11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable, the test subject shall be given the opportunity to select a different respirator and to be retested.
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the test subject shall be given a description of the fit test and the test subject's responsibilities during the test procedure. The description of the process shall include a description of the test exercises that the subject will be performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn for at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit test.
13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is wearing any applicable safety equipment that may be worn during actual respirator use which could interfere with respirator fit.
14. Test Exercises.
In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally.
In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply, taking caution so as not to hyperventilate.
Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her head from side to side between the extreme positions on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side.
Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his/her head up and down. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling).
The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song.
Rainbow Passage
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a prism and form a rainbow. The rainbow is a division of white light into many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long round arch, with its path high above, and its two ends apparently beyond the horizon. There is, according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People look, but no one ever finds it. When a man looks for something beyond reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the end of the rainbow.
The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud type QNFT or QLFT units that do not permit bending over at the waist.
Same as exercise (1).
B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
1. General
2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
Odor threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine if the individual tested can detect the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
The saccharin taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of saccharin.
4. Bitrex TM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol
The Bitrex TM (Denatonium benzoate) solution aerosol QLFT protocol uses the published saccharin test protocol because that protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is routinely used as a taste aversion agent in household liquids which children should not be drinking and is endorsed by the American Medical Association, the National Safety Council, and the American Association of Poison Control Centers. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex.
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) Protocol
This qualitative fit test uses a person's response to the irritating chemicals released in the “smoke” produced by a stannic chloride ventilation smoke tube to detect leakage into the respirator.
The person to be tested must demonstrate his or her ability to detect a weak concentration of the irritant smoke.
14. of this appendix shall be performed by the test subject while the respirator seal is being continually challenged by the smoke, directed around the perimeter of the respirator at a distance of six inches.
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols
The following quantitative fit testing procedures have been demonstrated to be acceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) generated in a test chamber, and employing instrumentation to quantify the fit of the respirator; Quantitative fit testing using ambient aerosol as the test agent and appropriate instrumentation (condensation nuclei counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quantitative fit testing using controlled negative pressure and appropriate instrumentation to measure the volumetric leak rate of a facepiece to quantify the respirator fit.
1. General
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol
Aerosol generation, dilution, and measurement systems using particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols shall be used for quantitative fit testing.
The test chamber shall be large enough to permit all test subjects to perform freely all required exercises without disturbing the test agent concentration or the measurement apparatus. The test chamber shall be equipped and constructed so that the test agent is effectively isolated from the ambient air, yet uniform in concentration throughout the chamber.
1
2
3
3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing (PortaCount®) protocol quantitatively fit tests respirators with the use of a probe. The probed respirator is only used for quantitative fit tests. A probed respirator has a special sampling device, installed on the respirator, that allows the probe to sample the air from inside the mask. A probed respirator is required for each make, style, model, and size that the employer uses and can be obtained from the respirator manufacturer or distributor. The primary CNC instrument manufacturer, TSI Incorporated, also provides probe attachments (TSI mask sampling adapters) that permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator (elastomeric or filtering facepiece), and a minimum fit factor pass level of at least 500 is required for a full-facepiece elastomeric respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
4. Modified ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol for full-facepiece and half-mask elastomeric respirators.
| Exercises 1 | Exercise procedure | Measurement procedure |
|---|---|---|
| Bending Over | The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 times at the bottom 2 | A 20 second ambient sample, followed by a 30 second mask sample. |
| Jogging-in-Place | The test subject shall jog in place comfortably for 30 seconds | A 30 second mask sample. |
| Head Side-to-Side | The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 | A 30 second mask sample. |
| Head Up-and-Down | The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 | A 30 second mask sample followed by a 9 second ambient sample. |
| 1 Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered. | ||
| 2 It is optional for test subjects to take additional breaths at other times during this exercise. |
5. Modified ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol for filtering facepiece respirators.
| Exercises 1 | Exercise procedure | Measurement procedure |
|---|---|---|
| Bending Over | The test subject shall bend at the waist, as if going to touch his/her toes for 50 seconds and inhale 2 times at the bottom 2 | A 20 second ambient sample, followed by a 30 second mask sample. |
| Talking | The test subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor for 30 seconds. He/she will either read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song | A 30 second mask sample. |
| Head Side-to-Side | The test subject shall stand in place, slowly turning his/her head from side to side for 30 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 | A 30 second mask sample. |
| Head Up-and-Down | The test subject shall stand in place, slowly moving his/her head up and down for 39 seconds and inhale 2 times at each extreme 2 | A 30 second mask sample followed by a 9 second ambient sample. |
| 1 Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered. | ||
| 2 It is optional for test subjects to take additional breaths at other times during this exercise. |
6. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The CNP protocol provides an alternative to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test method technology is based on exhausting air from a temporarily sealed respirator facepiece to generate and then maintain a constant negative pressure inside the facepiece. The rate of air exhaust is controlled so that a constant negative pressure is maintained in the respirator during the fit test. The level of pressure is selected to replicate the mean inspiratory pressure that causes leakage into the respirator under normal use conditions. With pressure held constant, air flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow into the respirator. Therefore, measurement of the exhaust stream that is required to hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed respirator constant yields a direct measure of leakage air flow into the respirator. The CNP fit test method measures leak rates through the facepiece as a method for determining the facepiece fit for negative pressure respirators. The CNP instrument manufacturer Occupational Health Dynamics of Birmingham, Alabama also provides attachments (sampling manifolds) that replace the filter cartridges to permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. To perform the test, the test subject closes his or her mouth and holds his/her breath, after which an air pump removes air from the respirator facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure. The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak rate through the facepiece, expressed as milliliters per minute. The quality and validity of the CNP fit tests are determined by the degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks the test pressure during the system measurement time of approximately five seconds. Instantaneous feedback in the form of a real-time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure is provided and used to determine test validity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator and a minimum fit factor of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
Fit Test Requirements.
Test Exercises.
In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject needs to hold head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to hyperventilate. After the deep breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her head from side to side between the extreme positions on each side for 1 minute. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. After the turning head side to side exercise, the subject needs to hold head full left and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. Next, the subject needs to hold head full right and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his or her head up and down for 1 minute. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling). After the moving head up and down exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head full up and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. Next, the subject shall hold his or her head full down and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song for 1 minute. After the talking exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he or she were to touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud-type QNFT units that prohibit bending at the waist. After the bending over exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
The test subject shall remove and re-don the respirator within a one-minute period. Then, in a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of a respirator shall be tried.
Test Instrument.
7. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) REDON quantitative fit testing protocol.
| Exercises 1 | Exercise procedure | Measurement procedure |
|---|---|---|
| Facing Forward | Stand and breathe normally, without talking, for 30 seconds | Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. |
| Bending Over | Bend at the waist, as if going to touch his or her toes, for 30 seconds | Face parallel to the floor, while holding breath for 10 seconds |
| Head Shaking | For about three seconds, shake head back and forth vigorously several times while shouting | Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds |
| REDON 1 | Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator mask | Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. |
| REDON 2 | Remove the respirator mask, loosen all facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator mask again | Face forward, while holding breath for 10 seconds. |
| 1 Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered. |
Where:
N = The number of exercises;
1
2
N
Part II. New Fit Test Protocols
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an application for approval of a new fit test protocol. If the application meets the following criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH Act to determine whether to list the new protocol as an approved protocol in this appendix A.
B. The application must include a detailed description of the proposed new fit test protocol. This application must be supported by either:
1. A test report prepared by an independent government research laboratory (e.g., Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, Los Alamos National Laboratory, the National Institute for Standards and Technology) stating that the laboratory has tested the protocol and had found it to be accurate and reliable; or
2. An article that has been published in a peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal describing the protocol and explaining how test data support the protocol's accuracy and reliability.
C. If OSHA determines that additional information is required before the Agency commences a rulemaking proceeding under this section, OSHA will so notify the applicant and afford the applicant the opportunity to submit the supplemental information. Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding will be deferred until OSHA has received and evaluated the supplemental information.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 37598, June 22, 2012]
The employer shall ensure that each affected employee uses protective footwear when working in areas where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling objects, or objects piercing the sole, or when the use of protective footwear will protect the affected employee from an electrical hazard, such as a static-discharge or electric-shock hazard, that remains after the employer takes other necessary protective measures.
“Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection,” and ASTM F-2413-2005, “Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Protective Footwear,” which are incorporated by reference in § 1910.6;
“American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear,” which is incorporated by reference in § 1910.6; or
“American National Standard for Personal Protection—Protective Footwear,” which is incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9, 1996; 74 FR 46356, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20629, Apr. 11, 2014]
Insulating equipment used for the protection of employees shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, the voltages that may be imposed upon it.
Electrical protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition.
The following specific requirements apply to rubber insulating blankets, rubber insulating covers, rubber insulating line hose, rubber insulating gloves, and rubber insulating sleeves:
swelling, softening, hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic.
| Class of Equipment | Proof-test Voltage rms V | Maximum proof-test current, mA (gloves only) | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 280-mm (11-in) glove | 360-mm (14-in) glove | 410-mm (16-in) glove | 460-mm (18-in) glove | ||
| 00 | 2,500 | 8 | 12 | ||
| 0 | 5,000 | 8 | 12 | 14 | 16 |
| 1 | 10,000 | 14 | 16 | 18 | |
| 2 | 20,000 | 16 | 18 | 20 | |
| 3 | 30,000 | 18 | 20 | 22 | |
| 4 | 40,000 | 22 | 24 |
| Class of equipment | Proof-test voltage |
|---|---|
| 00 | 10,000 |
| 0 | 20,000 |
| 1 | 40,000 |
| 2 | 50,000 |
| 3 | 60,000 |
| 4 | 70,000 |
| Note: The dc voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for proof testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this equipment, dc proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used at the voltages listed in Table I-4. See ASTM D1050-05 (2011) and ASTM D1049-98 (2010) for further information on proof tests for rubber insulating line hose and covers, respectively. |
| Class of glove | AC proof test | DC proof test | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| mm | in | mm | in | |
| 00 | 38 | 1.5 | 38 | 1.5 |
| 0 | 38 | 1.5 | 38 | 1.5 |
| 1 | 38 | 1.5 | 51 | 2.0 |
| 2 | 64 | 2.5 | 76 | 3.0 |
| 3 | 89 | 3.5 | 102 | 4.0 |
| 4 | 127 | 5.0 | 153 | 6.0 |
| 1 The water level is given as the clearance from the reinforced edge of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of ±13 mm. (±0.5 in.). | ||||
| 2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25 mm. (1 in.). |
| Class of equipment | Maximum use voltage 1 AC rms | Retest voltage 2 AC rms | Retest voltage 2 DC avg |
|---|---|---|---|
| 00 | 500 | 2,500 | 10,000 |
| 0 | 1,000 | 5,000 | 20,000 |
| 1 | 7,500 | 10,000 | 40,000 |
| 2 | 17,000 | 20,000 | 50,000 |
| 3 | 26,500 | 30,000 | 60,000 |
| 4 | 36,000 | 40,000 | 70,000 |
| 1 The maximum use voltage is the ac voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to-phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage if: | |||
| (1) There is no multiphase exposure in a system area and the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential, or | |||
| (2) The electric equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is removed. | |||
| 2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes. |
| Type of equipment | When to test |
|---|---|
| Rubber insulating line hose | Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. |
| Rubber insulating covers | Upon indication that insulating value is suspect and after repair. |
| Rubber insulating blankets | Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; and after repair. |
| Rubber insulating gloves | Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; after repair; and after use without protectors. |
| Rubber insulating sleeves | Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter; 1 upon indication that insulating value is suspect; and after repair. |
| 1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, the insulating equipment may not be placed into service unless it has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months. |
[79 FR 20629, Apr. 11, 2014]
Employers shall select and require employees to use appropriate hand protection when employees' hands are exposed to hazards such as those from skin absorption of harmful substances; severe cuts or lacerations; severe abrasions; punctures; chemical burns; thermal burns; and harmful temperature extremes.
Employers shall base the selection of the appropriate hand protection on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the hand protection relative to the task(s) to be performed, conditions present, duration of use, and the hazards and potential hazards identified.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, 1994]
This section establishes performance, care, and use criteria for all personal fall protection systems. The employer must ensure that each personal fall protection system used to comply with this part must meet the requirements of this section.
The following definitions apply to this section:
Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for equipment such as lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration devices.
Belt terminal means an end attachment of a window cleaner's positioning system used for securing the belt or harness to a window cleaner's belt anchor.
Body belt means a strap with means both for securing about the waist and for attaching to other components such as a lanyard used with positioning systems, travel restraint systems, or ladder safety systems.
Body harness means straps that secure about the employee in a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest, and shoulders, with a means for attaching the harness to other components of a personal fall protection system.
Carabiner means a connector generally comprised of a trapezoidal or oval shaped body with a closed gate or similar arrangement that may be opened to attach another object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object.
Competent person means a person who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in any personal fall protection system or any component of it, as well as in their application and uses with related equipment, and who has authorization to take prompt, corrective action to eliminate the identified hazards.
Connector means a device used to couple (connect) parts of the fall protection system together.
D-ring means a connector used:
Deceleration device means any mechanism that serves to dissipate energy during a fall.
Deceleration distance means the vertical distance a falling employee travels from the point at which the deceleration device begins to operate, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall distance, until stopping. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employee's body harness attachment point at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop.
Equivalent means alternative designs, equipment, materials, or methods that the employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety for employees compared to the designs, equipment, materials, or methods specified in the standard.
Free fall means the act of falling before the personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employee's body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance, lifeline and lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before the devices operate and fall arrest forces occur.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap that generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.
Lifeline means a component of a personal fall protection system consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end so as to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends so as to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and serves as a means for connecting other components of the system to the anchorage.
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a walking-working surface. It consists of a body harness, anchorage, and connector. The means of connection may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or a suitable combination of these.
Personal fall protection system means a system (including all components) an employer uses to provide protection from falling or to safely arrest an employee's fall if one occurs. Examples of personal fall protection systems include personal fall arrest systems, positioning systems, and travel restraint systems.
Positioning system (work-positioning system) means a system of equipment and connectors that, when used with a body harness or body belt, allows an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall or window sill, and work with both hands free. Positioning systems also are called “positioning system devices” and “work-positioning equipment.”
Qualified describes a person who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Rope grab means a deceleration device that travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/lever locking, or both.
Safety factor means the ratio of the design load and the ultimate strength of the material.
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a deceleration device containing a drum-wound line that can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal movement by the employee. At the onset of a fall, the device automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.
Snaphook means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped body with a normally closed gate, or similar arrangement that may be manually opened to permit the hook to receive an object. When released, the snaphook automatically closes to retain the object. Opening a snaphook requires two separate actions. Snaphooks are generally one of two types:
Travel restraint (tether) line means a rope or wire rope used to transfer forces from a body support to an anchorage or anchorage connector in a travel restraint system.
Travel restraint system means a combination of an anchorage, anchorage connector, lanyard (or other means of connection), and body support that an employer uses to eliminate the possibility of an employee going over the edge of a walking-working surface.
Window cleaner's belt means a positioning belt that consists of a waist belt, an integral terminal runner or strap, and belt terminals.
Window cleaner's belt anchor (window anchor) means specifically designed fall-preventing attachment points permanently affixed to a window frame or to a building part immediately adjacent to the window frame, for direct attachment of the terminal portion of a window cleaner's belt.
Window cleaner's positioning system means a system which consists of a window cleaner's belt secured to window anchors.
Work-positioning system (see Positioning system in this paragraph (b)).
The employer must ensure that personal fall protection systems meet the following requirements. Additional requirements for personal fall arrest systems and positioning systems are contained in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, respectively.
In addition to the general requirements in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer must ensure that personal fall arrest systems:
The employer must ensure that:
Body belts are prohibited as part of a personal fall arrest system.
The employer must ensure that each positioning system meets the following requirements:
All positioning systems, except window cleaners' positioning systems, are capable of withstanding, without failure, a drop test consisting of a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop of a 250-pound (113-kg) weight;
All window cleaners' positioning systems must:
Lineman's body belt and pole strap systems must meet the following tests:
The employer must ensure that window cleaners' positioning systems meet and are used in accordance with the following:
[81 FR 82999, Nov. 18, 2016, as amended at 84 FR 68797, Dec. 17, 2019]
The documents in appendix A provide information which may be helpful in understanding and implementing the standards in Subpart I.
1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Eye Injuries.” Report 597, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Face Injuries.” Report 604, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Head Injuries.” Report 605, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Accidents Involving Foot Injuries.” Report 626, Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981.
5. National Safety Council. “Accident Facts”, Annual edition, Chicago, IL: 1981.
6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). “Occupational Injuries and Illnesses in the United States by Industry,” Annual edition, Washington, D.C.: BLS.
7. National Society to Prevent Blindness. “A Guide for Controlling Eye Injuries in Industry,” Chicago, Il: 1982.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994]
This appendix is intended to provide compliance assistance for employers and employees in implementing requirements for a hazard assessment and the selection of personal protective equipment.
1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone should not be relied on to provide protection against hazards, but should be used in conjunction with guards, engineering controls, and sound manufacturing practices.
2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary to consider certain general guidelines for assessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand hazard situations that exist in an occupational or educational operation or process, and to match the protective devices to the particular hazard. It should be the responsibility of the safety officer to exercise common sense and appropriate expertise to accomplish these tasks.
3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess the need for PPE the following steps should be taken:
a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey of the areas in question. The purpose of the survey is to identify sources of hazards to workers and co-workers. Consideration should be given to the basic hazard categories:
b. Sources. During the walk-through survey the safety officer should observe: (a) sources of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where any movement of tools, machine elements or particles could exist, or movement of personnel that could result in collision with stationary objects; (b) sources of high temperatures that could result in burns, eye injury or ignition of protective equipment, etc.; (c) types of chemical exposures; (d) sources of harmful dust; (e) sources of light radiation, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat treating, high intensity lights, etc.; (f) sources of falling objects or potential for dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp objects which might pierce the feet or cut the hands; (h) sources of rolling or pinching objects which could crush the feet; (i) layout of workplace and location of co-workers; and (j) any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/accident data should be reviewed to help identify problem areas.
c. Organize data. Following the walk-through survey, it is necessary to organize the data and information for use in the assessment of hazards. The objective is to prepare for an analysis of the hazards in the environment to enable proper selection of protective equipment.
d. Analyze data. Having gathered and organized data on a workplace, an estimate of the potential for injuries should be made. Each of the basic hazards (paragraph 3.a.) should be reviewed and a determination made as to the type, level of risk, and seriousness of potential injury from each of the hazards found in the area. The possibility of exposure to several hazards simultaneously should be considered.
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of the procedures in paragraph 3, the general procedure for selection of protective equipment is to: a) Become familiar with the potential hazards and the type of protective equipment that is available, and what it can do; i.e., splash protection, impact protection, etc.; b) compare the hazards associated with the environment; i.e., impact velocities, masses, projectile shape, radiation intensities, with the capabilities of the available protective equipment; c) select the protective equipment which ensures a level of protection greater than the minimum required to protect employees from the hazards; and d) fit the user with the protective device and give instructions on care and use of the PPE. It is very important that end users be made aware of all warning labels for and limitations of their PPE.
5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that fits poorly will not afford the necessary protection. Continued wearing of the device is more likely if it fits the wearer comfortably. Protective devices are generally available in a variety of sizes. Care should be taken to ensure that the right size is selected.
6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjustments should be made on an individual basis for a comfortable fit that will maintain the protective device in the proper position. Particular care should be taken in fitting devices for eye protection against dust and chemical splash to ensure that the devices are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fitting of helmets is important to ensure that it will not fall off during work operations. In some cases a chin strap may be necessary to keep the helmet on an employee's head. (Chin straps should break at a reasonably low force, however, so as to prevent a strangulation hazard). Where manufacturer's instructions are available, they should be followed carefully.
7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the responsibility of the safety officer to reassess the workplace hazard situation as necessary, by identifying and evaluating new equipment and processes, reviewing accident records, and reevaluating the suitability of previously selected PPE.
8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face protection. Some occupations (not a complete list) for which eye protection should be routinely considered are: carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics and repairers, millwrights, plumbers and pipe fitters, sheet metal workers and tinsmiths, assemblers, sanders, grinding machine operators, lathe and milling machine operators, sawyers, welders, laborers, chemical process operators and handlers, and timber cutting and logging workers. The following chart provides general guidance for the proper selection of eye and face protection to protect against hazards associated with the listed hazard “source” operations.
| Source | Assessment of Hazard | Protection |
|---|---|---|
| IMPACT—Chipping, grinding machining, masonry work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, powered fastening, riveting, and sanding | Flying fragments, objects, large chips, particles sand, dirt, etc | Spectacles with side protection, goggles, face shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6), (10). For severe exposure, use faceshield. |
| HEAT—Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot dipping, and welding | Hot sparks | Faceshields, goggles, spectacles with side protection. For severe exposure use faceshield. See notes (1), (2), (3). |
| Splash from molten metals | Faceshields worn over goggles. See notes (1), (2), (3). | |
| High temperature exposure | Screen face shields, reflective face shields. See notes (1), (2), (3). | |
| CHEMICALS—Acid and chemicals handling, degreasing plating | Splash | Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For severe exposure, use face shield. See notes (3), (11). |
| Irritating mists | Special-purpose goggles. | |
| DUST—Woodworking, buffing, general dusty conditions | Nuisance dust | Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See note (8). |
| LIGHT and/or RADIATION— | ||
| Welding: Electric arc | Optical radiation | Welding helmets or welding shields. Typical shades: 10-14. See notes (9), (12) |
| Welding: Gas | Optical radiation | Welding goggles or welding face shield. Typical shades: gas welding 4-8, cutting 3-6, brazing 3-4. See note (9) |
| Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering | Optical radiation | Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3), (9) |
| Glare | Poor vision | Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10). |
| Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart: | ||
| (1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited protection. | ||
| (2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must be provided. | ||
| (3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles). | ||
| (4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in § 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted and shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such. | ||
| (5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective devices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear. | ||
| (6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers. | ||
| (7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas. | ||
| (8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be necessary. | ||
| (9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles). | ||
| (10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources and operations listed for “impact.” | ||
| (11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry. | ||
| (12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows task performance. |
9. Selection guidelines for head protection. All head protection (helmets) is designed to provide protection from impact and penetration hazards caused by falling objects. Head protection is also available which provides protection from electric shock and burn. When selecting head protection, knowledge of potential electrical hazards is important. Class A helmets, in addition to impact and penetration resistance, provide electrical protection from low-voltage conductors (they are proof tested to 2,200 volts). Class B helmets, in addition to impact and penetration resistance, provide electrical protection from high-voltage conductors (they are proof tested to 20,000 volts). Class C helmets provide impact and penetration resistance (they are usually made of aluminum which conducts electricity), and should not be used around electrical hazards.
Where falling object hazards are present, helmets must be worn. Some examples include: working below other workers who are using tools and materials which could fall; working around or under conveyor belts which are carrying parts or materials; working below machinery or processes which might cause material or objects to fall; and working on exposed energized conductors.
Some examples of occupations for which head protection should be routinely considered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen, mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers, sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, timber cutting and logging, stock handlers, and warehouse laborers.
Beginning with the ANSI Z89.1-1997 standard, ANSI updated the classification system for protective helmets. Prior revisions used type classifications to distinguish between caps and full brimmed hats. Beginning in 1997, Type I designated helmets designed to reduce the force of impact resulting from a blow only to the top of the head, while Type II designated helmets designed to reduce the force of impact resulting from a blow to the top or sides of the head. Accordingly, if a hazard assessment indicates that lateral impact to the head is foreseeable, employers must select Type II helmets for their employees. To improve comprehension and usefulness, the 1997 revision also redesignated the electrical-protective classifications for helmets as follows: “Class G—General”; helmets designed to reduce the danger of contact with low-voltage conductors; “Class E—Electrical”; helmets designed to reduce the danger of contact with conductors at higher voltage levels; and “Class C—Conductive”; helmets that provide no protection against contact with electrical hazards.
10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. Safety shoes and boots which meet the ANSI Z41-1991 Standard provide both impact and compression protection. Where necessary, safety shoes can be obtained which provide puncture protection. In some work situations, metatarsal protection should be provided, and in other special situations electrical conductive or insulating safety shoes would be appropriate.
Safety shoes or boots with impact protection would be required for carrying or handling materials such as packages, objects, parts or heavy tools, which could be dropped; and, for other activities where objects might fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with compression protection would be required for work activities involving skid trucks (manual material handling carts) around bulk rolls (such as paper rolls) and around heavy pipes, all of which could potentially roll over an employee's feet. Safety shoes or boots with puncture protection would be required where sharp objects such as nails, wire, tacks, screws, large staples, scrap metal etc., could be stepped on by employees causing a foot injury. Electrically conductive shoes would be required as a supplementary form of protection for work activities in which there is a danger of fire or explosion from the discharge of static electricity. Electrical-hazard or dielectric footwear would be required as a supplementary form of protection when an employee standing on the ground is exposed to hazardous step or touch potential (the difference in electrical potential between the feet or between the hands and feet) or when primary forms of electrical protective equipment, such as rubber insulating gloves and blankets, do not provide complete protection for an employee standing on the ground.
Some occupations (not a complete list) for which foot protection should be routinely considered are: Shipping and receiving clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe fitters, structural metal workers, assemblers, drywall installers and lathers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and stamping press operators, sawyers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, gardeners and grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging workers, stock handlers and warehouse laborers.
11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. Gloves are often relied upon to prevent cuts, abrasions, burns, and skin contact with chemicals that are capable of causing local or systemic effects following dermal exposure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that provide protection against all potential hand hazards, and commonly available glove materials provide only limited protection against many chemicals. Therefore, it is important to select the most appropriate glove for a particular application and to determine how long it can be worn, and whether it can be reused.
It is also important to know the performance characteristics of gloves relative to the specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc. These performance characteristics should be assessed by using standard test procedures. Before purchasing gloves, the employer should request documentation from the manufacturer that the gloves meet the appropriate test standard(s) for the hazard(s) anticipated.
Other factors to be considered for glove selection in general include:
With respect to selection of gloves for protection against chemical hazards:
12. Cleaning and maintenance. It is important that all PPE be kept clean and properly maintained. Cleaning is particularly important for eye and face protection where dirty or fogged lenses could impair vision.
For the purposes of compliance with § 1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE should be inspected, cleaned, and maintained at regular intervals so that the PPE provides the requisite protection.
It is also important to ensure that contaminated PPE which cannot be decontaminated is disposed of in a manner that protects employees from exposure to hazards.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 79 FR 20633, Apr. 11, 2014]
The following information generally applies to all personal fall protection systems and is intended to assist employers and employees comply with the requirements of § 1910.140 for personal fall protection systems.
It is important for employers to plan prior to using personal fall protection systems. Probably the most overlooked component of planning is locating suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be used later for window cleaning or other building maintenance.
Before purchasing a personal fall protection system, an employer should insist that the supplier provide information about its test performance (using recognized test methods) so the employer will know that the system meets the criteria in § 1910.140. Otherwise, the employer should test the equipment to ensure that it is in compliance. Appendix D to this subpart contains test methods which are recommended for evaluating the performance of any system. There are some circumstances in which an employer can evaluate a system based on data and calculations derived from the testing of similar systems. Enough information must be available for the employer to demonstrate that its system and the tested system(s) are similar in both function and design.
Ideally, a personal fall protection system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system. However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration devices, body belts, and body harnesses to be interchanged since some components wear out before others. Employers and employees should realize that not all components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be connected between a body harness and a deceleration device of the self-retracting type (unless specifically allowed by the manufacturer) since this can result in additional free fall for which the system was not designed. In addition, positioning components, such as pole straps, ladder hooks and rebar hooks, should not be used in personal fall arrest systems unless they meet the appropriate strength and performance requirements of part 1910 ( e.g., §§ 1910.140, 1910.268 and 1910.269). Any substitution or change to a personal fall protection system should be fully evaluated or tested by a competent person to determine that it meets applicable OSHA standards before the modified system is put in use. Also, OSHA suggests that rope be used according to manufacturers' recommendations, especially if polypropylene rope is used.
As required by §§ 1910.30 and 1910.132, before an employee uses a fall protection system, the employer must ensure that he or she is trained in the proper use of the system. This may include the following: The limits of the system; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques; estimating free fall distance, including determining elongation and deceleration distance; methods of use; and inspection and storage. Careless or improper use of fall protection equipment can result in serious injury or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the material in this standard and appendix, as well as manufacturers' recommendations, before a system is used. It is important for employees to be aware that certain tie-offs (such as using knots and tying around sharp edges) can reduce the overall strength of a system. Employees also need to know the maximum permitted free fall distance. Training should stress the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations of the equipment to be used, and unique conditions at the worksite that may be important.
Employers should obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier or a qualified person as to the system's proper use and application, including, where applicable:
Personal fall protection systems must be inspected before initial use in each workshift. Any component with damage, such as a cut, tear, abrasion, mold, or evidence of undue stretching, an alteration or addition that might affect its effectiveness, damage due to deterioration, fire, acid, or other corrosive damage, distorted hooks or faulty hook springs, tongues that are unfitted to the shoulder of buckles, loose or damaged mountings, non-functioning parts, or wear, or internal deterioration must be removed from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed. Any personal fall protection system, including components, subjected to impact loading must be removed from service immediately and not used until a competent person inspects the system and determines that it is not damaged and is safe to use for personal fall protection.
As required by § 1910.140(c)(21), when personal fall arrest systems are used, special consideration must be given to rescuing an employee promptly should a fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders, or other rescue equipment needs to be evaluated since there may be instances in which employees cannot self-rescue ( e.g., employee unconscious or seriously injured). In some situations, equipment allowing employees to rescue themselves after the fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices that have descent capability.
Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system that can support the system. Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system (such as an eye-bolt/snaphook anchorage), that component should be replaced by a stronger one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum deceleration characteristics. The following is a listing of some situations in which employers and employees should be especially cautious:
Sliding hitch knots should not be used except in emergency situations. The one-and-one sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The two-and-two, or three-and-three knots (preferable) may be used in emergency situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distances because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. OSHA requires that a competent or qualified person inspect each knot in a lanyard or vertical lifeline to ensure it meets the strength requirements in § 1910.140.
Horizontal lifelines, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, may be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees the force amplification is about 2:1, and at 5 degrees sag it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline, and the anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs. If there are multiple tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, and one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to fall. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the systems using horizontal lifelines must be designed only by qualified persons. OSHA recommends testing installed lifelines and anchors prior to use. OSHA requires that horizontal lifelines are designed, installed and used under the supervision of a qualified person.
It must be recognized that the strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt, and that its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at right angles to this axis (in the direction of its shear strength). Care should also be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid creating a roll-out hazard (accidental disengagement of the snaphook from the eye-bolt).
As required by § 1910.140(c)(3), each employee must have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is vertical. If multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline are used, and one employee falls, the movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing them to fall as well.
As required by § 1910.140(c)(10), the following connections must be avoided unless the locking snaphook or carabiner has been designed for them because they are conditions that can result in rollout:
Employers and employees should always be aware that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer. OSHA requires that personal fall arrest systems be rigged so an employee cannot free fall in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). Even a few additional feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly to the point of causing injury and possibly exceeding the strength of the system. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept to a minimum, and, as required by § 1910.140(d)(2), must never be greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment to the harness. (Otherwise, additional free fall distance is added to the length of the connecting means ( i.e., lanyard)). Tying off to the walking-working surface will often result in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a 6-foot (1.8-m) lanyard is used, the total free fall distance will be the distance from the walking-working level to the harness connection plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard.
During fall arrest, a lanyard will stretch or elongate, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result in a certain stopping distance. These distances should be available with the lanyard or device's instructions and must be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before an employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may be significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own elongation. As required by § 1910.140(d)(2), sufficient distance to allow for all of these factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a rope-grab-type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or the next working level below. These measures are suggested to prevent the employee from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become disengaged from the lifeline.
In selecting a location for tie-off, employers and employees should consider obstructions in the potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs that minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should be considered.
[81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016]
This appendix contains test methods for personal fall protection systems which may be used to determine if they meet the system performance criteria specified in paragraphs (d) and (e) of § 1910.140.
Test methods for personal fall arrest systems (paragraph (d) of § 1910.140).
The following sets forth test procedures for personal fall arrest systems as defined in paragraph (d) of § 1910.140.
The test consists of dropping the respective test weight specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this appendix once. A new, unused system should be used for each test.
A system fails the force test when the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.
The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during the force test.
The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, and type of lifeline) for which the device is designed.
The locking mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would in normal service.
Test methods for positioning systems (paragraph (e) of § 1910.140).
The following sets forth test procedures for positioning systems as defined in paragraph (e) of § 1910.140. The requirements in this appendix for personal fall arrest systems set forth procedures that may be used, along with the procedures listed below, to determine compliance with the requirements for positioning systems.
[81 FR 83002, Nov. 18, 2016]
This section applies to permanent places of employment.
Nonwater carriage toilet facility, means a toilet facility not connected to a sewer.
Number of employees means, unless otherwise specified, the maximum number of employees present at any one time on a regular shift.
Personal service room, means a room used for activities not directly connected with the production or service function performed by the establishment. Such activities include, but are not limited to, first-aid, medical services, dressing, showering, toilet use, washing, and eating.
Potable water means water that meets the standards for drinking purposes of the State or local authority having jurisdiction, or water that meets the quality standards prescribed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (40 CFR 141).
Toilet facility, means a fixture maintained within a toilet room for the purpose of defecation or urination, or both.
Toilet room, means a room maintained within or on the premises of any place of employment, containing toilet facilities for use by employees.
Toxic material means a material in concentration or amount which exceeds the applicable limit established by a standard, such as §§ 1910.1000 and 1910.1001 or, in the absence of an applicable standard, which is of such toxicity so as to constitute a recognized hazard that is causing or is likely to cause death or serious physical harm.
Urinal means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room for the sole purpose of urination.
Water closet means a toilet facility maintained within a toilet room for the purpose of both defecation and urination and which is flushed with water.
Wet process means any process or operation in a workroom which normally results in surfaces upon which employees may walk or stand becoming wet.
Every enclosed workplace shall be so constructed, equipped, and maintained, so far as reasonably practicable, as to prevent the entrance or harborage of rodents, insects, and other vermin. A continuing and effective extermination program shall be instituted where their presence is detected.
| Number of employees | Minimum number of water closets 1 |
|---|---|
| 1 to 15 | 1 |
| 16 to 35 | 2 |
| 36 to 55 | 3 |
| 56 to 80 | 4 |
| 81 to 110 | 5. |
| 111 to 150 | 6 |
| Over 150 | ( 2 ) |
| 1 Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals may be provided instead of water closets, except that the number of water closets in such cases shall not be reduced to less than 2 ⁄ 3 of the minimum specified. | |
| 2 1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees. |
Washing facilities shall be maintained in a sanitary condition.
Whenever employees are required by a particular standard to wear protective clothing because of the possibility of contamination with toxic materials, change rooms equipped with storage facilities for street clothes and separate storage facilities for the protective clothing shall be provided.
Where working clothes are provided by the employer and become wet or are washed between shifts, provision shall be made to insure that such clothing is dry before reuse.
This paragraph shall apply only where employees are permitted to consume food or beverages, or both, on the premises.
No employee shall be allowed to consume food or beverages in a toilet room nor in any area exposed to a toxic material.
Receptacles constructed of smooth, corrosion resistant, easily cleanable, or disposable materials, shall be provided and used for the disposal of waste food. The number, size, and location of such receptacles shall encourage their use and not result in overfilling. They shall be emptied not less frequently than once each working day, unless unused, and shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. Receptacles shall be provided with a solid tight-fitting cover unless sanitary conditions can be maintained without use of a cover.
No food or beverages shall be stored in toilet rooms or in an area exposed to a toxic material.
All employee food service facilities and operations shall be carried out in accordance with sound hygienic principles. In all places of employment where all or part of the food service is provided, the food dispensed shall be wholesome, free from spoilage, and shall be processed, prepared, handled, and stored in such a manner as to be protected against contamination.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 18446, Apr. 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011]
In camps where public sewers are available, all sewer lines and floor drains from buildings shall be connected thereto.
Where electric service is available, each habitable room in a camp shall be provided with at least one ceiling-type light fixture and at least one separate floor- or wall-type convenience outlet. Laundry and toilet rooms and rooms where people congregate shall contain at least one ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light levels in toilet and storage rooms shall be at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor. Other rooms, including kitchens and living quarters, shall be at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor.
Effective measures shall be taken to prevent infestation by and harborage of animal or insect vectors or pests.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47 FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005]
Red shall be the basic color for the identification of:
[Reserved]
Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids having a flash point at or below 80 °F, table containers of flammable liquids (open cup tester), excluding shipping containers, shall be painted red with some additional clearly visible identification either in the form of a yellow band around the can or the name of the contents conspicuously stenciled or painted on the can in yellow. Red lights shall be provided at barricades and at temporary obstructions. Danger signs shall be painted red.
Emergency stop bars on hazardous machines such as rubber mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers, etc., shall be red. Stop buttons or electrical switches which letters or other markings appear, used for emergency stopping of machinery shall be red.
Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and for marking physical hazards such as: Striking against, stumbling, falling, tripping, and “caught in between.”
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71069, Dec. 14, 2007]
As used in this section, the word sign refers to a surface on prepared for the warning of, or safety instructions of, industrial workers or members of the public who may be exposed to hazards. Excluded from this definition, however, are news releases, displays commonly known as safety posters, and bulletins used for employee education.
Safety instruction signs shall be used where there is a need for general instructions and suggestions relative to safety measures.
All signs shall be furnished with rounded or blunt corners and shall be free from sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other sharp projections. The ends or heads of bolts or other fastening devices shall be located in such a way that they do not constitute a hazard.
The colors red, black, and white shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1, “Fundamental Specification of Safety Colors for CIE Standard Source ‘C,’ ” of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1, “Specification of the Safety Colors for CIE Illuminate C and the CIE 1931, 2 Standard Observer,” of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
The standard color of the background shall be yellow; and the panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
The standard color of the background shall be white; and the panel, green with white letters. Any letters used against the white background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
This emblem (see fig. J-7) consists of a fluorescent yellow-orange triangle with a dark red reflective border. The yellow-orange fluorescent triangle is a highly visible color for daylight exposure. The reflective border defines the shape of the fluorescent color in daylight and creates a hollow red triangle in the path of motor vehicle headlights at night. The emblem is intended as a unique identification for, and it shall be used only on, vehicles which by design move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on the public roads. The emblem is not a clearance marker for wide machinery nor is it intended to replace required lighting or marking of slow-moving vehicles. Neither the color film pattern and its dimensions nor the backing shall be altered to permit use of advertising or other markings. The material, location, mounting, etc., of the emblem shall be in accordance with the American Society of Agricultural Engineers Emblem for Identifying Slow-Moving Vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.1-1971), which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The wording of any sign should be easily read and concise. The sign should contain sufficient information to be easily understood. The wording should make a positive, rather than negative suggestion and should be accurate in fact.
The biological hazard warning shall be used to signify the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to identify equipment, containers, rooms, materials, experimental animals, or combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable hazardous agents. For the purpose of this subparagraph the term “biological hazard,” or “biohazard,” shall include only those infectious agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the well-being of man.
Biological hazard or BIOHAZARD means those infectious agents presenting a risk of death, injury or illness to employees.
Major message means that portion of a tag's inscription that is more specific than the signal word and that indicates the specific hazardous condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee. Examples include: “High Voltage,” “Close Clearance,” “Do Not Start,” or “Do Not Use” or a corresponding pictograph used with a written text or alone.
Pictograph means a pictorial representation used to identify a hazardous condition or to convey a safety instruction.
Signal word means that portion of a tag's inscription that contains the word or words that are intended to capture the employee's immediate attention.
Tag means a device usually made of card, paper, pasteboard, plastic or other material used to identify a hazardous condition.
Tags shall be used as a means to prevent accidental injury or illness to employees who are exposed to hazardous or potentially hazardous conditions, equipment or operations which are out of the ordinary, unexpected or not readily apparent. Tags shall be used until such time as the identified hazard is eliminated or the hazardous operation is completed. Tags need not be used where signs, guarding or other positive means of protection are being used.
All required tags shall meet the following criteria:
Danger tags shall be used in major hazard situations where an immediate hazard presents a threat of death or serious injury to employees. Danger tags shall be used only in these situations.
Caution tags shall be used in minor hazard situations where a non-immediate or potential hazard or unsafe practice presents a lesser threat of employee injury. Caution tags shall be used only in these situations.
Warning tags may be used to represent a hazard level between “Caution” and “Danger,” instead of the required “Caution” tag, provided that they have a signal word of “Warning,” an appropriate major message, and otherwise meet the general tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
Biological Hazard Symbol Configuration
Other tags may be used in addition to those required by this paragraph (f), or in other situations where this paragraph (f) does not require tags, provided that they do not detract from the impact or visibility of the signal word and major message of any required tag.
Appendixes to § 1910.145( f ), Accident Prevention Tags
This section contains requirements for practices and procedures to protect employees in general industry from the hazards of entry into permit-required confined spaces. This section does not apply to agriculture, to construction, or to shipyard employment (parts 1928, 1926, and 1915 of this chapter, respectively).
Acceptable entry conditions means the conditions that must exist in a permit space to allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with a permit-required confined space entry can safely enter into and work within the space.
Attendant means an individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces who monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all attendant's duties assigned in the employer's permit space program.
Authorized entrant means an employee who is authorized by the employer to enter a permit space.
Blanking or blinding means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond the plate.
Confined space means a space that:
Double block and bleed means the closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking or tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves.
Emergency means any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring equipment) or event internal or external to the permit space that could endanger entrants.
Engulfment means the surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation, constriction, or crushing.
Entry means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required confined space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.
Entry permit (permit) means the written or printed document that is provided by the employer to allow and control entry into a permit space and that contains the information specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
Entry supervisor means the person (such as the employer, foreman, or crew chief) responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry as required by this section.
Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from a permit space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
Hot work permit means the employer's written authorization to perform operations (for example, riveting, welding, cutting, burning, and heating) capable of providing a source of ignition.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means any condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.
Inerting means the displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space by a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere is noncombustible.
Isolation means the process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely protected against the release of energy and material into the space by such means as: blanking or blinding; misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double block and bleed system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy; or blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages.
Line breaking means the intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is or has been carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or any fluid at a volume, pressure, or temperature capable of causing injury.
Non-permit confined space means a confined space that does not contain or, with respect to atmospheric hazards, have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen by volume.
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent oxygen by volume.
Permit-required confined space (permit space) means a confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics:
Permit-required confined space program (permit space program) means the employer's overall program for controlling, and, where appropriate, for protecting employees from, permit space hazards and for regulating employee entry into permit spaces.
Permit system means the employer's written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.
Prohibited condition means any condition in a permit space that is not allowed by the permit during the period when entry is authorized.
Rescue service means the personnel designated to rescue employees from permit spaces.
Retrieval system means the equipment (including a retrieval line, chest or full-body harness, wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of persons from permit spaces.
Testing means the process by which the hazards that may confront entrants of a permit space are identified and evaluated. Testing includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the permit space.
Under the permit space program required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the employer shall:
The entry permit that documents compliance with this section and authorizes entry to a permit space shall identify:
The employer shall ensure that all authorized entrants:
The employer shall ensure that each attendant:
The employer shall ensure that each entry supervisor:
The employer must ensure that such employees successfully complete the training required to establish proficiency as an authorized entrant, as provided by paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;
Appendixes to § 1910.146—Permit-required Confined Spaces
Appendix B to § 1910.146—Procedures for Atmospheric Testing
Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist.
The atmosphere of a confined space should be analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, should be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified safety professional, certified marine chemist, etc.) based on evaluation of all serious hazards.
The atmosphere of a permit space which may contain a hazardous atmosphere should be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) should be recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated acceptable entry condition.
Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter should be made for at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.
When monitoring for entries involving a descent into atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope should be tested a distance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress should be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and detector response.
A test for oxygen is performed first because most combustible gas meters are oxygen dependent and will not provide reliable readings in an oxygen deficient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are tested for next because the threat of fire or explosion is both more immediate and more life threatening, in most cases, than exposure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they are performed last.
Appendix C to § 1910.146—Examples of Permit-required Confined Space Programs
Example 1.
Workplace. Sewer entry.
Potential hazards. The employees could be exposed to the following:
Engulfment.
Presence of toxic gases. Equal to or more than 10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. If the presence of other toxic contaminants is suspected, specific monitoring programs will be developed.
Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Equal to or greater than 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL).
Oxygen Deficiency. A concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5% by volume.
A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant
Certification. Confined spaces may be entered without the need for a written permit or attendant provided that the space can be maintained in a safe condition for entry by mechanical ventilation alone, as provided in § 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter an enclosed/confined space shall have successfully completed, -as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures. A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. The Confined Space Pre-Entry Check List must be completed by the LEAD WORKER before entry into a confined space. This list verifies completion of items listed below. This check list shall be kept at the job site for duration of the job. If circumstances dictate an interruption in the work, the permit space must be re-evaluated and a new check list must be completed.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Pumps and Lines. All pumps and lines which may reasonably cause contaminants to flow into the space shall be disconnected, blinded and locked out, or effectively isolated by other means to prevent development of dangerous air contamination or engulfment. Not all laterals to sewers or storm drains require blocking. However, where experience or knowledge of industrial use indicates there is a reasonable potential for contamination of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer, then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If blocking and/or isolation requires entry into the space the provisions for entry into a permit- required confined space must be implemented.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.
Testing. The atmosphere within the space will be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas monitors and explosion meters are examples of monitoring equipment that may be used to test permit space atmospheres. Testing shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER who has successfully completed the Gas Detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre-entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. The supervisor will certify in writing, based upon the results of the pre-entry testing, that all hazards have been eliminated. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connecting spaces.
Entry Procedures. If there are no non-atmospheric hazards present and if the pre-entry tests show there is no dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency within the space and there is no reason to believe that any is likely to develop, entry into and work within may proceed. Continuous testing of the atmosphere in the immediate vicinity of the workers within the space shall be accomplished. The workers will immediately leave the permit space when any of the gas monitor alarm set points are reached as defined. Workers will not return to the area until a SUPERVISOR who has completed the gas detector training has used a direct reading gas detector to evaluate the situation and has determined that it is safe to enter.
Rescue. Arrangements for rescue services are not required where there is no attendant. See the rescue portion of section B., below, for instructions regarding rescue planning where an entry permit is required.
B. Entry Permit Required
Permits. Confined Space Entry Permit. All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter a permit-required confined space shall have successfully completed, as a minimum, the training as required by the following sections of these procedures. A written copy of operating and rescue procedures as required by these procedures shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. The Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed before approval can be given to enter a permit-required confined space. This permit verifies completion of items listed below. This permit shall be kept at the job site for the duration of the job. If circumstances cause an interruption in the work or a change in the alarm conditions for which entry was approved, a new Confined Space Entry Permit must be completed.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting vapors from tanks, piping or sewers.
Testing. The confined space atmosphere shall be tested to determine whether dangerous air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be used. Testing shall be performed by the SUPERVISOR who has successfully completed the gas detector training for the monitor he will use. The minimum parameters to be monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written record of the pre- entry test results shall be made and kept at the work site for the duration of the job. Affected employees shall be able to review the testing results. The most hazardous conditions shall govern when work is being performed in two adjoining, connected spaces.
Space Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation systems, where applicable, shall be set at 100% outside air. Where possible, open additional manholes to increase air circulation. Use portable blowers to augment natural circulation if needed. After a suitable ventilating period, repeat the testing. Entry may not begin until testing has demonstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has been eliminated.
Entry Procedures. The following procedure shall be observed under any of the following conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the existence of dangerous or deficient conditions and additional ventilation cannot reduce concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmosphere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is not feasible to provide for ready exit from spaces equipped with automatic fire suppression systems and it is not practical or safe to deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emergency exists and it is not feasible to wait for pre-entry procedures to take effect.
All personnel must be trained. A self contained breathing apparatus shall be worn by any person entering the space. At least one worker shall stand by the outside of the space ready to give assistance in case of emergency. The standby worker shall have a self contained breathing apparatus available for immediate use. There shall be at least one additional worker within sight or call of the standby worker. Continuous powered communications shall be maintained between the worker within the confined space and standby personnel.
If at any time there is any questionable action or non- movement by the worker inside, a verbal check will be made. If there is no response, the worker will be moved immediately. Exception: If the worker is disabled due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be removed from the confined space unless there is immediate danger to his/her life. Local fire department rescue personnel shall be notified immediately. The standby worker may only enter the confined space in case of an emergency (wearing the self contained breathing apparatus) and only after being relieved by another worker. Safety belt or harness with attached lifeline shall be used by all workers entering the space with the free end of the line secured outside the entry opening. The standby worker shall attempt to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline before entering the space.
When practical, these spaces shall be entered through side openings—those within 3 1/2 feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry must be through a top opening, the safety belt shall be of the harness type that suspends a person upright and a hoisting device or similar apparatus shall be available for lifting workers out of the space.
In any situation where their use may endanger the worker, use of a hoisting device or safety belt and attached lifeline may be discontinued.
When dangerous air contamination is attributable to flammable and/or explosive substances, lighting and electrical equipment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per National Electrical Code and no ignition sources shall be introduced into the area.
Continuous gas monitoring shall be performed during all confined space operations. If alarm conditions change adversely, entry personnel shall exit the confined space and a new confined space permit issued.
Rescue. Call the fire department services for rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured personnel are present, workers at the site shall implement emergency procedures to fit the situation.
Example 2.
Workplace. Meat and poultry rendering plants.
Cookers and dryers are either batch or continuous in their operation. Multiple batch cookers are operated in parallel. When one unit of a multiple set is shut down for repairs, means are available to isolate that unit from the others which remain in operation.
Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylindrical vessels equipped with a center, rotating shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the continuous cooker or dryer is also steam heated.
Potential Hazards. The recognized hazards associated with cookers and dryers are the risk that employees could be:
1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator;
2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled fat;
3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cooker/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct system if steam valves are not properly closed and locked out;
4. Burned by contact with hot metal surfaces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or inner shell of the cooker/dryer;
5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere inside cooker/dryer;
6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cooker/dryer;
7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment taken into the cooker/dryer;
8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of combustion; or
9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.
Permits. The supervisor in this case is always present at the cooker/dryer or other permit entry confined space when entry is made. The supervisor must follow the pre-entry isolation procedures described in the entry permit in preparing for entry, and ensure that the protective clothing, ventilating equipment and any other equipment required by the permit are at the entry site.
Control of hazards. Mechanical. Lock out main power switch to agitator motor at main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to inform others that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress.
Engulfment. Close all valves in the raw material blow line. Secure each valve in its closed position using chain and lock. Attach a tag to the valve and chain warning that a permit entry confined space entry is in progress. The same procedure shall be used for securing the fat recycle valve.
Burns and heat stress. Close steam supply valves to jacket and secure with chains and tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker vent line to condenser manifold duct system. Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at discharge end and top center door to allow natural ventilation throughout the entry. If faster cooling is needed, use a portable ventilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling water may be circulated through the jacket to reduce both outer and inner surface temperatures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air and inner surface temperatures in cooker/dryer to assure they are within acceptable limits before entering, or use proper protective clothing.
Fire and fume hazards. Careful site preparation, such as cleaning the area within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cutting operations, and proper ventilation are the preferred controls. All welding and cutting operations shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard. Proper ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust ventilation, or the use of portable ventilation fans, or a combination of the two practices.
Electrical shock. Electrical equipment used in cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condition.
Slips and falls. Remove residual grease before entering cooker/dryer.
Attendant. The supervisor shall be the attendant for employees entering cooker/dryers.
Permit. The permit shall specify how isolation shall be done and any other preparations needed before making entry. This is especially important in parallel arrangements of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation need not be shut down to allow safe entry into one unit.
Rescue. When necessary, the attendant shall call the fire department as previously arranged.
Example 3.
Workplace. Workplaces where tank cars, trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar portable tanks are fabricated or serviced.
A. During fabrication. These tanks and dry-bulk carriers are entered repeatedly throughout the fabrication process. These products are not configured identically, but the manufacturing processes by which they are made are very similar.
Sources of hazards. In addition to the mechanical hazards arising from the risks that an entrant would be injured due to contact with components of the tank or the tools being used, there is also the risk that a worker could be injured by breathing fumes from welding materials or mists or vapors from materials used to coat the tank interior. In addition, many of these vapors and mists are flammable, so the failure to properly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or explosion.
Control of hazards.
Welding. Local exhaust ventilation shall be used to remove welding fumes once the tank or carrier is completed to the point that workers may enter and exit only through a manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be brought into a tank or carrier that is a permit entry confined space.
Application of interior coatings/linings. Atmospheric hazards shall be controlled by forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the atmospheric concentration of flammable materials below 10% of the lower flammable limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), whichever term is used locally). The appropriate respirators are provided and shall be used in addition to providing forced ventilation if the forced ventilation does not maintain acceptable respiratory conditions.
Permits. Because of the repetitive nature of the entries in these operations, an “Area Entry Permit” will be issued for a 1 month period to cover those production areas where tanks are fabricated to the point that entry and exit are made using manholes.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that conditions in the tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet permit requirements before authorizing entry.
Attendant. The area supervisor shall designate an employee to maintain communication by employer specified means with employees working in tanks to ensure their safety. The attendant may not enter any permit entry confined space to rescue an entrant or for any other reason, unless authorized by the rescue procedure and, and even then, only after calling the rescue team and being relieved by as attendant by another worker.
Communications and observation. Communications between attendant and entrant(s) shall be maintained throughout entry. Methods of communication that may be specified by the permit include voice, voice powered radio, tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, signalling tugs on a rope, and the attendant's observation that work activities such as chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc., which require deliberate operator control continue normally. These activities often generate so much noise that the necessary hearing protection makes communication by voice difficult.
Rescue procedures. Acceptable rescue procedures include entry by a team of employee-rescuers, use of public emergency services, and procedures for breaching the tank. The area permit specifies which procedures are available, but the area supervisor makes the final decision based on circumstances. (Certain injuries may make it necessary to breach the tank to remove a person rather than risk additional injury by removal through an existing manhole. However, the supervisor must ensure that no breaching procedure used for rescue would violate terms of the entry permit. For instance, if the tank must be breached by cutting with a torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be free of volatile or combustible coatings within 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and the atmosphere within the tank must be below the LFL.
Retrieval line and harnesses. The retrieval lines and harnesses generally required under this standard are usually impractical for use in tanks because the internal configuration of the tanks and their interior baffles and other structures would prevent rescuers from hauling out injured entrants. However, unless the rescue procedure calls for breaching the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be trained in the use of retrieval lines and harnesses for removing injured employees through manholes.
B. Repair or service of “used” tanks and bulk trailers.
Sources of hazards. In addition to facing the potential hazards encountered in fabrication or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which have been in service may contain residues of dangerous materials, whether left over from the transportation of hazardous cargoes or generated by chemical or bacterial action on residues of non-hazardous cargoes.
Control of atmospheric hazards. A “used” tank shall be brought into areas where tank entry is authorized only after the tank has been emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) of any residues, and purged of any potential atmospheric hazards.
Welding. In addition to tank cleaning for control of atmospheric hazards, coating and surface materials shall be removed 4 inches (10.16 cm) or more from any surface area where welding or other torch work will be done and care taken that the atmosphere within the tank remains well below the LFL. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, subpart Q, OSHA's welding standard, at all times.)
Permits. An entry permit valid for up to 1 year shall be issued prior to authorization of entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trailers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry cleaning requirement, this permit shall require the employee safeguards specified for new tank fabrication or construction permit areas.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may authorize an employee to enter a tank trailer, dry bulk trailer or truck within the permit area. The area supervisor must determine that the entry permit requirements have been met before authorizing entry.
Appendix E to § 1910.146—Sewer System Entry
Sewer entry differs in three vital respects from other permit entries; first, there rarely exists any way to completely isolate the space (a section of a continuous system) to be entered; second, because isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes beyond the control of the entrant or employer, and third, experienced sewer workers are especially knowledgeable in entry and work in their permit spaces because of their frequent entries. Unlike other employments where permit space entry is a rare and exceptional event, sewer workers' usual work environment is a permit space.
The employer should designate as entrants only employees who are thoroughly trained in the employer's sewer entry procedures and who demonstrate that they follow these entry procedures exactly as prescribed when performing sewer entries.
Entrants should be trained in the use of, and be equipped with, atmospheric monitoring equipment which sounds an audible alarm, in addition to its visual readout, whenever one of the following conditions are encountered: Oxygen concentration less than 19.5 percent; flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hydrogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. Atmospheric monitoring equipment needs to be calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range sensor is best suited for initial use in situations where the actual or potential contaminants have not been identified, because broad range sensors, unlike substance-specific sensors, enable employers to obtain an overall reading of the hydrocarbons (flammables) present in the space. However, such sensors only indicate that a hazardous threshold of a class of chemicals has been exceeded. They do not measure the levels of contamination of specific substances. Therefore, substance-specific devices, which measure the actual levels of specific substances, are best suited for use where actual and potential contaminants have been identified. The measurements obtained with substance-specific devices are of vital importance to the employer when decisions are made concerning the measures necessary to protect entrants (such as ventilation or personal protective equipment) and the setting and attainment of appropriate entry conditions. However, the sewer environment may suddenly and unpredictably change, and the substance-specific devices may not detect the potentially lethal atmospheric hazards which may enter the sewer environment.
Although OSHA considers the information and guidance provided above to be appropriate and useful in most sewer entry situations, the Agency emphasizes that each employer must consider the unique circumstances, including the predictability of the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces in the employer's workplace in preparing for entry. Only the employer can decide, based upon his or her knowledge of, and experience with permit spaces in sewer systems, what the best type of testing instrument may be for any specific entry operation.
The selected testing instrument should be carried and used by the entrant in sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's environment, and in advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to warn the entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where several entrants are working together in the same immediate location, one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is acceptable.
Sewer crews should develop and maintain liaison, to the extent possible, with the local weather bureau and fire and emergency services in their area so that sewer work may be delayed or interrupted and entrants withdrawn whenever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded by rain or fire suppression activities, or whenever flammable or other hazardous materials are released into sewers during emergencies by industrial or transportation accidents.
Entry into large bore sewers may require the use of special equipment. Such equipment might include such items as atmosphere monitoring devices with automatic audible alarms, escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with at least 10 minute air supply (or other NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and waterproof flashlights, and may also include boats and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pulling around bends and corners as needed.
Appendix F to § 1910.146—Rescue Team or Rescue Service Evaluation Criteria (Non-Mandatory)
A. Initial Evaluation
I. The employer should meet with the prospective rescue service to facilitate the evaluations required by § 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and § 1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off-site rescue service is being considered, the employer must contact the service to plan and coordinate the evaluations required by the standard. Merely posting the service's number or planning to rely on the 911 emergency phone number to obtain these services at the time of a permit space emergency would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of the standard.
II. The capabilities required of a rescue service vary with the type of permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary and the hazards likely to be encountered in those spaces. Answering the questions below will assist employers in determining whether the rescue service is capable of performing rescues in the permit spaces present at the employer's workplace.
1. What are the needs of the employer with regard to response time (time for the rescue service to receive notification, arrive at the scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? For example, if entry is to be made into an IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ventilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue team or service would need to be standing by at the permit space. On the other hand, if the danger to entrants is restricted to mechanical hazards that would cause injuries (e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate.
2. How quickly can the rescue team or service get from its location to the permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary? Relevant factors to consider would include: the location of the rescue team or service relative to the employer's workplace, the quality of roads and highways to be traveled, potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion that might be encountered in transit, the reliability of the rescuer's vehicles, and the training and skill of its drivers.
3. What is the availability of the rescue service? Is it unavailable at certain times of the day or in certain situations? What is the likelihood that key personnel of the rescue service might be unavailable at times? If the rescue service becomes unavailable while an entry is underway, does it have the capability of notifying the employer so that the employer can instruct the attendant to abort the entry immediately?
4. Does the rescue service meet all the requirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the standard? If not, has it developed a plan that will enable it to meet those requirements in the future? If so, how soon can the plan be implemented?
5. For off-site services, is the service willing to perform rescues at the employer's workplace? (An employer may not rely on a rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to provide rescue services.)
6. Is an adequate method for communications between the attendant, employer and prospective rescuer available so that a rescue request can be transmitted to the rescuer without delay? How soon after notification can a prospective rescuer dispatch a rescue team to the entry site?
7. For rescues into spaces that may pose significant atmospheric hazards and from which rescue entry, patient packaging and retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a relatively short time (15-20 minutes), employers should consider using airline respirators (with escape bottles) for the rescuers and to supply rescue air to the patient. If the employer decides to use SCBA, does the prospective rescue service have an ample supply of replacement cylinders and procedures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be retrieved) well within the SCBA's air supply limits?
8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5 feet in depth, can the prospective rescue service properly perform entry rescues? Does the service have the technical knowledge and equipment to perform rope work or elevated rescue, if needed?
9. Does the rescue service have the necessary skills in medical evaluation, patient packaging and emergency response?
10. Does the rescue service have the necessary equipment to perform rescues, or must the equipment be provided by the employer or another source?
B. Performance Evaluation
Rescue services are required by paragraph (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues at least once every 12 months, provided that the team or service has not successfully performed a permit space rescue within that time. As part of each practice session, the service should perform a critique of the practice rescue, or have another qualified party perform the critique, so that deficiencies in procedures, equipment, training, or number of personnel can be identified and corrected. The results of the critique, and the corrections made to respond to the deficiencies identified, should be given to the employer to enable it to determine whether the rescue service can quickly be upgraded to meet the employer's rescue needs or whether another service must be selected. The following questions will assist employers and rescue teams and services evaluate their performance.
1. Have all members of the service been trained as permit space entrants, at a minimum, including training in the potential hazards of all permit spaces, or of representative permit spaces, from which rescue may be needed? Can team members recognize the signs, symptoms, and consequences of exposure to any hazardous atmospheres that may be present in those permit spaces?
2. Is every team member provided with, and properly trained in, the use and need for PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, which may be required to perform permit space rescues in the facility? Is every team member properly trained to perform his or her functions and make rescues, and to use any rescue equipment, such as ropes and backboards, that may be needed in a rescue attempt?
3. Are team members trained in the first aid and medical skills needed to treat victims overcome or injured by the types of hazards that may be encountered in the permit spaces at the facility?
4. Do all team members perform their functions safely and efficiently? Do rescue service personnel focus on their own safety before considering the safety of the victim?
5. If necessary, can the rescue service properly test the atmosphere to determine if it is IDLH?
6. Can the rescue personnel identify information pertinent to the rescue from entry permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs?
7. Has the rescue service been informed of any hazards to personnel that may arise from outside the space, such as those that may be caused by future work near the space?
8. If necessary, can the rescue service properly package and retrieve victims from a permit space that has a limited size opening (less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), limited internal space, or internal obstacles or hazards?
9. If necessary, can the rescue service safely perform an elevated (high angle) rescue?
10. Does the rescue service have a plan for each of the kinds of permit space rescue operations at the facility? Is the plan adequate for all types of rescue operations that may be needed at the facility? Teams may practice in representative spaces, or in spaces that are “worst-case” or most restrictive with respect to internal configuration, elevation, and portal size. The following characteristics of a practice space should be considered when deciding whether a space is truly representative of an actual permit space:
[58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846, June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him/her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
Authorized employee. A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section.
Capable of being locked out. An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability.
Energized. Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy.
Energy isolating device. A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to the following: A manually operated electrical circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently; a line valve; a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices.
Energy source. Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy.
Hot tap. A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems.
Lockout. The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed.
Lockout device. A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.
Normal production operations. The utilization of a machine or equipment to perform its intended production function.
Servicing and/or maintenance. Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy.
Setting up. Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal production operation.
Tagout. The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
Tagout device. A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
The employer shall establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered inoperative.
Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the following criteria: Color; shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be standardized.
Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools.
Tagout devices, including and their means of attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie.
Lockout devices and tagout devices shall indicate the identity of the employee applying the device(s).
Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance.
Affected employees shall be notified by the employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the machine or equipment.
The established procedures for the application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in the following sequence:
Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.
The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.
All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).
Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergization of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.
Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:
The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.
Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the employee who applied the device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): When the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tagout device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of the employer, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into the employer's energy control program. The employer shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:
Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.
Appendix A to § 1910.147—Typical Minimal Lockout Procedure
General
The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist employers in developing their procedures so they meet the requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided the employer complies with the provisions of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, the employer must provide full employee protection ( see paragraph (c)(3)) and additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections are required. For more complex systems, more comprehensive procedures may need to be developed, documented and utilized.
Lockout Procedure
Lockout procedure for
Purpose
This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped, isolated from all potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury.
Compliance With This Program
All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment.
Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above.
Sequence of Lockout
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify.
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to control the energy.
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.
Type(s) of stored energy—methods to dissipate or restrain.
Caution: Return operating control(s) to neutral or “off” position after verifying the isolation of the equipment.
Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment.
Restoring Equipment to Service. When the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready to return to normal operating condition, the following steps shall be taken.
[54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686, Sept. 20, 1990; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 44265, July 25, 2011]
Appendix A to § 1910.151—First aid kits (Non-Mandatory)
First aid supplies are required to be readily available under paragraph § 1910.151(b). An example of the minimal contents of a generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI) Z308.1-1998 “Minimum Requirements for Workplace First-aid Kits.” The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be adequate for small worksites. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits.
In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit appropriately.
If it is reasonably anticipated that employees will be exposed to blood or other potentially infectious materials while using first aid supplies, employers are required to provide appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in compliance with the provisions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens standard, § 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate PPE for this type of exposure, such as gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye protection.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
This subpart contains requirements for fire brigades, and all portable and fixed fire suppression equipment, fire detection systems, and fire or employee alarm systems installed to meet the fire protection requirements of 29 CFR part 1910.
This subpart applies to all employments except for maritime, construction, and agriculture.
[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988]
This section contains requirements for the organization, training, and personal protective equipment of fire brigades whenever they are established by an employer.
The requirements of this section apply to fire brigades, industrial fire departments and private or contractual type fire departments. Personal protective equipment requirements apply only to members of fire brigades performing interior structural fire fighting. The requirements of this section do not apply to airport crash rescue or forest fire fighting operations.
The employer shall prepare and maintain a statement or written policy which establishes the existence of a fire brigade; the basic organizational structure; the type, amount, and frequency of training to be provided to fire brigade members; the expected number of members in the fire brigade; and the functions that the fire brigade is to perform at the workplace. The organizational statement shall be available for inspection by the Assistant Secretary and by employees or their designated representatives.
The employer shall assure that employees who are expected to do interior structural fire fighting are physically capable of performing duties which may be assigned to them during emergencies. The employer shall not permit employees with known heart disease, epilepsy, or emphysema, to participate in fire brigade emergency activities unless a physician's certificate of the employees' fitness to participate in such activities is provided. For employees assigned to fire brigades before September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective on September 15, 1990. For employees assigned to fire brigades on or after September 15, 1980, this paragraph is effective December 15, 1980.
The employer shall maintain and inspect, at least annually, fire fighting equipment to assure the safe operational condition of the equipment. Portable fire extinguishers and respirators shall be inspected at least monthly. Fire fighting equipment that is in damaged or unserviceable condition shall be removed from service and replaced.
The following requirements apply to those employees who perform interior structural fire fighting. The requirements do not apply to employees who use fire extinguishers or standpipe systems to control or extinguish fires only in the incipient stage.
Such apparatus shall also be worn during emergency situations involving toxic substances.
[45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 73 FR 75584, Dec. 12, 2008]
The requirements of this section apply to the placement, use, maintenance, and testing of portable fire extinguishers provided for the use of employees. Paragraph (d) of this section does not apply to extinguishers provided for employee use on the outside of workplace buildings or structures. Where extinguishers are provided but are not intended for employee use and the employer has an emergency action plan and a fire prevention plan that meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39 respectively, then only the requirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section apply.
| Type of extinguishers | Test interval (years) |
|---|---|
| Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) | ( 1 ) |
| Soda acid (stainless steel shell) | 5 |
| Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze | 5 |
| Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze | 5 |
| Wetting agent | 5 |
| Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) | ( 1 ) |
| Foam (stainless steel shell) | 5 |
| Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) | 5 |
| Loaded stream | 5 |
| Dry chemical with stainless steel | 5 |
| Carbon dioxide | 5 |
| Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, brazed brass or aluminum shells | 12 |
| Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with mild steel shells | 12 |
| Halon 1211 | 12 |
| Halon 1301 | 12 |
| Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild steel shells | 12 |
| 1 Extinguishers having shells constructed of copper or brass joined by soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically tested and shall be removed from service by January 1, 1982. (Not permitted) |
[45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 67 FR 67964, Nov. 7, 2002]
This section applies to all small hose, Class II, and Class III standpipe systems installed to meet the requirements of a particular OSHA standard.
This section does not apply to Class I standpipe systems.
The employer shall assure that standpipes are located or otherwise protected against mechanical damage. Damaged standpipes shall be repaired promptly.
Where reels or cabinets are provided to contain fire hose, the employer shall assure that they are designed to facilitate prompt use of the hose valves, the hose, and other equipment at the time of a fire or other emergency. The employer shall assure that the reels and cabinets are conspicuously identified and used only for fire equipment.
The employer shall assure that standpipe hose is equipped with shut-off type nozzles.
The minimum water supply for standpipe and hose systems, which are provided for the use of employees, shall be sufficient to provide 100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a period of at least thirty minutes.
[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Automatic sprinkler systems installed in workplaces, but not required by OSHA, are exempt from the requirements of this section.
The employer shall properly maintain an automatic sprinkler system installed to comply with this section. The employer shall assure that a main drain flow test is performed on each system annually. The inspector's test valve shall be opened at least every two years to assure that the sprinkler system operates properly.
The employer shall conduct proper acceptance tests on sprinkler systems installed for employee protection after January 1, 1981, and record the dates of such tests. Proper acceptance tests include the following:
The employer shall assure that every automatic sprinkler system is provided with at least one automatic water supply capable of providing design water flow for at least 30 minutes. An auxiliary water supply or equivalent protection shall be provided when the automatic water supply is out of service, except for systems of 20 or fewer sprinklers.
The employer may attach hose connections for fire fighting use to wet pipe sprinkler systems provided that the water supply satisfies the combined design demand for sprinklers and standpipes.
The employer shall assure that automatic sprinkler system piping is protected against freezing and exterior surface corrosion.
The employer shall assure that all dry sprinkler pipes and fittings are installed so that the system may be totally drained.
On all sprinkler systems having more than twenty (20) sprinklers, the employer shall assure that a local waterflow alarm is provided which sounds an audible signal on the premises upon water flow through the system equal to the flow from a single sprinkler.
The employer shall assure that sprinklers are spaced to provide a maximum protection area per sprinkler, a minimum of interference to the discharge pattern by building or structural members or building contents and suitable sensitivity to possible fire hazards. The minimum vertical clearance between sprinklers and material below shall be 18 inches (45.7 cm).
The employer shall assure that hydraulically designed automatic sprinkler systems or portions thereof are identified and that the location, number of sprinklers in the hydraulically designed section, and the basis of the design is indicated. Central records may be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler valves provided the records are available for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary.
[45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980]
This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using dry chemical as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with § 1910.160.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using a gas as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with § 1910.160. In some cases, the gas may be in a liquid state during storage.
The requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) through (b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding systems.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
This section applies to all fixed extinguishing systems, using water or foam solution as the extinguishing agent, installed to meet a particular OSHA standard. These systems shall also comply with § 1910.160. This section does not apply to automatic sprinkler systems which are covered under § 1910.159.
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980]
This section applies to all automatic fire detection systems installed to meet the requirements of a particular OSHA standard.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]
The employer shall assure that manually operated actuation devices for use in conjunction with employee alarms are unobstructed, conspicuous and readily accessible.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980]
§ 1910.156 Fire brigades.
1. Scope. This section does not require an employer to organize a fire brigade. However, if an employer does decide to organize a fire brigade, the requirements of this section apply.
2. Pre-fire planning. It is suggested that pre-fire planning be conducted by the local fire department and/or the workplace fire brigade in order for them to be familiar with the workplace and process hazards. Involvement with the local fire department or fire prevention bureau is encouraged to facilitate coordination and cooperation between members of the fire brigade and those who might be called upon for assistance during a fire emergency.
3. Organizational statement. In addition to the information required in the organizational statement, paragraph 1910.156(b)(1), it is suggested that the organizational statement also contain the following information: a description of the duties that the fire brigade members are expected to perform; the line authority of each fire brigade officer; the number of the fire brigade officers and number of training instructors; and a list and description of the types of awards or recognition that brigade members may be eligible to receive.
4. Physical capability. The physical capability requirement applies only to those fire brigade members who perform interior structural fire fighting. Employees who cannot meet the physical capability requirement may still be members of the fire brigade as long as such employees do not perform interior structural fire fighting. It is suggested that fire brigade members who are unable to perform interior structural fire fighting be assigned less stressful and physically demanding fire brigade duties, e.g., certain types of training, recordkeeping, fire prevention inspection and maintenance, and fire pump operations.
Physically capable can be defined as being able to perform those duties specified in the training requirements of section 1910.156(c). Physically capable can also be determined by physical performance tests or by a physical examination when the examining physician is aware of the duties that the fire brigade member is expected to perform.
It is also recommended that fire brigade members participate in a physical fitness program. There are many benefits which can be attributed to being physically fit. It is believed that physical fitness may help to reduce the number of sprain and strain injuries as well as contributing to the improvement of the cardiovascular system.
5. Training and education. The paragraph on training and education does not contain specific training and education requirements because the type, amount, and frequency of training and education will be as varied as are the purposes for which fire brigades are organized. However, the paragraph does require that training and education be commensurate with those functions that the fire brigade is expected to perform; i.e., those functions specified in the organizational statement. Such a performance requirement provides the necessary flexibility to design a training program which meets the needs of individual fire brigades.
At a minimum, hands-on training is required to be conducted annually for all fire brigade members. However, for those fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting, some type of training or education session must be provided at least quarterly.
In addition to the required hands-on training, it is strongly recommended that fire brigade members receive other types of training and education such as: classroom instruction, review of emergency action procedures, pre-fire planning, review of special hazards in the workplace, and practice in the use of self-contained breathing apparatus.
It is not necessary for the employer to duplicate the same training or education that a fire brigade member receives as a member of a community volunteer fire department, rescue squad, or similar organization. However, such training or education must have been provided to the fire brigade member within the past year and it must be documented that the fire brigade member has received the training or education. For example: there is no need for a fire brigade member to receive another training class in the use of positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus if the fire brigade member has recently completed such training as a member of a community fire department. Instead, the fire brigade member should receive training or education covering other important equipment or duties of the fire brigade as they relate to the workplace hazards, facilities and processes.
It is generally recognized that the effectiveness of fire brigade training and education depends upon the expertise of those providing the training and education as well as the motivation of the fire brigade members. Fire brigade training instructors must receive a higher level of training and education than the fire brigade members they will be teaching. This includes being more knowledgeable about the functions to be performed by the fire brigade and the hazards involved. The instructors should be qualified to train fire brigade members and demonstrate skills in communication, methods of teaching, and motivation. It is important for instructors and fire brigade members alike to be motivated toward the goals of the fire brigade and be aware of the importance of the service that they are providing for the protection of other employees and the workplace.
It is suggested that publications from the International Fire Service Training Association, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-1041), the International Society of Fire Service Instructors and other fire training sources be consulted for recommended qualifications of fire brigade training instructors.
In order to be effective, fire brigades must have competent leadership and supervision. It is important for those who supervise the fire brigade during emergency situations, e.g., fire brigade chiefs, leaders, etc., to receive the necessary training and education for supervising fire brigade activities during these hazardous and stressful situations. These fire brigade members with leadership responsibilities should demonstrate skills in strategy and tactics, fire suppression and prevention techniques, leadership principles, pre-fire planning, and safety practices. It is again suggested that fire service training sources be consulted for determining the kinds of training and education which are necessary for those with fire brigade leadership responsibilities.
It is further suggested that fire brigade leaders and fire brigade instructors receive more formalized training and education on a continuing basis by attending classes provided by such training sources as universities and university fire extension services.
The following recommendations should not be considered to be all of the necessary elements of a complete comprehensive training program, but the information may be helpful as a guide in developing a fire brigade training program.
All fire brigade members should be familiar with exit facilities and their location, emergency escape routes for handicapped workers, and the workplace “emergency action plan.”
In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to control and extinguish fires in the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be trained in the use of fire extinguishers, standpipes, and other fire equipment they are assigned to use. They should also be aware of first aid medical procedures and procedures for dealing with special hazards to which they may be exposed. Training and education should include both classroom instruction and actual operation of the equipment under simulated emergency conditions. Hands-on type training must be conducted at least annually but some functions should be reviewed more often.
In addition to the above training, fire brigade members who are expected to perform emergency rescue and interior structural fire fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar with the proper techniques in rescue and fire suppression procedures. Training and education should include fire protection courses, classroom training, simulated fire situations including “wet drills” and, when feasible, extinguishment of actual mock fires. Frequency of training or education must be at least quarterly, but some drills or classroom training should be conducted as often as monthly or even weekly to maintain the proficiency of fire brigade members.
There are many excellent sources of training and education that the employer may want to use in developing a training program for the workplace fire brigade. These sources include publications, seminars, and courses offered by universities.
There are also excellent fire school courses by such facilities as Texas A and M University, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar University, and Reno Fire School, that deal with those unique hazards which may be encountered by fire brigades in the oil and chemical industry. These schools, and others, also offer excellent training courses which would be beneficial to fire brigades in other types of industries. These courses should be a continuing part of the training program, and employers are strongly encouraged to take advantage of these excellent resources.
It is also important that fire brigade members be informed about special hazards to which they may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. Such hazards as storage and use areas of flammable liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, etc., can pose difficult problems. There must be written procedures developed that describe the actions to be taken in situations involving special hazards. Fire brigade members must be trained in handling these special hazards as well as keeping abreast of any changes that occur in relation to these special hazards.
6. Fire fighting equipment. It is important that fire fighting equipment that is in damaged or unserviceable condition be removed from service and replaced. This will prevent fire brigade members from using unsafe equipment by mistake.
Fire fighting equipment, except portable fire extinguishers and respirators, must be inspected at least annually. Portable fire extinguishers and respirators are required to be inspected at least monthly.
7. Protective clothing.
Paragraph (e) of § 1910.156 does not require all fire brigade members to wear protective clothing. It is not the intention of these standards to require employers to provide a full ensemble of protective clothing for every fire brigade member without consideration given to the types of hazardous environments to which the fire brigade member might be exposed. It is the intention of these standards to require adequate protection for those fire brigade members who might be exposed to fires in an advanced stage, smoke, toxic gases, and high temperatures. Therefore, the protective clothing requirements only apply to those fire brigade members who perform interior structural fire fighting operations.
Additionally, the protective clothing requirements do not apply to the protective clothing worn during outside fire fighting operations (brush and forest fires, crash crew operations) or other special fire fighting activities. It is important that the protective clothing to be worn during these types of fire fighting operations reflect the hazards which are expected to be encountered by fire brigade members.
Section 1910.156 permits an option to achieve foot and leg protection.
The section recognizes the interdependence of protective clothing to cover one or more parts of the body. Therefore, an option is given so that fire brigade members may meet the foot and leg requirements by either wearing long fire-resistive coats in combination with fully extended boots, or by wearing shorter fire-resistive costs in combination with protective trousers and protective shoes or shorter boots.
Paragraph (e)(3) of § 1910.156 provides an option for fire brigade members to achieve body protection. Fire brigade members may wear a fire-resistive coat in combination with fully extended boots, or they may wear a fire-resistive coat in combination with protective trousers.
Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers meeting all of the requirements contained in NFPA 1971-1975 “Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters,” are acceptable as meeting the requirements of this standard.
The lining is required to be permanently attached to the outer shell. However, it is permissible to attach the lining to the outer shell material by stitching in one area such as at the neck. Fastener tape or snap fasteners may be used to secure the rest of the lining to the outer shell to facilitate cleaning. Reference to permanent lining does not refer to a winter liner which is a detachable extra lining used to give added protection to the wearer against the effects of cold weather and wind.
The requirements of the paragraph on hand protection may be met by protective gloves or a glove system. A glove system consists of a combination of different gloves. The usual components of a glove system consist of a pair of gloves, which provide thermal insulation to the hands, worn in combination with a second pair of gloves which provide protection against flame, cut, and puncture.
It is suggested that protective gloves provide dexterity and a sense of feel for objects. Criteria and test methods for dexterity are contained in the NIOSH publications, “The Development of Criteria for Firefighters' Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements” and “Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods.” These NIOSH publications also contain a permissible modified version of Federal Test Method 191, Method 5903, (paragraph (3) of appendix E) for flame resistance when gloves, rather than glove material, are tested for flame resistance.
Head protective devices are required to be provided with ear flaps so that the ear flaps will be available if needed. It is recommended that ear protection always be used while fighting interior structural fires.
Many head protective devices are equipped with face shields to protect the eyes and face. These face shields are permissible as meeting the eye and face protection requirements of this paragraph as long as such face shields meet the requirements of § 1910.133 of the General Industry Standards.
Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or hoods of approved breathing apparatus which meet the requirements of § 1910.134 and paragraph (f) of § 1910.156 are also acceptable as meeting the eye and face protection requirements.
It is recommended that a flame resistant protective head covering such as a hood or snood, which will not adversely affect the seal of a respirator facepiece, be worn during interior structural fire fighting operations to protect the sides of the face and hair.
8. Respiratory protective devices. Respiratory protection is required to be worn by fire brigade members while working inside buildings or confined spaces where toxic products of combustion or an oxygen deficiency is likely to be present; respirators are also to be worn during emergency situations involving toxic substances. When fire brigade members respond to emergency situations, they may be exposed to unknown contaminants in unknown concentrations. Therefore, it is imperative that fire brigade members wear proper respiratory protective devices during these situations. Additionally, there are many instances where toxic products of combustion are still present during mop-up and overhaul operations. Therefore, fire brigade members should continue to wear respirators during these types of operations.
Self-contained breathing apparatus are not required to be equipped with either a buddy-breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve. However, these accessories may be very useful and are acceptable as long as such accessories do not cause damage to the apparatus, restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or obstruct the normal operation of the apparatus.
Buddy-breathing devices are useful for emergency situations where a victim or another fire brigade member can share the same air supply with the wearer of the apparatus for emergency escape purposes.
The employer is encouraged to provide fire brigade members with an alternative means of respiratory protection to be used only for emergency escape purposes if the self-contained breathing apparatus becomes inoperative. Such alternative means of respiratory protection may be either a buddy-breathing device or an escape self-contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-duration respiratory protective device which is approved for only emergency escape purposes. It is suggested that if ESCBA units are used, that they be of at least 5 minutes service life.
Quick-disconnect valves are devices which start the flow of air by insertion of the hose (which leads to the facepiece) into the regulator of self-contained breathing apparatus, and stop the flow of air by disconnecting the hose from the regulator. These devices are particularly useful for those positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus which do not have the capability of being switched from the demand to the positive-pressure mode.
The use of a self-contained breathing apparatus where the apparatus can be switched from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is acceptable as long as the apparatus is in the positive-pressure mode when performing interior structural fire fighting operations. Also acceptable are approved respiratory protective devices which have been converted to the positive-pressure type when such modification is accomplished by trained and experienced persons using kits or parts approved by NIOSH and provided by the manufacturer and by following the manufacturer's instructions.
There are situations which require the use of respirators which have a duration of 2 hours or more. Presently, there are no approved positive-pressure apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2 hours. Consequently, negative-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus with a rated service life of more than 2 hours and which have a minimum protection factor of 5,000 as determined by an acceptable quantitative fit test performed on each individual, will be acceptable for use during situations which require long duration apparatus. Long duration apparatus may be needed in such instances as working in tunnels, subway systems, etc. Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus will continue to be acceptable for a maximum of 18 months after a positive-pressure apparatus with the same or longer rated service life of more than 2 hours is certified by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month phase-in period, all self-contained breathing apparatus used for these long duration situations will have to be of the positive-pressure type.
Protection factor (sometimes called fit factor) is defined as the ratio of the contaminant concentrations outside of the respirator to the contaminant concentrations inside the facepiece of the respirator.
Protection factors are determined by quantitative fit tests. An acceptable quantitative fit test should include the following elements:
1. A fire brigade member who is physically and medically capable of wearing respirators, and who is trained in the use of respirators, dons a self-contained breathing apparatus equipped with a device that will monitor the concentration of a contaminant inside the facepiece.
2. The fire brigade member then performs a qualitative fit test to assure the best face to facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit test can consist of a negative-pressure test, positive-pressure test, isoamyl acetate vapor (banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test. For more details on respirator fitting see the NIOSH booklet entitled “A Guide to Industrial Respiratory Protection” June, 1976, and HEW publication No. (NIOSH) 76-189.
3. The wearer should then perform physical activity which reflects the level of work activity which would be expected during fire fighting activities. The physical activity should include simulated fire-ground work activity or physical exercise such as running-in-place, a step test, etc.
4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the wearer is placed in a test atmosphere containing a non-toxic contaminant with a known, constant, concentration.
The protection factor is then determined by dividing the known concentration of the contaminant in the test atmosphere by the concentration of the contaminant inside the facepiece when the following exercises are performed:
The protection factor which is determined must be at least 5,000. The quantitative fit test should be conducted at least three times. It is acceptable to conduct all three tests on the same day. However, there should be at least one hour between tests to reflect the protection afforded by the apparatus during different times of the day.
The above elements are not meant to be a comprehensive, technical description of a quantitative fit test protocol. However, quantitative fit test procedures which include these elements are acceptable for determining protection factors. Procedures for a quantitative fit test are required to be available for inspection by the Assistant Secretary or authorized representative.
Organizations such as Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Lawrence Livermore Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) are excellent sources for additional information concerning qualitative and quantitative fit testing.
§ 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
1. Scope and application. The scope and application of this section is written to apply to three basic types of workplaces. First, there are those workplaces where the employer has chosen to evacuate all employees from the workplace at the time of a fire emergency. Second, there are those workplaces where the employer has chosen to permit certain employees to fight fires and to evacuate all other non-essential employees at the time of a fire emergency. Third, there are those workplaces where the employer has chosen to permit all employees in the workplace to use portable fire extinguishers to fight fires.
The section also addresses two kinds of work areas. The entire workplace can be divided into outside (exterior) work areas and inside (interior) work areas. This division of the workplace into two areas is done in recognition of the different types of hazards employees may be exposed to during fire fighting operations. Fires in interior workplaces, pose a greater hazard to employees; they can produce greater exposure to quantities of smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the capability of a building or structure to contain or entrap these products of combustion until the building can be ventilated. Exterior work areas, normally open to the environment, are somewhat less hazardous, because the products of combustion are generally carried away by the thermal column of the fire. Employees also have a greater selection of evacuation routes if it is necessary to abandon fire fighting efforts.
In recognition of the degree of hazard present in the two types of work areas, the standards for exterior work areas are somewhat less restrictive in regards to extinguisher distribution. Paragraph (a) explains this by specifying which paragraphs in the section apply.
2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. In recognition of the three options given to employers in regard to the amount of employee evacuation to be carried out, the standards permit certain exemptions based on the number of employees expected to use fire extinguishers.
Where the employer has chosen to totally evacuate the workplace at the time of a fire emergency and when fire extinguishers are not provided, the requirements of this section do not apply to that workplace.
Where the employer has chosen to partially evacuate the workplace or the effected area at the time of a fire emergency and has permitted certain designated employees to remain behind to operate critical plant operations or to fight fires with extinguishers, then the employer is exempt from the distribution requirements of this section. Employees who will be remaining behind to perform incipient fire fighting or members of a fire brigade must be trained in their duties. The training must result in the employees becoming familiar with the locations of fire extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must locate the extinguishers in convenient locations where the employees know they can be found. For example, they could be mounted in the fire truck or cart that the fire brigade uses when it responds to a fire emergency. They can also be distributed as set forth in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.”
Where the employer has decided to permit all employees in the workforce to use fire extinguishers, then the entire OSHA section applies.
3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. Previous standards for mounting fire extinguishers have been criticized for requiring specific mounting locations. In recognition of this criticism, the standard has been rewritten to permit as much flexibility in extinguisher mounting as is acceptable to assure that fire extinguishers are available when needed and that employees are not subjected to injury hazards when they try to obtain an extinguisher.
It is the intent of OSHA to permit the mounting of extinguishers in any location that is accessible to employees without the use of portable devices such as a ladder. This limitation is necessary because portable devices can be moved or taken from the place where they are needed and, therefore, might not be available at the time of an emergency.
Employers are given as much flexibility as possible to assure that employees can obtain extinguishers as fast as possible. For example, an acceptable method of mounting extinguishers in areas where fork lift trucks or tow-motors are used is to mount the units on retractable boards which, by means of counterweighting, can be raised above the level where they could be struck by vehicular traffic. When needed, they can be lowered quickly for use. This method of mounting can also reduce vandalism and unauthorized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers may also be mounted as outlined in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.”
4. Selection and distribution. The employer is responsible for the proper selection and distribution of fire extinguishers and the determination of the necessary degree of protection. The selection and distribution of fire extinguishers must reflect the type and class of fire hazards associated with a particular workplace.
Extinguishers for protecting Class A hazards may be selected from the following types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multipurpose dry chemical. Extinguishers for protecting Class B hazards may be selected from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, dry chemicals, foam, or loaded stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards may be selected from the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, or dry chemical.
Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires pose a different type of fire problem in the workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas, or certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish or control this type of fire. Therefore, certain metals have specific dry powder extinguishing agents which can extinguish or control this type of fire. Those agents which have been specifically approved for use on certain metal fires provide the best protection; however, there are also some “universal” type agents which can be used effectively on a variety of combustible metal fires if necessary. The “universal” type agents include: Foundry flux, Lith-X powder, TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder, dry talc, dry graphite powder, dry sand, dry sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium chloride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite.
Water is not generally accepted as an effective extinguishing agent for metal fires. When applied to hot burning metal, water will break down into its basic atoms of oxygen and hydrogen. This chemical breakdown contributes to the combustion of the metal. However, water is also a good universal coolant and can be used on some combustible metals, but only under proper conditions and application, to reduce the temperature of the burning metal below the ignition point. For example, automatic deluge systems in magnesium plants can discharge such large quantities of water on burning magnesium that the fire will be extinguished. The National Fire Protection Association has specific standards for this type of automatic sprinkler system. Further information on the control of metal fires with water can be found in the National Fire Protection Association's Fire Protection Handbook.
An excellent source of selection and distribution criteria is found in the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 10. Other sources of information include the National Safety Council and the employer's fire insurance carrier.
5. Substitution of standpipe systems for portable fire extinguishers. The employer is permitted to substitute acceptable standpipe systems for portable fire extinguishers under certain circumstances. It is necessary to assure that any substitution will provide the same coverage that portable units provide. This means that fire hoses, because of their limited portability, must be spaced throughout the protected area so that they can reach around obstructions such as columns, machinery, etc. and so that they can reach into closets and other enclosed areas.
6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. The ultimate responsibility for the inspection, maintenance and testing of portable fire extinguishers lies with the employer. The actual inspection, maintenance, and testing may, however, be conducted by outside contractors with whom the employer has arranged to do the work. When contracting for such work, the employer should assure that the contractor is capable of performing the work that is needed to comply with this standard.
If the employer should elect to perform the inspection, maintenance, and testing requirements of this section in-house, then the employer must make sure that those persons doing the work have been trained to do the work and to recognize problem areas which could cause an extinguisher to be inoperable. The National Fire Protection Association provides excellent guidelines in its standard for portable fire extinguishers. The employer may also check with the manufacturer of the unit that has been purchased and obtain guidelines on inspection, maintenance, and testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that should be left to contractors or individuals using suitable facilities and having the training necessary to perform the work.
Anytime the employer has removed an extinguisher from service to be checked or repaired, alternate equivalent protection must be provided. Alternate equivalent protection could include replacing the extinguisher with one or more units having equivalent or equal ratings, posting a fire watch, restricting the unprotected area from employee exposure, or providing a hose system ready to operate.
7. Hydrostatic testing. As stated before, the employer may contract for hydrostatic testing. However, if the employer wishes to provide the testing service, certain equipment and facilities must be available. Employees should be made aware of the hazards associated with hydrostatic testing and the importance of using proper guards and water pressures. Severe injury can result if extinguisher shells fail violently under hydrostatic pressure.
Employers are encouraged to use contractors who can perform adequate and reliable service. Firms which have been certified by the Materials Transportation Board (MTB) of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) or State licensed extinguisher servicing firms or recognized by the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors in Chicago, Illinois, are generally acceptable for performing this service.
8. Training and education. This part of the standard is of the utmost importance to employers and employees if the risk of injury or death due to extinguisher use is to be reduced. If an employer is going to permit an employee to fight a workplace fire of any size, the employer must make sure that the employee knows everything necessary to assure the employee's safety.
Training and education can be obtained through many channels. Often, local fire departments in larger cities have fire prevention bureaus or similar organizations which can provide basic fire prevention training programs. Fire insurance companies will have data and information available. The National Fire Protection Association and the National Safety Council will provide, at a small cost, publications that can be used in a fire prevention program.
Actual fire fighting training can be obtained from various sources in the country. The Texas A & M University, the University of Maryland's Fire and Rescue Institute, West Virginia University's Fire Service Extension, Iowa State University's Fire Service Extension and other State training schools and land grant colleges have fire fighting programs directed to industrial applications. Some manufacturers of extinguishers, such as the Ansul Company and Safety First, conduct fire schools for customers in the proper use of extinguishers. Several large corporations have taken time to develop their own on-site training programs which expose employees to the actual “feeling” of fire fighting. Simulated fires for training of employees in the proper use of extinguishers are also an acceptable part of a training program.
In meeting the requirements of this section, the employer may also provide educational materials, without classroom instruction, through the use of employee notice campaigns using instruction sheets or flyers or similar types of informal programs. The employer must make sure that employees are trained and educated to recognize not only what type of fire is being fought and how to fight it, but also when it is time to get away from it and leave fire suppression to more experienced fire fighters.
§ 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
1. Scope and application. This section has been written to provide adequate coverage of those standpipe and hose systems that an employer may install in the workplace to meet the requirements of a particular OSHA standard. For example, OSHA permits the substitution of hose systems for portable fire extinguishers in § 1910.157. If an employer chooses to provide hose systems instead of portable Class A fire extinguishers, then those hose systems used for substitution would have to meet the applicable requirements of § 1910.157. All other standpipe and hose systems not used as a substitute would be exempt from these requirements.
The section specifically exempts Class I large hose systems. By large hose systems, OSHA means those 2 1/2 ″ (6.3 cm) hose lines that are usually associated with fire departments of the size that provide their own water supply through fire apparatus. When the fire gets to the size that outside protection of that degree is necessary, OSHA believes that in most industries employees will have been evacuated from the fire area and the “professional” fire fighters will take control.
2. Protection of standpipes. Employers must make sure that standpipes are protected so that they can be relied upon during a fire emergency. This means protecting the pipes from mechanical and physical damage. There are various means for protecting the equipment such as, but not limited to, enclosing the supply piping in the construction of the building, locating the standpipe in an area which is inaccessible to vehicles, or locating the standpipe in a stairwell.
3. Hose covers and cabinets. The employer should keep fire protection hose equipment in cabinets or inside protective covers which will protect it from the weather elements, dirt or other damaging sources. The use of protective covers must be easily removed or opened to assure that hose and nozzle are accessible. When the employer places hose in a cabinet, the employer must make sure that the hose and nozzle are accessible to employees without subjecting them to injury. In order to make sure that the equipment is readily accessible, the employer must also make sure that the cabinets used to store equipment are kept free of obstructions and other equipment which may interfere with the fast distribution of the fire hose stored in the cabinet.
4. Hose outlets and connections. The employer must assure that employees who use standpipe and hose systems can reach the hose rack and hose valve without the use of portable equipment such as ladders. Hose reels are encouraged for use because one employee can retrieve the hose, charge it, and place it into service without much difficulty.
5. Hose. When the employer elects to provide small hose in lieu of portable fire extinguishers, those hose stations being used for the substitution must have hose attached and ready for service. However, if more than the necessary amount of small hose outlets are provided, hose does not have to be attached to those outlets that would provide redundant coverage. Further, where the installation of hose on outlets may expose the hose to extremely cold climates, the employer may store the hose in houses or similar protective areas and connect it to the outlet when needed.
There is approved lined hose available that can be used to replace unlined hose which is stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is constructed so that it can be folded and placed in cabinets in the same manner as unlined hose.
Hose is considered to be unserviceable when it deteriorates to the extent that it can no longer carry water at the required pressure and flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp hose, cross threaded couplings, and punctured hose are examples of unserviceable hose.
6. Nozzles. Variable stream nozzles can provide useful variations in water flow and spray patterns during fire fighting operations and they are recommended for employee use. It is recommended that 100 psi (700kPa) nozzle pressure be used to provide good flow patterns for variable stream nozzles. The most desirable attribute for nozzles is the ability of the nozzle person to shut off the water flow at the nozzle when it is necessary. This can be accomplished in many ways. For example, a shut-off nozzle with a lever or rotation of the nozzle to stop flow would be effective, but in other cases a simple globe valve placed between a straight stream nozzle and the hose could serve the same purpose. For straight stream nozzles 50 psi nozzle pressure is recommended. The intent of this standard is to protect the employee from “run-away” hoses if it becomes necessary to drop a pressurized hose line and retreat from the fire front and other related hazards.
7. Design and installation. Standpipe and hose systems designed and installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 14, “Standpipe and Hose Systems,” are considered to be in compliance with this standard.
§ 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
1. Scope and application. This section contains the minimum requirements for design, installation and maintenance of sprinkler systems that are needed for employee safety. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration is aware of the fact that the National Board of Fire Underwriters is no longer an active organization, however, sprinkler systems still exist that were designed and installed in accordance with that organization's standards. Therefore, OSHA will recognize sprinkler systems designed to, and maintained in accordance with, NBFU and earlier NFPA standards.
2. Exemptions. In an effort to assure that employers will continue to use automatic sprinkler systems as the primary fire protection system in workplaces, OSHA is exempting from coverage those systems not required by a particular OSHA standard and which have been installed in workplaces solely for the purpose of protecting property. Many of these types of systems are installed in areas or buildings with little or no employee exposure. An example is those warehouses where employees may enter occasionally to take inventory or move stock. Some employers may choose to shut down those systems which are not specifically required by OSHA rather than upgrade them to comply with the standards. OSHA does not intend to regulate such systems. OSHA only intends to regulate those systems which are installed to comply with a particular OSHA standard.
3. Design. There are two basic types of sprinkler system design. Pipe schedule designed systems are based on pipe schedule tables developed to protect hazards with standard sized pipe, number of sprinklers, and pipe lengths. Hydraulic designed systems are based on an engineered design of pipe size which will produce a given water density or flow rate at any particular point in the system. Either design can be used to comply with this standard.
The National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 13, “Automatic Sprinkler Systems,” contains the tables needed to design and install either type of system. Minimum water supplies, densities, and pipe sizes are given for all types of occupancies.
The employer may check with a reputable fire protection engineering consultant or sprinkler design company when evaluating existing systems or designing a new installation.
With the advent of new construction materials for the manufacuture of sprinkler pipe, materials, other than steel have been approved for use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of pipe material should be made on the basis of the type of installation and the acceptability of the material to local fire and building officials where such systems may serve more than one purpose.
Before new sprinkler systems are placed into service, an acceptance test is to be conducted. The employer should invite the installer, designer, insurance representative, and a local fire official to witness the test. Problems found during the test are to be corrected before the system is placed into service.
4. Maintenance. It is important that any sprinkler system maintenance be done only when there is minimal employee exposure to the fire hazard. For example, if repairs or changes to the system are to be made, they should be made during those hours when employees are not working or are not occupying that portion of the workplace protected by the portion of the system which has been shut down.
The procedures for performing a flow test via a main drain test or by the use of an inspector's test valve can be obtained from the employer's fire insurance company or from the National Fire Protection Association's Standard No. 13A, “Sprinkler System, Maintenance.”
5. Water supplies. The water supply to a sprinkler system is one of the most important factors an employer should consider when evaluationg a system. Obviously, if there is no water supply, the system is useless. Water supplies can be lost for various reasons such as improperly closed valves, excessive demand, broken water mains, and broken fire pumps. The employer must be able to determine if or when this type of condition exists either by performing a main drain test or visual inspection. Another problem may be an inadequate water supply. For example, a light hazard occupancy may, through rehabilitation or change in tenants, become an ordinary or high hazard occupancy. In such cases, the existing water supply may not be able to provide the pressure or duration necessary for proper protection. Employers must assure that proper design and tests have been made to assure an adequate water supply. These tests can be arranged through the employer's fire insurance carrier or through a local sprinkler maintenance company or through the local fire prevention organization.
Anytime the employer must shut down the primary water supply for a sprinkler system, the standard requires that equivalent protection be provided. Equivalent protection may include a fire watch with extinguishers or hose lines in place and manned, or a secondary water supply such as a tank truck and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire pumps, to protect the areas where the primary water supply is limited or shut down. The employer may also require evacuation of the workplace and have an emergency action plan which specifies such action.
6. Protection of piping. Piping which is exposed to corrosive atmospheres, either chemical or natural, can become defective to the extent that it is useless. Employers must assure that piping is protected from corrosion by its material of construction, e.g., stainless steel, or by a protective coating, e.g., paint.
7. Sprinklers. When an employer finds it necessary to replace sprinkler system components or otherwise change a sprinkler's design, employer should make a complete fire protection engineering survey of that part of the system being changed. This review should assure that the changes to the system will not alter the effectiveness of the system as it is presently designed. Water supplies, densities and flow characteristics should be maintained.
8. Protection of sprinklers. All components of the system must be protected from mechanical impact damage. This can be achieved with the use of mechanical guards or screens or by locating components in areas where physical contact is impossible or limited.
9. Sprinkler alarms. The most recognized sprinkler alarm is the water motor gong or bell that sounds when water begins to flow through the system. This is not however, the only type of acceptable water flow alarm. Any alarm that gives an indication that water is flowing through the system is acceptable. For example, a siren, a whistle, a flashing light, or similar alerting device which can transmit a signal to the necessary persons would be acceptable. The purpose of the alarm is to alert persons that the system is operating, and that some type of planned action is necessary.
10. Sprinkler spacing. For a sprinkler system to be effective there must be an adequate discharge of water spray from the sprinkler head. Any obstructions which hinder the designed density or spray pattern of the water may create unprotected areas which can cause fire to spread. There are some sprinklers that, because of the system's design, are deflected to specific areas. This type of obstruction is acceptable if the system's design takes it into consideration in providing adequate coverage.
§ 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general.
1. Scope and application. This section contains the general requirements that are applicable to all fixed extinguishing systems installed to meet OSHA standards. It also applies to those fixed extinguishing systems, generally total flooding, which are not required by OSHA, but which, because of the agent's discharge, may expose employees to hazardous concentrations of extinguishing agents or combustion by-products. Employees who work around fixed extinguishing systems must be warned of the possible hazards associated with the system and its agent. For example, fixed dry chemical extinguishing systems may generate a large enough cloud of dry chemical particles that employees may become visually disoriented. Certain gaseous agents can expose employees to hazardous by-products of combustion when the agent comes into contact with hot metal or other hot surface. Some gaseous agents may be present in hazardous concentrations when the system has totally discharged because an extra rich concentration is necessary to extinguish deep-seated fires. Certain local application systems may be designed to discharge onto the flaming surface of a liquid, and it is possible that the liquid can splatter when hit with the discharging agent. All of these hazards must be determined before the system is placed into operation, and must be discussed with employees.
Based on the known toxicological effects of agents such as carbon tetrachloride and chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permitting the use of these agents in areas where employees can be exposed to the agent or its side effects. However, chlorobromomethane has been accepted and may be used as an explosion suppression agent in unoccupied spaces. OSHA is permitting the use of this agent only in areas where employees will not be exposed.
2. Distinctive alarm signals. A distinctive alarm signal is required to indicate that a fixed system is discharging. Such a signal is necessary on those systems where it is not immediately apparent that the system is discharging. For example, certain gaseous agents make a loud noise when they discharge. In this case no alarm signal is necessary. However, where systems are located in remote locations or away from the general work area and where it is possible that a system could discharge without anyone knowing that it is doing so, then a distinctive alarm is necessary to warn employees of the hazards that may exist. The alarm can be a bell, gong, whistle, horn, flashing light, or any combination of signals as long as it is identifiable as a discharge alarm.
3. Maintenance. The employer is responsible for the maintenance of all fixed systems, but this responsibility does not preclude the use of outside contractors to do such work. New systems should be subjected to an acceptance test before placed in service. The employer should invite the installer, designer, insurance representative and others to witness the test. Problems found during the test need to be corrected before the system is considered operational.
4. Manual discharge stations. There are instances, such as for mechanical reasons and others, where the standards call for a manual back-up activation device. While the location of this device is not specified in the standard, the employer should assume that the device should be located where employees can easily reach it. It could, for example, be located along the main means of egress from the protected area so that employees could activate the system as they evacuate the work area.
5. Personal protective equipment. The employer is required to provide the necessary personal protective equipment to rescue employees who may be trapped in a totally flooded environment which may be hazardous to their health. This equipment would normally include a positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus and any necessary first aid equipment. In cases where the employer can assure the prompt arrival of the local fire department or plant emergency personnel which can provide the equipment, this can be considered as complying with the standards.
§ 1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry chemical.
1. Scope and application. The requirements of this section apply only to dry chemical systems. These requirements are to be used in conjunction with the requirements of § 1910.160.
2. Maintenance. The employer is responsible for assuring that dry chemical systems will operate effectively. To do this, periodic maintenance is necessary. One test that must be conducted during the maintenance check is one which will determine if the agent has remained free of moisture. If an agent absorbs any moisture, it may tend to cake and thereby clog the system. An easy test for acceptable moisture content is to take a lump of dry chemical from the container and drop it from a height of four inches. If the lump crumbles into fine particles, the agent is acceptable.
§ 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous agent.
1. Scope and application. This section applies only to those systems which use gaseous agents. The requirements of § 1910.160 also apply to the gaseous agent systems covered in this section.
2. Design concentrations. Total flooding gaseous systems are based on the volume of gas which must be discharged in order to produce a certain designed concentration of gas in an enclosed area. The concentration needed to extinguish a fire depends on several factors including the type of fire hazard and the amount of gas expected to leak away from the area during discharge. At times it is necessary to “super-saturate” a work area to provide for expected leakage from the enclosed area. In such cases, employers must assure that the flooded area has been ventilated before employees are permitted to reenter the work area without protective clothing and respirators.
3. Toxic decomposition. Certain halogenated hydrocarbons will break down or decompose when they are combined with high temperatures found in the fire environment. The products of the decomposition can include toxic elements or compounds. For example, when Halon 1211 is placed into contact with hot metal it will break down and form bromide or fluoride fumes. The employer must find out which toxic products may result from decomposition of a particular agent from the manufacturer, and take the necessary precautions to prevent employee exposure to the hazard.
§ 1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water spray and foam.
1. Scope and application. This section applies to those systems that use water spray or foam. The requirements of § 1910.160 also apply to this type of system.
2. Characteristics of foams. When selecting the type of foam for a specific hazard, the employer should consider the following limitations of some foams.
a. Some foams are not acceptable for use on fires involving flammable gases and liquefied gases with boiling points below ambient workplace temperatures. Other foams are not effective when used on fires involving polar solvent liquids.
b. Any agent using water as part of the mixture should not be used on fire involving combustible metals unless it is applied under proper conditions to reduce the temperature of burning metal below the ignition temperature. The employer should use only those foams that have been tested and accepted for this application by a recognized independent testing laboratory.
c. Certain types of foams may be incompatible and break down when they are mixed together.
d. For fires involving water miscible solvents, employers should use only those foams tested and approved for such use. Regular protein foams may not be effective on such solvents.
Whenever employers provide a foam or water spray system, drainage facilities must be provided to carry contaminated water or foam overflow away from the employee work areas and egress routes. This drainage system should drain to a central impounding area where it can be collected and disposed of properly. Other government agencies may have regulations concerning environmental considerations.
§ 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
1. Installation and restoration. Fire detection systems must be designed by knowledgeable engineers or other professionals, with expertise in fire detection systems and when the systems are installed, there should be an acceptance test performed on the system to insure it operates properly. The manufacturer's recommendations for system design should be consulted. While entire systems may not be approved, each component used in the system is required to be approved. Custom fire detection systems should be designed by knowledgeable fire protection or electrical engineers who are familiar with the workplace hazards and conditions. Some systems may only have one or two individual detectors for a small workplace, but good design and installation is still important. An acceptance test should be performed on all systems, including these smaller systems.
OSHA has a requirement that spare components used to replace those which may be destroyed during an alarm situation be available in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt restoration of the system. This does not mean that the parts or components have to be stored at the workplace. If the employer can assure that the supply of parts is available in the local community or the general metropolitan area of the workplace, then the requirements for storage and availability have been met. The intent is to make sure that the alarm system is fully operational when employees are occupying the workplace, and that when the system operates it can be returned to full service the next day or sooner.
2. Supervision. Fire detection systems should be supervised. The object of supervision is detection of any failure of the circuitry, and the employer should use any method that will assure that the system's circuits are operational. Electrically operated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure, or electrical circuits, can provide effective monitoring and are the typical types of supervision.
3. Protection of fire detectors. Fire detectors must be protected from corrosion either by protective coatings, by being manufactured from non-corrosive materials or by location. Detectors must also be protected from mechanical impact damage, either by suitable cages or metal guards where such hazards are present, or by locating them above or out of contact with materials or equipment which may cause damage.
4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. This information can be obtained from the approval listing for detectors or NFPA standards. It can also be obtained from fire protection engineers or consultants or manufacturers of equipment who have access to approval listings and design methods.
§ 1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
1. Scope and application. This section is intended to apply to employee alarm systems used for all types of employee emergencies except those which occur so quickly and at such a rapid rate (e.g., explosions) that any action by the employee is extremely limited following detection.
In small workplaces with 10 or less employees the alarm system can be by direct voice communication (shouting) where any one individual can quickly alert all other employees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms from remote workplaces where telephone service is not available, provided that radio messages will be monitored by emergency services, such as fire, police or others, to insure alarms are transmitted and received.
2. Alarm signal alternatives. In recognition of physically impaired individuals, OSHA is accepting various methods of giving alarm signals. For example, visual, tactile or audible alarm signals are acceptable methods for giving alarms to employees. Flashing lights or vibrating devices can be used in areas where the employer has hired employees with hearing or vision impairments. Vibrating devices, air fans, or other tactile devices can be used where visually and hearing impaired employees work. Employers are cautioned that certain frequencies of flashing lights have been claimed to initiate epileptic seizures in some employees and that this fact should be considered when selecting an alarm device. Two way radio communications would be most appropriate for transmitting emergency alarms in such workplaces which may be remote or where telephones may not be available.
3. Reporting alarms. Employee alarms may require different means of reporting, depending on the workplace involved. For example, in small workplaces, a simple shout throughout the workplace may be sufficient to warn employees of a fire or other emergency. In larger workplaces, more sophisticated equipment is necessary so that entire plants or high-rise buildings are not evacuated for one small emergency. In remote areas, such as pumping plants, radio communication with a central base station may be necessary. The goal of this standard is to assure that all employees who need to know that an emergency exists can be notified of the emergency. The method of transmitting the alarm should reflect the situation found at the workplace.
Personal radio transmitters, worn by an individual, can be used where the individual may be working such as in a remote location. Such personal radio transmitters shall send a distinct signal and should clearly indicate who is having an emergency, the location, and the nature of the emergency. All radio transmitters need a feedback system to assure that the emergency alarm is sent to the people who can provide assistance.
For multi-story buildings or single story buildings with interior walls for subdivisions, the more traditional alarm systems are recommended for these types of workplaces. Supervised telephone or manual fire alarm or pull box stations with paging systems to transmit messages throughout the building is the recommended alarm system. The alarm box stations should be available within a travel distance of 200 feet. Water flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire detection systems (guard's supervisory station) or tour signal (watchman's service), or other related systems may be part of the overall system. The paging system may be used for nonemergency operations provided the emergency messages and uses will have precedence over all other uses of the system.
4. Supervision. The requirements for supervising the employee alarm system circuitry and power supply may be accomplished in a variety of ways. Typically, electrically operated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure, steam pressure, or electrical continuity of circuitry may be used to continuously monitor the system to assure it is operational and to identify trouble in the system and give a warning signal.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
The following table contains a cross-reference listing of those current national consensus standards which contains information and guidelines that would be considered acceptable in complying with requirements in the specific sections of subpart L.
| Subpart L section | National consensus standard |
|---|---|
| 1910.156 | ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural Fire Fighter's Helmets. |
| ANSI Z88.5 American National Standard, Practice for Respirator Protection for the Fire Service. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters. | |
| NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service Instructor Professional Qualifications. | |
| 1910.157 | ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers. |
| 1910.158 | ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps. | |
| NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. | |
| NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. | |
| NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. | |
| NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department Operations in Properties Protected by Sprinkler, Standpipe Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose Connections. | |
| NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire Attack, Training for. | |
| NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. | |
| 1910.159 | ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler Systems. |
| NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler Systems, Maintenance. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. | |
| NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. | |
| NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems. | |
| NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. | |
| 1910.160 | ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301 Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211 Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion Suppression Systems. | |
| 1910.161 | ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical Systems. | |
| 1910.162 | ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211 Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301 Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion Suppression Systems. | |
| 1910.163 | ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Extinguishing Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Fixed Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water Spray Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. | |
| NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. | |
| 1910.164 | ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code. | |
| 1910.165 | ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station Signaling Systems. |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems. | |
| ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code. | |
| Metric Conversion | ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American National Standard for Metric Practice. |
| NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. | |
| ANSI Standards are available from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018. |
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
I. Appendix general references. The following references provide information which can be helpful in understanding the requirements contained in all of the sections of subpart L:
A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety Council; 425 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611.
C. Various associations also publish information which may be useful in understanding these standards. Examples of these associations are: Fire Equipment Manufacturers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 22204 and the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of Chicago, IL 60601.
II. Appendix references applicable to individual sections. The following references are grouped according to individual sections contained in subpart L. These references provide information which may be helpful in understanding and implementing the standards of each section of subpart L.
A. § 1910.156. Fire brigades:
1. Private Fire Brigades, NFPA 27; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, NFPA 197; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, NFPA 1001; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Organization for Fire Services, NFPA 1201; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. Organization of a Fire Department, NFPA 1202; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting, ANSI/NFPA 1971;.
7. American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, ANSI Z41.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
8. American National Standard for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection, ANSI Z87.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
9. American National Standard, Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection, ANSI Z89.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Vehicular Users, ANSI Z90.1; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
11. Testing Physical Fitness; Davis and Santa Maria. Fire Command. April 1975.
12. Development of a Job-Related Physical Performance Examination for Fire Fighters; Dotson and Others. A summary report for the National Fire Prevention and Control Administration. Washington, DC. March 1977.
13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fighters' Protective Clothing and Equipment; International Association of Fire Fighters, Washington, DC.
14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus by DOP Man Tests; Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Los Alamos, NM.
15. The Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters' Gloves; Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH. 1976.
16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets; National Fire Prevention and Control Administration, Washington, DC. 1977.
17. Firefighters; Job Safety and Health Magazine, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Washington, DC. June 1978.
18. Eating Smoke—The Dispensable Diet; Utech, H.P. The Fire Independent, 1975.
19. Project Monoxide—A Medical Study of an Occupational Hazard of Fire Fighters; International Association of Fire Fighters, Washington, DC.
20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Monoxide in Baltimore Firefighters; Radford and Levine. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD. Journal of Occupational Medicine, September, 1976.
21. Fire Brigades; National Safety Council, Chicago, IL. 1966.
22. American National Standard, Practice for Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service; ANSI Z88.5; American National Standards Institute, New York, NY 10018.
23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regulatory Commission; October 1, 1977—September 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open Circuit Breathing Apparatus. NU REG/CR-1235. Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory; Los Alamos, NM. 87545, January, 1980.
B. § 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers:
1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, ANSI/NFPA 10; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Compressed Gas Cylinders, C-1; Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Unserviceable Compressed Gas Cylinders, C-2; Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders, C-6; Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide, National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors; 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL 60601.
C. § 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems:
1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA 22; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections, ANSI/NFPA 194; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard for Fire Hose, NFPA 196; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, NFPA 198; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
D. § 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems:
1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI-NFPA 13; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection, ANSI-NFPA 22; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, ANSI/NFPA 231; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, ANSI/NFPA 231C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
E. § 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems—general information:
1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems, ANSI-NFPA 11; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for Hi-Expansion Foam Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined Agent Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
F. § 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems—dry chemical:
1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA 96; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
G. § 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems—gaseous agents:
1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems, ANSI/NFPA 69; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold Extinguishing Concentrations Using the Cup Burner Method; Riley and Olson, Ansul Report AL-530-A.
H. § 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems—water spray and foam agents:
1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for the Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
I. § 1910.164. Fire Detection systems:
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
J. § 1910.165. Employee alarm systems:
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling systems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72A; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72B; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72C; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72D; National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and Nursing Facilities: Practice and Potential. National Bureau of Standards. Washington, D.C., July 1977.
8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems. National Bureau of Standards. Washington, D.C., April 1978.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
The final standard for fire brigades, section 1910.156, contains provisions which incorporate certain publications by reference. The publications provide criteria and test methods for protective clothing worn by those fire brigade members who are expected to perform interior structural fire fighting. The standard references the publications as the chief sources of information for determining if the protective clothing affords the required level of protection.
It is appropriate to note that the final standard does not require employers to purchase a copy of the referenced publications. Instead, employers can specify (in purchase orders to the manufacturers) that the protective clothing meet the criteria and test methods contained in the referenced publications and can rely on the manufacturers' assurances of compliance. Employers, however, may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced publications for their own information.
The paragraph designation of the standard where the referenced publications appear, the title of the publications, and the availablity of the publications are as follows:
| Paragraph designation | Referenced publication | Available from |
|---|---|---|
| 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) | “Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fighting,” NFPA No. 1971 (1975) | National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. |
| 1910.156(e)(4)(i) | “Development of Criteria for Fire Fighter's Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods” (1976) | U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock No. for Vol. II is: 071-033-0201-1. |
| 1910.156(e)(5)(i) | “Model Performance Criteria for Structural Firefighter's Helmets” (1977) | U.S. Fire Administration, National Fire Safety and Research Office, Washington, D.C. 20230. |
The referenced publications (or a microfiche of the publications) are available for review at many universities and public libraries throughout the country. These publications may also be examined at the OSHA Technical Data Center, Room N2439-Rear, United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210 (202-219-7500), or at any OSHA Regional Office (see telephone directories under United States Government-Labor Department).
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58 FR 33509, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
This appendix contains test methods which must be used to determine if protective clothing affords the required level of protection as specified in § 1910.156, fire brigades.
A. Apparatus. The puncture resistance test shall be performed on a testing machine having a movable platform adjusted to travel at 1/4 -inch/min (0.1 cm/sec). Two blocks of hardwood, metal, or plastic shall be prepared as follows: the blocks shall be of such size and thickness as to insure a suitable rigid test ensemble and allow for at least one-inch of the pointed end of an 8D nail to be exposed for the penetration. One block shall have a hole drilled to hold an 8D common nail firmly at an angle of 98°. The second block shall have a maximum 1/2 -inch (1.3 cm) diameter hole drilled through it so that the hole will allow free passage of the nail after it penetrates the insole during the test.
B. Procedure. The test ensemble consisting of the sample unit, the two prepared blocks, a piece of leather outsole 10 to 11 irons thick, and a new 8D nail, shall be placed as follows: the 8D nail in the hole, the sample of outsole stock superimposed above the nail, the area of the sole plate to be tested placed on the outsole, and the second block with hole so placed as to allow for free passage of the nail after it passes through the outsole stock and sole plate in that order. The machine shall be started and the pressure, in pounds required for the nail to completely penetrate the outsole and sole plate, recorded to the nearest five pounds. Two determinations shall be made on each sole plate and the results averaged. A new nail shall be used for each determination.
C. Source. These test requirements are contained in “Military Specification For Fireman's Boots,” MIL-B-2885D (1973 and amendment dated 1975) and are reproduced for your convenience.
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 3-inches by 6-inches (7.6 cm by 15.2 cm). The long dimension shall be parallel to the warp for warp tests and parallel to the filling for filling tests. No two specimens for warp tests shall contain the same warp yarns, nor shall any two specimens for filling tests contain the same filling yarns. The specimen shall be taken no nearer the selvage than 1/10 the width of the cloth. An isosceles trapezoid having an altitude of 3-inches (7.6 cm) and bases of 1 inch (2.5cm) and 4 inches (10.2 cm) in length, respectively, shall be marked on each specimen, preferably with the aid of a template. A cut approximately 3/8 -inch (1 cm) in length shall then be made in the center of a perpendicular to the 1-inch (2.5 cm) edge.
B. Apparatus.
Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth, gripping surface. All edges which might cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a radius of not over 1/64 -inch (.04 cm). In cases where a cloth tends to slip when being tested, the jaws may be faced with rubber or other material to prevent slippage. The distance between the jaws (gage length) shall be one-inch at the start of the test.
C. Procedure.
D. Report.
E. Source. These test requirements are contained in “Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5136” and are reproduced for your convenience.
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a rectangle of cloth 2 3/4 inches (7.0 cm) by 12 inches (30.5 cm) with the long dimension parallel to either the warp or filling direction of the cloth. No two warp specimens shall contain the same warp yarns, and no two filling specimens shall contain the same filling yarn.
B. Number of determinations. Five specimens from each of the warp and filling directions shall be tested from each sample unit.
C. Apparatus.
A cabinet and accessories shall be fabricated in accordance with the requirements specified in Figures L-1, L-2, and L-3. Galvanized sheet metal or other suitable metal shall be used. The entire inside back wall of the cabinet shall be painted black to facilitate the viewing of the test specimen and pilot flame.
The burner shall be equipped with a variable orifice to adjust the flame height, a barrel having a 3/8 -inch (1 cm) inside diameter and a pilot light.
D. Procedure.
The burner flame shall be adjusted by means of the needle valve in the base of the burner to give a flame height of 1 1/2 inches (3.8 cm) with the stopcock fully open and the air supply to the burner shut off and taped. The 1 1/2 -inch (3.8 cm) flame height is obtained by adjusting the valve so that the uppermost portion (tip) of the flame is level with the tip of the metal prong (see Figure L-2) specified for adjustment of flame height. It is an important aspect of the evaluation that the flame height be adjusted with the tip of the flame level with the tip of the metal prong. After inserting the specimen, the stopcock shall be fully opened, and the burner flame applied vertically at the middle of the lower edge of the specimen for 12 seconds and the burner turned off. The cabinet door shall remain shut during testing.
Loads for determining char length applicable to the weight of the test cloth shall be as shown in Table L-2.
| Specified weight per square yard of cloth before any fire retardant treatment or coating—ounces | Total tearing weight for determining the charred length—pound |
|---|---|
| 2.0 to 6.0 | 0.25 |
| Over 6.0 to 15.0 | 0.50 |
| Over 15.0 to 23.0 | 0.75 |
| Over 23.0 | 1.0 |
| 1 To change into S.I. (System International) units, 1 ounce = 28.35 grams, 1 pound = 453 grams, 1 yard = .91 metre. |
E. Report.
F. Source. These test requirements are contained in “Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903 (1971)” and are reproduced for your convenience.
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
This section applies to compressed air receivers, and other equipment used in providing and utilizing compressed air for performing operations such as cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chipping. On the other hand, however, this section does not deal with the special problems created by using compressed air to convey materials nor the problems created when men work in compressed air as in tunnels and caissons. This section is not intended to apply to compressed air machinery and equipment used on transportation vehicles such as steam railroad cars, electric railway cars, and automotive equipment.
Air receivers shall be so installed that all drains, handholes, and manholes therein are easily accessible. Under no circumstances shall an air receiver be buried underground or located in an inaccessible place.
A drain pipe and valve shall be installed at the lowest point of every air receiver to provide for the removal of accumulated oil and water. Adequate automatic traps may be installed in addition to drain valves. The drain valve on the air receiver shall be opened and the receiver completely drained frequently and at such intervals as to prevent the accumulation of excessive amounts of liquid in the receiver.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
Where mechanical handling equipment is used, sufficient safe clearances shall be allowed for aisles, at loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be made. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repair, with no obstruction across or in aisles that could create a hazard. Permanent aisles and passageways shall be appropriately marked.
Storage of material shall not create a hazard. Bags, containers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers shall be stacked, blocked, interlocked and limited in height so that they are stable and secure against sliding or collapse.
Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation of materials that constitute hazards from tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harborage. Vegetation control will be exercised when necessary.
Clearance signs to warn of clearance limits shall be provided.
Derail and/or bumper blocks shall be provided on spur railroad tracks where a rolling car could contact other cars being worked, enter a building, work or traffic area.
Covers and/or guardrails shall be provided to protect personnel from the hazards of open pits, tanks, vats, ditches, etc.
[39 FR 23052, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]
Barrier means a fence, wall or other structure or object placed between a single piece rim wheel and an employee during tire inflation, to contain the rim wheel components in the event of the sudden release of the contained air of the single piece rim wheel.
Charts means the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration publications entitled “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,” “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,” and “Multi-Piece Rim Matching Chart.” These charts may be in manual or poster form. OSHA also will accept any other manual or poster that provides at least the same instructions, safety precautions, and other information contained in these publications, which is applicable to the types of wheels the employer is servicing.
Installing a rim wheel means the transfer and attachment of an assembled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. Removing means the opposite of installing.
Mounting a tire means the assembly or putting together of the wheel and tire components to form a rim wheel, including inflation. Demounting means the opposite of mounting.
Multi-piece rim wheel means the assemblage of a multi-piece wheel with the tire tube and other components.
Multi-piece wheel means a vehicle wheel consisting of two or more parts, one of which is a side or locking ring designed to hold the tire on the wheel by interlocking components when the tire is inflated.
Restraining device means an apparatus such as a cage, rack, assemblage of bars and other components that will constrain all rim wheel components during an explosive separation of a multi-piece rim wheel, or during the sudden release of the contained air of a single piece rim wheel.
Rim manual means a publication containing instructions from the manufacturer or other qualified organization for correct mounting, demounting, maintenance, and safety precautions peculiar to the type of wheel being serviced.
Rim wheel means an assemblage of tire, tube and liner (where appropriate), and wheel components.
Service or servicing means the mounting and demounting of rim wheels, and related activities such as inflating, deflating, installing, removing, and handling.
Service area means that part of an employer's premises used for the servicing of rim wheels, or any other place where an employee services rim wheels.
Single piece rim wheel means the assemblage of single piece rim wheel with the tire and other components.
Single piece wheel means a vehicle wheel consisting of one part, designed to hold the tire on the wheel when the tire is inflated.
Trajectory means any potential path or route that a rim wheel component may travel during an explosive separation, or the sudden release of the pressurized air, or an area at which an airblast from a single piece rim wheel may be released. The trajectory may deviate from paths which are perpendicular to the assembled position of the rim wheel at the time of separation or explosion. (See appendix A for examples of trajectories.)
Wheel means that portion of a rim wheel which provides the method of attachment of the assembly to the axle of a vehicle and also provides the means to contain the inflated portion of the assembly (i.e., the tire and/or tube).
The employer shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing multi-piece rim wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow that procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following elements:
The employer shall establish a safe operating procedure for servicing single piece rim wheels and shall assure that employees are instructed in and follow that procedure. The procedure shall include at least the following elements:
Appendix B to § 1910.177—Ordering Information for the OSHA Charts
The information on the OSHA charts is available on three posters, or in a manual containing the three charts, entitled “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tubeless Truck and Bus Tires,” “Demounting and Mounting Procedures for Tube-Type Truck and Bus Tires,” and “Multi-piece Rim Matching Chart.” Interested parties can download and print both the manuals and posters from OSHA's Web site at http://www.osha.gov/publications (and type “tire chart” in the search field). However, when used by the employer at a worksite to provide information to employees, the printed posters must be, at a minimum, 2 feet wide and 3 feet long. Copies of the manual also are available from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA Office of Publications, Room N-3101, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20210; telephone: (202) 693-1888; or fax: (202) 693-2498).
[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 24698, May 2, 2011; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011]
For the purpose of this standard there are eleven different designations of industrial trucks or tractors as follows: D, DS, DY, E, ES, EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.
| Classes | Unclassified | Class I locations | Class II locations | Class III locations |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Description of classes | Locations not possessing atmospheres as described in other columns | Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are, or may be, present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures | Locations which are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust | Locations where easily ignitible fibers or flyings are present but not likely to be in suspension in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. |
| Groups in classes | None | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | None |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Examples of locations or atmospheres in classes and groups | Piers and wharves inside and outside general storage, general industrial or commercial properties | Acetylene | Hydrogen | Ethyl ether | Gasoline Naphtha Alcohols Acetone Lacquer solvent Benzene | Metal dust | Carbon black coal dust, coke dust | Grain dust, flour dust, starch dust, organic dust | Baled waste, cocoa fiber, cotton, excelsior, hemp, istle, jute, kapok, oakum, sisal, Spanish moss, synthetic fibers, tow. |
| 1 | 2 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 2 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Divisions (nature of hazardous conditions) | None | Above condition exists continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal operating conditions | Above condition may occur accidentally as due to a puncture of a storage drum | Explosive mixture may be present under normal operating conditions, or where failure of equipment may cause the condition to exist simultaneously with arcing or sparking of electrical equipment, or where dusts of an electrically conducting nature may be present | Explosive mixture not normally present, but where deposits of dust may cause heat rise in electrical equipment, or where such deposits may be ignited by arcs or sparks from electrical equipment | Locations in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used | Locations in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled (except in the process of manufacture). |
| Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions | |||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Groups in classes | None | A | B | C | D | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | E | F | G | None | None |
| Type of truck authorized: | |||||||||||||||||
| Diesel: | |||||||||||||||||
| Type D | D** | ||||||||||||||||
| Type DS | DS | DS | DS | ||||||||||||||
| Type DY | DY | DY | DY | DY | |||||||||||||
| Electric: | |||||||||||||||||
| Type E | E** | E | |||||||||||||||
| Type ES | ES | ES | ES | ||||||||||||||
| Type EE | EE | EE | EE | EE | |||||||||||||
| Type EX | EX | EX | EX | EX | EX | EX | EX | ||||||||||
| Gasoline: | |||||||||||||||||
| Type G | G** | ||||||||||||||||
| Type GS | GS | GS | GS | ||||||||||||||
| LP-Gas: | |||||||||||||||||
| Type LP | LP** | ||||||||||||||||
| Type LPS | LPS | LPS | LPS | ||||||||||||||
| Paragraph Ref. in No. 505 | 210.211 | 201 (a) | 203 (a) | 209 (a) | 204 (a), (b) | 202 (a) | 205 (a) | 209 (a) | 206 (a), (b) | 207(a) | 208 (a) | ||||||
| **Trucks conforming to these types may also be used—see subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section. |
Power-operated industrial trucks that have been originally approved for the use of gasoline for fuel, when converted to the use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in accordance with paragraph (q) of this section, may be used in those locations where G, GS or LP, and LPS designated trucks have been specified in the preceding paragraphs.
See subpart D of this part.
Powered industrial truck operators shall receive initial training in the following topics, except in topics which the employer can demonstrate are not applicable to safe operation of the truck in the employer's workplace.
where they are located, what they do, and how they work;
If an operator has previously received training in a topic specified in paragraph (l)(3) of this section, and such training is appropriate to the truck and working conditions encountered, additional training in that topic is not required if the operator has been evaluated and found competent to operate the truck safely.
The employer shall certify that each operator has been trained and evaluated as required by this paragraph (l). The certification shall include the name of the operator, the date of the training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s) performing the training or evaluation.
The employer shall ensure that operators of powered industrial trucks are trained, as appropriate, by the dates shown in the following table.
| If the employee was hired: | The initial training and evaluation of that employee must be completed: |
|---|---|
| Before December 1, 1999 | By December 1, 1999. |
| After December 1, 1999 | Before the employee is assigned to operate a powered industrial truck. |
Where industrial trucks are used on a round-the-clock basis, they shall be examined after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected.
Appendix A to § 1910.178—Stability of Powered Industrial Trucks (Non-mandatory Appendix to Paragraph ( l ) of This Section)
A-1. Definitions. The following definitions help to explain the principle of stability:
Center of gravity is the point on an object at which all of the object's weight is concentrated. For symmetrical loads, the center of gravity is at the middle of the load.
Counterweight is the weight that is built into the truck's basic structure and is used to offset the load's weight and to maximize the vehicle's resistance to tipping over.
Fulcrum is the truck's axis of rotation when it tips over.
Grade is the slope of a surface, which is usually measured as the number of feet of rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal distance (the slope is expressed as a percent).
Lateral stability is a truck's resistance to overturning sideways.
Line of action is an imaginary vertical line through an object's center of gravity.
Load center is the horizontal distance from the load's edge (or the fork's or other attachment's vertical face) to the line of action through the load's center of gravity.
Longitudinal stability is the truck's resistance to overturning forward or rearward.
Moment is the product of the object's weight times the distance from a fixed point (usually the fulcrum). In the case of a powered industrial truck, the distance is measured from the point at which the truck will tip over to the object's line of action. The distance is always measured perpendicular to the line of action.
Track is the distance between the wheels on the same axle of the truck.
Wheelbase is the distance between the centerline of the vehicle's front and rear wheels.
A-2. General.
A-2.1. Determining the stability of a powered industrial truck is simple once a few basic principles are understood. There are many factors that contribute to a vehicle's stability: the vehicle's wheelbase, track, and height; the load's weight distribution; and the vehicle's counterweight location (if the vehicle is so equipped).
A-2.2. The “stability triangle,” used in most stability discussions, demonstrates stability simply.
A-3. Basic Principles.
A-3.1. Whether an object is stable depends on the object's moment at one end of a system being greater than, equal to, or smaller than the object's moment at the system's other end. This principle can be seen in the way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is, if the product of the load and distance from the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the moment at the device's other end, the device is balanced and it will not move. However, if there is a greater moment at one end of the device, the device will try to move downward at the end with the greater moment.
A-3.2. The longitudinal stability of a counterbalanced powered industrial truck depends on the vehicle's moment and the load's moment. In other words, if the mathematic product of the load moment (the distance from the front wheels, the approximate point at which the vehicle would tip forward) to the load's center of gravity times the load's weight is less than the vehicle's moment, the system is balanced and will not tip forward. However, if the load's moment is greater than the vehicle's moment, the greater load-moment will force the truck to tip forward.
A-4. The Stability Triangle.
A-4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered industrial trucks have a three-point suspension system, that is, the vehicle is supported at three points. This is true even if the vehicle has four wheels. The truck's steer axle is attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the axle's center. When the points are connected with imaginary lines, this three-point support forms a triangle called the stability triangle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.
A-4.2. When the vehicle's line of action, or load center, falls within the stability triangle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip over. However, when the vehicle's line of action or the vehicle/load combination falls outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)
A-5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck tips forward is the front wheels' points of contact with the pavement. When a powered industrial truck tips forward, the truck will rotate about this line. When a truck is stable, the vehicle-moment must exceed the load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehicle-moment, the truck will begin to tip forward, thereby causing the rear to lose contact with the floor or ground and resulting in loss of steering control. If the load-moment greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the truck will tip forward.
A-5.2. To determine the maximum safe load-moment, the truck manufacturer normally rates the truck at a maximum load at a given distance from the front face of the forks. The specified distance from the front face of the forks to the line of action of the load is commonly called the load center. Because larger trucks normally handle loads that are physically larger, these vehicles have greater load centers. Trucks with a capacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load center. Trucks with a capacity greater than 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center. To safely operate the vehicle, the operator should always check the data plate to determine the maximum allowable weight at the rated load center.
A-5.3. Although the true load-moment distance is measured from the front wheels, this distance is greater than the distance from the front face of the forks. Calculating the maximum allowable load-moment using the load-center distance always provides a lower load-moment than the truck was designed to handle. When handling unusual loads, such as those that are larger than 48 inches long (the center of gravity is greater than 24 inches) or that have an offset center of gravity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment should be calculated and used to determine whether a load can be safely handled. For example, if an operator is operating a 3000 pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load center), the maximum allowable load-moment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center), then the maximum that this load can weigh is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30).
A-6. Lateral Stability.
A-6.1. The vehicle's lateral stability is determined by the line of action's position (a vertical line that passes through the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity) relative to the stability triangle. When the vehicle is not loaded, the truck's center of gravity location is the only factor to be considered in determining the truck's stability. As long as the line of action of the combined vehicle's and load's center of gravity falls within the stability triangle, the truck is stable and will not tip over. However, if the line of action falls outside the stability triangle, the truck is not stable and may tip over. Refer to Figure 2.
A-6.2. Factors that affect the vehicle's lateral stability include the load's placement on the truck, the height of the load above the surface on which the vehicle is operating, and the vehicle's degree of lean.
A-7. Dynamic Stability.
A-7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a powered industrial truck has been discussed without considering the dynamic forces that result when the vehicle and load are put into motion. The weight's transfer and the resultant shift in the center of gravity due to the dynamic forces created when the machine is moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, and lowering loads, etc., are important stability considerations.
A-7.2. When determining whether a load can be safely handled, the operator should exercise extra caution when handling loads that cause the vehicle to approach its maximum design characteristics. For example, if an operator must handle a maximum load, the load should be carried at the lowest position possible, the truck should be accelerated slowly and evenly, and the forks should be tilted forward cautiously. However, no precise rules can be formulated to cover all of these eventualities.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998; 68 FR 32638, June 2, 2003; 71 FR 16672, Apr. 3, 2006; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]
means the American National Standards Institute.
This section applies to overhead and gantry cranes, including semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall cranes, storage bridge cranes, and others having the same fundamental characteristics. These cranes are grouped because they all have trolleys and similar travel characteristics.
All new overhead and gantry cranes constructed and installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0-1967, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Cranes may be modified and rerated provided such modifications and the supporting structure are checked thoroughly for the new rated load by a qualified engineer or the equipment manufacturer. The crane shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (k)(2) of this section. New rated load shall be displayed in accordance with subparagraph (5) of this paragraph.
Outdoor storage bridges shall be provided with automatic rail clamps. A wind-indicating device shall be provided which will give a visible or audible alarm to the bridge operator at a predetermined wind velocity. If the clamps act on the rail heads, any beads or weld flash on the rail heads shall be ground off.
The rated load of the crane shall be plainly marked on each side of the crane, and if the crane has more than one hoisting unit, each hoist shall have its rated load marked on it or its load block and this marking shall be clearly legible from the ground or floor.
If the runways of two cranes are parallel, and there are no intervening walls or structure, there shall be adequate clearance provided and maintained between the two bridges.
Access to the car and/or bridge walkway shall be by a conveniently placed fixed ladder, stairs, or platform requiring no step over any gap exceeding 12 inches (30 cm). Fixed ladders must comply with subpart D of this part.
Carbon tetrachloride extinguishers shall not be used.
Light in the cab shall be sufficient to enable the operator to see clearly enough to perform his work.
Toeboards and handrails must comply with subpart D of this part.
Bridge trucks shall be equipped with sweeps which extend below the top of the rail and project in front of the truck wheels.
Conductors of the open type mounted on the crane runway beams or overhead shall be so located or so guarded that persons entering or leaving the cab or crane footwalk normally could not come into contact with them.
If a service receptacle is provided in the cab or on the bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall be a grounded three-prong type permanent receptacle, not exceeding 300 volts.
[Reserved]
If a load is supported by more than one part of rope, the tension in the parts shall be equalized.
Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be overloaded.
Except for floor-operated cranes a gong or other effective warning signal shall be provided for each crane equipped with a power traveling mechanism.
Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be inspected to insure compliance with the provisions of this section.
The following items shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section or as specifically indicated, including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. All deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
Visual inspection daily; monthly inspection with a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the hook inspected. For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10° twist from the plane of the unbent hook refer to paragraph (l)(3)(iii)( a ) of this section.
Complete inspections of the crane shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)( b ) of this section, depending upon its activity, severity of service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this section and in addition, the following items. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
Test loads shall not be more than 125 percent of the rated load unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. The test reports shall be placed on file where readily available to appointed personnel.
A preventive maintenance program based on the crane manufacturer's recommendations shall be established.
A thorough inspection of all ropes shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected shall be kept on file where readily available to appointed personnel. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength, shall be carefully observed and determination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:
All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a crane on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration and shall be performed by an appointed person whose approval shall be required for further use of the rope. A certification record shall be available for inspection which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the rope which was inspected.
The crane shall not be loaded beyond its rated load except for test purposes as provided in paragraph (k) of this section.
The employer shall insure that operators are familiar with the operation and care of fire extinguishers provided.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]
means the American National Standards Institute.
This section applies to crawler cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel mounted cranes of both truck and self-propelled wheel type, and any variations thereof which retain the same fundamental characteristics. This section includes only cranes of the above types, which are basically powered by internal combustion engines or electric motors and which utilize drums and ropes. Cranes designed for railway and automobile wreck clearances are excepted. The requirements of this section are applicable only to machines when used as lifting cranes.
All new crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes constructed and utilized on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, ANSI B30.5-1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. Crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes constructed prior to August 31, 1971, should be modified to conform to those design specifications by February 15, 1972, unless it can be shown that the crane cannot feasibly or economically be altered and that the crane substantially complies with the requirements of this section.
Only designated personnel shall be permitted to operate a crane covered by this section.
where stability governs lifting performance.
| Type of crane mounting | Maximum load ratings (percent of tipping loads) |
|---|---|
| Locomotive, without outriggers: | |
| Booms 60 feet or less | 1 85 |
| Booms over 60 feet | 1 85 |
| Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended | 80 |
| Crawler, without outriggers | 75 |
| Crawler, using outriggers fully extended | 85 |
| Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or using outriggers fully extended | 85 |
| 1 Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net stabilizing moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with such booms. |
A substantial and durable rating chart with clearly legible letters and figures shall be provided with each crane and securely fixed to the crane cab in a location easily visible to the operator while seated at his control station.
Prior to initial use all new and altered cranes shall be inspected to insure compliance with provisions of this section.
Inspection procedure for cranes in regular service is divided into two general classifications based upon the intervals at which inspection should be performed. The intervals in turn are dependent upon the nature of the critical components of the crane and the degree of their exposure to wear, deterioration, or malfunction. The two general classifications are herein designated as “frequent” and “periodic”, with respective intervals between inspections as defined below:
Daily to monthly intervals.
1- to 12-month intervals, or as specifically recommended by the manufacturer.
Items such as the following shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section or as specifically indicated including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
Daily.
For hooks with cracks or having more than 15 percent in excess of normal throat opening or more than 10° twist from the plane of the unbent hook.
Complete inspections of the crane shall be performed at intervals as generally defined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section depending upon its activity, severity of service, and environment, or as specifically indicated below. These inspections shall include the requirements of paragraph (d)(3) of this section and in addition, items such as the following. Any deficiencies such as listed shall be carefully examined and determination made as to whether they constitute a safety hazard:
Certification records which include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, of the crane which was inspected shall be made monthly on critical items in use such as brakes, crane hooks, and ropes. This certification record shall be kept readily available.
After adjustments and repairs have been made the crane shall not be operated until all guards have been reinstalled, safety devices reactivated, and maintenance equipment removed.
A thorough inspection of all ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and an identifier for the ropes shall be prepared and kept on file where readily available. All inspections shall be performed by an appointed or authorized person. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength shall be carefully observed and detemination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:
Rail clamps shall not be used as a means of restraining tipping of a locomotive crane.
Cranes shall not be operated without the full amount of any ballast or counterweight in place as specified by the maker, but truck cranes that have dropped the ballast or counterweight may be operated temporarily with special care and only for light loads without full ballast or counterweight in place. The ballast or counterweight in place specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded.
A locomotive crane shall not be swung into a position where railway cars on an adjacent track might strike it, until it has been ascertained that cars are not being moved on the adjacent track and proper flag protection has been established.
For operations near overhead electric lines, see § 1910.333(c)(3).
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
means the American National Standards Institute.
This section applies to guy, stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chicago boom and A-frame derricks of the stationary type, capable of handling loads at variable reaches and powered by hoists through systems of rope reeving, used to perform lifting hook work, single or multiple line bucket work, grab, grapple, and magnet work. Derricks may be permanently installed for temporary use as in construction work. The requirements of this section also apply to any modification of these types which retain their fundamental features, except for floating derricks.
All new derricks constructed and installed on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for Derricks, ANSI B30.6-1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Only designated personnel shall be permitted to operate a derrick covered by this section.
For permanently installed derricks with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and mast, a substantial, durable, and clearly legible rating chart shall be provided with each derrick and securely affixed where it is visible to personnel responsible for the safe operation of the equipment. The chart shall include the following data:
Size and construction of rope may be shown either on the rating chart or in the operating manual.
For nonpermanent installations, the manufacturer shall provide sufficient information from which capacity charts can be prepared for the particular installation. The capacity charts shall be located at the derricks or the jobsite office.
Items such as the following shall be inspected for defects at intervals as defined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)( a ) of this section or as specifically indicated, including observation during operation for any defects which might appear between regular inspections. Deficiencies shall be carefully examined for any safety hazard:
Inspect daily for adjustment, wear, and lubrication.
Inspect daily, visually.
Daily.
Daily.
Prior to initial use all new and altered derricks shall be tested to insure compliance with this section including the following functions:
All anchorages shall be approved by the appointed person. Rock and hairpin anchorages may require special testing.
A preventive maintenance program based on the derrick manufacturer's recommendations shall be established.
A thorough inspection of all ropes in use shall be made at least once a month and a certification record which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected shall be prepared and kept on file where readily available. Any deterioration, resulting in appreciable loss of original strength shall be carefully observed and determination made as to whether further use of the rope would constitute a safety hazard. Some of the conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are the following:
Heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur in sections in contact with equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where rope travel is limited, or with saddles. Particular care shall be taken to inspect ropes at these locations.
All rope which has been idle for a period of a month or more due to shutdown or storage of a derrick on which it is installed shall be given a thorough inspection before it is used. This inspection shall be for all types of deterioration. A certification record shall be prepared and kept readily available which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and an identifier for the ropes which were inspected.
Particular care shall be taken in the inspection of nonrotating rope.
Derrick operations shall be directed only by the individual specifically designated for that purpose.
Dogs, pawls, or other positive holding mechanism on the hoist shall be engaged. When not in use, the derrick boom shall:
For operations near overhead electric lines, see § 1910.333(c)(3).
[37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38 FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Prior to each day's operation a briefing shall be conducted. This briefing shall set forth the plan of operation for the pilot and ground personnel.
Loads shall be properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into the rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means shall be used for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable clamps from loosening.
All electrically operated cargo hooks shall have the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent inadvertent operation. In addition, these cargo hooks shall be equipped with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. The employer shall ensure that the hooks are tested prior to each day's operation by a competent person to determine that the release functions properly, both electrically and mechanically.
The employer shall take all necessary precautions to protect employees from flying objects in the rotor downwash. All loose gear within 100 feet of the place of lifting the load or depositing the load, or within all other areas susceptible to rotor downwash, shall be secured or removed.
Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all helicopter loading and unloading areas.
The size and weight of loads, and the manner in which loads are connected to the helicopter shall be checked. A lift may not be made if the helicopter operator believes the lift cannot be made safely.
When employees perform work under hovering craft, a safe means of access shall be provided for employees to reach the hoist line hook and engage or disengage cargo slings. Employees may not be permitted to perform work under hovering craft except when necessary to hook or unhook loads.
Static charge on the suspended load shall be dissipated with a grounding device before ground personnel touch the suspended load, unless protective rubber gloves are being worn by all ground personnel who may be required to touch the suspended load.
The weight of an external load shall not exceed the helicopter manufacturer's rating.
Hoist wires or other gear, except for pulling lines or conductors that are allowed to “pay out” from a container or roll off a reel, shall not be attached to any fixed ground structure, or allowed to foul on any fixed structure.
Ground personnel shall be instructed and the employer shall ensure that when visibility is reduced by dust or other conditions, they shall exercise special caution to keep clear of main and stabilizing rotors. Precautions shall also be taken by the employer to eliminate, as far as practical, the dust or other conditions reducing the visibility.
The employer shall instruct the aircrew and ground personnel on the signal systems to be used and shall review the system with the employees in advance of hoisting the load. This applies to both radio and hand signal systems. Hand signals, where used, shall be as shown in Figure N-1.
No employee shall be permitted to approach within 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor blades are turning, unless his work duties require his presence in that area.
The employer shall instruct employees, and shall ensure, that whenever approaching or leaving a helicopter which has its blades rotating, all employees shall remain in full view of the pilot and keep in a crouched position. No employee shall be permitted to work in the area from the cockpit or cabin rearward while blades are rotating, unless authorized by the helicopter operator to work there.
Sufficient ground personnel shall be provided to ensure that helicopter loading and unloading operations can be performed safely.
There shall be constant reliable communication between the pilot and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. The signalman shall be clearly distinguishable from other ground personnel.
This section applies to slings used in conjunction with other material handling equipment for the movement of material by hoisting, in employments covered by this part. The types of slings covered are those made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope (conventional three strand construction), and synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene).
Angle of loading is the inclination of a leg or branch of a sling measured from the horizontal or vertical plane as shown in Fig. N-184-5; provided that an angle of loading of five degrees or less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading.
Basket hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is passed under the load and has both ends, end attachments, eyes or handles on the hook or a single master link.
Braided wire rope is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire ropes.
Bridle wire rope sling is a sling composed of multiple wire rope legs with the top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting hook.
Cable laid endless sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made endless by joining the ends of a single length of cable laid rope with one or more metallic fittings.
Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the rope inside the six wraps.
Cable laid rope is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped around a fiber or wire rope core.
Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made from a cable laid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one or more metal sleeves over the rope junction.
Choker hitch is a sling configuration with one end of the sling passing under the load and through an end attachment, handle or eye on the other end of the sling.
Coating is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a sling or to a sling component to impart desirable properties.
Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a complete fabric. (See Fig. N-184-2.)
Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties.
Equivalent entity is a person or organization (including an employer) which, by possession of equipment, technical knowledge and skills, can perform with equal competence the same repairs and tests as the person or organization with which it is equated.
Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling consisting of a series of transverse coils and cross rods.
Female handle (choker) is a handle with a handle eye and a slot of such dimension as to permit passage of a male handle thereby allowing the use of a metal mesh sling in a choker hitch. (See Fig. N-184-1.)
Handle is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached. (See Fig. N-184-1.)
Handle eye is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept a hook, shackle or other lifting device. (See Fig. N-184-1.)
Hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is fastened to an object or load, either directly to it or around it.
Link is a single ring of a chain.
Male handle (triangle) is a handle with a handle eye.
Master coupling link is an alloy steel welded coupling link used as an intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links. (See Fig. N-184-3.)
Master link or gathering ring is a forged or welded steel link used to support all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope sling. (See Fig. N-184-3.)
Mechanical coupling link is a nonwelded, mechanically closed steel link used to attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain.
Proof test is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity to verify construction and workmanship of a sling.
Rated capacity or working load limit is the maximum working load permitted by the provisions of this section.
Reach is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured from the top bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the bottom bearing surface of the lower terminal component.
Selvage edge is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to prevent unraveling.
Sling is an assembly which connects the load to the material handling equipment.
Sling manufacturer is a person or organization that assembles sling components into their final form for sale to users.
Spiral is a single transverse coil that is the basic element from which metal mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N-184-2.)
Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made endless from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more metallic fittings.
Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of strand wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the strand inside the six wraps.
Strand laid rope is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or eight) wrapped around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent wire rope core (IWRC).
Vertical hitch is a method of supporting a load by a single, vertical part or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N-184-4.)
Whenever any sling is used, the following practices shall be observed:
Each day before being used, the sling and all fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects by a competent person designated by the employer. Additional inspections shall be performed during sling use, where service conditions warrant. Damaged or defective slings shall be immediately removed from service.
Alloy steel chain slings shall have permanently affixed durable identification stating size, grade, rated capacity, and reach.
The employer shall ensure that before use, each new, repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling, including all welded components in the sling assembly, shall be proof tested by the sling manufacturer or equivalent entity, in accordance with paragraph 5.2 of the American Society of Testing and Materials Specification A391-65, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6 (ANSI G61.1-1968). The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and shall make it available for examination.
Employers must permanently remove an alloy steel-chain slings from service if it is heated above 1000 degrees F. When exposed to service temperatures in excess of 600 degrees F, employers must reduce the maximum working-load limits permitted by the chain manufacturer in accordance with the chain or sling manufacturer's recommendations.
If the chain size at any point of the link is less than that stated in Table N-184-1, the employer must remove the chain from service.
| Chain size, inches | Minimum allowable chain size, inches |
|---|---|
| 1 ⁄ 4 | 13 ⁄ 64 |
| 3 ⁄ 8 | 19 ⁄ 64 |
| 1 ⁄ 2 | 25 ⁄ 64 |
| 5 ⁄ 8 | 31 ⁄ 64 |
| 3 ⁄ 4 | 19 ⁄ 32 |
| 7 ⁄ 8 | 4 5 ⁄ 64 |
| 1 | 13 ⁄ 16 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 29 ⁄ 32 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 |
| 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 3 ⁄ 32 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 1 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 13 ⁄ 32 |
Employers must use only wire-rope slings that have permanently affixed and legible identification markings as prescribed by the manufacturer, and that indicate the recommended safe working load for the type(s) of hitch(es) used, the angle upon which it is based, and the number of legs if more than one.
Fiber core wire rope slings of all grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to temperatures in excess of 200 °F. When nonfiber core wire rope slings of any grade are used at temperatures above 400 °F or below minus 60 °F, recommendations of the sling manufacturer regarding use at that temperature shall be followed.
Wire rope slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
Each metal mesh sling shall have permanently affixed to it a durable marking that states the rated capacity for vertical basket hitch and choker hitch loadings.
Handles shall have a rated capacity at least equal to the metal fabric and exhibit no deformation after proof testing.
The fabric and handles shall be joined so that:
Coatings which diminish the rated capacity of a sling shall not be applied.
All new and repaired metal mesh slings, including handles, shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at a minimum of 1 1/2 times their rated capacity. Elastomer impregnated slings shall be proof tested before coating.
Metal mesh slings which are not impregnated with elastomers may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 °F to plus 550 °F without decreasing the working load limit. Metal mesh slings impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or neoprene may be used only in a temperature range from zero degrees to plus 200 °F. For operations outside these temperature ranges or for metal mesh slings impregnated with other materials, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.
Metal mesh slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
percent reduction of the original cross sectional area of metal at any point around the handle eye.
Employers must use natural and synthetic fiber-rope slings that have permanently affixed and legible identification markings stating the rated capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle upon which it is based, type of fiber material, and the number of legs if more than one.
Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings, except for wet frozen slings, may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 °F to plus 180 °F without decreasing the working load limit. For operations outside this temperature range and for wet frozen slings, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.
Spliced fiber rope slings shall not be used unless they have been spliced in accordance with the following minimum requirements and in accordance with any additional recommendations of the manufacturer:
Fiber rope slings shall not be used if end attachments in contact with the rope have sharp edges or projections.
Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
Only fiber rope slings made from new rope shall be used. Use of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope slings is prohibited.
Each sling shall be marked or coded to show the rated capacities for each type of hitch and type of synthetic web material.
Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and width and selvage edges shall not be split from the webbing's width.
Fittings shall be:
When synthetic web slings are used, the following precautions shall be taken:
Synthetic web slings of polyester and nylon shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 °F. Polypropylene web slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 200 °F.
Synthetic web slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
[40 FR 27369, June 27, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30, 1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 76 FR 33607, June 8, 2011; 84 FR 15105, Apr. 15, 2019]
Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
Type 1—Straight Wheel
Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole.
Limitation: Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or greater than rim thickness, W dimension.
Type 2—Cylinder Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and wall—wheel is mounted on the diameter.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
Type 6—Straight-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension “W” takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
Type 11—Flaring-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W).
Limitation: These wheels shall be mounted only with a special tapered flange.
Typical examples of modified types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo) showing tapered K dimensions.
Special supporting, back adapter and inside flange nuts are required for the proper mounting of these types of wheels subject to limitations of § 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii).
Limitations: See § 1910.215(c)(1).
Surface Feet Per Minute = 3.1416 × diameter in inches × r.p.m. ÷ 12 or.262 × diameter in inches × r.p.m.
Examples:
Cutting off wheels are recommended only for use on specially designed and fully guarded machines and are subject to the following maximum thickness and hole size limitations.
| Wheel diameter | Max. thickness (inch) |
|---|---|
| 6 inch and smaller | 3 ⁄ 18 |
| Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| Larger than 23 inches | 1 ⁄ 2 |
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14, 1988]
One or more methods of machine guarding shall be provided to protect the operator and other employees in the machine area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are—barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc.
Guards shall be affixed to the machine where possible and secured elsewhere if for any reason attachment to the machine is not possible. The guard shall be such that it does not offer an accident hazard in itself.
When the periphery of the blades of a fan is less than seven (7) feet above the floor or working level, the blades shall be guarded. The guard shall have openings no larger than one-half ( 1/2 ) inch.
Machines designed for a fixed location shall be securely anchored to prevent walking or moving.
The requirements of this paragraph are also applicable to sliding cutoff saws mounted above the table.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]
Abrasive wheels shall be used only on machines provided with safety guards as defined in the following paragraphs of this section, except:
The safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut, and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard, except:
Grinding machines shall be equipped with flanges in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
On offhand grinding machines, work rests shall be used to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of one-eighth inch to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest, which may cause wheel breakage. The work rest shall be securely clamped after each adjustment. The adjustment shall not be made with the wheel in motion.
Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by this section.
Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:
The maximum exposure angles specified in paragraphs (b) (3) through (8) of this section shall not be exceeded. Visors or other accessory equipment shall not be included as a part of the guard when measuring the guard opening, unless such equipment has strength equal to that of the guard.
The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as bench and floor stands should not exceed 90° or one-fourth of the periphery. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65° above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-6 and O-7 and paragraph (b)(9) of this section.)
Wherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125°. (See Figures O-8 and O-9.)
The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical grinding machines shall not exceed 180°. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65° above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-10 and O-11 and subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.)
The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cutting-off machines and on surface grinding machines which employ the wheel periphery shall not exceed 150°. This exposure shall begin at a point not less than 15° below the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures O-12 and O-13)
The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on grinders known as automatic snagging machines shall not exceed 180° and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figures O-14 and O-15.)
Safety guards of the types described in subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph, where the operator stands in front of the opening, shall be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum angular exposure above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle as specified in paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this section shall never be exceeded, and the distance between the wheel periphery and the adjustable tongue or the end of the peripheral member at the top shall never exceed one-fourth inch. (See Figures O-18, O-19, O-20, O-21, O-22, and O-23.)
correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required angular protection for all sizes of wheel used.
correct
Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for smallest size wheel used.
incorrect
Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel but too large for smaller wheels.
Band type guards shall conform to the following general specifications:
Abrasive wheel machinery guards shall meet the design specifications of the American National Standard Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI B7.1-1970, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. This requirement shall not apply to natural sandstone wheels or metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface.
All abrasive wheels shall be mounted between flanges which shall not be less than one-third the diameter of the wheel.
The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between flat non-relieved flanges of equal bearing surfaces.
Flanges shall be dimensionally accurate and in good balance. There shall be no rough surfaces or sharp edges.
Types 27 and 28 wheels, because of their shape, require specially designed adaptors.
The driving flange shall be securely fastened to the spindle and the bearing surface shall run true. When more than one wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. (See paragraph (d)(6) of this section.)
All flanges shall be maintained in good condition. When the bearing surfaces become worn, warped, sprung, or damaged they should be trued or refaced. When refacing or truing, care shall be exercised to make sure that proper relief and rigidity is maintained as specified in paragraphs (c) (2) and (5) of this section and they shall be replaced when they do not conform to these subparagraphs and Table O-4, Figure O-30, Table O-5, Figure O-31, Table O-6, Figure O-32, and Table O-8, Figure O-35. Failure to observe these rules might cause excessive flange pressure around the hole of the wheel. This is especially true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges.
Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user (ring test) to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently with a light nonmetallic implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a wooden mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked (dead), they shall not be used. This is known as the “Ring Test”.
Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus.002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure.
All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters and flanges shall be flat and free of foreign matter.
When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges.
When blotters or flange facings of compressible material are required, they shall cover entire contact area of wheel flanges. Blotters need not be used with the following types of wheels:
When more than one wheel is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. When mounting wheels which have not been cemented together, or ones which do not utilize separating spacers, care must be exercised to use wheels specially manufactured for that purpose.
| Material used in construction of guard | Maximum thickness of cutting off wheel | Speed not to exceed | Cutting off wheel diameters | |||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6 to 11 inches | Over 11 to 20 inches | Over 20 to 30 inches | Over 30 to 48 inches | Over 48 to 72 inches | ||||||||
| A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | |||
| Structural steel (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) | 1 ⁄ 2 inch or less | 14,200 SFPM | 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 32 | 3 ⁄ 32 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 1 ⁄ 2 inch or less | 16,000 SFPM | 3 ⁄ 32 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| Minimum material specifications | Diameter of wheel | Minimum thickness of band A | Minimum diameter of rivets | Maximum distance between centers of rivets |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Inches | ||||
| Hot rolled steel SAE 1008 | Under 8 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 8 to 24 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 | |
| Over 24 to 30 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| Wheel diameter | Wheel hole diameter | B—Minimum flange diameter | D—Minimun thickness of flange at bore | E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut | F 1 —(D-E) minimum thickness |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 12 to 14 | 4 | 6 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 5 | 7 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 6 | 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| Larger than 14 to 18 | 4 | 6 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 5 | 7 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 6 | 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 7 | 9 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 8 | 10 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| Larger than 18 to 24 | 6 | 8 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 7 | 9 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 8 | 10 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 10 | 12 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 12 | 14 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| Larger than 24 to 30 | 12 | 15 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| Larger than 30 to 36 | 12 | 15 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 1 For wheels under 1 1 ⁄ 4 inches thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness. |
| A—Diameter of wheel | B—Minimum outside diameter of flanges | C—Radial width of bearing surface | D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore | E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of recess | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Minimum | Maximum | ||||
| 1 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 16 |
| 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 32 |
| 3 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 32 |
| 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 8 |
| 5 | 1 3 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 8 |
| 6 | 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 7 | 2 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 8 | 3 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 10 | 3 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 12 | 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 16 |
| 14 | 4 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 16 |
| 16 | 5 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 16 |
| 18 | 6 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| 20 | 7 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| 22 | 7 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 |
| 24 | 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 |
| 26 | 8 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 28 | 10 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 30 | 10 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 |
| 36 | 12 | 1 | 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 42 | 14 | 1 | 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 48 | 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 |
| 60 | 20 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 |
| 72 | 24 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 2 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 1 Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true. |
| Wheel diameter | Wheel hole diameter | B—Minimum flange diameter | D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore | E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut | F 2 —(D-E) minimum thickness |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20 | 6 | 8 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 20 | 8 | 10 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 24 | 12 | 15 | 2 | 1 | 1 |
| 30 | 12 | 15 | 2 | 1 | 1 |
| 36 | 12 | 15 | 2 | 1 | |
| 1 Flanges shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to R. 25-30. | |||||
| 2 For wheels under 1 1 ⁄ 4 inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness. |
| Wheel diameter | Wheel hole diameter | B—Minimum outside diameter of flange | D—Minimum thickness of flange at bore | E—Minimum thickness of flange at edge of undercut |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 12 to 14 | 5 | 7 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 |
| Larger than 14 to 20 | 5 | 7 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 |
| 6 | 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | |
| 8 | 10 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | |
| 10 | 11 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | |
| 12 | 13 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | |
| Larger than 20 to 30 | 8 | 10 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 10 | 11 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 12 | 13 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 16 | 17 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| Larger than 30 to 42 | 12 | 13 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 16 | 17 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 18 | 19 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| 20 | 21 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | |
| Larger than 42 to 60 | 16 | 20 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 20 | 24 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | |
| 24 | 29 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | |
| Note: These flanges may be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other equivalent means of fastening. For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 12. |
| Material used in construction of guard | Maximum thickness of grinding wheel | Grinding wheel diameters | |||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3 to 6 inches | Over 6 to 12 inches | Over 12 to 16 inches | Over 16 to 20 inches | Over 20 to 24 inches | Over 24 to 30 inches | Over 30 to 48 inches | |||||||||
| A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | A | B | ||
| Material | 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 |
| satis- | 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 |
| factory 1 | 6 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 |
| for | 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | ||
| speeds | 10 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | ||
| up to | 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 | 1 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 | 1 7 ⁄ 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | ||||
| 8,000 | 20 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 2 | 1 5 ⁄ 8 | ||||||
| SFPM. | |||||||||||||||
| Cast iron (min. tensile strength 20,000 p.s.i.) Class 20. | |||||||||||||||
| Material | 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 | 7 ⁄ 8 |
| satis- | 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 |
| factory 1 | 6 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 |
| for | 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | ||
| speeds | 10 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | ||
| up to | 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 | ||||
| 9,000 | 20 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | ||||||
| SFPM. | |||||||||||||||
| Malleable iron (min. tensile strength 50,000 p.s.i.) Grade 32510. | |||||||||||||||
| Materials | 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| satis- | 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| factory 1 | 6 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| for | 8 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 15 ⁄ 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 | ||
| speeds | 10 | 1 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 15 ⁄ 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 | 1 7 ⁄ 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 16 | ||
| up to | 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 13 ⁄ 16 | 1 7 ⁄ 16 | ||||
| 16,000 | 20 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 | 1 7 ⁄ 16 | 1 5 ⁄ 16 | 2 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 11 ⁄ 16 | ||||||
| SFPM. | |||||||||||||||
| Steel castings (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) Grade V60-30. | |||||||||||||||
| Structural | 2 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 4 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| steel | 4 | 1 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| (min. | 6 | 3 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 16 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| tensile | 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 9 | |||||||
| strength | 10 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 5 ⁄ 8 | ||
| 60,000 | 16 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 9 ⁄ 16 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 1 1 ⁄ 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | ||||
| p.s.i.) | 20 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 13 ⁄ 16 | 11 ⁄ 16 | 7 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 16 | 15 ⁄ 16 | ||||||
| 1 The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable. |
| Overall thickness of wheel (T) | Maximum exposure of wheel (C) |
|---|---|
| 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 1 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 3 | 1 |
| 4 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 5 and over | 2 |
| A—Diameter of wheel | B 1 —Minimum outside diameter of flange | T—Minimum thickness of flange |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 5 ⁄ 8 | 1 ⁄ 8 |
| 2 | 1 | 1 ⁄ 8 |
| 3 | 1 | 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 4 | 1 3 ⁄ 8 | 3 ⁄ 16 |
| 5 | 1 3 ⁄ 4 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 6 | 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| 1 Note: Must be large enough to extend beyond the bushing. Where prong anchor or cupback bushing are used, this footnote does not apply. |
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Mechanical and electrical equipment and auxiliaries shall be installed in accordance with this section and subpart S of this part.
All new mill installations shall be installed so that the top of the operating rolls is not less than 50 inches above the level on which the operator stands, irrespective of the size of the mill. This distance shall apply to the actual working level, whether it be at the general floor level, in a pit, or on a platform.
A safety trip control shall be provided in front and in back of each mill. It shall be accessible and shall operate readily on contact. The safety trip control shall be one of the following types or a combination thereof:
Installed at front and back of each mill having a 46-inch roll height or over. These bars shall operate readily by pressure of the mill operator's body.
Installed in the front and in the back of each mill and located within 2 inches of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The top rods shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands. The triprods shall be accessible and shall operate readily whether the rods are pushed or pulled.
Installed in the front and in the back of each mill and located within 2 inches of a vertical plane tangent to the front and rear rolls. The cables shall not be more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands. The tripwire cable or wire center cord shall operate readily whether cable or cord is pushed or pulled.
All auxiliary equipment such as mill divider, support bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, strip knives, etc., shall be located in such a manner as to avoid interference with access to and operation of safety devices.
A safety triprod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across each pair of in-running rolls extending the length of the face of the rolls. It shall be readily accessible and operate whether pushed or pulled. The safety tripping devices shall be located within reach of the operator and the bite.
On both sides of the calender and near each end of the face of the roll, there shall be a cable or wire center cord connected to the safety trip. They shall operate readily when pushed or pulled.
Where a mill is so installed that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a mill, safety control devices listed in paragraph (b) of this section shall not apply.
Where a calender is so installed that persons cannot normally reach through, over, under, or around to come in contact with the roll bite or be caught between a roll and an adjacent object, then, provided such elements are made a fixed part of a calender, safety control devices listed in paragraph (c) of this section shall not apply.
All trip and emergency switches shall not be of the automatically resetting type, but shall require manual resetting.
All measurements on mills and calenders shall be taken with the rolls running empty at maximum operating speed. Stopping distances shall be expressed in inches of surface travel of the roll from the instant the emergency stopping device is actuated.
All mills irrespective of the size of the rolls or their arrangement (individually or group-driven) shall be stopped within a distance, as measured in inches of surface travel, not greater than 1 1/2 percent of the peripheral no-load surface speeds of the respective rolls as determined in feet per minute.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
It shall be the responsibility of any person reconstructing, or modifying a mechanical power press to do so in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
Press brakes, hydraulic and pneumatic power presses, bulldozers, hot bending and hot metal presses, forging presses and hammers, riveting machines and similar types of fastener applicators are excluded from the requirements of this section.
Friction brakes provided for stopping or holding a slide movement shall be inherently self-engaging by requiring power or force from an external source to cause disengagement. Brake capacity shall be sufficient to stop the motion of the slide quickly and capable of holding the slide and its attachments at any point in its travel.
control circuits and solenoid value coils shall be powered by not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. supply obtained from a transformer with an isolated secondary. Higher voltages that may be necessary for operation of machine or control mechanisms shall be isolated from any control mechanism handled by the operator, but motor starters with integral Start-Stop buttons may utilize line voltage control. All d.c. control circuits shall be powered by not more than a nominal 240-volt d.c. supply isolated from any higher voltages.
Air controlling equipment shall be protected against foreign material and water entering the pneumatic system of the press. A means of air lubrication shall be provided when needed.
The maximum anticipated working pressures in any hydraulic system on a mechanical power press shall not exceed the safe working pressure rating of any component used in that system.
All pressure vessels used in conjunction with power presses shall conform to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Edition, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the control system shall be constructed so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required, but does prevent initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be detectable by a simple test, or indicated by the control system. This requirement does not apply to those elements of the control system which have no effect on the protection against point of operation injuries.
When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the brake monitor shall meet the following requirements:
s
s
where:
s
and
s
s
s
where:
s
and
s
m
m
where:
m
and
m
m
m
m
1/2
Hand feeding tools are intended for placing and removing materials in and from the press. Hand feeding tools are not a point of operation guard or protection device and shall not be used in lieu of the “guards” or devices required in this section.
Where the operator feeds or removes parts by placing one or both hands in the point of operation, and a two hand control, presence sensing device, Type B gate or movable barrier (on a part revolution clutch) is used for safeguarding:
The employer shall: (i) Use dies and operating methods designed to control or eliminate hazards to operating personnel, and (ii) furnish and enforce the use of hand tools for freeing and removing stuck work or scrap pieces from the die, so that no employee need reach into the point of operation for such purposes.
The employer shall provide means for handling scrap from roll feed or random length stock operations. Scrap cutters used in conjunction with scrap handling systems shall be safeguarded in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section and with § 1910.219.
The hazard created by a guide post (when it is located in the immediate vicinity of the operator) when separated from its bushing by more than one-fourth inch shall be considered as a point of operation hazard and be protected in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
If unitized tooling is used, the opening between the top of the punch holder and the face of the slide, or striking pad, shall be safeguarded in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
Provision shall be made in both the upper and lower shoes for securely mounting the die to the bolster and slide. Where clamp caps or setscrews are used in conjunction with punch stems, additional means of securing the upper shoe to the slide shall be used.
Handling equipment attach points shall be provided on all dies requiring mechanical handling.
The employer shall establish and follow an inspection program having a general component and a directed component.
It shall be the responsibility of any person modifying a power press to furnish instructions with the modification to establish new or changed guidelines for use and care of the power press so modified.
It shall be the responsibility of the employer to insure the original and continuing competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power presses.
The employer shall train and instruct the operator in the safe method of work before starting work on any operation covered by this section. The employer shall insure by adequate supervision that correct operating procedures are being followed.
The employer shall provide clearance between machines so that movement of one operator will not interfere with the work of another. Ample room for cleaning machines, handling material, work pieces, and scrap shall also be provided. All surrounding floors shall be kept in good condition and free from obstructions, grease, oil, and water.
The employer shall operate his presses within the tonnage and attachment weight ratings specified by the manufacturer.
Explanation of above diagram:
This diagram shows the accepted safe openings between the bottom edge of a guard and feed table at various distances from the danger line (point of operation).
The clearance line marks the distance required to prevent contact between guard and moving parts.
The minimum guarding line is the distance between the infeed side of the guard and the danger line which is one-half inch from the danger line.
The various openings are such that for average size hands an operator's fingers won't reach the point of operation.
After installation of point of operation guards and before a job is released for operation a check should be made to verify that the guard will prevent the operator's hands from reaching the point of operation.
| Distance of opening from point of operation hazard | Maximum width of opening |
|---|---|
| 1 ⁄ 2 to 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 2 to 2 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| 2 1 ⁄ 2 to 3 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 3 1 ⁄ 2 to 5 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 |
| 5 1 ⁄ 2 to 6 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 6 1 ⁄ 2 to 7 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 |
| 7 1 ⁄ 2 to 12 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 12 1 ⁄ 2 to 15 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 15 1 ⁄ 2 to 17 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 7 ⁄ 8 |
| 17 1 ⁄ 2 to 31 1 ⁄ 2 | 2 1 ⁄ 8 |
This table shows the distances that guards shall be positioned from the danger line in accordance with the required openings.
Presses whose designs incorporate flywheels running on journals on the crankshaft or back shaft, or bull gears running on journals mounted on the crankshaft, shall be inspected, lubricated, and maintained as provided in paragraph (h)(10) of this section to reduce the possibility of unintended and uncontrolled press strokes caused by bearing seizure.
set-up/reset means shall be provided which requires an overt action by the operator, in addition to PSDI mode selection, before operation of the press by means of PSDI can be started.
Control components shall be selected, constructed, and connected together in such a way as to withstand expected operational and environmental stresses, at least including those outlined in appendix A. Such stresses shall not so affect the control system as to cause unsafe operation.
shall be implemented only by use of light curtain (photo-electric) presence sensing devices which meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(3)(iii)( c ) of this section unless the requirements of the following paragraph have been met.
Ds = Hs × (Ts + Tp + Tr + 2Tm) + Dp
Where:
Ds = Minimum safety distance.
Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).
Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds, computed by taking averages of multiple measurements at each of three positions (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of crankshaft angular position; the longest of the three averages is the stopping time to use. (Ts is defined as the sum of the kinetic energy dissipation time plus the pneumatic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).)
Tp = Longest presence sensing device response time, in seconds.
Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all interposing control elements between the presence sensing device and the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).
Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear. The time increase allowed shall be limited to no more than 10 percent of the longest press stopping time measured at the top of the stroke, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is longer.
Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to provide for possible penetration through the presence sensing field by fingers or hand before detection occurs. The penetration depth factor shall be determined from Graph h-1 using the minimum object sensitivity size.
Where tools are used for feeding, removal of scrap, lubrication of parts, or removal of parts that stick on the die in PSDI operations:
Appendix A to § 1910.217—Mandatory Requirements for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses
Purpose
The purpose of the certification/validation of safety systems for presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses is to ensure that the safety systems are designed, installed, and maintained in accordance with all applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.
General
The certification/validation process shall utilize an independent third-party validation organization recognized by OSHA in accordance with the requirements specified in appendix C of this section.
While the employer is responsible for assuring that the certification/validation requirements in § 1910.217(h)(11) are fulfilled, the design certification of PSDI safety systems may be initiated by manufacturers, employers, and/or their representatives. The term manufacturers refers to the manufacturer of any of the components of the safety system. An employer who assembles a PSDI safety system would be a manufacturer as well as employer for purposes of this standard and appendix.
The certification/validation process includes two stages. For design certification, in the first stage, the manufacturer (which can be an employer) certifies that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A, based on appropriate design criteria and tests. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates that the PSDI safety system meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the manufacturer's certification by reviewing the manufacturer's design and test data and performing any additional reviews required by this standard or which it believes appropriate.
For installation certification/validation and annual recertification/revalidation, in the first stage the employer certifies or recertifies that the employer is installing or utilizing a PSDI safety system validated as meeting the design requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A by an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization and that the installation, operation and maintenance meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. In the second stage, the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization validates or revalidates that the PSDI safety system installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A and the employer's certification, by reviewing that the PSDI safety system has been certified; the employer's certification, designs and tests, if any; the installation, operation, maintenance and training; and by performing any additional tests and reviews which the validation organization believes is necessary.
Summary
The certification/validation of safety systems for PSDI shall consider the press, controls, safeguards, operator, and environment as an integrated system which shall comply with all of the requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. The certification/validation process shall verify that the safety system complies with the OSHA safety requirements as follows:
A. Design Certification/Validation
1. The major parts, components and subsystems used shall be defined by part number or serial number, as appropriate, and by manufacturer to establish the configuration of the system.
2. The identified parts, components and subsystems shall be certified by the manufacturer to be able to withstand the functional and operational environments of the PSDI safety system.
3. The total system design shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with all requirements in 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.
4. The third-party validation organization shall validate the manufacturer's certification under paragraphs 2 and 3.
B. Installation Certification/Validation
1. The employer shall certify that the PSDI safety system has been design certified and validated, that the installation meets the operational and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, that the installation drawings are accurate, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A. (The operational and installation requirements of the PSDI safety system may vary for different applications.)
2. The third-party validation organization shall validate the employer's certifications that the PSDI safety system is design certified and validated, that the installation meets the installation and environmental requirements specified by the manufacturer, and that the installation meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this appendix A.
C. Recertification/Revalidation
1. The PSDI safety system shall remain under certification/validation for the shorter of one year or until the system hardware is changed, modified or refurbished, or operating conditions are changed (including environmental, application or facility changes), or a failure of a critical component has occurred.
2. Annually, or after a change specified in paragraph 1., the employer shall inspect and recertify the installation as meeting the requirements set forth under B., Installation Certification/Validation.
3. The third-party validation organization, annually or after a change specified in paragraph 1., shall validate the employer's certification that the requirements of paragraph B., Installation Certification/Validation have been met.
Certification/Validation Requirements
A. General Design Certification/Validation Requirements
1. Certification/Validation Program Requirements. The manufacturer shall certify and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate that:
2. Certification/Validation Program Level of Risk Evaluation Requirements. The manufacturer shall evaluate and certify, and the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall validate, the design and operation of the safety system by determining conformance with the following:
a. The safety system shall have the ability to sustain a single failure or a single operating error and not cause injury to personnel from point of operation hazards. Acceptable design features shall demonstrate, in the following order or precedence, that:
b. The manufacturer shall design, evaluate, test and certify, and the third-party validation organization shall evaluate and validate, that the PSDI safety system meets appropriate requirements in the following areas.
Design certification/validation for a new safety system, i.e., a new design or new integration of specifically identified components and subsystems, would entail a single certification/validation which would be applicable to all identical safety systems. It would not be necessary to repeat the tests on individual safety systems of the same manufacture or design. Nor would it be necessary to repeat these tests in the case of modifications where determined by the manufacturer and validated by the third-party validation organization to be equivalent by similarity analysis. Minor modifications not affecting the safety of the system may be made by the manufacturer without revalidation.
Substantial modifications would require testing as a new safety system, as deemed necessary by the validation organization.
B. Additional Detailed Design Certification/Validation Requirements
1. General. The manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative shall certify to and submit to an OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the documentation necessary to demonstrate that the PSDI safety system design is in full compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a)-
2. Reaction Times. For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the reaction time required by § 1910.217(h), the tests shall use the following definitions and requirements:
a. Reaction time means the time, in seconds, it takes the signal, required to activate/deactivate the system, to travel through the system, measured from the time of signal initiation to the time the function being measured is completed.
b. Full stop or No movement of the slide or ram means when the crankshaft rotation has slowed to two or less revolutions per minute, just before stopping completely.
c. Function completion means for, electrical, electromechanical and electronic devices, when the circuit produces a change of state in the output element of the device.
d. When the change of state is motion, the measurement shall be made at the completion of the motion.
e. The generation of the test signal introduced into the system for measuring reaction time shall be such that the initiation time can be established with an error of less than 0.5 percent of the reaction time measured.
f. The instrument used to measure reaction time shall be calibrated to be accurate to within 0.001 second.
3. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(ii). For compliance with these requirements, the average value of the stopping time, Ts, shall be the arithmetic mean of at least 25 stops for each stop angle initiation measured with the brake and/or clutch unused, 50 percent worn, and 90 percent worn. The recommendations of the brake system manufacturer shall be used to simulate or estimate the brake wear. The manufacturer's recommended minimum lining depth shall be identified and documented, and an evaluation made that the minimum depth will not be exceeded before the next (annual) recertification/revalidation. A correlation of the brake and/or clutch degradation based on the above tests and/or estimates shall be made and documented. The results shall document the conditions under which the brake and/or clutch will and will not comply with the requirement. Based upon this determination, a scale shall be developed to indicate the allowable 10 percent of the stopping time at the top of the stroke for slide or ram overtravel due to brake wear. The scale shall be marked to indicate that brake adjustment and/or replacement is required. The explanation and use of the scale shall be documented.
The test specification and procedure shall be submitted to the validation organization for review and validation prior to the test. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of tests.
4. Compliance with §§ 1910.217(h)(5)(iii) and (h)(9)(v). Each reaction time required to calculate the Safety Distance, including the brake monitor setting, shall be documented in separate reaction time tests. These tests shall specify the acceptable tolerance band sufficient to assure that tolerance build-up will not render the safety distance unsafe.
a. Integrated test of the press fully equipped to operate in the PSDI mode shall be conducted to establish the total system reaction time.
b. Brakes which are the adjustable type shall be adjusted properly before the test.
5. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(2)(iii). a. Prior to conducting the brake system test required by paragraph (h)(2)(ii), a visual check shall be made of the springs. The visual check shall include a determination that the spring housing or rod does not show damage sufficient to degrade the structural integrity of the unit, and the spring does not show any tendency to interleave.
b. Any detected broken or unserviceable springs shall be replaced before the test is conducted. The test shall be considered successful if the stopping time remains within that which is determined by paragraph (h)(9)(v) for the safety distance setting. If the increase in press stopping time exceeds the brake monitor setting limit defined in paragraph (h)(5)(iii), the test shall be considered unsuccessful, and the cause of the excessive stopping time shall be investigated. It shall be ascertained that the springs have not been broken and that they are functioning properly.
6. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(7). a. Tests which are conducted by the manufacturers of electrical components to establish stress, life, temperature and loading limits must be tests which are in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.
b. Electrical and/or electronic cards or boards assembled with discreet components shall be considered a subsystem and shall require separate testing that the subsystems do not degrade in any of the following conditions:
c. The manufacturer shall specify the test requirements and procedures from existing consensus tests in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code.
d. Tests designed by the manufacturer shall be made available upon request to the validation organization. The validation organization representative shall witness at least one set of each of these tests.
7. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(iv). a. The manufacturer shall design a test to demonstrate that the prescribed minimum object sensitivity of the presence sensing device is met.
b. The test specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.
8. Compliance with § 1910.217(h)(9)(x). a. The manufacturer shall design a test(s) to establish the hand tool extension diameters allowed for variations in minimum object sensitivity response.
b. The test(s) shall document the range of object diameter sizes which will produce both single and double break conditions.
c. The test(s) specifications and procedures shall be made available upon request to the validation organization.
9. Integrated Tests Certification/Validation. a. The manufacturer shall design a set of integrated tests to demonstrate compliance with the following requirements:
Sections 1910.217(h)(6) (ii); (iii); (iv); (v); (vi); (vii); (viii); (ix); (xi); (xii); (xiii); (xiv); (xv); and (xvii).
b. The integrated test specifications and procedures shall be made available to the validation organization.
10. Analysis. a. The manufacturer shall submit to the validation organization the technical analysis such as Hazard Analysis, Failure Mode and Effect Analysis, Stress Analysis, Component and Material Selection Analysis, Fluid Compatability, and/or other analyses which may be necessary to demonstrate, compliance with the following requirements:
Sections 1910.217(h)(8) (i) and (ii); (h)(2) (ii) and (iii); (h)(3)(i) (A) and (C), and (ii); (h)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii); (h)(6) (i), (iii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi), and (xvii); (h)(7) (i) and (ii); (h)(9) (iv), (v), (viii), (ix) and (x); (h)(10) (i) and (ii).
11. Types of Tests Acceptable for Certification/Validation. a. Test results obtained from development testing may be used to certify/validate the design.
b. The test results shall provide the engineering data necessary to establish confidence that the hardware and software will meet specifications, the manufacturing process has adequate quality control and the data acquired was used to establish processes, procedures, and test levels supporting subsequent hardware design, production, installation and maintenance.
12. Validation for Design Certification/Validation. If, after review of all documentation, tests, analyses, manufacturer's certifications, and any additional tests which the third-party validation organization believes are necessary, the third-party validation organization determines that the PSDI safety system is in full compliance with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A, it shall validate the manufacturer's certification that it so meets the stated requirements.
C. Installation Certification/Validation Requirements
1. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall certify that the requirements of § 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A have been met and that the installation is proper.
2. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall validate the employer's certification that the PSDI safety system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.
D. Recertification/Revalidation Requirements
1. A PSDI safety system which has received installation certification/validation shall undergo recertification/revalidation the earlier of:
a. Each time the systems hardware is significantly changed, modified, or refurbished;
b. Each time the operational conditions are significantly changed (including environmental, application or facility changes, but excluding such changes as die changes or press relocations not involving revision to the safety system);
c. When a failure of a significant component has occurred or a change has been made which may affect safety; or
d. When one year has elapsed since the installation certification/validation or the last recertification/revalidation.
2. Conduct or recertification/revalidation. The employer shall evaluate and test the PSDI safety system installation, shall submit to the OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization the necessary supporting documentation, and shall recertify that the requirements of § 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix are being met. The documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:
a. Demonstration of a thorough inspection of the entire press and PSDI safety system to ascertain that the installation, components and safeguarding have not been changed, modified or tampered with since the installation certification/validation or last recertification/revalidation was made.
b. Demonstrations that such adjustments as may be needed (such as to the brake monitor setting) have been accomplished with proper changes made in the records and on such notices as are located on the press and safety system.
c. Demonstration that review has been made of the reports covering the design certification/validation, the installation certification/validation, and all recertification/revalidations, in order to detect any degradation to an unsafe condition, and that necessary changes have been made to restore the safety system to previous certification/validation levels.
3. The OSHA-recognized third-party validation organization shall conduct tests, and/or review and evaluate the employer's installation, tests, documentation and representations. If it so determines, it shall revalidate the employer's recertification that the PSDI system is in full conformance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.217(a) through (h) and this appendix A.
Appendix B to § 1910.217—Nonmandatory Guidelines for Certification/Validation of Safety Systems for Presence Sensing Device Initiation of Mechanical Power Presses
Objectives
This appendix provides employers, manufacturers, and their representatives, with nonmandatory guidelines for use in developing certification documents. Employers and manufacturers are encouraged to recommend other approaches if there is a potential for improving safety and reducing cost. The guidelines apply to certification/validation activity from design evaluation through the completion of the installation test and the annual recertification/revalidation tests.
General Guidelines
A. The certification/validation process should confirm that hazards identified by hazard analysis, (HA), failure mode effect analysis (FMEA), and other system analyses have been eliminated by design or reduced to an acceptable level through the use of appropriate design features, safety devices, warning devices, or special procedures. The certification/validation process should also confirm that residual hazards identified by operational analysis are addressed by warning, labeling safety instructions or other appropriate means.
B. The objective of the certification/validation program is to demonstrate and document that the system satisfies specification and operational requirements for safe operations.
Quality Control
The safety attributes of a certified/validated PSDI safety system are more likely to be maintained if the quality of the system and its parts, components and subsystem is consistently controlled. Each manufacturer supplying parts, components, subsystems, and assemblies needs to maintain the quality of the product, and each employer needs to maintain the system in a non-degraded condition.
Analysis Guidelines
A. Certification/validation of hardware design below the system level should be accomplished by test and/or analysis.
B. Analytical methods may be used in lieu of, in combination with, or in support of tests to satisfy specification requirements.
C. Analyses may be used for certification/validation when existing data are available or when test is not feasible.
D. Similarity analysis may be used in lieu of tests where it can be shown that the article is similar in design, manufacturing process, and quality control to another article that was previously certified/validated in accordance with equivalent or more stringent criteria. If previous design, history and application are considered to be similar, but not equal to or more exacting than earlier experiences, the additional or partial certification/validation tests should concentrate on the areas of changed or increased requirements.
Analysis Reports
The analysis reports should identify: (1) The basis for the analysis; (2) the hardware or software items analyzed; (3) conclusions; (4) safety factors; and (5) limit of the analysis. The assumptions made during the analysis should be clearly stated and a description of the effects of these assumptions on the conclusions and limits should be included.
Certification/validation by similarity analysis reports should identify, in addition to the above, application of the part, component or subsystem for which certification/validation is being sought as well as data from previous usage establishing adequacy of the item. Similarity analysis should not be accepted when the internal and external stresses on the item being certified/validated are not defined.
Usage experience should also include failure data supporting adequacy of the design.
Appendix C to § 1910.217—Mandatory Requirements for OSHA Recognition of Third-Party Validation Organizations for the PSDI Standard
This appendix prescribes mandatory requirements and procedures for OSHA recognition of third-party validation organizations to validate employer and manufacturer certifications that their equipment and practices meet the requirements of the PSDI standard. The scope of the appendix includes the three categories of certification/validation required by the PSDI standard: Design Certification/Validation, Installation Certification/Validation, and Annual Recertification/Revalidation.
If further detailing of these provisions will assist the validation organization or OSHA in this activity, this detailing will be done through appropriate OSHA Program Directives.
I. Procedure for OSHA Recognition of Validation Organizations
A. Applications
1. Eligibility. a. Any person or organization considering itself capable of conducting a PSDI-related third-party validation function may apply for OSHA recognition.
b. However, in determining eligibility for a foreign-based third-party validation organization, OSHA shall take into consideration whether there is reciprocity of treatment by the foreign government after consultation with relevant U.S. government agencies.
2. Content of application. a. The application shall identify the scope of the validation activity for which the applicant wishes to be recognized, based on one of the following alternatives:
b. The application shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the qualifications set forth in section II of this appendix.
c. The applicant shall provide information demonstrating that it and any validating laboratory utilized meet the program requirements set forth in section III of this appendix.
d. The applicant shall identify the test methods it or the validating laboratory will use to test or judge the components and operations of the PSDI safety system required to be tested by the PSDI standard and appendix A, and shall specify the reasons the test methods are appropriate.
e. The applicant may include whatever enclosures, attachments, or exhibits the applicant deems appropriate. The application need not be submitted on a Federal form.
f. The applicant shall certify that the information submitted is accurate.
3. Filing office location. The application shall be filed with: PSDI Certification/Validation Program, Office of Variance Determination, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Room N3653, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210.
4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An application may be revised by an applicant at any time prior to the completion of the final staff recommendation.
b. An application may be withdrawn by an applicant, without prejudice, at any time prior to the final decision by the Assistant Secretary in paragraph I.B.8.b.
B. Review and Decision Process
1. Acceptance and field inspection. All applications submitted will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an application, OSHA may request additional information if it believes information relevant to the requirements for recognition have been omitted. OSHA may inspect the facilities of the third-party validation organization and any validating laboratory, and while there shall review any additional documentation underlying the application. A report shall be made of each field inspection.
2. Requirements for recognition. The requirements for OSHA recognition of a third-party validation organization for the PSDI standard are that the program has fulfilled the requirements of section II of this appendix for qualifications and of section III of this appendix for program requirements, and the program has identified appropriate test and analysis methods to meet the requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.
3. Preliminary approval. If, after review of the application, any additional information, and the inspection report, the applicant and any validating laboratory appear to have met the requirements for recognition, a written recommendation shall be submitted by the responsible OSHA personnel to the Assistant Secretary to approve the application with a supporting explanation.
4. Preliminary disapproval. If, after review of the application, additional information, and inspection report, the applicant does not appear to have met the requirements for recognition, the Director of the PSDI certification/validation program shall notify the applicant in writing, listing the specific requirements of this appendix which the applicant has not met, and the reasons.
5. Revision of application. After receipt of a notification of preliminary disapproval, the applicant may submit a revised application for further review by OSHA pursuant to subsection I.B. of this appendix or may request that the original application be submitted to the Assistant Secretary with a statement of reasons supplied by the applicant as to why the application should be approved.
6. Preliminary decision by Assistant Secretary. a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special designee for this purpose, will make a preliminary decision whether the applicant has met the requirements for recognition based on the completed application file and the written staff recommendation, as well as the statement of reasons by the applicant if there is a recommendation of disapproval.
b. This preliminary decision will be sent to the applicant and subsequently published in the Federal Register.
7. Public review and comment period. a. The Federal Register notice of preliminary decision will provide a period of not less than 60 calendar days for the written comments on the applicant's fulfillment of the requirements for recognition. The application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, statement of applicant's reasons, and any comments received, will be available for public inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
b. If the preliminary decision is in favor of recognition, a member of the public, or if the preliminary decision is against recognition, the applicant may request a public hearing by the close of the comment period, if it supplies detailed reasons and evidence challenging the basis of the Assistant Secretary's preliminary decision and justifying the need for a public hearing to bring out evidence which could not be effectively supplied through written submissions.
8. Final decision by Assistant Secretary —a. Without hearing. If there are no valid requests for a hearing, based on the application, supporting documents, staff recommendation, evidence and public comment, the Assistant Secretary shall issue the final decision (including reasons) of the Department of Labor on whether the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that it meets the requirements for recognition.
b. After hearing. If there is a valid request for a hearing pursuant to paragraph I.B.7.b. of this appendix, the following procedures will be used:
b. Publication. A notification of the final decision shall be published in the Federal Register.
C. Terms and Conditions of Recognition, Renewal and Revocation
1. The following terms and conditions shall be part of every recognition:
a. The recognition of any validation organization will be evidenced by a letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter will provide the specific details of the scope of the OSHA recognition as well as any conditions imposed by OSHA, including any Federal monitoring requirements.
b. The recognition of each validation organization will be valid for five years, unless terminated before or renewed after the expiration of the period. The dates of the period of recognition will be stated in the recognition letter.
c. The recognized validation organization shall continue to satisfy all the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition during the period of recognition.
2. A recognized validation organization may change a test method of the PSDI safety system certification/validation program by notifying the Assistant Secretary of the change, certifying that the revised method will be at least as effective as the prior method, and providing the supporting data upon which its conclusions are based.
3. A recognized validation organization may renew its recognition by filing a renewal request at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of this appendix, above, not less than 180 calendar days, nor more than one year, before the expiration date of its current recognition. When a recognized validation organization has filed such a renewal request, its current recognition will not expire until a final decision has been made on the request. The renewal request will be processed in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, above, except that a reinspection is not required but may be performed by OSHA. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.
4. A recognized validation organization may apply to OSHA for an expansion of its current recognition to cover other categories of PSDI certification/validation in addition to those included in the current recognition. The application for expansion will be acted upon and processed by OSHA in accordance with subsection I.B. of this appendix, subject to the possible reinspection exception. If the validation organization has been recognized for more than one year, meets the requirements for expansion of recognition, and there is no evidence that the recognized validation organization has not been following the requirements of this appendix and the letter of recognition, an expansion will normally be granted. A hearing will be granted to an objecting member of the public only if evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this appendix is supplied to OSHA.
5. A recognized validation organization may voluntarily terminate its recognition, either in its entirety or with respect to any area covered in its recognition, by giving written notice to OSHA at any time. The written notice shall indicate the termination date. A validation organization may not terminate its installation certification and recertification validation functions earlier than either one year from the date of the written notice, or the date on which another recognized validation organization is able to perform the validation of installation certification and recertification.
6.a. OSHA may revoke its recognition of a validation organization if its program either has failed to continue to satisfy the requirements of this appendix or its letter of recognition, has not been performing the validation functions required by the PSDI standard and appendix A, or has misrepresented itself in its applications. Before proposing to revoke recognition, the Agency will notify the recognized validation organization of the basis of the proposed revocation and will allow rebuttal or correction of the alleged deficiencies. If the deficiencies are not corrected, OSHA may revoke recognition, effective in 60 days, unless the validation organization requests a hearing within that time.
b. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor pursuant to the rules specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
c. The parties shall be OSHA and the recognized validation organization. The decision shall be made pursuant to the procedures specified in paragraphs I.B.8.b.
D. Provisions of OSHA Recognition
Each recognized third-party validation organization and its validating laboratories shall:
1. Allow OSHA to conduct unscheduled reviews or on-site audits of it or the validating laboratories on matters relevant to PSDI, and cooperate in the conduct of these reviews and audits;
2. Agree to terms and conditions established by OSHA in the grant of recognition on matters such as exchange of data, submission of accident reports, and assistance in studies for improving PSDI or the certification/validation process.
II. Qualifications
The third-party validation organization, the validating laboratory, and the employees of each shall meet the requirements set forth in this section of this appendix.
A. Experience of Validation Organization
1. The third-party validation organization shall have legal authority to perform certification/validation activities.
2. The validation organization shall demonstrate competence and experience in either power press design, manufacture or use, or testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses and associated control systems.
3. The validation organization shall demonstrate a capability for selecting, reviewing, and/or validating appropriate standards and test methods to be used for validating the certification of PSDI safety systems, as well as for reviewing judgements on the safety of PSDI safety systems and their conformance with the requirements of this section.
4. The validating organization may utilize the competence, experience, and capability of its employees to demonstrate this competence, experience and capability.
B. Independence of Validation Organization
1. The validation organization shall demonstrate that:
a. It is financially capable to conduct the work;
b. It is free of direct influence or control by manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, representatives of employers and employees, and employer or employee organizations; and
c. Its employees are secure from discharge resulting from pressures from manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers or employee representatives.
2. A validation organization may be considered independent even if it has ties with manufacturers, employers or employee representatives if these ties are with at least two of these three groups; it has a board of directors (or equivalent leadership responsible for the certification/validation activities) which includes representatives of the three groups; and it has a binding commitment of funding for a period of three years or more.
C. Validating Laboratory
The validation organization's laboratory (which organizationally may be a part of the third-party validation organization):
1. Shall have legal authority to perform the validation of certification;
2. Shall be free of operational control and influence of manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, employers, or employee representatives that would impair its integrity of performance; and
3. Shall not engage in the design, manufacture, sale, promotion, or use of the certified equipment.
D. Facilities and Equipment
The validation organization's validating laboratory shall have available all testing facilities and necessary test and inspection equipment relevant to the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems, installations and operations.
E. Personnel
The validation organization and the validating laboratory shall be adequately staffed by personnel who are qualified by technical training and/or experience to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.
1. The validation organization shall assign overall responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to an Administrative Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree and five years professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the areas of power press design or manufacture or a broad range of power press use, or in the areas of testing, quality control, or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.
2. The validating laboratory, if a separate organization from the validation organization, shall assign technical responsibility for the validation of PSDI certification to a Technical Director. Minimum requirements for this position are a Bachelor's degree in a technical field and five years of professional experience, at least one of which shall have been in responsible charge of a function in the area of testing, quality control or certification/validation of equipment comparable to power presses or their associated control systems.
3. If the validation organization and the validating laboratory are the same organization, the administrative and technical responsibilities may be combined in a single position, with minimum requirements as described in E.1. and 2. for the combined position.
4. The validation organization and validating laboratory shall have adequate administrative and technical staffs to conduct the validation of the certification of PSDI safety systems.
F. Certification/Validation Mark or Logo
1. The validation organization or the validating laboratory shall own a registered certification/validation mark or logo.
2. The mark or logo shall be suitable for incorporation into the label required by paragraph (h)(11)(iii) of this section.
III. Program Requirements
A. Test and Certification/Validation Procedures
1. The validation organization and/or validating laboratory shall have established written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI safety systems. The procedures shall be based on pertinent OSHA standards and test methods, or other publicly available standards and test methods generally recognized as appropriate in the field, such as national consensus standards or published standards of professional societies or trade associations.
2. The written procedures for test and certification/validation of PSDI systems, and the standards and test methods on which they are based, shall be reproducible and be available to OSHA and to the public upon request.
B. Test Reports
1. A test report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system that is tested. The test report shall be signed by a technical staff representative and the Technical Director.
2. The test report shall include the following:
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.
b. Identification and description of test methods or procedures used. (This may be through reference to published sources which describe the test methods or procedures used.)
c. Results of all tests performed.
d. All safety distance calculations.
3. A copy of the test report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to OSHA upon request.
C. Certification/Validation Reports
1. A certification/validation report shall be prepared for each PSDI safety system for which the certification is validated. The certification/validation report shall be signed by the Administrative Director and the Technical Director.
2. The certification/validation report shall include the following:
a. Name of manufacturer and catalog or model number of each subsystem or major component.
b. Results of all tests which serve as the basis for the certification.
c. All safety distance calculations.
d. Statement that the safety system conforms with all requirements of the PSDI standard and appendix A.
3. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be maintained on file at the validation organization and/or validating laboratory, and shall be available to the public upon request.
4. A copy of the certification/validation report shall be submitted to OSHA within 30 days of its completion.
D. Publications System
The validation organization shall make available upon request a list of PSDI safety systems which have been certified/validated by the program.
E. Follow-up Activities
1. The validation organization or validating laboratory shall have a follow-up system for inspecting or testing manufacturer's production of design certified/validated PSDI safety system components and subassemblies where deemed appropriate by the validation organization.
2. The validation organization shall notify the appropriate product manufacturer(s) of any reports from employers of point of operation injuries which occur while a press is operated in a PSDI mode.
F. Records
The validation organization or validating laboratory shall maintain a record of each certification/validation of a PSDI safety system, including manufacturer and/or employer certification documentation, test and working data, test report, certification/validation report, any follow-up inspections or testing, and reports of equipment failures, any reports of accidents involving the equipment, and any other pertinent information. These records shall be available for inspection by OSHA and OSHA State Plan offices.
G. Dispute Resolution Procedures
1. The validation organization shall have a reasonable written procedure for acknowledging and processing appeals or complaints from program participants (manufacturers, producers, suppliers, vendors and employers) as well as other interested parties (employees or their representatives, safety personnel, government agencies, etc.), concerning certification or validation.
2. The validation organization may charge any complainant the reasonable charge for repeating tests needed for the resolution of disputes.
Appendix D to § 1910.217—Nonmandatory Supplementary Information
This appendix provides nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines to assist in the understanding and use of 29 CFR 1910.217(h) to allow presence sensing device initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power presses. Although this appendix as such is not mandatory, it references sections and requirements which are made mandatory by other parts of the PSDI standard and appendices.
1. General
OSHA intends that PSDI continue to be prohibited where present state-of-the-art technology will not allow it to be done safely. Only part revolution type mechanical power presses are approved for PSDI. Similarly, only presses with a configuration such that a person's body cannot completely enter the bed area are approved for PSDI.
2. Brake and Clutch
Flexible steel band brakes do not possess a long-term reliability against structural failure as compared to other types of brakes, and therefore are not acceptable on presses used in the PSDI mode of operation.
Fast and consistent stopping times are important to safety for the PSDI mode of operation. Consistency of braking action is enhanced by high brake torque. The requirement in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) defines a high torque capability which should ensure fast and consistent stopping times.
Brake design parameters important to PSDI are high torque, low moment of inertia, low air volume (if pneumatic) mechanisms, non-interleaving engagement springs, and structural integrity which is enhanced by over-design. The requirement in paragrpah (h)(2)(iii) reduces the possibility of significantly increased stopping time if a spring breaks.
As an added precaution to the requirements in paragraph (h)(2)(iii), brake adjustment locking means should be secured. Where brake springs are externally accessible, lock nuts or other means may be provided to reduce the possibility of backing off of the compression nut which holds the springs in place.
3. Pneumatic Systems
Elevated clutch/brake air pressure results in longer stopping time. The requirement in paragraph (h)(3)(i)( C ) is intended to prevent degradation in stoping speed from higher air pressure. Higher pressures may be permitted, however, to increase clutch torque to free “jammed” dies, provided positive measures are provided to prevent the higher pressure at other times.
4. Flywheels and Bearings
Lubrication of bearings is considered the single greatest deterrent to their failure. The manufacturer's recommended procedures for maintenance and inspection should be closely followed.
5. Brake Monitoring
The approval of brake monitor adjustments, as required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii), is not considered a recertification, and does not necessarily involve an on-site inspection by a representative of the validation organization. It is expected that the brake monitor adjustment normally could be evaluated on the basis of the effect on the safety system certification/validation documentation retained by the validation organization.
Use of a brake monitor does not eliminate the need for periodic brake inspection and maintenance to reduce the possibility of catastrophic failures.
6. Cycle Control and Control Systems
The PSDI set-up/reset means required by paragraph (h)(6)(iv) may be initiated by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton or by the actuation of a special momentary pushbutton and the initiation of a first stroke with two hand controls.
It would normally be preferable to limit the adjustment of the time required in paragraph (h)(6)(vi) to a maximum of 15 seconds. However, where an operator must do many operations outside the press, such as lubricating, trimming, deburring, etc., a longer interval up to 30 seconds is permitted.
When a press is equipped for PSDI operation, it is recommended that the presence sensing device be active as a guarding device in other production modes. This should enhance the reliability of the device and ensure that it remains operable.
An acceptable method for interlocking supplemental guards as required by paragraph (h)(6)(xiii) would be to incorporate the supplemental guard and the PSDI presence sensing device into a hinged arrangement in which the alignment of the presence sensing device serves, in effect, as the interlock. If the supplemental guards are moved, the presence sensing device would become misaligned and the press control would be deactivated. No extra microswitches or interlocking sensors would be required.
Paragraph (h)(6)(xv) of the standard requires that the control system have provisions for an “inch” operating means; that die-setting not be done in the PSDI mode; and that production not be done in the “inch” mode. It should be noted that the sensing device would be by-passed in the “inch” mode. For that reason, the prohibitions against die-setting in the PSDI mode, and against production in the “inch” mode are cited to emphasize that “inch” operation is of reduced safety and is not compatible with PSDI or other production modes.
7. Environmental Requirements
It is the intent of paragraph (h)(7) that control components be provided with inherent design protection against operating stresses and environmental factors affecting safety and reliability.
8. Safety system
The safety system provision continues the concept of paragraph (b)(13) that the probability of two independent failures in the length of time required to make one press cycle is so remote as to be a negligible risk factor in the total array of equipment and human factors. The emphasis is on an integrated total system including all elements affecting point of operation safety.
It should be noted that this does not require redundancy for press components such as structural elements, clutch/brake mechanisms, plates, etc., for which adequate reliability may be achieved by proper design, maintenance, and inspection.
9. Safeguarding the Point of Operation
The intent of paragraph (h)(9)(iii) is to prohibit use of mirrors to “bend” a single light curtain sensing field around corners to cover more than one side of a press. This prohibition is needed to increase the reliability of the presence sensing device in initiating a stroke only when the desired work motion has been completed.
Object sensitivity describes the capability of a presence sensing device to detect an object in the sensing field, expressed as the linear measurement of the smallest interruption which can be detected at any point in the field. Minimum object sensitivity describes the largest acceptable size of the interruption in the sensing field. A minimum object sensitivity of one and one-fourth inches (31.75 mm) means that a one and one-fourth inch (31.75 mm) diameter object will be continuously detected at all locations in the sensing field.
In deriving the safety distance required in paragraph (h)(9)(v), all stopping time measurements should be made with clutch/brake air pressure regulated to the press manufacturer's recommended value for full clutch torque capability. The stopping time measurements should be made with the heaviest upper die that is planned for use in the press. If the press has a slide counterbalance system, it is important that the counterbalance be adjusted correctly for upper die weight according to the manufacturer's instructions. While the brake monitor setting is based on the stopping time it actually measures, i.e., the normal stopping time at the top of the stroke, it is important that the safety distance be computed from the longest stopping time measured at any of the indicated three downstroke stopping positions listed in the explanation of Ts. The use in the formula of twice the stopping time increase, Tm, allowed by the brake monitor for brake wear allows for greater increases in the downstroke stopping time than occur in normal stopping time at the top of the stroke.
10. Inspection and Maintenance. [Reserved]
11. Safety System Certification/Validation
Mandatory requirements for certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided in appendix A and appendix C to this standard. Nonmandatory supplementary information and guidelines relating to certification/validation of the PSDI safety system are provided to appendix B to this standard.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39 FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 40 FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 8594, Feb. 8, 1980; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 8353, 8358 Mar. 14, 1988; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 77 FR 46949, Aug. 7, 2012; 78 FR 69550, Nov. 20, 2013]
The safety requirements of this subparagraph apply to lead casts or other use of lead in the forge shop or die shop.
It shall be the responsibility of the employer to maintain all forge shop equipment in a condition which will insure continued safe operation. This responsibility includes:
| Size of timber, inches 1 | Square inches in cross section | Minimum allowable crushing strength parallel to grain, p.s.i. 2 | Maximum static load within short column range 3 | Safety factor | Maximum recommended weight of forging hammer for timber used | Maximum allowable length of timber, inches |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 × 4 | 16 | 5,000 | 80,000 | 10 | 8,000 | 44 |
| 6 × 6 | 36 | 5,000 | 180,000 | 10 | 18,000 | 66 |
| 8 × 8 | 64 | 5,000 | 320,000 | 10 | 32,000 | 88 |
| 10 × 10 | 100 | 5,000 | 500,000 | 10 | 50,000 | 100 |
| 12 × 12 | 144 | 5,000 | 720,000 | 10 | 72,000 | 132 |
| 1 Actual dimension. | ||||||
| 2 Adapted from U.S. Department of Agriculture Technical Bulletin 479. Hardwoods recommended are those whose ultimate crushing strengths in compression parallel to grain are 5,000 p.s.i. (pounds per square inch) or greater. | ||||||
| 3 Slenderness ratio formula for short columns is L/d = 11, where L = length of timber in inches and d = least dimension in inches; this ratio should not exceed 11. |
Die keys and shims shall be made from a grade of material that will not unduly crack or splinter.
All foot operated devices (i.e., treadles, pedals, bars, valves, and switches) shall be substantially and effectively protected from unintended operation.
All manually operated valves and switches shall be clearly identified and readily accessible.
Every steam or airhammer shall have a safety cylinder head to act as a cushion if the rod should break or pullout of the ram.
Steam hammers shall be provided with a quick closing emergency valve in the admission pipeline at a convenient location. This valve shall be closed and locked in the off position while the hammer is being adjusted, repaired, or serviced, or when the dies are being changed.
Steam hammers shall be provided with a means of cylinder draining, such as a self-draining arrangement or a quick-acting drain cock.
Steam or air piping shall conform to the specifications of American National Standard ANSI B31.1.0-1967, Power Piping with Addenda issued before April 28, 1971, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
When dies are being changed or maintenance is being performed on the press, the following shall be accomplished:
When dies are being changed or maintenance is being performed on the press, the following shall be accomplished:
The requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall also apply to hot trimming presses.
Cold trimming presses shall be safeguarded in accordance with § 1910.217(c).
All upsetters shall be installed so that they remain on their supporting foundations.
Upsetters shall be provided with a means for locking out the power at its entry point to the machine and rendering its cycling controls inoperable.
All manually operated valves and switches shall be clearly identified and readily accessible.
Tongs shall be of sufficient length to clear the body of the worker in case of kickback, and shall not have sharp handle ends.
When dies are being changed, maintenance performed, or any work done on the machine, the power to the upsetter shall be locked out, and the flywheel shall be at rest.
The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section shall apply to boltheading.
The provisions of paragraph (h) of this section shall apply to rivet making.
A positive-type lockout device for disconnecting the power to the shear shall be provided.
Every saw shall be provided with a guard of not less than one-eighth inch sheet metal positioned to stop flying sparks.
Conveyor power transmission equipment shall be guarded in accordance with ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and Related Equipment, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The cleaning chamber shall have doors or guards to protect operators.
Personal protective equipment shall be used in grinding operations, and equipment shall be used and maintained in accordance with ANSI B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, and with § 1910.215.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29, 1986; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
Flywheels located so that any part is seven (7) feet or less above floor or platform shall be guarded in accordance with the requirements of this subparagraph:
Cranks and connecting rods, when exposed to contact, shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section, or by a guardrail as described in paragraph (o)(5) of this section.
Tail rods or extension piston rods shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by a guardrail on sides and end, with a clearance of not less than fifteen (15) nor more than twenty (20) inches when rod is fully extended.
Vertical and inclined shafting seven (7) feet or less from floor or working platform, excepting maintenance runways, shall be enclosed with a stationary casing in accordance with requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section.
All mechanical power transmission apparatus located in basements, towers, and rooms used exclusively for power transmission equipment shall be guarded in accordance with this section, except that the requirements for safeguarding belts, pulleys, and shafting need not be complied with when the following requirements are met:
Pulleys, any parts of which are seven (7) feet or less from the floor or working platform, shall be guarded in accordance with the standards specified in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pulleys serving as balance wheels (e.g., punch presses) on which the point of contact between belt and pulley is more than six feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) from the floor or platform may be guarded with a disk covering the spokes.
Pulleys with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims, shall not be used.
Pulleys intended to operate at rim speed in excess of manufacturers normal recommendations shall be specially designed and carefully balanced for the speed at which they are to operate.
Vertical belts running over a lower pulley more than seven (7) feet above floor or platform shall be guarded at the bottom in the same manner as horizontal overhead belts, if conditions are as stated in paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) ( a ) and ( c ) of this section.
Gears shall be guarded in accordance with one of the following methods:
Paragraph (f)(1) of this section does not apply to hand-operated gears used only to adjust machine parts and which do not continue to move after hand power is removed. However, the guarding of these gears is highly recommended.
All sprocket wheels and chains shall be enclosed unless they are more than seven (7) feet above the floor or platform. Where the drive extends over other machine or working areas, protection against falling shall be provided. This subparagraph does not apply to manually operated sprockets.
When frequent oiling must be done, openings with hinged or sliding self-closing covers shall be provided. All points not readily accessible shall have oil feed tubes if lubricant is to be added while machinery is in motion.
The driving point of all friction drives when exposed to contact shall be guarded, all arm or spoke friction drives and all web friction drives with holes in the web shall be entirely enclosed, and all projecting belts on friction drives where exposed to contact shall be guarded.
All revolving collars, including split collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws or bolts used in collars shall not project beyond the largest periphery of the collar.
Shaft couplings shall be so constructed as to present no hazard from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolving surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews will, however, be permitted where they are covered with safety sleeves or where they are used parallel with the shafting and are countersunk or else do not extend beyond the flange of the coupling.
All drip cups and pans shall be securely fastened.
Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch pulleys having projecting parts, where such clutches are located seven (7) feet or less above the floor or working platform, shall be enclosed by a stationary guard constructed in accordance with this section. A “U” type guard is permissible.
In engine rooms a guardrail, preferably with toeboard, may be used instead of the guard required by paragraph (k)(1) of this section, provided such a room is occupied only by engine room attendants.
The use of belt poles as substitutes for mechanical shifters is not recommended.
Where loose pulleys or idlers are not practicable, belt perches in form of brackets, rollers, etc., shall be used to keep idle belts away from the shafts.
Belts which of necessity must be shifted by hand and belts within seven (7) feet of the floor or working platform which are not guarded in accordance with this section shall not be fastened with metal in any case, nor with any other fastening which by construction or wear will constitute an accident hazard.
The materials and dimensions specified in this paragraph shall apply to all guards, except horizontal overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain guards more than seven (7) feet above floor, or platform.
Overhead-rope and chain-drive guard construction shall conform to the rules for overhead-belt guard.
All power-transmission equipment shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 days and be kept in good working condition at all times.
Bearings shall be kept in alignment and properly adjusted.
Hangers shall be inspected to make certain that all supporting bolts and screws are tight and that supports of hanger boxes are adjusted properly.
The regular oilers shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Machinery shall be oiled when not in motion, wherever possible.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760; Nov. 7, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004]
As used in this subpart:
low-velocity type. A tool which, by means of a heavy mass hammer supplemented by a load, moves a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface, always starting the fastener at rest and in contact with the work surface. It shall be so designed that when used with any load that accurately chambers in it and that is commercially available at the time the tool is submitted for approval, it will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel.
A tool or machine which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material.
A tool that utilizes a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface. It shall be so designed that when used with any load that accurately chambers in it and that is commercially available at the time the tool is submitted for approval, it will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel.
To fit properly without the use of excess force, the case being duly supported.
An explosive-actuated fastening tool, unless otherwise indicated, and all accessories pertaining thereto.
A device or guard attached to the muzzle end of the tool, which is designed to confine flying particles.
Mounted wheels, usually 2-inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain or threaded steel mandrels.
Removal, by grinding, of cement, mortar, or other nonmetallic jointing material.
Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1, reinforced organic bonded wheels have diameter, thickness and hole size dimension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting as Type 1 wheels defined in subparagraph (10) of this paragraph.
Limitation: Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic bonded. (See § 1910.243(c)(1)(ii)( c. ))
A grinding operation where the grinding machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location to another.
Organic wheels are wheels which are bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent.
A safety guard is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation.
The term reinforced as applied to grinding wheels shall define a class of organic wheels which contain strengthening fabric or filament. The term reinforced does not cover wheels using such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs or wire or tape winding.
Type 11 flaring cup wheels have double diameter dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition in subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.
Type 11 Flaring Cup Wheels
Type 11—Flaring-cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered outward from the back. Wall thickness at the back is normally greater than at the grinding face (W).
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
Type 6 cup wheels have diameter, thickness, hole size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension.
Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange.
Type 6 Straight Cup Wheels
Type 6—Straight Cup Wheel
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole with one side straight or flat and the opposite side recessed. This type, however, differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is performed on the wall of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. Therefore, the wall dimension “W” takes precedence over the diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to describe this shape type.
Type 1 straight wheels have diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions and should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges.
Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
Type 1 Straight Wheels
Type 1—Straight Wheel
Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness and hole.
A jack is an appliance for lifting and lowering or moving horizontally a load by application of a pushing force.
The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for which it is designed to lift safely that load throughout its specified amount of travel.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978]
Each employer shall be responsible for the safe condition of tools and equipment used by employees, including tools and equipment which may be furnished by employees.
Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment.
Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a pulley. These guards shall effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact.
All cracked saws shall be removed from service.
Portable electric powered tools shall meet the electrical requirements of subpart S of this part.
A tool retainer shall be installed on each piece of utilization equipment which, without such a retainer, may eject the tool.
Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to utilization equipment shall be designed for the pressure and service to which they are subjected.
Abrasive wheels shall be used only on machine provided with safety guards as defined in paragraph (c) (1) through (4) of this section.
The requirements of this paragraph (c)(1) shall not apply to the following classes of wheels and conditions.
Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut and outer flange are exposed. Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted.
The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable machines designed for, and used with, type 6, 11, 27, and 28 abrasive wheels, cutting off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels.
Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by:
Safety guards used on machines known as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum exposure angle of 180°, and the guard shall be so located so as to be between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be deflected away from the operator. (See Figure P-4.)
Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs, having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by this paragraph.
Tools of this type shall have the characteristics outlined in ( a ) through ( h ) of this section.
Be sure the operating control(s) is in neutral before starting the engine,” or similar wording shall be clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self-propelled mowers.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 50 FR 4649, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]
The blast cleaning nozzles shall be equipped with an operating valve which must be held open manually. A support shall be provided on which the nozzle may be mounted when it is not in use.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984]
As used in this subpart:
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]
For elaboration of these basic precautions and of the special precautions of paragraph (a)(2) of this section as well as a delineation of the fire protection and prevention responsibilities of welders and cutters, their supervisors (including outside contractors) and those in management on whose property cutting and welding is to be performed, see Standard for Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, NFPA Standard 51B, 1962, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. The basic precautions for fire prevention in welding or cutting work are:
If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place.
If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards.
If the requirements stated in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii) of this section cannot be followed then welding and cutting shall not be performed.
When the nature of the work to be performed falls within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section certain additional precautions may be necessary:
Wherever there are floor openings or cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways and open or broken windows.
Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the combustible material exposed.
Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area shall be inspected by the individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations. He shall designate precautions to be followed in granting authorization to proceed preferably in the form of a written permit.
Where combustible materials such as paper clippings, wood shavings, or textile fibers are on the floor, the floor shall be swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible floors shall be kept wet, covered with damp sand, or protected by fire-resistant shields. Where floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc welding or cutting equipment shall be protected from possible shock.
Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the following situations:
Where practicable, all combustibles shall be relocated at least 35 feet (10.7 m) from the work site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be protected with flameproofed covers or otherwise shielded with metal or asbestos guards or curtains.
Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be suitably protected or shut down.
Where cutting or welding is done near walls, partitions, ceiling or roof of combustible construction, fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.
If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling or roof, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are not relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be provided.
Welding shall not be attempted on a metal partition, wall, ceiling or roof having a combustible covering nor on walls or partitions of combustible sandwich-type panel construction.
Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by conduction.
Management shall recognize its responsibility for the safe usage of cutting and welding equipment on its property and:
The Supervisor:
Cutting or welding shall be permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe. When work cannot be moved practically, as in most construction work, the area shall be made safe by removing combustibles or protecting combustibles from ignition sources.
No welding, cutting, or other hot work shall be performed on used drums, barrels, tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as to make absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present or any substances such as greases, tars, acids, or other materials which when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors. Any pipe lines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or blanked.
All hollow spaces, cavities or containers shall be vented to permit the escape of air or gases before preheating, cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is recommended.
When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine be disconnected from the power source.
In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks or improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable, the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.
A welder or helper working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways shall be protected against falling. This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety belts, life lines, or some other equally effective safeguards.
Welders shall place welding cable and other equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways.
| Welding operation | Shade No. |
|---|---|
| Shielded metal-arc welding— 1 ⁄ 16 -, 3 ⁄ 32 -, 1 ⁄ 8 -, 5 ⁄ 32 -inch electrodes | 10 |
| Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous)— 1 ⁄ 16 -, 3 ⁄ 32 -, 1 ⁄ 8 -, 5 ⁄ 32 -inch electrodes | 11 |
| Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous)— 1 ⁄ 16 -, 3 ⁄ 32 -, 1 ⁄ 8 -, 5 ⁄ 32 -inch electrodes | 12 |
| Shielded metal-arc welding: | |
| 3 ⁄ 16 -, 7 ⁄ 32 -, 1 ⁄ 4 -inch electrodes | 12 |
| 5 ⁄ 16 -, 3 ⁄ 8 -inch electrodes | 14 |
| Atomic hydrogen welding | 10-14 |
| Carbon arc welding | 14 |
| Soldering | 2 |
| Torch brazing | 3 or 4 |
| Light cutting, up to 1 inch | 3 or 4 |
| Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches | 4 or 5 |
| Heavy cutting, 6 inches and over | 5 or 6 |
| Gas welding (light) up to 1 ⁄ 8 inch | 4 or 5 |
| Gas welding (medium) 1 ⁄ 8 inch to 1 ⁄ 2 inch | 5 or 6 |
| Gas welding (heavy) 1 ⁄ 2 inch and over | 6 or 8 |
| Note: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation. |
Where the work permits, the welder should be enclosed in an individual booth painted with a finish of low reflectivity such as zinc oxide (an important factor for absorbing ultraviolet radiations) and lamp black, or shall be enclosed with noncombustible screens similarly painted. Booths and screens shall permit circulation of air at floor level. Workers or other persons adjacent to the welding areas shall be protected from the rays by noncombustible or flameproof screens or shields or shall be required to wear appropriate goggles.
Employees exposed to the hazards created by welding, cutting, or brazing operations shall be protected by personal protective equipment in accordance with the requirements of § 1910.132 of this part. Appropriate protective clothing required for any welding operation will vary with the size, nature and location of the work to be performed.
As used herein confined space is intended to mean a relatively small or restricted space such as a tank, boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment of a ship.
Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces. For ventilation requirements see paragraph (c) of this section.
When welding or cutting is being performed in any confined spaces the gas cylinders and welding machines shall be left on the outside. Before operations are started, heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked to prevent accidental movement.
Where a welder must enter a confined space through a manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided for quickly removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body that his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a preplanned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all times and be capable of putting rescue operations into effect.
When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine disconnected from the power source.
In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.
After welding operations are completed, the welder shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning other workers.
The requirements in this paragraph have been established on the basis of the following three factors in arc and gas welding which govern the amount of contamination to which welders may be exposed:
When welding must be performed in a space entirely screened on all sides, the screens shall be so arranged that no serious restriction of ventilation exists. It is desirable to have the screens so mounted that they are about 2 feet (0.61 m) above the floor unless the work is performed at so low a level that the screen must be extended nearer to the floor to protect nearby workers from the glare of welding.
Local exhaust or general ventilating systems shall be provided and arranged to keep the amount of toxic fumes, gases, or dusts below the maximum allowable concentration as specified in § 1910.1000 of this part.
The employer shall include the potentially hazardous materials employed in fluxes, coatings, coverings, and filler metals, all of which are potentially used in welding and cutting, or are released to the atmosphere during welding and cutting, in the program established to comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure that each employee has access to labels on containers of such materials and safety data sheets, and is trained in accordance with the provisions of § 1910.1200. Potentially hazardous materials shall include but not be limited to the materials itemized in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section.
Do not use in areas without adequate ventilation. See ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes published by the American Welding Society.
CAUTION
Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these fumes and gases. Use adequate ventilation. See ANSI Z49.1-1967 Safety in Welding and Cutting published by the American Welding Society.
WARNING
CONTAINS CADMIUM—POISONOUS FUMES MAY BE FORMED ON HEATING
Do not breathe fumes. Use only with adequate ventilation such as fume collectors, exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators. See ANSI Z49.1-1967. If chest pain, cough, or fever develops after use call physician immediately.
CAUTION
CONTAINS FLUORIDES
This flux when heated gives off fumes that may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
1. Avoid fumes—use only in well-ventilated spaces.
2. Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.
3. Do not take internally.
Mechanical ventilation shall be provided when welding or cutting is done on metals not covered in paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section. (For specific materials, see the ventilation requirements of paragraphs (c)(5) through (c)(12) of this section.)
Such ventilation shall be at the minimum rate of 2,000 cubic feet (57 m 3 ) per minute per welder, except where local exhaust hoods and booths as per paragraph (c)(3) of this section, or airline respirators approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, pursuant to the provisions of 30 CFR part 11, are provided. Natural ventilation is considered sufficient for welding or cutting operations where the restrictions in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section are not present.
Mechanical local exhaust ventilation may be by means of either of the following:
Freely movable hoods intended to be placed by the welder as near as practicable to the work being welded and provided with a rate of air-flow sufficient to maintain a velocity in the direction of the hood of 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute in the zone of welding when the hood is at its most remote distance from the point of welding. The rates of ventilation required to accomplish this control velocity using a 3-inch (7.6 cm) wide flanged suction opening are shown in the following table:
| Welding zone | Minimum air flow 1 cubic feet/minute | Duct diameter, inches 2 |
|---|---|---|
| 4 to 6 inches from arc or torch | 150 | 3 |
| 6 to 8 inches from arc or torch | 275 | 3 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 8 to 10 inches from arc or torch | 425 | 4 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 10 to 12 inches from arc or torch | 600 | 5 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 1 When brazing with cadmium bearing materials or when cutting on such materials increased rates of ventilation may be required. | ||
| 2 Nearest half-inch duct diameter based on 4,000 feet per minute velocity in pipe. |
A fixed enclosure with a top and not less than two sides which surround the welding or cutting operations and with a rate of airflow sufficient to maintain a velocity away from the welder of not less than 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute.
All welding and cutting operations carried on in confined spaces shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder but also to helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All air replacing that withdrawn shall be clean and respirable.
In circumstances for which it is impossible to provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose masks approved for this purpose by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 must be used.
In areas immediately hazardous to life, a full-facepiece, pressure-demand, self-contained breathing apparatus or a combination full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary, self-contained air supply approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 must be used.
Where welding operations are carried on in confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with hose masks, hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, a worker shall be stationed on the outside of such confined spaces to insure the safety of those working within.
Oxygen shall never be used for ventilation.
In confined spaces, welding or cutting involving fluxes, coverings, or other materials which contain fluorine compounds shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section. A fluorine compound is one that contains fluorine, as an element in chemical combination, not as a free gas.
The need for local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators for welding or cutting in other than confined spaces will depend upon the individual circumstances. However, experience has shown such protection to be desirable for fixed-location production welding and for all production welding on stainless steels. Where air samples taken at the welding location indicate that the fluorides liberated are below the maximum allowable concentration, such protection is not necessary.
In confined spaces welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing base or filler metals or metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
Indoors, welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing base or filler metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
In confined spaces, welding involving lead-base metals (erroneously called lead-burning) shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
Indoors, welding involving lead-base metals shall be done in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving metals containing lead, other than as an impurity, or metals coated with lead-bearing materials, including paint, must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the cutting operation must be protected by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.
Welding or cutting indoors, outdoors, or in confined spaces involving beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be done using local exhaust ventilation and airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations defined by § 1910.1000 of this part. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the welding or cutting operations shall be protected as necessary by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.
In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base metals must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators, such as fume respirators, approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.
Welding (brazing) involving cadmium-bearing filler metals shall be done using ventilation as prescribed in paragraph (c)(3) or (c)(4) of this section if the work is to be done in a confined space.
In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting operations involving metals coated with mercury-bearing materials, including paint, must be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions show that employee exposure is within the acceptable concentrations specified by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Such operations, when done outdoors, must be done using respirators approved for this purpose by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84.
In the use of cleaning materials, because of their possible toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as manufacturers instructions shall be followed.
Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no vapors from these operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any welding operation. In addition, trichloroethylene and perchlorethylene should be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the ultraviolet radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.
Oxygen cutting, using either a chemical flux or iron powder or gas-shielded arc cutting of stainless steel, shall be done using mechanical ventilation adequate to remove the fumes generated.
First-aid equipment shall be available at all times. All injuries shall be reported as soon as possible for medical attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be provided.
The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section and § 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.
Where field shop operations are involved for fabrication of fittings, river crossings, road crossings, and pumping and compressor stations the requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section and §§ 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.
When arc welding is performed in wet conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special protection against electric shock shall be supplied.
In pressure testing of pipelines, the workers and the public shall be protected against injury by the blowing out of closures or other pressure restraining devices. Also, protection shall be provided against expulsion of loose dirt that may have become trapped in the pipe.
The welded construction of transmission pipelines shall be conducted in accordance with the Standard for Welding Pipe Lines and Related Facilities, API Std. 1104—1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The connection, by welding, of branches to pipelines carrying flammable substances shall be performed in accordance with Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables, API Std. PSD No. 2201—1963, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the inspection of welded pipeline joints shall be carried out in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1—1963, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section and §§ 1910.253 and 1910.254 of this part shall be observed.
The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the inspection of welded piping joints shall be in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1—1963.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 74 FR 46357, Sept. 9, 2009; 77 FR 17777, Mar. 26, 2012]
Mixtures of fuel gases and air or oxygen may be explosive and shall be guarded against. No device or attachment facilitating or permitting mixtures of air or oxygen with flammable gases prior to consumption, except at the burner or in a standard torch, shall be allowed unless approved for the purpose.
Under no condition shall acetylene be generated, piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds) or utilized at a pressure in excess of 15 psig (103 kPa gauge pressure) or 30 psia (206 kPa absolute). The 30 psia (206 kPa absolute) limit is intended to prevent unsafe use of acetylene in pressurized chambers such as caissons, underground excavations or tunnel construction.) This requirement is not intended to apply to storage of acetylene dissolved in a suitable solvent in cylinders manufactured and maintained according to U.S. Department of Transportation requirements, or to acetylene for chemical use. The use of liquid acetylene shall be prohibited.
Only approved apparatus such as torches, regulators or pressure-reducing valves, acetylene generators, and manifolds shall be used.
Workmen in charge of the oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment, including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be instructed and judged competent by their employers for this important work before being left in charge. Rules and instructions covering the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment including generators, and oxygen or fuel-gas distribution piping systems shall be readily available.
Inside a building, cylinders, except those in actual use or attached ready for use, shall be limited to a total gas capacity of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m 3 ) or 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied petroleum gas.
Low-Pressure Manifold
Do Not Connect High-Pressure Cylinders
Maximum Pressure—250 psig (1.7 MPa)
Equipment shall be installed and used only in the service for which it is approved and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Service piping systems shall be protected by pressure relief devices set to function at not more than the design pressure of the systems and discharging upwards to a safe location.
The space around the generator shall be ample for free, unobstructed operation and maintenance and shall permit ready adjustment and charging.
Metal tools, even the so-called spark resistant type may cause ignition of an acetylene and air mixture when opening carbide containers.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 55 FR 46053, Nov. 1, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007]
Welding equipment shall be chosen for safe application to the work to be done as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
Welding equipment shall be installed safely as specified by paragraph (c) of this section.
Workmen designated to operate arc welding equipment shall have been properly instructed and qualified to operate such equipment as specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
Assurance of consideration of safety in design is obtainable by choosing apparatus complying with the Requirements for Electric Arc-Welding Apparatus, NEMA EW-1-1962, National Electrical Manufacturers Association or the Safety Standard for Transformer-Type Arc-Welding Machines, ANSI C33.2—1956, Underwriters' Laboratories, both of which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The following limits shall not be exceeded:
welding under wet conditions or warm surroundings where perspiration is a factor, the use of reliable automatic controls for reducing no load voltage is recommended to reduce the shock hazard.
reactors shall not be used to draw welding current directly from any a.c. power source having a voltage exceeding 80 volts.
Installation including power supply shall be in accordance with the requirements of subpart S of this part.
machines shall be connected with the same polarity.
machines shall be connected to the same phase of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.
Workers assigned to operate or maintain arc welding equipment shall be acquainted with the requirements of this section and with 1910.252 (a), (b), and (c) of this part.
Before starting operations all connections to the machine shall be checked to make certain they are properly made. The work lead shall be firmly attached to the work; magnetic work clamps shall be freed from adherent metal particles of spatter on contact surfaces. Coiled welding cable shall be spread out before use to avoid serious overheating and damage to insulation.
Grounding of the welding machine frame shall be checked. Special attention shall be given to safety ground connections of portable machines.
There shall be no leaks of cooling water, shielding gas or engine fuel.
It shall be determined that proper switching equipment for shutting down the machine is provided.
Printed rules and instructions covering operation of equipment supplied by the manufacturers shall be strictly followed.
Electrode holders when not in use shall be so placed that they cannot make electrical contact with persons, conducting objects, fuel or compressed gas tanks.
Cables with splices within 10 feet (3 m) of the holder shall not be used. The welder should not coil or loop welding electrode cable around parts of his body.
[55 FR 13696, Apr. 11, 1990, as amended at 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005]
All equipment shall be installed by a qualified electrician in conformance with subpart S of this part. There shall be a safety-type disconnecting switch or a circuit breaker or circuit interrupter to open each power circuit to the machine, conveniently located at or near the machine, so that the power can be shut off when the machine or its controls are to be serviced.
Ignitron tubes used in resistance welding equipment shall be equipped with a thermal protection switch.
Workmen designated to operate resistance welding equipment shall have been properly instructed and judged competent to operate such equipment.
Controls of all automatic or air and hydraulic clamps shall be arranged or guarded to prevent the operator from accidentally activating them.
All external weld initiating control circuits shall operate on low voltage, not over 120 volts, for the safety of the operators.
Stored energy or capacitor discharge type of resistance welding equipment and control panels involving high voltage (over 550 volts) shall be suitably insulated and protected by complete enclosures, all doors of which shall be provided with suitable interlocks and contacts wired into the control circuit (similar to elevator interlocks). Such interlocks or contacts shall be so designed as to effectively interrupt power and short circuit all capacitors when the door or panel is open. A manually operated switch or suitable positive device shall be installed, in addition to the mechanical interlocks or contacts, as an added safety measure assuring absolute discharge of all capacitors.
All doors and access panels of all resistance welding machines and control panels shall be kept locked and interlocked to prevent access, by unauthorized persons, to live portions of the equipment.
All press welding machine operations, where there is a possibility of the operator's fingers being under the point of operation, shall be effectively guarded by the use of a device such as an electronic eye safety circuit, two hand controls or protection similar to that prescribed for punch press operation, § 1910.217 of this part. All chains, gears, operating bus linkage, and belts shall be protected by adequate guards, in accordance with § 1910.219 of this part.
The hazard of flying sparks shall be, wherever practical, eliminated by installing a shield guard of safety glass or suitable fire-resistant plastic at the point of operation. Additional shields or curtains shall be installed as necessary to protect passing persons from flying sparks. (See § 1910.252(b)(2)(i)(C) of this part.)
All foot switches shall be guarded to prevent accidental operation of the machine.
Two or more safety emergency stop buttons shall be provided on all special multispot welding machines, including 2-post and 4-post weld presses.
On large machines, four safety pins with plugs and receptacles (one in each corner) shall be provided so that when safety pins are removed and inserted in the ram or platen, the press becomes inoperative.
Where technically practical, the secondary of all welding transformers used in multispot, projection and seam welding machines shall be grounded. This may be done by permanently grounding one side of the welding secondary current circuit. Where not technically practical, a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary or the use of a safety disconnect switch in conjunction with the welding control are acceptable alternates. Safety disconnect shall be arranged to open both sides of the line when welding current is not present.
All portable welding guns shall have suitable counterbalanced devices for supporting the guns, including cables, unless the design of the gun or fixture makes counterbalancing impractical or unnecessary.
All portable welding guns, transformers and related equipment that is suspended from overhead structures, eye beams, trolleys, etc., shall be equipped with safety chains or cables. Safety chains or cables shall be capable of supporting the total shock load in the event of failure of any component of the supporting system.
Each clevis shall be capable of supporting the total shock load of the suspended equipment in the event of trolley failure.
All initiating switches, including retraction and dual schedule switches, located on the portable welding gun shall be equipped with suitable guards capable of preventing accidental initiation through contact with fixturing, operator's clothing, etc. Initiating switch voltage shall not exceed 24 volts.
The movable holder, where it enters the gun frame, shall have sufficient clearance to prevent the shearing of fingers carelessly placed on the operating movable holder.
The secondary and case of all portable welding transformers shall be grounded. Secondary grounding may be by center tapped secondary or by a center tapped grounding reactor connected across the secondary.
Flash welding machines shall be equipped with a hood to control flying flash. In cases of high production, where materials may contain a film of oil and where toxic elements and metal fumes are given off, ventilation shall be provided in accordance with § 1910.252(c) of this part.
For the protection of the operators of nearby equipment, fire-resistant curtains or suitable shields shall be set up around the machine and in such a manner that the operators movements are not hampered.
Periodic inspection shall be made by qualified maintenance personnel, and a certification record maintained. The certification record shall include the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection and the serial number, or other identifier, for the equipment inspected. The operator shall be instructed to report any equipment defects to his supervisor and the use of the equipment shall be discontinued until safety repairs have been completed.
This section applies to establishments where pulp, paper, and paperboard are manufactured and converted. This section does not apply to logging and the transportation of logs to pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
Standards covering issues of occupational safety and health which have general application without regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in paragraphs (b) through (m) of this section and in subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph and made applicable under this section. Such standards shall be construed according to the rules set forth in § 1910.5.
Establishments subject to this section shall comply with the following standards of the American National Standards Institute, which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6:
The following standards, which are incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, shall be considered standards under this section:
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, including addenda 1969.
17, July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explosives.
Devices such as padlocks shall be provided for locking out the source of power at the main disconnect switch. Before any maintenance, inspection, cleaning, adjusting, or servicing of equipment (electrical, mechanical, or other) that requires entrance into or close contact with the machinery or equipment, the main power disconnect switch or valve, or both, controlling its source of power or flow of material, shall be locked out or blocked off with padlock, blank flange, or similar device.
Emergency lighting shall be provided wherever it is necessary for employees to remain at their machines or stations to shut down equipment in case of power failure. Emergency lighting shall be provided at stairways and passageways or aisleways used by employees for emergency exit in case of power failure. Emergency lighting shall be provided in all plant first aid and medical facilities.
Where large forklift trucks, or lift trucks with clam-jaws, are used in the yard, the operator's enclosed cab shall be provided with an escape hatch, whenever the hydraulic arm blocks escape through the side doors.
All cars shall be securely fastened in place and all employees in the clear before dumping is started.
All trucks and trailers shall be securely fastened in place and all employees in the clear before dumping is started.
Artificial illumination shall be provided when loading or unloading is performed after dark, in accordance with American National Standard A11.1—1965 (R—1970).
When barking drums are employed in the yard, the requirements of paragraph (e)(12) of this section shall apply.
Handles of wood hooks shall be locked to the shank to prevent them from rotating.
When conveyors cross walkways or roadways in the yards, the employer must erect signs reading “Danger—Overhead Conveyor” or an equivalent warning, in accordance with ANSI Z35.1-1968 or ANSI Z535.2-2011, incorporated by reference in § 1910.6.
Whenever possible, all dust, fumes, and gases incident to handling materials shall be controlled at the source, in accordance with American National Standard Z9.2—1960. Where control at the source is not possible, respirators with goggles or protective masks shall be provided, and employees shall wear them when handling alum, clay, soda ash, lime, bleach powder, sulfur, chlorine, and similar materials, and when opening rag bales.
A guard shall be provided in front of all gang and slasher saws to protect workers from wood thrown by saws. A guard shall be placed over tail sprockets.
Saws shall be stopped and power switches shall be locked out and tagged whenever it is necessary for any person to be on the slasher table.
The runway from the pond or unloading dock to the table shall be protected with standard handrails and toeboards. Inclined portions shall have cleats or equivalent nonslip surfacing that complies with subpart D of this part. Protective equipment shall be provided for persons working over water.
Where not protected by the frame of the machine, the underside of the slasher saws shall be enclosed with guards.
The requirements of paragraph (c)(15)(iv) of this section shall apply.
Each barker shall be equipped with a feed and turnover device which will make it unnecessary for the operator to hold a bolt or log by hand during the barking operation. Eye, ear, and head protection shall be provided for the operator, in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
All control devices shall be locked out and tagged when knives are being changed.
Water wheels, when directly connected to barker disks or grinders, shall be provided with speed governors, if operated with gate wide open.
In addition to motor switch, clutch, belt shifter, or other power disconnecting device, intermittent barking drums shall be equipped with a device which may be locked to prevent the drum from moving while it is being emptied or filled.
Hydraulic barkers shall be enclosed with strong baffles at the inlet and the outlet. The operator shall be protected by at least five-ply laminated glass.
The block upon or against which the wood is rested shall have a corrugated surface or other means provided that the wood will not slip. Wood to be split, and also the splitting block, shall be free of ice, snow, or chips. The operator shall be provided with eye and foot protection. A clear and unobstructed view shall be maintained between equipment and workers around the block and the workers' help area.
Power for the operation of the splitter shall be controlled by a clutch or equivalent device.
The operators of knot cleaners of the woodpecker type shall wear eye protection equipment.
The feed system to the chipper spout shall be arranged in such a way that the operator does not stand in a direct line with the chipper spout. All chipper spouts shall be enclosed to a height of at least 42 inches from the floor or operator's platform. When other protection is not sufficient, the operator shall wear a safety belt line. The safety belt line shall be fastened in such a manner as to make it impossible for the operator to fall into the throat of the chipper. Ear protection equipment shall be worn by the operator and others in the immediate area if there is any possibility that the noise level may be harmful (see § 1910.95).
Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of knives.
Conveyors and conveyor drive belts and pulleys shall be fully enclosed or, if open and within 7 feet of the floor, shall be constructed and guarded in accordance with paragraph (c)(15) of this section and American National Standards B15.1—1953 (Reaffirmed 1958) and B20.1—1957.
Measures for the control of dust shall be provided, in accordance with American National Standards Z33.1—1961, Z87.1—1968, and Z88.2—1969.
Outside elevators shall be inspected daily during winter months when ice materially affects safety. Elevators, runways, stairs, etc., for the acid tower shall be inspected monthly for defects that may occur because of exposure to acid or corrosive gases.
Where lime slaking takes place, employees shall be provided with rubber boots, rubber gloves, protective aprons, and eye protection. A deluge shower and eye fountain shall be provided to flush the skin and eyes to counteract lime or acid burns.
When lead burning is being done within tanks, fresh air shall be forced into the tanks so that fresh air will reach the face of the worker first and the direction of the current will never be from the source of the fumes toward the face of the workers. Supplied air respirators (constant-flow type) shall be provided.
Hoops of tanks shall be made of rods rather than flat strips and shall be safely maintained by scheduled inspections.
Steam or compressed-air lances, or other facilities, shall be used for breaking down the arches caused by jamming in chip lofts. No worker shall be permitted to enter a bin unless provided with a safety belt, with line attached, and an attendant stationed at the bin to summon assistance.
At least one unobstructed exit at each end of the room shall be provided on each floor of a digester building.
Gas masks must be available, and they must furnish adequate protection against sulfurous acid and chlorine gases and be inspected and repaired in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
Insofar as the processes of the sulfate and soda operations are similar to those of the sulfite processes, the standard of paragraphs (g) (1) through (17) of this section shall apply.
Exhaust ventilation shall be provided where niter cake is fed into a rotary furnace and shall be so designed and maintained as to keep the concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas below the parts per million listed in § 1910.1000.
All piping leading to tanks shall be blanked off or valved and locked or tagged. Any lines to sewers shall be blanked off to protect workers from air contaminants.
Welding on blow tanks, accumulator tanks, or any other vessels where turpentine vapor or other combustible vapor could gather shall be done only after the vessel has been completely purged of fumes. Fresh air shall be supplied workers inside of vessels.
Nonsparking tools and ground hose shall be used when pumping out the tank. The tank shall be surrounded by a berm or moat.
Bleaching engines, except the Bellmer type, shall be completely covered on the top, with the exception of one small opening large enough to allow filling, but too small to admit an employee. Platforms leading from one engine to another shall have standard guardrails that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part.
Bagged or drummed chemicals require efficient handling to prevent damage and spillage. Certain oxidizing chemicals used in bleaching pulp and also in some sanitizing work require added precautions for safety in storage and handling. In storage, these chemicals must be isolated from combustible materials and other chemicals with which they will react such as acids. They must also be kept dry, clean and uncontaminated.
Hood guards shall be provided on butting saws, in accordance with American National Standard O1.1—1954 (reaffirmed 1961).
The requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section shall apply.
Persons exposed to falling material shall wear eye, head, foot, and shin protection equipment, in accordance with American National Standards Z87.1—1968, Z88.2—1969, Z89.1—1969, and Z41.1—1967.
Pulp conveyors and conveyor drive belts and pulleys shall be fully enclosed, or if open and within 7 feet of the floor, shall be constructed and guarded in accordance with American National Standard B20.1—1957.
Paper machines shall be equipped with devices that will stop the machine quickly in an emergency. The devices shall consist of push buttons for electric motive power (or electrically operated engine stops), pull cords connected directly to the prime mover, control clutches, or other devices, interlocked with adequate braking action. The devices shall be tested periodically by making use of them when stopping the machine and shall be so located that any person working on the machine can quickly disconnect the machine from the source of power in case of emergency.
Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves shall be provided for workmen handling acids in accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) and (d)(1) of this section.
Steps of uniform rise and tread with nonslip surfaces that meet the requirements in subpart D of this part shall be provided at each press.
A removable plank shall be provided along each press, with standard guardrails installed. The planks shall have nonslip surfaces in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
If a gear bearing must be oiled while the machine is in operation, an automatic oiling device to protect the oiler shall be provided, or oil cups and grease fittings shall be placed along the walkways out of reach of hot pipes and dryer gears.
All levers carrying weights shall be constructed so that weights will not slip or fall off.
Either a permanent guardrail or apron guard or both shall be installed in front of the first dryer in each section in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
All exposed steam and hot-water pipes within 7 feet of the floor or working platform or within 15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps, or fixed ladders shall be covered with an insulating material, or guarded in such manner as to prevent contact.
Dryer gears shall be guarded excepting where the oilers' walkway is removed out of reach of the gears' nips and spokes and hot pipes in accordance with American National Standard B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958).
A feeder belt or other effective device shall be provided for starting paper through the calender stack.
Steps or ladders that comply with subpart D of this part and tread with nonslip surfaces shall be provided at each calendar stack. Handrails and hand grips complying with subpart D shall be provided at each calendar stack.
All exposed sole plates between dryers, calenders, reels, and rewinders shall have a nonskid surface.
The hazard of the nip points on all calender rolls shall be eliminated or minimized by means of an effective barrier device, or by feeding the paper into the rolls by means of a rope carrier, air jets, or hand feeding devices.
[Reserved]
Alloy steel scrapers with pullthrough blades approximately 3 by 5 inches in size shall be used to remove “scabs” from calender rolls.
Permanent lighting shall be installed in all areas where employees are required to make machine adjustments and sheet transfers in accordance with the American National Standard A11.1—1965 (R 1970).
All control panel handles and buttons shall be protected from accidental contact.
Feeder belts, carrier ropes, air carriage, or other equally effective means shall be provided for starting paper into the nip or drum-type reels.
Set screws for securing core collars to winding and unwinding shafts shall not protrude above the face of the collar. All edges of the collar with which an operator's hand comes in contact shall be beveled to remove all sharp corners.
Slitter knives shall be guarded so as to prevent accidental contact. Carriers shall be provided and used for transportation of slitter knives.
The winder shall have a guide rail to align the shaft for easy entrance into the opened rewind shaft bearing housings.
When the core shaft weighs in excess of the safe standard, a mechanical device such as a dolly shall be provided for carrying all or part of the weight when it is being removed from the set of paper and placed in the dressing brackets on the winder.
A nonskid surface shall be provided in the front vicinity of the winder to prevent accidental slipping.
Special standards regarding the use of radiation equipment shall be posted and followed as required by § 1910.96.
Rolls shall be cleaned only on the outrunning side.
Electrically or manually operated quick power disconnecting devices, interlocked with braking action, shall be provided on all operating sides of the machine within easy reach of all employees. These devices shall be tested by making use of them when stopping the machine.
The requirements of paragraph (k)(27) of this section and the American National Standard B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958) shall apply.
These shall be in accordance with American National Standard A17.1—1965.
The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this section shall apply.
A zero speed switch should be installed to prevent the guard from being raised while the roll is turning.
The requirements of paragraph (k)(22) of this section shall apply.
The nipping point located on the operator's side shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards interlocked with the drive.
The nip point and cutter knife shall be guarded by either automatic or manually operated barrier guards.
No person shall be permitted to ride on a powered hand truck unless it is so designed by the manufacturer. A limit switch shall be on operating handle—30 degrees each way from a 45-degree angle up and down.
The carton-stitching machine shall be guarded to prevent the operator from coming in contact with the stitching head.
Flag signals, derails, or other protective devices shall be used to protect men during switching operations. The blue flag policy shall be invoked according to paragraph (c)(9)(i) of this section.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 72 FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 78 FR 35566, June 13, 2013; 81 FR 83005, Nov. 18, 2016]
The requirements of this subpart for textile safety apply to the design, installation, processes, operation, and maintenance of textile machinery, equipment, and other plant facilities in all plants engaged in the manufacture and processing of textiles, except those processes used exclusively in the manufacture of synthetic fibers.
Standards covering issues of occupational safety and health which are of general application without regard to any specific industry are incorporated by reference in paragraphs of this section and made applicable to textiles. All such standards shall be construed according to the rules of construction set out in § 1910.5.
A belt shifter is a device for mechanically shifting a belt from one pulley to another.
A belt shifter lock is a device for positively locking the belt shifter in position while the machine is stopped and the belt is idling on the loose pulleys.
A calender in essence consists of a set of heavy rollers mounted on vertical side frames and arranged to pass cloth between them. Calenders may have two to ten rollers, or bowls, some of which can be heated.
An embossing calender is a calender with two or more rolls, one of which is engraved for producing figured effects of various kinds on a fabric.
Drying cans are hollow cylindrical drums mounted in a frame so they can rotate. They are heated with steam and are used to dry fabrics or yarn as it passes around the perimeter of the can.
Carbonizing means the removing of vegetable matter such as burns, straws, etc., from wool by treatment with acid, followed by heat. The undesired matter is reduced to a carbon-like form which may be removed by dusting or shaking.
A card machine consists of cylinders of various sizes—and in certain cases flats—covered with card clothing and set in relation to each other so that fibers in staple form may be separated into individual relationship. The speed of the cylinders and their direction of rotation varies. The finished product is delivered as a sliver. Cards of different types are: The revolving flat card, the roller-and-clearer card, etc.
Card clothing is the material with which many of the surfaces of a card are covered; e.g., the cylinder, doffer, etc. It consists of a thick foundation material, usually made of textile fabrics, through which are pressed many fine, closely spaced, specially bent wires.
A comber is a machine for combing fibers of cotton, wool, etc. The essential parts are a device for feeding forward a fringe of fibers at regular intervals and an arrangement of combs or pins which, at the right time, pass through the fringe. All tangled fibers, short fibers, and neps are removed and the long fibers are laid parallel.
Combing machinery is a general classification, including combers, sliver lap machines, ribbon lap machines, and gill boxes, but excluding cards.
A rotary staple cutter is a machine consisting of one or more rotary blades used for the purpose of cutting textile fibers into staple lengths.
Exposed to contact shall mean that the location of an object, material, nip point, or point of operation is such that a person is liable to come in contact with it in his normal course of employment.
A Garnett machine means any of a number of types of machines for opening hard twisted waste of wool, cotton, silk, etc. Essentially, such machines consist of a lickerin; one or more cylinders, each having a complement worker and stripper rolls; and a fancy roll and doffer. The action of such machines is somewhat like that of a wool card, but it is much more severe in that the various rolls are covered with garnett wire instead of card clothing.
A gill box is a machine used in the worsted system of manufacturing yarns. Its function is to arrange the fibers in parallel order. Essentially, it consists of a pair of feed rolls and a series of followers where the followers move at a faster surface speed and perform a combing action.
An interlock is a device that operates to prevent the operation of machine while the cover or door of the machine is open or unlocked, and which will also hold the cover or door closed and locked while the machine is in motion.
A dye jig is a machine for dyeing piece goods. The cloth, at full width, passes from a roller through the dye liquor in an open vat and is then wound on another roller. The operation is repeated until the desired shade is obtained.
A kier is a large metal vat, usually a pressure type, in which fabrics may be boiled out, bleached, etc.
A ribbon lapper is a machine used to prepare laps for feeding a cotton comb; its purpose is to provide a uniform lap in which the fibers have been straightened as much as possible.
A sliver lapper is a machine in which a number of parallel card slivers are drafted slightly, laid side by side in a compact sheet, and wound into a cylindrical package.
A loom is a machine for effecting the interlacing of two series of yarns crossing one another at right angles. The warp yarns are wound on a warp beam and pass through heddles and reed. The filling is shot across in a shuttle and settled in place by reed and lay, and the fabric is wound on a cloth beam.
A starch mangle is a mangle that is used specifically for starching cotton goods. It commonly consists of two large rolls and a shallow open vat with several immersion rolls. The vat contains the starch solution.
A water mangle is a calender having two or more rolls used for squeezing water from fabrics before drying. Water mangles also may be used in other ways during the finishing of various fabrics.
A mule is a type of spinning frame having a head stock and a carriage as its two main sections. The head stock is stationary. The carriage is movable and it carries the spindles which draft and spin the roving into the yarn. The carriage extends over the whole width of the machine and moves slowly toward and away from the head stock during the spinning operation.
Nip shall mean the point of contact between two in-running rolls.
Openers and pickers means a general classification which includes breaker pickers, intermediate pickers, finisher pickers, single process pickers, multiple process pickers, willow machines, card and picker waste cleaners, thread extractors, shredding machines, roving waste openers, shoddy pickers, bale breakers, feeders, vertical openers, lattice cleaners, horizontal cleaners, and any similar machinery equipped with either cylinders, screen section, calender section, rolls, or beaters used for the preparation of stock for further processing.
A paddler consists of a trough for a solution and two or more squeeze rolls between which cloth passes after being passed through a mordant or dye bath.
Point of operation shall mean that part of the machine where the work of cutting, shearing, squeezing, drawing, or manipulating the stock in any other way is done.
A roller printing machine is a machine consisting of a large central cylinder, or pressure bowl, around the lower part of the perimeter of which is placed a series of engraved color rollers (each having a color trough), a furnisher roller, doctor blades, etc. The machine is used for printing fabrics.
Continuous bleaching ranges are of several types and may be made for cloth in rope or open-width form. The goods, after wetting out, pass through a squeeze roll into a saturator containing a solution of caustic soda and then to an enclosed J-box. A V-shaped arrangement is attached to the front part of the J-box for uniform and rapid saturation of the cloth with steam before it is packed down in the J-box. The cloth, in a single strand rope form, passes over a guide roll down the first arm of the “V” and up the second. Steam is injected into the “V” at the upper end of the second arm so that the cloth is rapidly saturated with steam at this point. The J-box capacity is such that cloth will remain hot for a sufficient time to complete the scouring action. It then passes a series of washers with a squeeze roll in between. The cloth then passes through a second set of saturator, J-box, and washer, where it is treated with the peroxide solution. By slight modification of the form of the unit, the same process can be applied to open-width cloth.
A mercerizing range consists generally of a 3-bowl mangle, a tenter frame, and a number of boxes for washing and scouring. The whole setup is in a straight line and all parts operate continuously. The combination is used to saturate the cloth with sodium hydroxide, stretch it while saturated, and washing out most of the caustic before releasing tension.
A sanforizing machine is a machine consisting of a large steam-heated cylinder, an endless, thick, woolen felt blanket which is in close contact with the cylinder for most of its perimeter, and an electrically heated shoe which presses the cloth against the blanket while the latter is in a stretched condition as it curves around feed-in roll.
A shearing machine is a machine used in shearing cloth. Cutting action is provided by a number of steel blades spirally mounted on a roller. The roller rotates in close contact with a fixed ledger blade. There may be from one to six such rollers on a machine.
A singeing machine is a machine used particularly with cotton; it comprises of a heated roller, plate, or an open gas flame. The material is rapidly passed over the roller or the plate or through the open gas flame to remove, fuzz or hairiness on yarn or cloth by burning.
A slasher is a machine used for applying a size mixture to warp yarns. Essentially, it consists of a stand for holding section beams, a size box, one or more cylindrical dryers or an enclosed hot air dryer, and a beaming end for finding the yarn on the loom beams.
Industrial organic solvent means any organic volatile liquid or compound, or any combination of these substances which are used to dissolve or suspend a nonvolatile or slightly volatile substance for industrial utilization. It shall also apply to such substances when used as detergents or cleansing agents. It shall not apply to petroleum products when such products are used as fuel.
A tenter frame is a machine for drying cloth under tension. It essentially consists of a pair of endless traveling chains fitted with clips of fine pins and carried on tracks. The cloth is firmly held at the selvages by the two chains which diverge as they move forward so that the cloth is brought to the desired width.
A warper is any machine for preparing and arranging the yarns intended for the warp of a fabric, specifically, a beam warper.
Stopping and starting handles shall be designed to the proper length to prevent the worker's hand or fingers from striking against any revolving part, gear guard, or any other part of the machine.
All guards and other safety devices, including starting and stopping devices, shall be properly maintained.
Lighting shall conform to American National Standard A11.1—1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Identification of piping systems shall conform to American National Standard A13.1—1956, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Identification of physical hazards shall be in accordance with the requirements of § 1910.144.
All pipes carrying steam or hot water for process or servicing machinery, when exposed to contact and located within seven feet of the floor or working platform shall be covered with a heat-insulating material, or otherwise properly guarded.
When any opening or picker machinery is equipped with a beater, such beater shall be provided with metal covers which will prevent contact with the beater. Such covers shall be provided with an interlock which will prevent the cover from being raised while the machine is in motion and prevent the operation of the machine while the cover is open.
Cleanout holes within reaching distance of the fan or picker beater shall have their covers securely fastened and they shall not be opened while the machine is in motion.
The feed rolls on all opening and picking machinery shall be covered with a guard designed to prevent the operator from reaching the nip while the machinery is in operation.
All textile opener lines shall be equipped with magnetic separators, tramp iron separators, or other means for the removal of foreign ferrous material.
Cylinder and lickerins shall be completely protected and the doffers should be enclosed.
The enclosures or covers shall be kept in place while the machine is in operation, except when stripping or grinding.
On operations calling for flat strippings which are allowed to fall on the doffer cover, where such strippings are removed by hand, the doffer cover shall be kept closed and securely fastened to prevent the opening of the cover while the machine is in operation. When it becomes necessary to clean the cards while they are in motion, a long-handled brush or dust mop shall be used.
Garnett lickerins shall be enclosed.
Garnett fancy rolls shall be enclosed by covers. These shall be installed in a way that keeps worker rolls reasonably accessible for removal or adjustment.
The underside of the garnett shall be guarded by a screen mesh or other form of enclosure to prevent access.
Vacuum relief valves shall conform to the ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968.
When slashers are operated by control levers, these levers shall be connected to a horizontal bar or treadle located not more than 69 inches above the floor to control the operation from any point.
Slashers operated by pushbutton control shall have stop and start buttons located at each end of the machine, and additional buttons located on both sides of the machine, at the size box and the delivery end. If calender rolls are used, additional buttons shall be provided at both sides of the machine at points near the nips, except when slashers are equipped with an enclosed dryer.
All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
When enclosures or hoods are used over cylinder drying rolls, such enclosures or hoods shall be provided with an exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from escaping into the workroom.
Slasher kettles and cookers shall be provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent surging over. Steam-control valves shall be so located that they can be operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or steam.
When slashers are operated by control levers, these levers shall be connected to a horizontal bar or treadle located not more than 69 inches above the floor to control the operation from any point.
Slashers operated by push-button control shall have one start button at each end of the machine and stop buttons shall be located on both sides of the machines at intervals spaced not more than 6 feet on centers. Inching buttons should be installed.
The dryer enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust system which will effectively prevent wet air and steam from escaping into the workroom.
All nip guards shall comply with Table R-1.
| Distance of opening from nip point | Maximum width of opening |
|---|---|
| 0 to 1 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 4 |
| 1 1 ⁄ 2 to 2 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 8 |
| 2 1 ⁄ 2 to 3 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 ⁄ 2 |
| 3 1 ⁄ 2 to 5 1 ⁄ 2 | 5 ⁄ 8 |
| 5 1 ⁄ 2 to 6 1 ⁄ 2 | 3 ⁄ 4 |
| 6 1 ⁄ 2 to 7 1 ⁄ 2 | 7 ⁄ 8 |
| 7 1 ⁄ 2 to 8 1 ⁄ 2 | 1 1 ⁄ 4 |
| The measurements in Table R-1 are all in inches. |
Slasher kettles and cookers shall be provided with expansion chambers in the covers, or drains, to prevent surging over. Steam control valves shall be so located that they can be operated without exposing the worker to moving parts, hot surfaces, or steam.
Swiveled double-bar gates shall be installed on all warpers operating in excess of 450 yards per minute. These gates shall be so interlocked that the machine cannot be operated until the gate is in the “closed position,” except for the purpose of inching or jogging.
Closed position shall mean that the top bar of the gate shall be at least 42 inches from the floor or working platform; and the lower bar shall be at least 21 inches from the floor or working platform; and the gate shall be located 15 inches from the vertical tangent to the beam head.
A guard shall be placed ahead of the feed end and shall be so designed that it will prevent the worker's fingers from being caught in the pins of the intersecting fallers.
All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
Covers for band pulleys shall be closed when the machine is in motion.
Branches or working platforms approximately 10 inches in height and 8 inches in width should be installed along the entire running length of the machine for the worker to stand on while creeling the machine. Such benches or platforms shall be covered with an abrasive or nonslip material.
Cover guard. An interlocking cover guard shall be installed over the large calender drums and the lap spool, designed to prevent the operator from coming in contact with the nip.
Each loom shall be equipped with a guard designed to minimize the danger of the shuttle flying out of the shed.
Provisions shall be made so that every loom fixer can prevent the loom from being started while he is at work on the loom. This may be accomplished by means of a lock, the key to which is retained in the possession of the loom fixer, or by some other effective means to prevent starting the loom.
All revolving blades on shearing machines shall be guarded so that the opening between the cloth surface and the bottom of the guard will not exceed three-eighths inch.
Each valve controlling the flow of steam, injurious gases, or liquids into a J-box shall be equipped with a chain, lock, and key, so that any worker who enters the J-box can lock the valve and retain the key in his possession. Any other method which will prevent steam, injurious gases, or liquids from entering the J-box while the worker is in it will be acceptable.
The nip of all in-running rolls on open-width bleaching machine rolls shall be protected with a guard to prevent the worker from being caught at the nip. The guard shall extend across the entire length of the nip.
Each valve controlling the flow of steam, injurious gases, or liquids into a kier shall be equipped with a chain, lock, and key, so that any worker who enters the kier can lock the valve and retain the key in his possession. Any other method which will prevent steam, injurious gases, or liquids from entering the kier while the worker is in it will be acceptable.
On new installations guardrails that comply with subpart D of this part shall be provided where workers are required to plait by hand from the top of the bin so as to protect the worker from falling to a lower level.
A stopping device shall be provided at each end of the machine.
A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame between the in-running chain and the clip opener, to prevent the worker's fingers from being caught.
The nip at the in-running rolls shall conform to § 1910.264.
A stopping device shall be provided at each end of the machine.
A guard shall be installed at each end of the frame at the in-running chain and clip opener.
Oil cups shall be safely located to permit easy access.
Each dye jig shall be equipped with individual mechanical or electrical means for stopping the machine.
Roll arms on jigs shall be built to allow for extra large batches, and to prevent the center bar from being forced off, causing the batch to fall.
Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
Pressure reducing valves and pressure gages shall conform to the ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, 1968, Unfired Pressure Vessels.
If cans are not designed to prevent vacuum collapse, each can shall be equipped with one or more vacuum relief valves with openings of sufficient size to prevent the collapse of the can if vacuum occurs.
The feed rolls shall be guarded to conform to § 1910.264.
Pressure rolls shall be covered or guarded to conform to § 1910.264.
Each extractor shall be equipped with a metal cover.
Each extractor shall be equipped with an interlocking device that will prevent the cover from being opened while the basket is in motion, and also prevent the power operation of the basket while the cover is open.
Each extractor shall be equipped with a mechanically or electrically operated brake to quickly stop the basket when the power driving the basket is shut off.
Each centrifugal extractor shall be effectively secured in position on the floor or foundation so as to eliminate unnecessary vibration, and should not be operated at a speed greater than the manufacturer's rating, which shall be stamped where easily visible in letters not less than one-quarter inch in height. The maximum allowable speed shall be given in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Over-speed governor. Each engine individually driving an extractor shall be provided with an approved engine stop and speed limit governor.
Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
All nip guards for water mangle, starch mangle, back-washer (worsted yarn) crabbing machines, decating machines, shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv).
A safety trip rod, cable, or wire center cord shall be provided across the front and back of all palmer cylinders extending the length of the face of the cylinder. It shall operate readily whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands and shall be readily accessible.
Splash guards shall be installed on all rope washers unless the machine is so designed as to prevent the water or liquid from splashing the operator, the floor, or working surface.
A safety trip rod, cable or wire center cord shall be provided across the front and back of all rope washers extending the length of the face of the washer. It shall operate readily whether pushed or pulled. This safety trip shall be not more than 72 inches above the level on which the operator stands and shall be readily accessible.
Each drying tumbler, each double cylinder shaker or clothes tumbler, and each washing machine shall be equipped with an interlock device which will prevent the power operation of the inside cylinder when the outer door on the case or shell is open, and which will also prevent the outer door on the case or shell from being opened without shutting off the power.
All nip guards shall comply with the requirements of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this section.
The engraved roller gears and the large crown wheel shall be provided with a protective disc which will enclose the nips of the in-running gears. Individual discs for each nip will be acceptable.
The nip at the in-running side of the rolls shall be provided with a guard extending across the entire length of the nip and arranged to prevent the fingers of the workers from being pulled in between the rolls or between the guard and the rolls, and constructed so that the cloth can be fed into the rolls safely.
A guard shall be installed completely enclosing the cutters to prevent the hands of the operator from reaching the cutting zone.
An angle-iron-handle stop guard shall be installed at the right angle to the frame of the machine. The stop guard shall be so designed and so located that it will prevent the handle from traveling beyond the vertical position should the handle slip from the operator's hand when the pawl has been released from the teeth of the takeup gear.
Cleats shall be installed on the ends of roll benches.
The bottom of the overhead folders shall be located not less than 7 feet from the floor or working surface.
Floors in color-mixing rooms shall be constructed to drain easily.
Carboys shall be provided with inclinators, or the acid shall be withdrawn from the carboys by means of pumping without pressure in the carboy, or by means of hand operated siphons.
Means shall be provided for handling and emptying caustic soda and caustic potash containers to prevent workers from coming in contact with the caustic (see paragraph (qq) of this section).
Wherever acids or caustics are used, provision shall be made for a copious and flowing supply of fresh, clean water.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49 FR 5324, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]
The requirements of this section shall apply to the design, installation, operation and maintenance of machinery and equipment used within a bakery.
All gears shall be completely enclosed regardless of location.
Sprockets and V-belt drives located within reach from platforms or pasageways or located within 8 feet 6 inches from the floor shall be completely enclosed.
Where machinery must be lubricated while in motion, stationary lubrication fittings inside a machine shall be provided with extension piping to a point of safety so that the employee will not have to reach into any dangerous part of the machine when lubricating.
Exposed hot water and steam pipes shall be covered with insulating material wherever necessary to protect employee from contact.
The back of the divider shall have a complete cover to enclose all of the moving parts, or each individual part shall be enclosed or guarded to remove the separate hazards. The rear cover shall be provided with a limit switch in order that the machine cannot operate when this cover is open. The guard on the back shall be hinged so that it cannot be completely removed and if a catch or brace is provided for holding the cover open, it shall be designed so that it will not release due to vibrations or minor bumping whereby the cover may drop on an employee.
Mechanical feed moulders shall be provided with hoppers so designed and connected to the proofer that an employee's hands cannot get into the hopper where they will come in contact with the in-running rolls.
Hand-fed moulders shall be provided with a belt-feed device or the hopper shall be extended high enough so that the hands of the operator cannot get into the feed rolls. The top edge of such a hopper shall be well rounded to prevent injury when it is struck or bumped by the employee's hand.
There shall be a stopping device within easy reach of the operator who feeds the moulder and another stopping device within the reach of the employee taking the dough away from the moulder.
The top roll shall be protected by a heavy gage metal shield extending over the roll to go within 6 inches of the hopper bottom board. The shield may be perforated to permit observation of the dough entering the rolls.
All door locks shall be operable both from within and outside the box. Guide rails shall be installed to center the rack as it enters, passes through, and leaves the proof box.
Fermentation room doors shall have nonshatterable wire glass or plastic panels for vision through doors.
Troughs shall be mounted on antifriction bearing casters thus making it possible for the operator to move and direct the motion of the trough with a minimum of effort.
A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in vertical position when the truck is not in use.
Separate flues shall be provided, (i) for venting vapors from the frying section, and (ii) for venting products of combustion from the combustion chamber used to heat the fat.
Reversible brakes shall be provided with a guard or tripping mechanism on each side of the rolls. These guards shall be so arranged as to stop the machine or reverse the direction of the rolls so that they are outrunning if the guard is moved by contact of the operator.
Cross-roll brakes shall be provided with guards that are similar in number and equal in effectiveness to guards on hand-fed brakes.
Mechanically operated peanut cooling trucks shall have a grid-type cover over the entire top.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996]
This section applies to moving parts of equipment used in laundries and to conditions peculiar to this industry, with special reference to the point of operation of laundry machines. This section does not apply to dry-cleaning operations.
Provisions of paragraph (c)(2) (iii), (iv)( a )( 1 ), and (iv)( b ) of this section shall not apply to shakeout or conditioning tumblers where the clothes are loaded into the open end of the revolving cylinder and are automatically discharged out of the opposite end.
Markers and others handling soiled clothes shall be warned against touching the eyes, mouth, or any part of the body on which the skin has been broken by a scratch or abrasion; and they shall be cautioned not to touch or eat food until their hands have been thoroughly washed.
Employees shall be properly instructed as to the hazards of their work and be instructed in safe practices, by bulletins, printed rules, and verbal instructions.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978]
This section includes safety requirements for sawmill operations including, but not limited to, log and lumber handling, sawing, trimming, and planing; waste disposal; operation of dry kilns; finishing; shipping; storage; yard and yard equipment; and for power tools and affiliated equipment used in connection with such operations, but excluding the manufacture of plywood, cooperage, and veneer.
The term A-frame means a structure made of two independent columns fastened together at the top and separated at the bottom for stability.
The term annealing means heating then cooling to soften and render less brittle.
The term binder means a chain, cable, rope, or other approved material used for binding loads.
The term boom means logs or timbers fastened together end to end and used to contain floating logs. The term includes enclosed logs.
The term brow log means a log placed parallel to a roadway at a landing or dump to protect vehicles while loading or unloading.
The term bunk means a cross support for a load.
The term cant means a log slabbed on one or more sides.
The term carriage means a framework mounted on wheels which runs on tracks or in grooves in a direction parallel to the face of the saw, and which contains apparatus to hold a log securely and advance it towards the saw.
The term carrier means an industrial truck so designed and constructed that it straddles the load to be transported with mechanisms to pick up the load and support it during transportation.
The term chipper means a machine which cuts material into chips.
The terms chock, bunk block, and cheese block mean a wedge that prevents logs or loads from moving.
The term cold deck means a pile of logs stored for future removal.
The term crotch lines means two short lines attached to a hoisting line by a ring or shackle, the lower ends being attached to loading hooks.
The term dog means a steel tooth, one or more of which are attached to each carriage knee to hold log firmly in place on carriage.
The term drag saw means a power-driven, reciprocating crosscut saw mounted on suitable frame and used for bucking logs.
The term head block means that part of a carriage which holds the log and upon which it rests. It generally consists of base, knee, taper set, and mechanism.
The term head rig means a combination of head saw and log carriage used for the initial breakdown of logs into timbers, cants, and boards.
The term hog means a machine for cutting or grinding slabs and other coarse residue from the mill.
The term husk means a head saw framework on a circular mill.
The term industrial truck means a mobile powerdriven truck or tractor.
The term kiln tender means the operator of a kiln.
The term lift truck means an industrial truck used for lateral transportation and equipped with a power-operated lifting device, usually in the form of forks, for piling or unpiling lumber units or packages.
The term live rolls means cylinders of wood or metal mounted on horizontal axes and rotated by power, which are used to convey slabs, lumber, and other wood products.
The term loading boom means any structure projecting from a pivot point to guide a log when lifted.
The term Log deck means a platform in the sawmill on which the logs remain until needed for sawing.
The term lumber hauling truck means an industrial truck, other than a lift truck or a carrier, used for the transport of lumber.
The term log haul means a conveyor for transferring logs to mill.
The term package means a unit of lumber.
The term peavy means a stout wooden handle fitted with a spike and hook and used for rolling logs.
The term pike pole means a long pole whose end is shod with a sharp pointed spike.
The term pitman rod means connecting rod.
The term resaw means band, circular, or sash gang saws used to break down slabs, cants, or flitches into lumber.
The term running line means any moving rope as distinguished from a stationary rope such as a guyline.
The term safety factor means a calculated reduction factor which may be applied to laboratory test values to obtain safe working stresses for wooden beams and other mechanical members; ratio of breaking load to safe load.
The term saw guide means a device for steadying a circular or bandsaw.
The term setwork means a mechanism on a sawmill carriage which enables an operator to move the log into position for another cut.
The term sorting gaps means the areas on a log pond enclosed by boom sticks into which logs are sorted.
The term spreader wheel means a metal wheel that separates the board from the log in back of circular saws to prevent binding.
The term splitter means a knife-type, nonrotating spreader.
The term sticker means a strip of wood or other material used to separate layers of lumber.
The term stiff boom means the anchored, stationary boom sticks which are tied together and on which boom men work.
The term swifter is a means of tying boom sticks together to prevent them from spreading while being towed.
The term telltale means a device used to serve as a warning for overhead objects.
The term top saw means the upper of two circular saws on a head rig, both being on the same husk.
The term tramway means a way for trams, usually consisting of parallel tracks laid on wooden beams.
The term trestle means a braced framework of timbers, piles or steelwork for carrying a road or railroad over a depression.
All buildings, docks, tramways, walkways, log dumps, and other structures shall be designed, constructed and maintained so as to support the imposed load in accordance with a safety factor.
Work areas under mills shall be as evenly surfaced as local conditions permit. They shall be free from unnecessary obstructions and provided with lighting facilities in accordance with American National Standard for Industrial Lighting A11.1—1965, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Flooring in buildings and on ramps and walkways shall be constructed and installed in accordance with established principles of mechanics and sound engineering practices. They shall be of adequate strength to support the estimated or actual dead and live loads acting on them with the resultant stress not exceeding the allowable stress for the material being used.
Areas under floor openings shall, where practical, be fenced off. When this is not practical, they shall be plainly marked and telltales shall be installed to hang over these areas.
The flooring of buildings, docks, and passageways shall be kept in good repair. When a hazardous condition develops that cannot be immediately repaired, the area shall be guarded until adequate repairs are made.
Floors, footwalks, and passageways in the work area around machines or other places where a person is required to stand or walk shall be provided with effective means to minimize slipping.
Walkways, docks, and platforms shall be of sufficient width to provide adequate passage and working areas.
Walkways shall be evenly floored and kept in good repair.
Docks and runways used for the operation of lift trucks and other vehicles shall have a substantial guard or shear timber except where loading and unloading are being performed.
All elevated walks, runways, or platforms, if 4 feet or more from the floor level, shall be provided with a standard railing except on loading or unloading sides of platforms. If height exceeds 6 feet, a standard toe board also shall be provided to prevent material from rolling or falling off.
Where elevated platforms are used routinely on a daily basis, they shall be equipped with stairways or fixed ladders that comply with subpart D of this part.
Where required, walkways and stairways with standard handrails shall be provided in elevated and hazardous locations. Where such passageways are over walkways or work areas, standard toe boards shall be provided.
Stairways shall be constructed in accordance with subpart D of this part.
Stairways shall be provided with a standard handrail on at least one side or on any open side. Where stairs are more than four feet wide there shall be a standard handrail at each side, and where more than eight feet wide, a third standard handrail shall be erected in the center of the stairway.
All stairways shall be adequately lighted as prescribed in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
Doors shall not open directly on or block a flight of stairs, and shall swing in the direction of exit travel.
Exits shall be located and identified in a manner that affords ready exit from all work areas.
All swinging doors shall be provided with windows; with one window for each section of double swinging doors. Such windows shall be of shatterproof or safety glass unless otherwise protected against breakage.
Where sliding doors are used as exits, an inner door shall be cut inside each of the main doors and arranged to open outward.
Where a doorway opens upon a railroad track or upon a tramway or dock over which vehicles travel, a barrier or other warning device shall be placed to prevent workmen from stepping into moving traffic.
Ventilation shall be provided to supply adequate fresh healthful air to rooms, buildings, and work areas.
All open vats and tanks into which workmen could fall shall be guarded.
Illumination shall be provided and designed to supply adequate general and local lighting to rooms, buildings, and work areas during the time of use.
Factors upon which the adequacy and effectiveness of illumination will be judged, include the following:
Physical hazard marking shall be as specified in § 1910.144 of this part.
Means shall be provided to block, chain, or otherwise secure equipment normally supported by hydraulic pressure so as to provide for safe maintenance.
All gas piping and appliances shall be installed in accordance with the American National Standard Requirements for the Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Z21.30—1964, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Construction, operation, and maintenance of conveyors shall be in accordance with American National Standard B20.1—1957, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Spiked live rolls shall be guarded.
Tramways and trestles shall have substantial mud sills or foundations which shall be frequently inspected and kept in repair. When vehicles are operated on tramways and trestles which are used for foot passage, traffic shall be controlled or a walkway with standard handrails at the outer edge and shear timber on the inner edge shall be provided. This walkway shall be wide enough to allow adequate clearance to vehicles. When walkways cross over other thoroughfares, they shall be solidly fenced at the outer edge to a height of 42 inches over such thoroughfares.
Stationary tramways and trestles shall have a vertical clearance of 22 feet over railroad rails. When constructed over carrier docks or roads, they shall have a clearance of 6 feet above the driver's foot rest on the carrier, and in no event shall this clearance be less than 12 feet from the roadway. In existing operations where it is impractical to obtain such clearance, telltales, electric signals, signs or other precautionary measures shall be installed.
All mills containing one or more machines that create dust, shavings, chips, or slivers during a period of time equal to or greater than one-fourth of the working day, shall be equipped with a collecting system. It may be either continuous or automatic, and shall be of sufficient strength and capacity to enable it to remove such refuse from points of operation and immediate vicinities of machines and work areas.
Each woodworking machine that creates dust, shavings, chips, or slivers shall be equipped with an exhaust or conveyor system located and adjusted to remove the maximum amount of refuse from the point of operation and immediate vicinity.
Exhaust pipes shall not discharge into an unconfined outside pile if uncontrolled fire or explosion hazards are created. They may empty into settling or dust chambers, designed to prevent the dust or refuse from entering any work area. Such chambers shall be constructed and operated to minimize the danger of fire or dust explosion.
Provision for the daily removal of refuse shall be made in all operations not required to have an exhaust system or having refuse too heavy, bulky, or otherwise unsuitable to be handled by the exhaust system.
The feed system to the chipper shall be arranged so the operator does not stand in direct line with the chipper spout (hopper). The chipper spout shall be enclosed to a height of not less than 36 inches from the floor or the operator's platform. A safety belt and lifeline shall be worn by workmen when working at or near the spout unless the spout is guarded. The lifeline shall be short enough to prevent workers from falling into the chipper.
Open bins, bunkers, and hoppers whose upper edges extend less than 3 feet above working level shall be equipped with standard handrails and toe boards, or have their tops covered by a substantial grill or grating with openings small enough to prevent a man from falling through.
Where automotive or other wheeled equipment is used to move materials into bins, bunkers, and hoppers, adequate guard rails shall be installed along each side of the runway, and a substantial bumper stop provided when necessary.
Where needed, fuel houses and bins shall have a standard railed platform or walkway near the top.
Ropes, cables, slings, and chains shall be used in accordance with safe use practices recommended by the manufacturer or within safe limits recommended by the equipment manufacturer when used in conjunction with it.
No open hook shall be used in rigging to lift any load where there is hazard from relieving the tension on the hook from the load or hook catching or fouling.
Installation, inspection, maintenance, repair, and testing of ropes, cables, slings, and chains shall be done only by persons qualified to do such work.
Proper storage shall be provided for slings while not in use.
Connections, fittings, fastenings, and other parts used in connection with ropes and cables shall be of good quality and of proper size and strength, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Hooks, shackles, rings, pad eyes, and other fittings that show excessive wear or that have been bent, twisted, or otherwise damaged shall be removed from service.
Running lines of hoisting equipment located within 6 feet 6 inches of the ground or working level shall be boxed off or otherwise guarded, or the operating area shall be restricted.
There shall be not less than two full wraps of hoisting cable on the drum of cranes and hoists at all times of operation.
Drums shall have a flange at each end to prevent the cable from slipping off.
Bottom sheaves shall be protected by close fitting guards to prevent cable from jumping the sheave.
The reeving of a rope shall be so arranged as to minimize chafing or abrading while in use.
Lumber lifting devices on all stackers shall be designed and arranged so as to minimize the possibility of lumber falling from such devices.
Means shall be provided to positively block the hoisting platform when employees must go beneath the stacker or unstacker hoist.
Every manually operated control switch shall be properly identified and so located as to be readily accessible to the operator.
Main control switches shall be so designed that they can be locked in the open position.
The hoistway side openings at the top level of the stacker and unstacker shall be protected by enclosures of standard railings.
When the hoist platform or top of the load is below the working platform, the hoistway openings shall be guarded.
The lower landing area of stackers and unstackers shall be guarded by enclosures that prevent entrance to the area or pit below the hoist platform. Entrances should be protected by electrically interlocked gates which, when open, will disconnect the power and set the hoist brakes. When the interlock is not installed, other positive means of protecting the entrance shall be provided.
Every stacker and unstacker shall be inspected at frequent intervals and all defective parts shall be immediately repaired or replaced.
Safe means of entrance and exit shall be provided to permit cleaning of pits.
Where the return of trucks from unstacker to stacker is by mechanical power or gravity, adequate signs, warning devices, or barriers shall be erected to prevent entry into the hazardous area.
In stacking units of lumber, pile foundations shall be designed and arranged to support maximum loads without sinking, sagging, or permitting the piles to topple. In unit package piles, substantial bolsters or unit separators shall be placed between each package directly over the stickers.
Long units of lumber shall not be stacked upon shorter packages except where a stable pile can be made with the use of package separators.
Piles of lumber which have become unstable shall be immediately made safe, or the area into which they might fall shall be fenced or barricaded and employees prohibited from entering it.
Unit packages of lumber shall be provided with stickers as necessary to insure stability under ordinary operating conditions.
Stickers shall extend the full width of the package, shall be uniformly spaced, and shall be aligned one above the other. Stickers may be lapped with a minimum overlapping of 12 inches. Stickers shall not protrude more than 2 inches beyond the sides of the package.
The height of unit package piles shall be dependent on the dimensions of the packages and shall be such as to provide stability under normal operating conditions. Adjacent lumber piles may be tied together with separators to increase stability.
Loads shall be built and secured to insure stability in transit.
If the burner stack is not self-supporting, it shall be guyed or otherwise supported.
The conveyor runway to the burner shall be equipped with a standard handrail. If the runway crosses a roadway or thoroughfare, standard toe boards shall be provided in addition.
Vehicles shall include all mobile equipment normally used in sawmill, planing mill, storage, shipping, and yard operations.
All vehicles shall be equipped with audible warning signals and where practicable shall have spark arrestors.
All vehicles operated in the dark or in poorly lighted areas shall be equipped with head and tail lights.
All vehicles operated in areas where overhead hazards exist shall be equipped with an approved overhead guard. See American National Standard Safety Code for Powered Industrial Trucks, B56.1—1969, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Where the operator is exposed to hazard from backing the vehicle into objects, an approved platform guard shall be provided and so arranged as to not impede exit of driver from vehicle.
Vehicles powered by internal combustion engines shall not operate in buildings unless the buildings are adequately ventilated.
No vehicle shall be operated with loads exceeding its safe load capacity.
All vehicles shall be equipped with brakes capable of holding and controlling the vehicle and capacity load upon any incline or grade over which they may be operated.
Railroad tracks and other hazardous crossings shall be plainly posted.
All areas of restricted side or overhead clearance shall be plainly marked.
Pickup and unloading points and paths for lumber packages on conveyors and transfers and other areas where accurate spotting is required, shall be plainly marked and wheel stops provided where necessary.
46 CFR 160.099 and 46 CFR 160.050) with line attached and maintained to retain buoyancy shall be provided.
The applicable provisions of the Standard for Fire Protection for Motorcraft, NFPA No. 302—1968, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6, shall be complied with.
Safe access to the head rig shall be provided.
Log decks shall be provided with adequate stops, chains, or other safeguards to prevent logs from rolling down the deck onto the carriage or its runway.
A barricade or other positive stop of sufficient strength to stop any log shall be erected between the sawyer's stand and the log deck.
Loose chains from overhead canting devices or other equipment shall not be allowed to hang over the log deck in such manner as to strike employees.
Swing saws on log decks shall be equipped with a barricade and stops for protection of employees who may be on the opposite side of the log haul chute.
Where reciprocating log cutoff saws (drag saws) are provided, they shall not project into walkway or aisle.
Circular log bucking or cutoff saws shall be so located and guarded as to allow safe entrance to and exit from the building.
Where the cutoff saw partially blocks the entrance from the log haul runway, the entrance shall be guarded.
Rotary barking devices shall be so guarded as to protect employees from flying chips, bark, or other extraneous material.
If an elevating ramp or gate is used, it shall be provided with a safety chain, hook, or other means of suspension while employees are underneath.
The hazardous area around ring barkers and their conveyors shall be fenced off or posted as a prohibited area for unauthorized persons.
Hydraulic barkers shall be enclosed with strong baffles at the inlet and outlet. The operator shall be protected by adequate safety glass or equivalent.
Holddown rolls shall be installed at the infeed and outfeed sections of mechanical ring barkers to control the movement of logs.
A substantial stop or bumper with adequate shock-absorptive qualities shall be installed at each end of the carriage runway.
Rider-type carriages shall be floored to provide secure footing and a firm working platform for the block setter.
Sheaves on rope-driven carriages shall be guarded at floor line with substantial housings.
A positive means shall be provided to prevent unintended movement of the carriage. This may involve a control locking device, a carriage tie-down, or both.
A barrier shall be provided to prevent employees from entering the space necessary for travel of the carriage, with headblocks fully receded, for the full length and extreme ends of carriage runways. Warning signs shall be posted at possible entry points to this area.
For a rider-type carriage adequate overhead clear space above the carriage deck shall be provided for the full carriage runway length.
Carriage track sweeping devices shall be used to keep track rails clear of debris.
Dogging devices shall be adequate to secure logs, cants, or boards, during sawing operations.
Twin circular head saws rigs such as scrag saws shall meet the specifications for single circular head saws in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section where applicable.
Band resaws shall meet the specifications for band head saws as required by paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section.
Sash gang resaws shall meet the safety specifications of whole-log sash gang saws in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section.
Trimmer saws shall not be run at peripheral speeds in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer.
Automatic trimmer saws shall be provided with safety stops or hangers to prevent saws from dropping on table.
Live rolls and tailing devices in back of edger shall operate at a speed not less than the speed of the edger feed rolls.
Dry kilns shall be constructed upon solid foundations to prevent tracks from sagging
A passageway shall be provided to give adequate clearance on at least one side or in the center of end-piled kilns and on two sides of cross-piled kilns.
Pits shall be well ventilated, drained, and lighted, and shall be large enough to safely accommodate the kiln operator together with operating devices such as valves, dampers, damper rods, and traps.
All high-pressure steam mains located in or adjacent to an operating pit shall be covered with heat-insulating material.
A fixed ladder complying with the requirements of subpart D of this part, or other adequate means, shall be provided to permit access to the roof. Where controls and machinery are mounted on the roof, a permanent stairway with standard handrail shall be installed in accordance with the requirements in subpart D.
A means shall be provided for chocking or blocking cars.
A warm room shall be provided for kiln employees to stay in during cold weather after leaving a hot kiln.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005; 76 FR 80739, Dec. 27, 2011; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]
This paragraph contains the list of paragraphs and appendices contained in this section.
a. Table of contents
b. Scope and application
c. Definitions
d. General requirements
1. Personal protective equipment
2. First-aid kits
3. Seat belts
4. Fire extinguishers
5. Environmental conditions
6. Work areas
7. Signaling and signal equipment
8. Overhead electric lines
9. Flammable and combustible liquids
10. Explosives and blasting agents
e. Hand and portable powered tools
1. General requirements
2. Chain saws
f. Machines
1. General requirements
2. Machine operation
3. Protective structures
4. Overhead guards
5. Machine access
6. Exhaust systems
7. Brakes
8. Guarding
g. Vehicles
h. Tree harvesting
1. General requirements
2. Manual felling
3. Bucking and limbing
4. Chipping
5. Yarding
6. Loading and unloading
7. Transport
8. Storage
i. Training
j. Appendices
Appendix A—Minimum First-aid Supplies
Appendix B—Minimum First-aid Training
Appendix C—Corresponding ISO Agreements
Arch. An open-framed trailer or built-up framework used to suspend the leading ends of trees or logs when they are skidded.
Backcut (felling cut). The final cut in a felling operation.
Ballistic nylon. A nylon fabric of high tensile properties designed to provide protection from lacerations.
Buck. To cut a felled tree into logs.
Butt. The bottom of the felled part of a tree.
Cable yarding. The movement of felled trees or logs from the area where they are felled to the landing on a system composed of a cable suspended from spars and/or towers. The trees or logs may be either dragged across the ground on the cable or carried while suspended from the cable.
Chock. A block, often wedge shaped, which is used to prevent movement; e.g., a log from rolling, a wheel from turning.
Choker. A sling used to encircle the end of a log for yarding. One end is passed around the load, then through a loop eye, end fitting or other device at the other end of the sling. The end that passed through the end fitting or other device is then hooked to the lifting or pulling machine.
Danger tree. A standing tree that presents a hazard to employees due to conditions such as, but not limited to, deterioration or physical damage to the root system, trunk, stem or limbs, and the direction and lean of the tree.
Debark. To remove bark from trees or logs.
Deck. A stack of trees or logs.
Designated person. An employee who has the requisite knowledge, training and experience to perform specific duties.
Domino felling. The partial cutting of multiple trees which are left standing and then pushed over with a pusher tree.
Fell (fall). To cut down trees.
Feller (faller). An employee who fells trees.
Grounded. The placement of a component of a machine on the ground or on a device where it is firmly supported.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable enclosures, covers, casings, shields, troughs, railings, screens, mats, or platforms, or by location, to prevent injury.
Health care provider. A health care practitioner operating with the scope of his/her license, certificate, registration or legally authorized practice.
Landing. Any place where logs are laid after being yarded, and before transport from the work site.
Limbing. To cut branches off felled trees.
Lodged tree (hung tree). A tree leaning against another tree or object which prevents it from falling to the ground.
Log. A segment sawed or split from a felled tree, such as, but not limited to, a section, bolt, or tree length.
Logging operations. Operations associated with felling and moving trees and logs from the stump to the point of delivery, such as, but not limited to, marking danger trees and trees/logs to be cut to length, felling, limbing, bucking, debarking, chipping, yarding, loading, unloading, storing, and transporting machines, equipment and personnel to, from and between logging sites.
Machine. A piece of stationary or mobile equipment having a self-contained powerplant, that is operated off-road and used for the movement of material. Machines include, but are not limited to, tractors, skidders, front-end loaders, scrapers, graders, bulldozers, swing yarders, log stackers, log loaders, and mechanical felling devices, such as tree shears and feller-bunchers. Machines do not include airplanes or aircraft (e.g., helicopters).
Rated capacity. The maximum load a system, vehicle, machine or piece of equipment was designed by the manufacturer to handle.
Root wad. The ball of a tree root and dirt that is pulled from the ground when a tree is uprooted.
Serviceable condition. A state or ability of a tool, machine, vehicle or other device to operate as it was intended by the manufacturer to operate.
Skidding. The yarding of trees or logs by pulling or towing them across the ground.
Slope (grade). The increase or decrease in altitude over a horizontal distance expressed as a percentage. For example, a change of altitude of 20 feet (6 m) over a horizontal distance of 100 feet (30 m) is expressed as a 20 percent slope.
Snag. Any standing dead tree or portion thereof.
Spring pole. A tree, segment of a tree, limb, or sapling which is under stress or tension due to the pressure or weight of another object.
Tie down. Chain, cable, steel strips or fiber webbing and binders attached to a truck, trailer or other conveyance as a means to secure loads and to prevent them from shifting or moving when they are being transported.
Undercut. A notch cut in a tree to guide the direction of the tree fall and to prevent splitting or kickback.
Vehicle. A car, bus, truck, trailer or semi-trailer owned, leased or rented by the employer that is used for transportation of employees or movement of material.
Winching. The winding of cable or rope onto a spool or drum.
Yarding. The movement of logs from the place they are felled to a landing.
For each vehicle or machine (equipped with ROPS/FOPS or overhead guards), including any vehicle or machine provided by an employee, the employer shall assure:
The employer shall provide and maintain portable fire extinguishers on each machine and vehicle in accordance with the requirements of subpart L of part 1910.
All work shall terminate and each employee shall move to a place of safety when environmental conditions, such as but not limited to, electrical storms, strong winds which may affect the fall of a tree, heavy rain or snow, extreme cold, dense fog, fires, mudslides, and darkness, create a hazard for the employee in the performance of the job.
shall be tested, installed, and maintained in serviceable condition.
shall be installed, tested and maintained in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J231, January 1981, “Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS)”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
and FOPS shall meet the requirements of the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J397, April 1988, “Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Each forklift shall be equipped with an overhead guard meeting the requirements of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME B56.6-1992 (with addenda), “Safety Standard for Rough Terrain Forklift Trucks”, which is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
The transport vehicle operator shall assure that each tie down is tight before transporting the load. While enroute, the operator shall check and tighten the tie downs whenever there is reason to believe that the tie downs have loosened or the load has shifted.
Each deck shall be constructed and located so it is stable and provides each employee with enough room to safely move and work in the area.
Training shall be provided as follows:
At a minimum, training shall consist of the following elements:
The employer shall hold safety and health meetings as necessary and at least each month for each employee. Safety and health meetings may be conducted individually, in crew meetings, in larger groups, or as part of other staff meetings.
Appendices A and B of this section are mandatory. The information contained in appendix C of this section is informational and is not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from existing regulations.
Appendix A to § 1910.266—First-Aid Kits (Mandatory)
The following list sets forth the minimally acceptable number and type of first-aid supplies for first-aid kits required under paragraph (d)(2) of the logging standard. The contents of the first-aid kit listed should be adequate for small work sites, consisting of approximately two to three employees. When larger operations or multiple operations are being conducted at the same location, additional first-aid kits should be provided at the work site or additional quantities of supplies should be included in the first-aid kits:
1. Gauze pads (at least 4 × 4 inches).
2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8 × 10 inches).
3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids).
4. One package gauze roller bandage at least 2 inches wide.
5. Two triangular bandages.
6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed moistened towelettes.
7. Scissors.
8. At least one blanket.
9. Tweezers.
10. Adhesive tape.
11. Latex gloves.
12. Resuscitation equipment such as resuscitation bag, airway, or pocket mask.
13. Two elastic wraps.
14. Splint.
15. Directions for requesting emergency assistance.
Appendix B to § 1910.266—First-aid and CPR Training (Mandatory)
The following is deemed to be the minimal acceptable first-aid and CPR training program for employees engaged in logging activities.
First-aid and CPR training shall be conducted using the conventional methods of training such as lecture, demonstration, practical exercise and examination (both written and practical). The length of training must be sufficient to assure that trainees understand the concepts of first aid and can demonstrate their ability to perform the various procedures contained in the outline below.
At a minimum, first-aid and CPR training shall consist of the following:
1. The definition of first aid.
2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good Samaritan Laws).
3. Basic anatomy.
4. Patient assessment and first aid for the following:
a. Respiratory arrest.
b. Cardiac arrest.
c. Hemorrhage.
d. Lacerations/abrasions.
e. Amputations.
f. Musculoskeletal injuries.
g. Shock.
h. Eye injuries.
i. Burns.
j. Loss of consciousness.
k. Extreme temperature exposure (hypothermia/hyperthermia)
l. Paralysis
m. Poisoning.
n. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/hallucinations, etc.). Artificial ventilation.
o. Drug overdose.
5. CPR.
6. Application of dressings and slings.
7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and fractures.
8. Immobilization of injured persons.
9. Handling and transporting injured persons.
10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact with poisonous plants or animals.
Appendix C to § 1910.266—Comparable ISO Standards (Non-mandatory)
The following International Labor Organization (ISO) standards are comparable to the corresponding Society of Automotive Engineers (Standards that are referenced in this standard.)
Utilization of the ISO standards in lieu of the corresponding SAE standards should result in a machine that meets the OSHA standard.
| SAE standard | ISO standard | Subject |
|---|---|---|
| SAE J1040 | ISO 3471-1 | Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines. |
| SAE J397 | ISO 3164 | Deflection Limiting Volume—ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation. |
| SAE J231 | ISO 3449 | Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS). |
| SAE J386 | ISO 6683 | Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines. |
| SAE J185 | ISO 2897 | Access Systems for Off-Road Machines. |
[59 FR 51741, Oct. 12, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 7449, Feb. 8, 1995; 60 FR 40458, Aug. 9, 1996; 60 FR 47035, Sept. 8, 1995; 61 FR 9241, 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006; 79 FR 37190, July 1, 2014]
Lighting in telecommunication centers shall be provided in an adequate amount such that continuing work operations, routine observations, and the passage of employees can be carried out in a safe and healthful manner. Certain specific tasks in centers, such as splicing cable and the maintenance and repair of equipment frame lineups, may require a higher level of illumination. In such cases, the employer shall install permanent lighting or portable supplemental lighting to attain a higher level of illumination shall be provided as needed to permit safe performance of the required task.
Guard rails and toe boards may be omitted on distribution frame mezzanine platforms to permit access to equipment. This exemption applies only on the side or sides of the platform facing the frames and only on those portions of the platform adjacent to equipped frames.
Maintenance aisles, or wiring aisles, between equipment frame lineups are working spaces and are not an exit route for purposes of 29 CFR 1910.34.
When blastproof or power actuated doors are installed in specially designed hardsite security buildings and spaces, they shall be designed and installed so that they can be used as a means of egress in emergencies.
Highway mobile vehicles and trailers stored in garages in accordance with § 1910.110 may be equipped to carry more than one LP-gas container, but the total capacity of LP-gas containers per work vehicle stored in garages shall not exceed 100 pounds of LP-gas. All container valves shall be closed when not in use.
When using or transporting nitrogen cylinders in a horizontal position, special compartments, racks, or adequate blocking shall be provided to prevent cylinder movement. Regulators shall be removed or guarded before a cylinder is transported.
No employee, or any material or equipment, may be supported or permitted to be supported on any portion of a pole structure, platform, ladder, walkway or other elevated structure or aerial device unless the employer ensures that the support structure is first inspected by a competent person and it is determined to be adequately strong, in good working condition and properly secured in place.
| Voltage range (phase to phase, RMS) | Approach distance (inches) |
|---|---|
| 300 V and less | ( 1 ) |
| Over 300V, not over 750V | 12 |
| Over 750V not over 2 kV | 18 |
| Over 2 kV, not over 15 kV | 24 |
| Over 15 kV, not over 37 kV | 36 |
| Over 37 kV, not over 87.5 kV | 42 |
| Over 87.5 kV, not over 121 kV | 48 |
| Over 121 kV, not over 140 kV | 54 |
| 1 Avoid contact. |
Whenever natural light is insufficient to adequately illuminate the worksite, artificial illumination shall be provided to enable the employee to perform the work safely.
Employers shall provide training in the various precautions and safe practices described in this section and shall insure that employees do not engage in the activities to which this section applies until such employees have received proper training in the various precautions and safe practices required by this section. However, where the employer can demonstrate that an employee is already trained in the precautions and safe practices required by this section prior to his employment, training need not be provided to that employee in accordance with this section. Where training is required, it shall consist of on-the-job training or classroom-type training or a combination of both. The employer shall certify that employees have been trained by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on file for the duration of the employee's employment. The certification record shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health. Such training shall, where appropriate, include the following subjects:
Personal protective equipment, protective devices and special tools needed for the work of employees shall be provided and the employer shall ensure that they are used by employees. Before each day's use the employer shall ensure that these personal protective devices, tools, and equipment are carefully inspected by a competent person to ascertain that they are in good condition.
| Gloves, blankets, and other insulating equipment | Natural rubber | Synthetic rubber |
|---|---|---|
| Months | ||
| New | 12 | 18 |
| Re-issued | 9 | 15 |
A positioning system or a personal fall arrest system shall be provided and the employer shall ensure their use when work is performed at positions more than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground, on poles, and on towers, except as provided in paragraphs (n)(7) and (8) of this section. These systems shall meet the applicable requirements in subpart I of this part. The employer shall ensure that all climbing equipment is inspected before each day's use to determine that it is in safe working condition.
Ladders, step bolts, and manhole steps shall meet the applicable requirements in subpart D of this part.
Head protection meeting the requirements of ANSI Z89.2-1971, “Safety Requirements for Industrial Protective Helmets for Electrical Workers, Class B” shall be provided whenever there is exposure to possible high voltage electrical contact, and the employer shall ensure that the head protection is used by employees. ANSI Z89.2-1971 is incorporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6.
Eye protection meeting the requirements of § 1910.133 (a)(2) thru (a)(6) shall be provided and the employer shall ensure its use by employees where foreign objects may enter the eyes due to work operations such as but not limited to:
Flame-type heaters may not be used within ground tents or on platforms within aerial tents unless:
Torches may be used on aerial splicing platforms or in buckets enclosed by tents provided the tent material is constructed of fire resistant material and the torch is turned off when not in actual use. Aerial tents shall be adequately ventilated while the torch is in operation.
Nominal 120V, or less, portable generators used for providing power at work locations do not require grounding if the output circuit is completely isolated from the frame of the unit.
Vehicle-mounted utility generators used for providing nominal 240V AC or less for powering portable tools and equipment need not be grounded to earth if all of the following conditions are met:
Grounding shall be omitted when using soldering irons, guns or wire-wrap tools on telecommunications circuits.
The wiping of lead joints using melted solder, gas fueled torches, soldering irons or other appropriate heating devices, and the soldering of wires or other electrical connections do not constitute the welding, cutting and brazing described in subpart Q of this part. When operated from commercial power the metal housing of electric solder pots shall be grounded. Electric solder pots may be used with the power equipment described in paragraph (i)(5) of this section without a grounding conductor. The employer shall ensure that wiping gloves or cloths and eye protection are used in lead wiping operations. A drip pan to catch hot lead drippings shall also be provided and used.
These devices shall not be operated with any conductive part of the equipment closer to exposed energized power lines than the clearances set forth in Table R-2 of this section.
When working with poles in piles or stacks, work shall be performed from the ends of the poles as much as possible, and precautions shall be taken for the safety of employees at the other end of the pole. During pole hauling operations, all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement. Lights, reflectors and/or flags shall be displayed on the end and sides of the load as necessary. The requirements for installation, removal, or other handling of poles in pole lines are prescribed in paragraph (n) of this section which pertains to overhead lines. In the case of hoisting machinery equipped with a positive stop loadholding device, it shall be permissible for the operator to leave his position at the controls (while a load is suspended) for the sole purpose of assisting in positioning the load prior to landing it. Prior to unloading steel, poles, crossarms, and similar material, the load shall be thoroughly examined to ascertain that the load has not shifted, that binders or stakes have not broken, and that the load is not otherwise hazardous to employees.
Cable reels in storage shall be checked or otherwise restrained when there is a possibility that they might accidentally roll from position.
Electric power conductors and equipment shall be considered as energized unless the employee can visually determine that they are bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section.
Nonworking open wire communications lines shall be bonded to one of the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this section.
Acceptable grounds for protective grounding are as follows:
When attaching grounds (bonds), the first attachment shall be made to the protective ground. When removing bonds, the connection to the line or equipment shall be removed first. Insulating gloves shall be worn during these operations.
Unless temporary guys or braces are attached, the following poles shall be tested in accordance with paragraph (n)(3) of this section and determined to be safe before employees are permitted to climb them:
One of the following methods or an equivalent method shall be used for testing wood poles:
Poles or structures determined to be unsafe by test or observation may not be climbed until made safe by guying, bracing or other adequate means. Poles determined to be unsafe to climb shall, until they are made safe, be tagged in a conspicuous place to alert and warn all employees of the unsafe condition.
Where strand passes over electric power wires or railroad tracks, it shall be inspected from an elevated working position at each pole supporting the span in question. The strand may not be used to support any splicing platform, scaffold or cable car, if any of the following conditions exist:
Unless adequate railings are provided, safety straps and body belts shall be used while working on elevated work platforms such as aerial splicing platforms, pole platforms, ladder platforms and terminal balconies.
Safety straps and body belts shall be worn when working at elevated positions on poles, towers or similar structures, which do not have adequately guarded work areas.
Before installing or removing wire or cable, the pole or structure shall be guyed, braced, or otherwise supported, as necessary, to prevent failure of the pole or structure.
When cranes, derricks, or other mechanized equipment are used for setting, moving, or removing poles, all necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid contact with energized power conductors or equipment.
Climbing and working are prohibited above the level of the lowest electric power conducter on the pole (exclusive of vertical runs and street light wiring), except:
The provisions of this paragraph apply to the guarding of manholes and street openings, and to the ventilation and testing for gas in manholes and unvented vaults, where telecommunications field work is performed on or with underground lines.
While work is being performed in a manhole occupied jointly by an electric utility and a telecommunication utility, an employee with basic first aid training shall be available in the immediate vicinity to render emergency assistance as may be required. The employee whose presence is required in the immediate vicinity for the purposes of rendering emergency assistance is not to be precluded from occasionally entering a manhole to provide assistance other than in an emergency. The requirement of this paragraph (o)(3) does not preclude a qualified employee, working alone, from entering for brief periods of time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service, for the purpose of inspection, housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work if such work can be performed safely.
Ladders shall be used to enter and exit manholes exceeding 4 feet in depth.
When open flames are used in manholes, the following precautions shall be taken to protect against the accumulation of combustible gas:
Employers shall insure that employees do not look into an open waveguide which is connected to an energized source of microwave radiation.
Accessible areas associated with microwave communication systems where the electromagnetic radiation level exceeds the radiation protection guide given in § 1910.97 shall be posted as described in that section. The lower half of the warning symbol shall include the following:
Radiation in this area may exceed hazard limitations and special precautions are required. Obtain specific instruction before entering.
When an employee works in an area where the electromagnetic radiation exceeds the radiation protection guide, the employer shall institute measures that insure that the employee's exposure is not greater than that permitted by the radiation guide. Such measures shall include, but not be limited to those of an administrative or engineering nature or those involving personal protective equipment.
electrical hazards —
| Voltage range (phase to phase) (kilovolts) | Minimum working distance |
|---|---|
| 2.1 to 15.0 | 2 ft. 0 in. |
| 15.1 to 35.0 | 2 ft. 4 in. |
| 35.1 to 46.0 | 2 ft. 6 in. |
| 46.1 to 72.5 | 3 ft. 0 in. |
| 72.6 to 121.0 | 3 ft. 4 in. |
| 138.0 to 145.0 | 3 ft. 6 in. |
| 161.0 to 169.0 | 3 ft. 8 in. |
| 230.0 to 242.0 | 5 ft. 0 in. |
| 345.0 to 362.0 | 7 ft. 0 in. |
| 500.0 to 552.0 | 11 ft. 0 in. |
| 700.0 to 765.0 | 15 ft. 0 in. |
Aerial lifts include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to elevate personnel to jobsites above ground:
This consists of a platform, approximately 3 ft. × 4 ft., used to perform aerial cable work. It is furnished with fiber or synthetic ropes for supporting the platform from aerial strand, detachable guy ropes for anchoring it, and a device for raising and lowering it with a handline.
A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated canvas which is usually supported by light metal or plastic tubing. It is designed to protect employees in inclement weather while working on ladders, aerial splicing platforms, or aerial devices.
Electrically connected to a source of potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential significantly different from that of the earth in the vicinity. The term live is sometimes used in the place of the term current-carrying, where the intent is clear, to avoid repetition of the longer term.
A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or “A” frame type wood and/or metal structure intended to warn and limit access to a work area.
A physical obstruction which is intended to prevent contact with energized lines or equipment, or to prevent unauthorized access to work area.
An electrical connection from one conductive element to another for the purpose of minimizing potential differences or providing suitable conductivity for fault current or for mitigation of leakage current and electrolytic action.
A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor cable).
A protective covering applied to cables.
A conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current is intended to flow.
The conductors and their supporting or containing structures for telephone, telegraph, railroad signal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, community television antenna and other systems which are used for public or private signal or communication service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. When communications lines operate at less than 150 volts to ground, no limit is placed on the capacity of the system. Specifically designed communications cables may include communication circuits not complying with the preceding limitations, where such circuits are also used incidentally to supply power to communication equipment.
A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, suitable for carrying an electric current.
Intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the build-up of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons.
A general term which includes materials, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and similar items used as part of, or in connection with, a supply or communications installation.
That conductive body, usually earth, to which an electric potential is referenced.
A conductive connection, whether intentional or accidental, by which an electric circuit or equipment is connected to reference ground.
The connecting or establishment of a connection, whether by intention or accident, of an electric circuit or equipment to reference ground.
A small tent usually constructed of vinyl coated canvas supported by a metal or plastic frame. Its purpose is to protect employees from inclement weather while working at buried cable pedestal sites or similar locations.
A system or circuit conductor which is intentionally grounded.
A system of conductors in which at least one conductor or point (usually the middle wire, or the neutral point of transformer or generator windings) is intentionally grounded, either solidly or through a current-limiting device (not a current-interrupting device).
Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric substance (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.
That which is relied upon to insulate the conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from ground.
The sharing of a common facility, such as a manhole, trench or pole, by two or more different kinds of utilities (e.g., power and telecommunications).
A device designed to facilitate working aloft from an extension ladder. A typical device consists of a platform (approximately 9″ × 18″) hinged to a welded pipe frame. The rear edge of the platform and the bottom cross-member of the frame are equipped with latches to lock the platform to ladder rungs.
A removable seat used to facilitate work at an elevated position on rolling ladders in telecommunication centers.
A subsurface enclosure which personnel may enter and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and maintaining submersible equipment and/or cable.
A platform consisting of separate planks which are laid across steel platform supports. The ends of the supports are engaged in the manhole cable racks.
The act of communicating or signaling utilizing a frequency between 1 GH z (gigahertz) and 300 GH z inclusively.
The nominal voltage of a system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The actual voltage may vary above or below this value.
A balcony or seat used as a support for workmen at pole-mounted equipment or terminal boxes. A typical device consists of a bolted assembly of steel details and a wooden platform. Steel braces run from the pole to the underside of the balcony. A guard rail (approximately 30″ high) may be provided.
A platform intended for use by a workman in splicing and maintenance operations in an elevated position adjacent to a pole. It consists of a platform equipped at one end with a hinged chain binder for securing the platform to a pole. A brace from the pole to the underside of the platform is also provided.
Any worker who by reason of his training and experience has demonstrated his ability to safely perform his duties.
A tree worker who through related training and on-the-job experience is familar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line clearance.
Any worker regularly assigned to a line-clearance tree-trimming crew and undergoing on-the-job training who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated his ability to perform his duties safely at his level of training.
The person or organization that operates or controls the electrical conductors involved.
An installation of communication equipment under the exclusive control of an organization providing telecommunications service, that is located outdoors or in a vault, chamber, or a building space used primarily for such installations.
Rotating or nonrotating derrick structures permanently mounted on vehicles for the purpose of lifting, lowering, or positioning hardware and materials used in telecommunications work.
A truck used to transport men, tools, and material, and to serve as a traveling workshop for telecommunication installation and maintenance work. It is sometimes equipped with a boom and auxiliary equipment for setting poles, digging holes, and elevating material or men.
The furnishing of a capability to signal or communicate at a distance by means such as telephone, telegraph, police and firealarm, community antenna television, or similar system, using wire, conventional cable, coaxial cable, wave guides, microwave transmission, or other similar means.
An enclosed vault in which the only openings are access openings.
An enclosure above or below ground which personnel may enter, and which is used for the purpose of installing, operating, and/or maintaining equipment and/or cable which need not be of submersible design.
An enclosure as described in paragraph(s) (42) of this section, with provision for air changes using exhaust flue stack(s) and low level air intake(s), operating on differentials of pressure and temperature providing for air flow.
The voltage between any conductor and ground unless otherwise indicated.
The voltage between any two conductors. If one circuit is directly connected to and supplied from another circuit of higher voltage (as in the case of an autotransformer), both are considered as of the higher voltage, unless the circuit of lower voltage is effectively grounded, in which case its voltage is not determined by the circuit of higher voltage. Direct connection implies electric connection as distinguished from connection merely through electromagnetic or electrostatic induction.
[40 FR 13441, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, 1982; 52 FR 36387, Sept. 28, 1987; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, 2005; 81 FR 83006, Nov. 18, 2016]
Existing characteristics and conditions of electric lines and equipment that are related to the safety of the work to be performed shall be determined before work on or near the lines or equipment is started. Such characteristics and conditions include, but are not limited to:
The employer shall provide medical services and first aid as required in § 1910.151. In addition to the requirements of § 1910.151, the following requirements also apply:
When employees are performing work on, or associated with, exposed lines or equipment energized at 50 volts or more, persons with first-aid training shall be available as follows:
First-aid supplies required by § 1910.151(b) shall be placed in weatherproof containers if the supplies could be exposed to the weather.
The employer shall maintain each first-aid kit, shall ensure that it is readily available for use, and shall inspect it frequently enough to ensure that expended items are replaced. The employer also shall inspect each first aid kit at least once per year.
The briefing shall cover at least the following subjects: hazards associated with the job, work procedures involved, special precautions, energy-source controls, and personal protective equipment requirements.
An employee working alone need not conduct a job briefing. However, the employer shall ensure that the tasks to be performed are planned as if a briefing were required.
The provisions of paragraph (d) of this section apply to the use of lockout/tagout procedures for the control of energy sources in installations for the purpose of electric power generation, including related equipment for communication or metering. Locking and tagging procedures for the deenergizing of electric energy sources which are used exclusively for purposes of transmission and distribution are addressed by paragraph (m) of this section.
Lockout and tagout device application and removal may only be performed by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance.
Affected employees shall be notified by the employer or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied and after they are removed from the machine or equipment.
The established procedures for the application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall include the following elements and actions, and these procedures shall be performed in the following sequence:
Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employees to ensure the following:
This paragraph covers enclosed spaces that may be entered by employees. It does not apply to vented vaults if the employer makes a determination that the ventilation system is operating to protect employees before they enter the space. This paragraph applies to routine entry into enclosed spaces in lieu of the permit-space entry requirements contained in paragraphs (d) through (k) of § 1910.146. If, after the employer takes the precautions given in paragraphs (e) and (t) of this section, the hazards remaining in the enclosed space endanger the life of an entrant or could interfere with an entrant's escape from the space, then entry into the enclosed space shall meet the permit-space entry requirements of paragraphs (d) through (k) of § 1910.146.
The employer shall ensure the use of safe work practices for entry into, and work in, enclosed spaces and for rescue of employees from such spaces.
Each employee who enters an enclosed space or who serves as an attendant shall be trained in the hazards of enclosed-space entry, in enclosed-space entry procedures, and in enclosed-space rescue procedures.
Employers shall provide equipment to ensure the prompt and safe rescue of employees from the enclosed space.
Before any entrance cover to an enclosed space is removed, the employer shall determine whether it is safe to do so by checking for the presence of any atmospheric pressure or temperature differences and by evaluating whether there might be a hazardous atmosphere in the space. Any conditions making it unsafe to remove the cover shall be eliminated before the cover is removed.
When covers are removed from enclosed spaces, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other barrier designed to prevent an accidental fall through the opening and to protect employees working in the space from objects entering the space.
Employees may not enter any enclosed space while it contains a hazardous atmosphere, unless the entry conforms to the permit-required confined spaces standard in § 1910.146.
While work is being performed in the enclosed space, an attendant with first-aid training shall be immediately available outside the enclosed space to provide assistance if a hazard exists because of traffic patterns in the area of the opening used for entry. The attendant is not precluded from performing other duties outside the enclosed space if these duties do not distract the attendant from: monitoring employees within the space or ensuring that it is safe for employees to enter and exit the space.
Test instruments used to monitor atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be kept in calibration and shall have a minimum accuracy of ±10 percent.
Before an employee enters an enclosed space, the atmosphere in the enclosed space shall be tested for oxygen deficiency with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument, capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. If continuous forced-air ventilation is provided, testing is not required provided that the procedures used ensure that employees are not exposed to the hazards posed by oxygen deficiency.
Before an employee enters an enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be tested for flammable gases and vapors with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument capable of collection and immediate analysis of data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. This test shall be performed after the oxygen testing and ventilation required by paragraph (e)(9) of this section demonstrate that there is sufficient oxygen to ensure the accuracy of the test for flammability.
If continuous forced-air ventilation is used, it shall begin before entry is made and shall be maintained long enough for the employer to be able to demonstrate that a safe atmosphere exists before employees are allowed to enter the work area. The forced-air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate area where employees are present within the enclosed space and shall continue until all employees leave the enclosed space.
The air supply for the continuous forced-air ventilation shall be from a clean source and may not increase the hazards in the enclosed space.
If open flames are used in enclosed spaces, a test for flammable gases and vapors shall be made immediately before the open flame device is used and at least once per hour while the device is used in the space. Testing shall be conducted more frequently if conditions present in the enclosed space indicate that once per hour is insufficient to detect hazardous accumulations of flammable gases or vapors.
Excavation operations shall comply with subpart P of part 1926 of this chapter.
Personal protective equipment shall meet the requirements of subpart I of this part.
| Test method | Criteria for passing the test |
|---|---|
| Vertically suspend a 500-mm (19.7-inch) length of strapping supporting a 100-kg (220.5-lb) weight Use a butane or propane burner with a 76-mm (3-inch) flame. | Any flames on the positioning strap shall self extinguish. The positioning strap shall continue to support the 100-kg (220.5-lb) mass. |
| Direct the flame to an edge of the strapping at a distance of 25 mm (1 inch) | |
| Remove the flame after 5 seconds | |
| Wait for any flames on the positioning strap to stop burning |
Requirements for portable ladders contained in subpart D of this part apply in addition to the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section, except as specifically noted in paragraph (h)(2) of this section.
Portable ladders used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line work need not meet § 1910.23(c)(4) and (9). Portable ladders and platforms used on structures or conductors in conjunction with overhead line work shall meet the following requirements:
Portable metal ladders and other portable conductive ladders may not be used near exposed energized lines or equipment. However, in specialized high-voltage work, conductive ladders shall be used when the employer demonstrates that nonconductive ladders would present a greater hazard to employees than conductive ladders.
Paragraph (i)(2) of this section applies to electric equipment connected by cord and plug. Paragraph (i)(3) of this section applies to portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment. Paragraph (i)(4) of this section applies to hydraulic and pneumatic tools.
Cord- and plug-connected equipment not covered by subpart S of this part shall comply with one of the following instead of § 1910.243(a)(5):
Portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to supply cord- and plug-connected equipment covered by paragraph (i)(2) of this section shall meet the following requirements:
Live-line tool rods, tubes, and poles shall be designed and constructed to withstand the following minimum tests:
Materials handling and storage shall comply with applicable material-handling and material-storage requirements in this part, including those in subpart N of this part.
This paragraph applies to work on exposed live parts, or near enough to them to expose the employee to any hazard they present.
The employer shall ensure that employees make connections as follows:
When an employee performs work within reaching distance of exposed energized parts of equipment, the employer shall ensure that the employee removes or renders nonconductive all exposed conductive articles, such as keychains or watch chains, rings, or wrist watches or bands, unless such articles do not increase the hazards associated with contact with the energized parts.
When an employee must install or remove fuses with one or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts, or with exposed parts energized at more than 50 volts, the employer shall ensure that the employee uses tools or gloves rated for the voltage. When an employee installs or removes expulsion-type fuses with one or both terminals energized at more than 300 volts, the employer shall ensure that the employee wears eye protection meeting the requirements of subpart I of this part, uses a tool rated for the voltage, and is clear of the exhaust path of the fuse barrel.
The requirements of this section that pertain to the hazards of exposed live parts also apply when an employee performs work in proximity to covered (noninsulated) wires.
Non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment or devices, such as transformer cases and circuit-breaker housings, shall be treated as energized at the highest voltage to which these parts are exposed, unless the employer inspects the installation and determines that these parts are grounded before employees begin performing the work.
| For phase-to-phase system voltages of 50 V to 300 V: 1 | |
|---|---|
| MAD = avoid contact | |
| For phase-to-phase system voltages of 301 V to 5 kV: 1 | |
| MAD = M + D, where | |
| D = 0.02 m | the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. |
| M = 0.31 m for voltages up to 750 V and 0.61 m otherwise | the inadvertent movement factor. |
| For phase-to-phase system voltages of 5.1 kV to 72.5 kV: 1 4 | |
| MAD = M + AD, where | |
| M = 0.61 m | the inadvertent movement factor. |
| A = the applicable value from Table R-5 | the altitude correction factor. |
| D = the value from Table R-4 corresponding to the voltage and exposure or the value of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance calculated using the method provided in appendix B to this section | the electrical component of the minimum approach distance. |
| For phase-to-phase system voltages of more than 72.5 kV, nominal: 2 4 | |
| MAD = 0.3048( C + a ) V L-G TA + M | |
| C = 0.01 for phase-to-ground exposures that the employer can demonstrate consist only of air across the approach distance (gap), | |
| 0.01 for phase-to-phase exposures if the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap, or | |
| 0.011 otherwise | |
| V L-G = phase-to-ground rms voltage, in kV | |
| T = maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage; for phase-to-ground exposures, T equals T L-G , the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, determined by the employer under paragraph (l)(3)(ii) of this section; for phase-to-phase exposures, T equals 1.35 T L-G + 0.45 | |
| A = altitude correction factor from Table R-5 | |
| M = 0.31 m, the inadvertent movement factor | |
| a = saturation factor, as follows: |
| Phase-to-Ground Exposures | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| V Peak = T L-G V L-G √2 | 635 kV or less | 635.1 to 915 kV | 915.1 to 1,050 kV | More than 1,050 kV | |
| a | 0 | ( V Peak -635)/140,000 | ( V Peak -645)/135,000 | ( V Peak -675)/125,000 | |
| Phase-to-Phase Exposures 3 | |||||
| V Peak = (1.35 T L-G + 0.45) V L-G √2 | 630 kV or less | 630.1 to 848 kV | 848.1 to 1,131 kV | 1,131.1 to 1,485 kV | More than 1,485 kV |
| a | 0 | ( V Peak -630)/155,000 | ( V Peak -633.6)/152,207 | ( V Peak -628)/153,846 | ( V Peak -350.5)/203,666 |
| 1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table R-6. If the worksite is at an elevation of more than 900 meters (3,000 feet), see footnote 1 to Table R-6. | |||||
| 2 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table R-7, except that the employer may not use the minimum approach distances in Table R-7 for phase-to-phase exposures if an insulated tool spans the gap or if any large conductive object is in the gap. If the worksite is at an elevation of more than 900 meters (3,000 feet), see footnote 1 to Table R-7. Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 14 through Table 21 in appendix B to this section, which calculated MAD for various values of T, provided the employer follows the notes to those tables. | |||||
| 3 Use the equations for phase-to-ground exposures (with V Peak for phase-to-phase exposures) unless the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. | |||||
| 4 Until March 31, 2015, employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 6 through Table 13 in Appendix B to this section. |
| Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure |
|---|---|---|
| D (m) | D (m) | |
| 5.1 to 15.0 | 0.04 | 0.07 |
| 15.1 to 36.0 | 0.16 | 0.28 |
| 36.1 to 46.0 | 0.23 | 0.37 |
| 46.1 to 72.5 | 0.39 | 0.59 |
| Altitude above sea level (m) | A |
|---|---|
| 0 to 900 | 1.00 |
| 901 to 1,200 | 1.02 |
| 1,201 to 1,500 | 1.05 |
| 1,501 to 1,800 | 1.08 |
| 1,801 to 2,100 | 1.11 |
| 2,101 to 2,400 | 1.14 |
| 2,401 to 2,700 | 1.17 |
| 2,701 to 3,000 | 1.20 |
| 3,001 to 3,600 | 1.25 |
| 3,601 to 4,200 | 1.30 |
| 4,201 to 4,800 | 1.35 |
| 4,801 to 5,400 | 1.39 |
| 5,401 to 6,000 | 1.44 |
| Nominal voltage (kV) phase-to-phase | Distance | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | |||
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 0.050 to 0.300 2 | Avoid Contact | Avoid Contact | ||
| 0.301 to 0.750 2 | 0.33 | 1.09 | 0.33 | 1.09 |
| 0.751 to 5.0 | 0.63 | 2.07 | 0.63 | 2.07 |
| 5.1 to 15.0 | 0.65 | 2.14 | 0.68 | 2.24 |
| 15.1 to 36.0 | 0.77 | 2.53 | 0.89 | 2.92 |
| 36.1 to 46.0 | 0.84 | 2.76 | 0.98 | 3.22 |
| 46.1 to 72.5 | 1.00 | 3.29 | 1.20 | 3.94 |
| 1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work. | ||||
| 2 For single-phase systems, use voltage-to-ground. |
| Voltage range phase to phase (kV) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 72.6 to 121.0 | 1.13 | 3.71 | 1.42 | 4.66 |
| 121.1 to 145.0 | 1.30 | 4.27 | 1.64 | 5.38 |
| 145.1 to 169.0 | 1.46 | 4.79 | 1.94 | 6.36 |
| 169.1 to 242.0 | 2.01 | 6.59 | 3.08 | 10.10 |
| 242.1 to 362.0 | 3.41 | 11.19 | 5.52 | 18.11 |
| 362.1 to 420.0 | 4.25 | 13.94 | 6.81 | 22.34 |
| 420.1 to 550.0 | 5.07 | 16.63 | 8.24 | 27.03 |
| 550.1 to 800.0 | 6.88 | 22.57 | 11.38 | 37.34 |
| 1 Employers may use the minimum approach distances in this table provided the worksite is at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work. | ||||
| 2 Employers may use the phase-to-phase minimum approach distances in this table provided that no insulated tool spans the gap and no large conductive object is in the gap. | ||||
| 3 The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges. |
| Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage | Distance (m) maximum line-to-ground voltage (kV) | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 250 | 400 | 500 | 600 | 750 | |
| 1.5 or less | 1.12 | 1.60 | 2.06 | 2.62 | 3.61 |
| 1.6 | 1.17 | 1.69 | 2.24 | 2.86 | 3.98 |
| 1.7 | 1.23 | 1.82 | 2.42 | 3.12 | 4.37 |
| 1.8 | 1.28 | 1.95 | 2.62 | 3.39 | 4.79 |
| 1 The distances specified in this table are for air, bare-hand, and live-line tool conditions. If employees will be working at elevations greater than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above mean sea level, the employer shall determine minimum approach distances by multiplying the distances in this table by the correction factor in Table R-5 corresponding to the altitude of the work. |
| Voltage range (kV) | Type of current (ac or dc) | Assumed maximum per-unit transient overvoltage |
|---|---|---|
| 72.6 to 420.0 | ac | 3.5 |
| 420.1 to 550.0 | ac | 3.0 |
| 550.1 to 800.0 | ac | 2.5 |
| 250 to 750 | dc | 1.8 |
Paragraph (m) of this section applies to the deenergizing of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting employees. See paragraph (d) of this section for requirements on the control of hazardous energy sources used in the generation of electric energy. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been deenergized under procedures other than those required by paragraph (d) or (m) of this section, as applicable, shall be treated as energized.
Paragraph (n) of this section applies to grounding of generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting employees. Paragraph (n)(4) of this section also applies to protective grounding of other equipment as required elsewhere in this section.
For any employee to work transmission and distribution lines or equipment as deenergized, the employer shall ensure that the lines or equipment are deenergized under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section and shall ensure proper grounding of the lines or equipment as specified in paragraphs (n)(3) through (n)(8) of this section. However, if the employer can demonstrate that installation of a ground is impracticable or that the conditions resulting from the installation of a ground would present greater hazards to employees than working without grounds, the lines and equipment may be treated as deenergized provided that the employer establishes that all of the following conditions apply:
Temporary protective grounds shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent each employee from being exposed to hazardous differences in electric potential.
The employer shall ensure that, unless a previously installed ground is present, employees test lines and equipment and verify the absence of nominal voltage before employees install any ground on those lines or that equipment.
The employer shall ensure that, when an employee performs work on a cable at a location remote from the cable terminal, the cable is not grounded at the cable terminal if there is a possibility of hazardous transfer of potential should a fault occur.
The employer may permit employees to remove grounds temporarily during tests. During the test procedure, the employer shall ensure that each employee uses insulating equipment, shall isolate each employee from any hazards involved, and shall implement any additional measures necessary to protect each exposed employee in case the previously grounded lines and equipment become energized.
Paragraph (o) of this section provides for safe work practices for high-voltage and high-power testing performed in laboratories, shops, and substations, and in the field and on electric transmission and distribution lines and equipment. It applies only to testing involving interim measurements using high voltage, high power, or combinations of high voltage and high power, and not to testing involving continuous measurements as in routine metering, relaying, and normal line work.
Mechanical equipment used to lift or move lines or other material shall be used within its maximum load rating and other design limitations for the conditions under which the mechanical equipment is being used.
This paragraph provides additional requirements for work performed on or near overhead lines and equipment and for live-line barehand work.
The following provisions apply to the installation and removal of overhead conductors or cable (overhead lines).
In addition to other applicable provisions contained in this section, the following requirements apply to live-line barehand work:
The following requirements apply to work performed on towers or other structures that support overhead lines.
This paragraph provides additional requirements for line-clearance tree trimming and for equipment used in this type of work.
This paragraph does not apply to qualified employees.
Gasoline-engine power saw operations shall meet the requirements of § 1910.266(e) and the following:
Each employee shall be tied in with a climbing rope and safety saddle when the employee is working above the ground in a tree, unless he or she is ascending into the tree.
The employer shall ensure that employees perform power-line carrier work, including work on equipment used for coupling carrier current to power line conductors, in accordance with the requirements of this section pertaining to work on energized lines.
This paragraph provides additional requirements for work on underground electrical installations.
The employer shall ensure that employees use a ladder or other climbing device to enter and exit a manhole or subsurface vault exceeding 1.22 meters (4 feet) in depth. No employee may climb into or out of a manhole or vault by stepping on cables or hangers.
The employer shall ensure that, if employees use duct rods, the employees install the duct rods in the direction presenting the least hazard to employees. The employer shall station an employee at the far end of the duct line being rodded to ensure that the employees maintain the required minimum approach distances.
When multiple cables are present in a work area, the employer shall identify the cable to be worked by electrical means, unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance or location or by other readily apparent means of identification. The employer shall protect cables other than the one being worked from damage.
Except when paragraph (t)(7)(ii) of this section permits employees to perform work that could cause a fault in an energized cable in a manhole or vault, the employer shall ensure that employees inspect energized cables to be moved for abnormalities.
When employees perform work on buried cable or on cable in a manhole or vault, the employer shall maintain metallic-sheath continuity, or the cable sheath shall be treated as energized.
This paragraph provides additional requirements for substations and for work performed in them.
The employer shall provide and maintain sufficient access and working space about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment by employees.
The employer shall ensure that, when employees remove or insert draw-out-type circuit breakers, the breaker is in the open position. The employer shall also render the control circuit inoperable if the design of the equipment permits.
Conductive fences around substations shall be grounded. When a substation fence is expanded or a section is removed, fence sections shall be isolated, grounded, or bonded as necessary to protect employees from hazardous differences in electric potential.
This paragraph provides additional requirements and related work practices for power generating plants.
Before exciter or generator brushes are changed while the generator is in service, the exciter or generator field shall be checked to determine whether a ground condition exists. The brushes may not be changed while the generator is energized if a ground condition exists.
The employer shall provide and maintain sufficient access and working space about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment by employees.
The following requirements apply to work in water and steam spaces associated with boilers:
The following requirements apply to chemical cleaning of boilers and pressure vessels:
Additionally, the number of personnel shall be limited to those necessary to accomplish the task safely.
Employees working on or close to water gates, valves, intakes, forebays, flumes, or other locations where increased or decreased water flow or levels may pose a significant hazard shall be warned and shall vacate such dangerous areas before water flow changes are made.
The following additional requirements apply to work on capacitors and on lines connected to capacitors.
The employer shall ensure that employees do not open the secondary of a current transformer while the transformer is energized. If the employer cannot deenergize the primary of the current transformer before employees perform work on an instrument, a relay, or other section of a current transformer secondary circuit, the employer shall bridge the circuit so that the current transformer secondary does not experience an open-circuit condition.
The employer shall provide sufficient illumination to enable the employee to perform the work safely.
When there is a possibility of voltage backfeed from sources of cogeneration or from the secondary system (for example, backfeed from more than one energized phase feeding a common load), the requirements of paragraph (l) of this section apply if employees will work the lines or equipment as energized, and the requirements of paragraphs (m) and (n) of this section apply if employees will work the lines or equipment as deenergized.
The employer shall install, adjust, and operate laser equipment in accordance with § 1926.54 of this chapter.
Hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of equipment shall provide insulation for the voltage involved.
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him or her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him or her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
Attendant. An employee assigned to remain immediately outside the entrance to an enclosed or other space to render assistance as needed to employees inside the space.
Authorized employee. An employee who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section.
Automatic circuit recloser. A self-controlled device for automatically interrupting and reclosing an alternating-current circuit, with a predetermined sequence of opening and reclosing followed by resetting, hold closed, or lockout.
Barricade. A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or A-frame type wood or metal structures that provides a warning about, and limits access to, a hazardous area.
Barrier. A physical obstruction that prevents contact with energized lines or equipment or prevents unauthorized access to a work area.
Bond. The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a common electric potential.
Bus. A conductor or a group of conductors that serve as a common connection for two or more circuits.
Bushing. An insulating structure that includes a through conductor or that provides a passageway for such a conductor, and that, when mounted on a barrier, insulates the conductor from the barrier for the purpose of conducting current from one side of the barrier to the other.
Cable. A conductor with insulation, or a stranded conductor with or without insulation and other coverings (single-conductor cable), or a combination of conductors insulated from one another (multiple-conductor cable).
Cable sheath. A conductive protective covering applied to cables.
Circuit. A conductor or system of conductors through which an electric current is intended to flow.
Clearance (between objects). The clear distance between two objects measured surface to surface.
Clearance (for work). Authorization to perform specified work or permission to enter a restricted area.
Communication lines. (See Lines; (1) Communication lines. )
Conductor. A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, used for carrying an electric current.
Contract employer. An employer, other than a host employer, that performs work covered by this section under contract.
Covered conductor. A conductor covered with a dielectric having no rated insulating strength or having a rated insulating strength less than the voltage of the circuit in which the conductor is used.
Current-carrying part. A conducting part intended to be connected in an electric circuit to a source of voltage. Non-current-carrying parts are those not intended to be so connected.
Deenergized. Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electric charge; not having a potential that is different from the potential of the earth.
Designated employee (designated person). An employee (or person) who is assigned by the employer to perform specific duties under the terms of this section and who has sufficient knowledge of the construction and operation of the equipment, and the hazards involved, to perform his or her duties safely.
Electric line truck. A truck used to transport personnel, tools, and material for electric supply line work.
Electric supply equipment. Equipment that produces, modifies, regulates, controls, or safeguards a supply of electric energy.
Electric supply lines. (See Lines; (2) Electric supply lines. )
Electric utility. An organization responsible for the installation, operation, or maintenance of an electric supply system.
Enclosed space. A working space, such as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, that has a limited means of egress or entry, that is designed for periodic employee entry under normal operating conditions, and that, under normal conditions, does not contain a hazardous atmosphere, but may contain a hazardous atmosphere under abnormal conditions.
Energized (alive, live). Electrically connected to a source of potential difference, or electrically charged so as to have a potential significantly different from that of earth in the vicinity.
Energy isolating device. A physical device that prevents the transmission or release of energy, including, but not limited to, the following: a manually operated electric circuit breaker, a disconnect switch, a manually operated switch, a slide gate, a slip blind, a line valve, blocks, and any similar device with a visible indication of the position of the device. (Push buttons, selector switches, and other control-circuit-type devices are not energy isolating devices.)
Energy source. Any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy source that could cause injury to employees.
Entry (as used in paragraph (e) of this section). The action by which a person passes through an opening into an enclosed space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.
Equipment (electric). A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like used as part of or in connection with an electrical installation.
Exposed, Exposed to contact (as applied to energized parts). Not isolated or guarded.
Fall restraint system. A fall protection system that prevents the user from falling any distance.
First-aid training. Training in the initial care, including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (which includes chest compressions, rescue breathing, and, as appropriate, other heart and lung resuscitation techniques), performed by a person who is not a medical practitioner, of a sick or injured person until definitive medical treatment can be administered.
Ground. A conducting connection, whether planned or unplanned, between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous approach or inadvertent contact by persons or objects.
Hazardous atmosphere. An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from an enclosed space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
High-power tests. Tests in which the employer uses fault currents, load currents, magnetizing currents, and line-dropping currents to test equipment, either at the equipment's rated voltage or at lower voltages.
High-voltage tests. Tests in which the employer uses voltages of approximately 1,000 volts as a practical minimum and in which the voltage source has sufficient energy to cause injury.
High wind. A wind of such velocity that one or more of the following hazards would be present:
Host employer. An employer that operates, or that controls the operating procedures for, an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation on which a contract employer is performing work covered by this section.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH). Any condition that poses an immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.
Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.
Insulation (cable). Material relied upon to insulate the conductor from other conductors or conducting parts or from ground.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.
Line-clearance tree trimmer. An employee who, through related training or on-the-job experience or both, is familiar with the special techniques and hazards involved in line-clearance tree trimming.
Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees, or the cutting of brush, that is within the following distance of electric supply lines and equipment:
Lines —
The conductors and their supporting or containing structures which are used for public or private signal or communication service, and which operate at potentials not exceeding 400 volts to ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the transmitted power of which does not exceed 150 watts. If the lines are operating at less than 150 volts, no limit is placed on the transmitted power of the system. Under certain conditions, communication cables may include communication circuits exceeding these limitations where such circuits are also used to supply power solely to communication equipment.
Conductors used to transmit electric energy and their necessary supporting or containing structures. Signal lines of more than 400 volts are always supply lines within this section, and those of less than 400 volts are considered as supply lines, if so run and operated throughout.
Manhole. A subsurface enclosure that personnel may enter and that is used for installing, operating, and maintaining submersible equipment or cable.
Minimum approach distance. The closest distance an employee may approach an energized or a grounded object.
Personal fall arrest system. A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level.
Qualified employee (qualified person). An employee (person) knowledgeable in the construction and operation of the electric power generation, transmission, and distribution equipment involved, along with the associated hazards.
Statistical sparkover voltage. A transient overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-percent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).
Statistical withstand voltage. A transient overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-percent probability of sparkover (that is, three standard deviations below the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).
Switch. A device for opening and closing or for changing the connection of a circuit. In this section, a switch is manually operable, unless otherwise stated.
System operator. A qualified person designated to operate the system or its parts.
Vault. An enclosure, above or below ground, that personnel may enter and that is used for installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or cable.
Vented vault. A vault that has provision for air changes using exhaust-flue stacks and low-level air intakes operating on pressure and temperature differentials that provide for airflow that precludes a hazardous atmosphere from developing.
Voltage. The effective (root mean square, or rms) potential difference between any two conductors or between a conductor and ground. This section expresses voltages in nominal values, unless otherwise indicated. The nominal voltage of a system or circuit is the value assigned to a system or circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The operating voltage of the system may vary above or below this value.
Work-positioning equipment. A body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a utility pole or tower leg, and work with both hands free while leaning.
Appendix A to § 1910.269—Flow Charts
This appendix presents information, in the form of flow charts, that illustrates the scope and application of § 1910.269. This appendix addresses the interface between § 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part (Electrical), between § 1910.269 and § 1910.146 (Permit-required confined spaces), and between § 1910.269 and § 1910.147 (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance for employers trying to implement the requirements of § 1910.269 in combination with other General Industry Standards contained in Part 1910. Employers should always consult the relevant standards, in conjunction with this appendix, to ensure compliance with all applicable requirements.
Appendix A-2 to § 1910.269—Application of § 1910.269 and Subpart S of this Part to Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices 1
| Compliance with Subpart S will comply with these paragraphs of § 1910.269 1 | Paragraphs that apply regardless of compliance with Subpart S 2 |
|---|---|
| (d), electric-shock hazards only | (a)(2), (a)(3) and (a)(4). |
| (h)(3) | (b) |
| (i)(2) and (i)(3) | (c) |
| (k) | (d), for other than electric-shock hazards. |
| (l)(1) through (l)(5), (l)(7), and (l)(10) through (l)(12) | (e) |
| (m) | (f) |
| (p)(4) | (g) |
| (s)(2) | (h)(1) and (h)(2). |
| (u)(1) and (u)(3) through (u)(5) | (i)(4) |
| (v)(3) through (v)(5) | (j) |
| (w)(1) and (w)(7) | (l)(6), (l)(8) and (l)(9). |
| (n) | |
| (o) | |
| (p)(1) through (p)(3). | |
| (q) | |
| (r) | |
| (s)(1) | |
| (t) | |
| (u)(2) and (u)(6) | |
| (v)(1), (v)(2), and (v)(6) through (v)(12). | |
| (w)(2) through (w)(6), (w)(8), and (w)(9). | |
| 1 If the electrical installation meets the requirements of §§ 1910.302 through 1910.308 of this part, then the electrical installation and any associated electrical safety-related work practices conforming to §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part are considered to comply with these provisions of § 1910.269 of this part. | |
| 2 These provisions include electrical safety and other requirements that must be met regardless of compliance with subpart S of this part. |
Appendix B to § 1910.269—Working on Exposed Energized Parts
I. Introduction
Electric utilities design electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations to meet National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI C2, requirements. Electric utilities also design transmission and distribution lines to limit line outages as required by system reliability criteria 1 and to withstand the maximum overvoltages impressed on the system. Conditions such as switching surges, faults, and lightning can cause overvoltages. Electric utilities generally select insulator design and lengths and the clearances to structural parts so as to prevent outages from contaminated line insulation and during storms. Line insulator lengths and structural clearances have, over the years, come closer to the minimum approach distances used by workers. As minimum approach distances and structural clearances converge, it is increasingly important that system designers and system operating and maintenance personnel understand the concepts underlying minimum approach distances.
1 Federal, State, and local regulatory bodies and electric utilities set reliability requirements that limit the number and duration of system outages.
The information in this appendix will assist employers in complying with the minimum approach-distance requirements contained in § 1910.269(l)(3) and (q)(3). Employers must use the technical criteria and methodology presented in this appendix in establishing minimum approach distances in accordance with § 1910.269(l)(3)(i) and Table R-3 and Table R-8. This appendix provides essential background information and technical criteria for the calculation of the required minimum approach distances for live-line work on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution installations.
Unless an employer is using the maximum transient overvoltages specified in Table R-9 for voltages over 72.5 kilovolts, the employer must use persons knowledgeable in the techniques discussed in this appendix, and competent in the field of electric transmission and distribution system design, to determine the maximum transient overvoltage.
II. General
A. Definitions. The following definitions from § 1910.269(x) relate to work on or near electric power generation, transmission, and distribution lines and equipment and the electrical hazards they present.
Exposed.... Not isolated or guarded.
Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or platforms, designed to minimize the possibility, under normal conditions, of dangerous approach or inadvertent contact by persons or objects.
Insulated. Separated from other conducting surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) offering a high resistance to the passage of current.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.
Statistical sparkover voltage. A transient overvoltage level that produces a 97.72-percent probability of sparkover (that is, two standard deviations above the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).
Statistical withstand voltage. A transient overvoltage level that produces a 0.14-percent probability of sparkover (that is, three standard deviations below the voltage at which there is a 50-percent probability of sparkover).
B. Installations energized at 50 to 300 volts. The hazards posed by installations energized at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those found in many other workplaces. That is not to say that there is no hazard, but the complexity of electrical protection required does not compare to that required for high-voltage systems. The employee must avoid contact with the exposed parts, and the protective equipment used (such as rubber insulating gloves) must provide insulation for the voltages involved.
C. Exposed energized parts over 300 volts AC. Paragraph (l)(3)(i) of § 1910.269 requires the employer to establish minimum approach distances no less than the distances computed by Table R-3 for ac systems so that employees can work safely without risk of sparkover. 2
2 Sparkover is a disruptive electric discharge in which an electric arc forms and electric current passes through air.
Unless the employee is using electrical protective equipment, air is the insulating medium between the employee and energized parts. The distance between the employee and an energized part must be sufficient for the air to withstand the maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite under the working conditions and practices the employee is using. This distance is the minimum air insulation distance, and it is equal to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.
Normal system design may provide or include a means (such as lightning arrestors) to control maximum anticipated transient overvoltages, or the employer may use temporary devices (portable protective gaps) or measures (such as preventing automatic circuit breaker reclosing) to achieve the same result. Paragraph (l)(3)(ii) of § 1910.269 requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9, which specifies the following maximums for ac systems:
72.6 to 420.0 kilovolts—3.5 per unit
420.1 to 550.0 kilovolts—3.0 per unit
550.1 to 800.0 kilovolts—2.5 per unit
See paragraph IV.A.2, later in this appendix, for additional discussion of maximum transient overvoltages.
D. Types of exposures. Employees working on or near energized electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems face two kinds of exposures: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase. The exposure is phase-to-ground: (1) With respect to an energized part, when the employee is at ground potential or (2) with respect to ground, when an employee is at the potential of the energized part during live-line barehand work. The exposure is phase-to-phase, with respect to an energized part, when an employee is at the potential of another energized part (at a different potential) during live-line barehand work.
III. Determination of Minimum Approach Distances for AC Voltages Greater Than 300 Volts
A. Voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Test data generally forms the basis of minimum air insulation distances. The lowest voltage for which sufficient test data exists is 5,000 volts, and these data indicate that the minimum air insulation distance at that voltage is 20 millimeters (1 inch). Because the minimum air insulation distance increases with increasing voltage, and, conversely, decreases with decreasing voltage, an assumed minimum air insulation distance of 20 millimeters will protect against sparkover at voltages of 301 to 5,000 volts. Thus, 20 millimeters is the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for these voltages.
B. Voltages of 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts. For voltages from 5.1 to 72.5 kilovolts, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration bases the methodology for calculating the electrical component of the minimum approach distance on Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 4-1995, Standard Techniques for High-Voltage Testing. Table 1 lists the critical sparkover distances from that standard as listed in IEEE Std 516-2009, IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines.
| 60 Hz Rod-to-Rod sparkover (kV peak) | Gap spacing from IEEE Std 4-1995 (cm) |
|---|---|
| 25 | 2 |
| 36 | 3 |
| 46 | 4 |
| 53 | 5 |
| 60 | 6 |
| 70 | 8 |
| 79 | 10 |
| 86 | 12 |
| 95 | 14 |
| 104 | 16 |
| 112 | 18 |
| 120 | 20 |
| 143 | 25 |
| 167 | 30 |
| 192 | 35 |
| 218 | 40 |
| 243 | 45 |
| 270 | 50 |
| 322 | 60 |
| Source: IEEE Std 516-2009. |
To use this table to determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance, the employer must determine the peak phase-to-ground transient overvoltage and select a gap from the table that corresponds to that voltage as a withstand voltage rather than a critical sparkover voltage. To calculate the electrical component of the minimum approach distance for voltages between 5 and 72.5 kilovolts, use the following procedure:
1. Divide the phase-to-phase voltage by the square root of 3 to convert it to a phase-to-ground voltage.
2. Multiply the phase-to-ground voltage by the square root of 2 to convert the rms value of the voltage to the peak phase-to-ground voltage.
3. Multiply the peak phase-to-ground voltage by the maximum per-unit transient overvoltage, which, for this voltage range, is 3.0, as discussed later in this appendix. This is the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage, which corresponds to the withstand voltage for the relevant exposure. 3
3 The withstand voltage is the voltage at which sparkover is not likely to occur across a specified distance. It is the voltage taken at the 3σ point below the sparkover voltage, assuming that the sparkover curve follows a normal distribution.
4. Divide the maximum phase-to-ground transient overvoltage by 0.85 to determine the corresponding critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is 3 standard deviations (or 15 percent) greater than the withstand voltage.)
5. Determine the electrical component of the minimum approach distance from Table 1 through interpolation.
| Step | Maximum system phase-to-phase voltage (kV) | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 15 | 36 | 46 | 72.5 | |
| 1. Divide by √3 | 8.7 | 20.8 | 26.6 | 41.9 |
| 2. Multiply by √2 | 12.2 | 29.4 | 37.6 | 59.2 |
| 3. Multiply by 3.0 | 36.7 | 88.2 | 112.7 | 177.6 |
| 4. Divide by 0.85 | 43.2 | 103.7 | 132.6 | 208.9 |
| 5. Interpolate from Table 1 | 3 + (7.2/10)*1 | 14 + (8.7/9)*2 | 20 + (12.6/23)*5 | 35 + (16.9/26)*5 |
| Electrical component of MAD (cm) | 3.72 | 15.93 | 22.74 | 38.25 |
C. Voltages of 72.6 to 800 kilovolts. For voltages of 72.6 kilovolts to 800 kilovolts, this section bases the electrical component of minimum approach distances, before the application of any altitude correction factor, on the following formula:
Equation 1—For Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV
D
C
a
V
L
G
T
Where:
D
C
a
4
4 Test data demonstrates that the saturation factor is greater than 0 at peak voltages of about 630 kilovolts. Systems operating at 345 kilovolts (or maximum system voltages of 362 kilovolts) can have peak maximum transient overvoltages exceeding 630 kilovolts. Table R-3 sets equations for calculating a based on peak voltage.
V
L-G
T
In Equation 1, C is 0.01: (1) For phase-to-ground exposures that the employer can demonstrate consist only of air across the approach distance (gap) and (2) for phase-to-phase exposures if the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. Otherwise, C is 0.011.
In Equation 1, the term a varies depending on whether the employee's exposure is phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase and on whether objects are in the gap. The employer must use the equations in Table 3 to calculate a. Sparkover test data with insulation spanning the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-ground exposures, and sparkover test data with only air in the gap form the basis for the equations for phase-to-phase exposures. The phase-to-ground equations result in slightly higher values of a, and, consequently, produce larger minimum approach distances, than the phase-to-phase equations for the same value of V Peak.
| Phase-to-ground exposures | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| V Peak = T L-G V L-G √2 | 635 kV or less | 635.1 to 915 kV | 915.1 to 1,050 kV |
| a | 0 | ( V Peak - 635)/140,000 | ( V Peak -645)/135,000 |
| V Peak = T L-G V L-G √2 | More than 1,050 kV | ||
| a | ( V Peak -675)/125,000 | ||
| Phase-to-phase exposures 1 | |||
| V Peak = (1.35 T L-G + 0.45) V L-G √2 | 630 kV or less | 630.1 to 848 kV | 848.1 to 1,131 kV |
| a | 0 | ( V Peak -630)/155,000 | ( V Peak -633.6)/152,207 |
| V Peak = (1.35 T L-G + 0.45) V L-G √2 | 1,131.1 to 1,485 kV | More than 1,485 kV |
|---|---|---|
| a | ( V Peak -628)/153,846 | ( V Peak -350.5)/203,666 |
| 1 Use the equations for phase-to-ground exposures (with V Peak for phase-to-phase exposures) unless the employer can demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. |
In Equation 1, T is the maximum transient overvoltage factor in per unit. As noted earlier, § 1910.269(l)(3)(ii) requires the employer to determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. For phase-to-ground exposures, the employer uses this value, called T L-G, as T in Equation 1. IEEE Std 516-2009 provides the following formula to calculate the phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage, T L-L, from T L-G :
T
L-L
T
L-G
For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer uses this value as T in Equation 1.
D. Provisions for inadvertent movement. The minimum approach distance must include an “adder” to compensate for the inadvertent movement of the worker relative to an energized part or the movement of the part relative to the worker. This “adder” must account for this possible inadvertent movement and provide the worker with a comfortable and safe zone in which to work. Employers must add the distance for inadvertent movement (called the “ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance”) to the electrical component to determine the total safe minimum approach distances used in live-line work.
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration based the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance on response time-distance analysis. This technique uses an estimate of the total response time to a hazardous incident and converts that time to the distance traveled. For example, the driver of a car takes a given amount of time to respond to a “stimulus” and stop the vehicle. The elapsed time involved results in the car's traveling some distance before coming to a complete stop. This distance depends on the speed of the car at the time the stimulus appears and the reaction time of the driver.
In the case of live-line work, the employee must first perceive that he or she is approaching the danger zone. Then, the worker responds to the danger and must decelerate and stop all motion toward the energized part. During the time it takes to stop, the employee will travel some distance. This is the distance the employer must add to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the total safe minimum approach distance.
At voltages from 751 volts to 72.5 kilovolts, 5 the electrical component of the minimum approach distance is smaller than the ergonomic component. At 72.5 kilovolts, the electrical component is only a little more than 0.3 meters (1 foot). An ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance must provide for all the worker's unanticipated movements. At these voltages, workers generally use rubber insulating gloves; however, these gloves protect only a worker's hands and arms. Therefore, the energized object must be at a safe approach distance to protect the worker's face. In this case, 0.61 meters (2 feet) is a sufficient and practical ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance.
5 For voltages of 50 to 300 volts, Table R-3 specifies a minimum approach distance of “avoid contact.” The minimum approach distance for this voltage range contains neither an electrical component nor an ergonomic component.
For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts, employees must use different work practices during energized line work. Generally, employees use live-line tools (hot sticks) to perform work on energized equipment. These tools, by design, keep the energized part at a constant distance from the employee and, thus, maintain the appropriate minimum approach distance automatically.
The location of the worker and the type of work methods the worker is using also influence the length of the ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance. In this higher voltage range, the employees use work methods that more tightly control their movements than when the workers perform work using rubber insulating gloves. The worker, therefore, is farther from the energized line or equipment and must be more precise in his or her movements just to perform the work. For these reasons, this section adopts an ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance of 0.31 m (1 foot) for voltages between 72.6 and 800 kilovolts.
| Voltage range (kV) | Distance | |
|---|---|---|
| m | ft | |
| 0.301 to 0.750 | 0.31 | 1.0 |
| 0.751 to 72.5 | 0.61 | 2.0 |
| 72.6 to 800 | 0.31 | 1.0 |
| Note: The employer must add this distance to the electrical component of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full minimum approach distance. |
The ergonomic component of the minimum approach distance accounts for errors in maintaining the minimum approach distance (which might occur, for example, if an employee misjudges the length of a conductive object he or she is holding), and for errors in judging the minimum approach distance. The ergonomic component also accounts for inadvertent movements by the employee, such as slipping. In contrast, the working position selected to properly maintain the minimum approach distance must account for all of an employee's reasonably likely movements and still permit the employee to adhere to the applicable minimum approach distance. (See Figure 1.) Reasonably likely movements include an employee's adjustments to tools, equipment, and working positions and all movements needed to perform the work. For example, the employee should be able to perform all of the following actions without straying into the minimum approach distance:
• Adjust his or her hardhat,
• maneuver a tool onto an energized part with a reasonable amount of overreaching or underreaching,
• reach for and handle tools, material, and equipment passed to him or her, and
• adjust tools, and replace components on them, when necessary during the work procedure.
The training of qualified employees required under § 1910.269(a)(2), and the job planning and briefing required under § 1910.269(c), must address selection of a proper working position.
E. Miscellaneous correction factors. Changes in the air medium that forms the insulation influences the strength of an air gap. A brief discussion of each factor follows.
1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric strength of air in a uniform electric field at standard atmospheric conditions is approximately 3 kilovolts per millimeter. 6 The pressure, temperature, and humidity of the air, the shape, dimensions, and separation of the electrodes, and the characteristics of the applied voltage (wave shape) affect the disruptive gradient.
6 For the purposes of estimating arc length, § 1910.269 generally assumes a more conservative dielectric strength of 10 kilovolts per 25.4 millimeters, consistent with assumptions made in consensus standards such as the National Electrical Safety Code (IEEE C2-2012). The more conservative value accounts for variables such as electrode shape, wave shape, and a certain amount of overvoltage.
2. Atmospheric effect. The empirically determined electrical strength of a given gap is normally applicable at standard atmospheric conditions (20 °C, 101.3 kilopascals, 11 grams/cubic centimeter humidity). An increase in the density (humidity) of the air inhibits sparkover for a given air gap. The combination of temperature and air pressure that results in the lowest gap sparkover voltage is high temperature and low pressure. This combination of conditions is not likely to occur. Low air pressure, generally associated with high humidity, causes increased electrical strength. An average air pressure generally correlates with low humidity. Hot and dry working conditions normally result in reduced electrical strength. The equations for minimum approach distances in Table R-3 assume standard atmospheric conditions.
3. Altitude. The reduced air pressure at high altitudes causes a reduction in the electrical strength of an air gap. An employer must increase the minimum approach distance by about 3 percent per 300 meters (1,000 feet) of increased altitude for altitudes above 900 meters (3,000 feet). Table R-5 specifies the altitude correction factor that the employer must use in calculating minimum approach distances.
IV. Determining Minimum Approach Distances
A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the Worksite
1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal system voltage range determines the voltage for purposes of calculating minimum approach distances. The employer selects the range in which the nominal system voltage falls, as given in the relevant table, and uses the highest value within that range in per-unit calculations.
2. Transient overvoltages. Operation of switches or circuit breakers, a fault on a line or circuit or on an adjacent circuit, and similar activities may generate transient overvoltages on an electrical system. Each overvoltage has an associated transient voltage wave shape. The wave shape arriving at the site and its magnitude vary considerably.
In developing requirements for minimum approach distances, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration considered the most common wave shapes and the magnitude of transient overvoltages found on electric power generation, transmission, and distribution systems. The equations in Table R-3 for minimum approach distances use per-unit maximum transient overvoltages, which are relative to the nominal maximum voltage of the system. For example, a maximum transient overvoltage value of 3.0 per unit indicates that the highest transient overvoltage is 3.0 times the nominal maximum system voltage.
3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. Table 5 lists the magnitude of typical transient overvoltages.
| Cause | Magnitude (per unit) |
|---|---|
| Energized 200-mile line without closing resistors | 3.5 |
| Energized 200-mile line with one-step closing resistor | 2.1 |
| Energized 200-mile line with multistep resistor | 2.5 |
| Reclosing with trapped charge one-step resistor | 2.2 |
| Opening surge with single restrike | 3.0 |
| Fault initiation unfaulted phase | 2.1 |
| Fault initiation adjacent circuit | 2.5 |
| Fault clearing | 1.7 to 1.9 |
4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand. For each air gap length under the same atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical variation in the breakdown voltage. The probability of breakdown against voltage has a normal (Gaussian) distribution. The standard deviation of this distribution varies with the wave shape, gap geometry, and atmospheric conditions. The withstand voltage of the air gap is three standard deviations (3σ) below the critical sparkover voltage. (The critical sparkover voltage is the crest value of the impulse wave that, under specified conditions, causes sparkover 50 percent of the time. An impulse wave of three standard deviations below this value, that is, the withstand voltage, has a probability of sparkover of approximately 1 in 1,000.)
5. Broken Insulators. Tests show reductions in the insulation strength of insulator strings with broken skirts. Broken units may lose up to 70 percent of their withstand capacity. Because an employer cannot determine the insulating capability of a broken unit without testing it, the employer must consider damaged units in an insulator to have no insulating value. Additionally, the presence of a live-line tool alongside an insulator string with broken units may further reduce the overall insulating strength. The number of good units that must be present in a string for it to be “insulated” as defined by § 1910.269(x) depends on the maximum overvoltage possible at the worksite.
B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on Known, Maximum-Anticipated Per-Unit Transient Overvoltages
1. Determining the minimum approach distance for AC systems. Under § 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), the employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis or must assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. When the employer conducts an engineering analysis of the system and determines that the maximum transient overvoltage is lower than specified by Table R-9, the employer must ensure that any conditions assumed in the analysis, for example, that employees block reclosing on a circuit or install portable protective gaps, are present during energized work. To ensure that these conditions are present, the employer may need to institute new live-work procedures reflecting the conditions and limitations set by the engineering analysis.
2. Calculation of reduced approach distance values. An employer may take the following steps to reduce minimum approach distances when the maximum transient overvoltage on the system (that is, the maximum transient overvoltage without additional steps to control overvoltages) produces unacceptably large minimum approach distances:
Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage (with respect to a given nominal voltage range) for the energized part.
Step 2. Determine the technique to use to control the maximum transient overvoltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of this appendix.) Determine the maximum transient overvoltage that can exist at the worksite with that form of control in place and with a confidence level of 3σ. This voltage is the withstand voltage for the purpose of calculating the appropriate minimum approach distance.
Step 3. Direct employees to implement procedures to ensure that the control technique is in effect during the course of the work.
Step 4. Using the new value of transient overvoltage in per unit, calculate the required minimum approach distance from Table R-3.
C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient Overvoltage Stress Found on a System
1. Introduction. There are several means of controlling overvoltages that occur on transmission systems. For example, the employer can modify the operation of circuit breakers or other switching devices to reduce switching transient overvoltages. Alternatively, the employer can hold the overvoltage to an acceptable level by installing surge arresters or portable protective gaps on the system. In addition, the employer can change the transmission system to minimize the effect of switching operations. Section 4.8 of IEEE Std 516-2009 describes various ways of controlling, and thereby reducing, maximum transient overvoltages.
2. Operation of circuit breakers. 7 The maximum transient overvoltage that can reach the worksite is often the result of switching on the line on which employees are working. Disabling automatic reclosing during energized line work, so that the line will not be reenergized after being opened for any reason, limits the maximum switching surge overvoltage to the larger of the opening surge or the greatest possible fault-generated surge, provided that the devices (for example, insertion resistors) are operable and will function to limit the transient overvoltage and that circuit breaker restrikes do not occur. The employer must ensure the proper functioning of insertion resistors and other overvoltage-limiting devices when the employer's engineering analysis assumes their proper operation to limit the overvoltage level. If the employer cannot disable the reclosing feature (because of system operating conditions), other methods of controlling the switching surge level may be necessary.
7 The detailed design of a circuit interrupter, such as the design of the contacts, resistor insertion, and breaker timing control, are beyond the scope of this appendix. The design of the system generally accounts for these features. This appendix only discusses features that can limit the maximum switching transient overvoltage on a system.
Transient surges on an adjacent line, particularly for double circuit construction, may cause a significant overvoltage on the line on which employees are working. The employer's engineering analysis must account for coupling to adjacent lines.
3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge arresters allows a reduction in the basic impulse-insulation levels of much transmission system equipment. The primary function of early arresters was to protect the system insulation from the effects of lightning. Modern arresters not only dissipate lightning-caused transients, but may also control many other system transients caused by switching or faults.
The employer may use properly designed arresters to control transient overvoltages along a transmission line and thereby reduce the requisite length of the insulator string and possibly the maximum transient overvoltage on the line. 8
8 Surge arrester application is beyond the scope of this appendix. However, if the employer installs the arrester near the work site, the application would be similar to the protective gaps discussed in paragraph IV.D of this appendix.
4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of overvoltage control involves establishing switching restrictions, whereby the employer prohibits the operation of circuit breakers until certain system conditions are present. The employer restricts switching by using a tagging system, similar to that used for a permit, except that the common term used for this activity is a “hold-off” or “restriction.” These terms indicate that the restriction does not prevent operation, but only modifies the operation during the live-work activity.
D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on Control of Maximum Transient Overvoltage at the Worksite
When the employer institutes control of maximum transient overvoltage at the worksite by installing portable protective gaps, the employer may calculate the minimum approach distance as follows:
Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand voltage for the protective gap based on system requirements and an acceptable probability of gap sparkover. 9
9 The employer should check the withstand voltage to ensure that it results in a probability of gap flashover that is acceptable from a system outage perspective. (In other words, a gap sparkover will produce a system outage. The employer should determine whether such an outage will impact overall system performance to an acceptable degree.) In general, the withstand voltage should be at least 1.25 times the maximum crest operating voltage.
Step 2. Determine a gap distance that provides a withstand voltage 10 greater than or equal to the one selected in the first step. 11
10 The manufacturer of the gap provides, based on test data, the critical sparkover voltage for each gap spacing (for example, a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts for a gap spacing of 1.2 meters). The withstand voltage for the gap is equal to 85 percent of its critical sparkover voltage.
11 Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the protective gap is known.
Step 3. Use 110 percent of the gap's critical sparkover voltage to determine the phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ).
Step 4. Determine the maximum transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, at the worksite from the following formula:
Step 5. Use this value of T 12 in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance. If the worksite is no more than 900 meters (3,000 feet) above sea level, the employer may use this value of T to determine the minimum approach distance from Table 14 through Table 21.
12 IEEE Std 516-2009 states that most employers add 0.2 to the calculated value of T as an additional safety factor.
Sample protective gap calculations.
Problem: Employees are to perform work on a 500-kilovolt transmission line at sea level that is subject to transient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum operating voltage of the line is 550 kilovolts. Determine the length of the protective gap that will provide the minimum practical safe approach distance. Also, determine what that minimum approach distance is.
Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times the crest phase-to-ground voltage): 13
13 To eliminate sparkovers due to minor system disturbances, the employer should use a withstand voltage no lower than 1.25 p.u. Note that this is a practical, or operational, consideration only. It may be feasible for the employer to use lower values of withstand voltage.
Step 2. Using test data for a particular protective gap, select a gap that has a critical sparkover voltage greater than or equal to:
kV
kV
For example, if a protective gap with a 1.22-m (4.0-foot) spacing tested to a critical sparkover voltage of 665 kilovolts (crest), select this gap spacing.
Step 3. The phase-to-ground peak voltage at gap sparkover ( V PPG Peak ) is 110 percent of the value from the previous step:
kV
kV
This value corresponds to the withstand voltage of the electrical component of the minimum approach distance.
Step 4. Use this voltage to determine the worksite value of T:
Step 5. Use this value of T in the equation in Table R-3 to obtain the minimum approach distance, or look up the minimum approach distance in Table 14 through Table 21:
MAD
E. Location of Protective Gaps
1. Adjacent structures. The employer may install the protective gap on a structure adjacent to the worksite, as this practice does not significantly reduce the protection afforded by the gap.
2. Terminal stations. Gaps installed at terminal stations of lines or circuits provide a level of protection; however, that level of protection may not extend throughout the length of the line to the worksite. The use of substation terminal gaps raises the possibility that separate surges could enter the line at opposite ends, each with low enough magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without sparkover. When voltage surges occur simultaneously at each end of a line and travel toward each other, the total voltage on the line at the point where they meet is the arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap installed within 0.8 km (0.5 mile) of the worksite will protect against such intersecting waves. Engineering studies of a particular line or system may indicate that employers can adequately protect employees by installing gaps at even more distant locations. In any event, unless using the default values for T from Table R-9, the employer must determine T at the worksite.
3. Worksite. If the employer installs protective gaps at the worksite, the gap setting establishes the worksite impulse insulation strength. Lightning strikes as far as 6 miles from the worksite can cause a voltage surge greater than the gap withstand voltage, and a gap sparkover can occur. In addition, the gap can sparkover from overvoltages on the line that exceed the withstand voltage of the gap. Consequently, the employer must protect employees from hazards resulting from any sparkover that could occur.
F. Disabling automatic reclosing. There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-interrupting devices while employees are performing live-line work:
• To prevent reenergization of a circuit faulted during the work, which could create a hazard or result in more serious injuries or damage than the injuries or damage produced by the original fault;
• To prevent any transient overvoltage caused by the switching surge that would result if the circuit were reenergized.
However, due to system stability considerations, it may not always be feasible to disable the automatic-reclosing feature.
V. Minimum Approach-Distance Tables
A. Legacy tables. Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 6 through Table 13 until March 31, 2015.
| Voltage range phase to phase (kV) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 0.05 to 1.0 | Avoid Contact | Avoid Contact | ||
| 1.1 to 15.0 | 0.64 | 2.10 | 0.66 | 2.20 |
| 15.1 to 36.0 | 0.72 | 2.30 | 0.77 | 2.60 |
| 36.1 to 46.0 | 0.77 | 2.60 | 0.85 | 2.80 |
| 46.1 to 72.5 | 0.90 | 3.00 | 1.05 | 3.50 |
| 72.6 to 121 | 0.95 | 3.20 | 1.29 | 4.30 |
| 138 to 145 | 1.09 | 3.60 | 1.50 | 4.90 |
| 161 to 169 | 1.22 | 4.00 | 1.71 | 5.70 |
| 230 to 242 | 1.59 | 5.30 | 2.27 | 7.50 |
| 345 to 362 | 2.59 | 8.50 | 3.80 | 12.50 |
| 500 to 550 | 3.42 | 11.30 | 5.50 | 18.10 |
| 765 to 800 | 4.53 | 14.90 | 7.91 | 26.00 |
| Note: The clear live-line tool distance must equal or exceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 2.0 | 0.74 | 2.42 | 1.09 | 3.58 |
| 2.1 | 0.76 | 2.50 | 1.09 | 3.58 |
| 2.2 | 0.79 | 2.58 | 1.12 | 3.67 |
| 2.3 | 0.81 | 2.67 | 1.14 | 3.75 |
| 2.4 | 0.84 | 2.75 | 1.17 | 3.83 |
| 2.5 | 0.84 | 2.75 | 1.19 | 3.92 |
| 2.6 | 0.86 | 2.83 | 1.22 | 4.00 |
| 2.7 | 0.89 | 2.92 | 1.24 | 4.08 |
| 2.8 | 0.91 | 3.00 | 1.24 | 4.08 |
| 2.9 | 0.94 | 3.08 | 1.27 | 4.17 |
| 3.0 | 0.97 | 3.17 | 1.30 | 4.25 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 2.0 | 0.84 | 2.75 | 1.24 | 4.08 |
| 2.1 | 0.86 | 2.83 | 1.27 | 4.17 |
| 2.2 | 0.89 | 2.92 | 1.30 | 4.25 |
| 2.3 | 0.91 | 3.00 | 1.32 | 4.33 |
| 2.4 | 0.94 | 3.08 | 1.35 | 4.42 |
| 2.5 | 0.97 | 3.17 | 1.37 | 4.50 |
| 2.6 | 0.99 | 3.25 | 1.40 | 4.58 |
| 2.7 | 1.02 | 3.33 | 1.42 | 4.67 |
| 2.8 | 1.04 | 3.42 | 1.45 | 4.75 |
| 2.9 | 1.07 | 3.50 | 1.47 | 4.83 |
| 3.0 | 1.09 | 3.58 | 1.50 | 4.92 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 2.0 | 0.91 | 3.00 | 1.42 | 4.67 |
| 2.1 | 0.97 | 3.17 | 1.45 | 4.75 |
| 2.2 | 0.99 | 3.25 | 1.47 | 4.83 |
| 2.3 | 1.02 | 3.33 | 1.50 | 4.92 |
| 2.4 | 1.04 | 3.42 | 1.52 | 5.00 |
| 2.5 | 1.07 | 3.50 | 1.57 | 5.17 |
| 2.6 | 1.12 | 3.67 | 1.60 | 5.25 |
| 2.7 | 1.14 | 3.75 | 1.63 | 5.33 |
| 2.8 | 1.17 | 3.83 | 1.65 | 5.42 |
| 2.9 | 1.19 | 3.92 | 1.68 | 5.50 |
| 3.0 | 1.22 | 4.00 | 1.73 | 5.67 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 2.0 | 1.17 | 3.83 | 1.85 | 6.08 |
| 2.1 | 1.22 | 4.00 | 1.91 | 6.25 |
| 2.2 | 1.24 | 4.08 | 1.93 | 6.33 |
| 2.3 | 1.30 | 4.25 | 1.98 | 6.50 |
| 2.4 | 1.35 | 4.42 | 2.01 | 6.58 |
| 2.5 | 1.37 | 4.50 | 2.06 | 6.75 |
| 2.6 | 1.42 | 4.67 | 2.11 | 6.92 |
| 2.7 | 1.47 | 4.83 | 2.13 | 7.00 |
| 2.8 | 1.50 | 4.92 | 2.18 | 7.17 |
| 2.9 | 1.55 | 5.08 | 2.24 | 7.33 |
| 3.0 | 1.60 | 5.25 | 2.29 | 7.50 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 2.0 | 1.60 | 5.25 | 2.62 | 8.58 |
| 2.1 | 1.65 | 5.42 | 2.69 | 8.83 |
| 2.2 | 1.75 | 5.75 | 2.79 | 9.17 |
| 2.3 | 1.85 | 6.08 | 2.90 | 9.50 |
| 2.4 | 1.93 | 6.33 | 3.02 | 9.92 |
| 2.5 | 2.03 | 6.67 | 3.15 | 10.33 |
| 2.6 | 2.16 | 7.08 | 3.28 | 10.75 |
| 2.7 | 2.26 | 7.42 | 3.40 | 11.17 |
| 2.8 | 2.36 | 7.75 | 3.53 | 11.58 |
| 2.9 | 2.49 | 8.17 | 3.68 | 12.08 |
| 3.0 | 2.59 | 8.50 | 3.81 | 12.50 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 1.83 | 6.00 | 2.24 | 7.33 |
| 1.6 | 1.98 | 6.50 | 2.67 | 8.75 |
| 1.7 | 2.13 | 7.00 | 3.10 | 10.17 |
| 1.8 | 2.31 | 7.58 | 3.53 | 11.58 |
| 1.9 | 2.46 | 8.08 | 4.01 | 13.17 |
| 2.0 | 2.67 | 8.75 | 4.52 | 14.83 |
| 2.1 | 2.84 | 9.33 | 4.75 | 15.58 |
| 2.2 | 3.02 | 9.92 | 4.98 | 16.33 |
| 2.3 | 3.20 | 10.50 | 5.23 | 17.17 |
| 2.4 | 3.43 | 11.25 | 5.51 | 18.08 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 2.95 | 9.67 | 3.68 | 12.08 |
| 1.6 | 3.25 | 10.67 | 4.42 | 14.50 |
| 1.7 | 3.56 | 11.67 | 5.23 | 17.17 |
| 1.8 | 3.86 | 12.67 | 6.07 | 19.92 |
| 1.9 | 4.19 | 13.75 | 6.99 | 22.92 |
| 2.0 | 4.55 | 14.92 | 7.92 | 26.00 |
| Note 1: The employer may apply the distance specified in this table only where the employer determines the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage by engineering analysis. (Table 6 applies otherwise.) | ||||
| Note 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. |
B. Alternative minimum approach distances. Employers may use the minimum approach distances in Table 14 through Table 21 provided that the employer follows the notes to those tables.
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 0.67 | 2.2 | 0.84 | 2.8 |
| 1.6 | 0.69 | 2.3 | 0.87 | 2.9 |
| 1.7 | 0.71 | 2.3 | 0.90 | 3.0 |
| 1.8 | 0.74 | 2.4 | 0.93 | 3.1 |
| 1.9 | 0.76 | 2.5 | 0.96 | 3.1 |
| 2.0 | 0.78 | 2.6 | 0.99 | 3.2 |
| 2.1 | 0.81 | 2.7 | 1.01 | 3.3 |
| 2.2 | 0.83 | 2.7 | 1.04 | 3.4 |
| 2.3 | 0.85 | 2.8 | 1.07 | 3.5 |
| 2.4 | 0.88 | 2.9 | 1.10 | 3.6 |
| 2.5 | 0.90 | 3.0 | 1.13 | 3.7 |
| 2.6 | 0.92 | 3.0 | 1.16 | 3.8 |
| 2.7 | 0.95 | 3.1 | 1.19 | 3.9 |
| 2.8 | 0.97 | 3.2 | 1.22 | 4.0 |
| 2.9 | 0.99 | 3.2 | 1.24 | 4.1 |
| 3.0 | 1.02 | 3.3 | 1.27 | 4.2 |
| 3.1 | 1.04 | 3.4 | 1.30 | 4.3 |
| 3.2 | 1.06 | 3.5 | 1.33 | 4.4 |
| 3.3 | 1.09 | 3.6 | 1.36 | 4.5 |
| 3.4 | 1.11 | 3.6 | 1.39 | 4.6 |
| 3.5 | 1.13 | 3.7 | 1.42 | 4.7 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 0.74 | 2.4 | 0.95 | 3.1 |
| 1.6 | 0.76 | 2.5 | 0.98 | 3.2 |
| 1.7 | 0.79 | 2.6 | 1.02 | 3.3 |
| 1.8 | 0.82 | 2.7 | 1.05 | 3.4 |
| 1.9 | 0.85 | 2.8 | 1.08 | 3.5 |
| 2.0 | 0.88 | 2.9 | 1.12 | 3.7 |
| 2.1 | 0.90 | 3.0 | 1.15 | 3.8 |
| 2.2 | 0.93 | 3.1 | 1.19 | 3.9 |
| 2.3 | 0.96 | 3.1 | 1.22 | 4.0 |
| 2.4 | 0.99 | 3.2 | 1.26 | 4.1 |
| 2.5 | 1.02 | 3.3 | 1.29 | 4.2 |
| 2.6 | 1.04 | 3.4 | 1.33 | 4.4 |
| 2.7 | 1.07 | 3.5 | 1.36 | 4.5 |
| 2.8 | 1.10 | 3.6 | 1.39 | 4.6 |
| 2.9 | 1.13 | 3.7 | 1.43 | 4.7 |
| 3.0 | 1.16 | 3.8 | 1.46 | 4.8 |
| 3.1 | 1.19 | 3.9 | 1.50 | 4.9 |
| 3.2 | 1.21 | 4.0 | 1.53 | 5.0 |
| 3.3 | 1.24 | 4.1 | 1.57 | 5.2 |
| 3.4 | 1.27 | 4.2 | 1.60 | 5.2 |
| 3.5 | 1.30 | 4.3 | 1.64 | 5.4 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 0.81 | 2.7 | 1.05 | 3.4 |
| 1.6 | 0.84 | 2.8 | 1.09 | 3.6 |
| 1.7 | 0.87 | 2.9 | 1.13 | 3.7 |
| 1.8 | 0.90 | 3.0 | 1.17 | 3.8 |
| 1.9 | 0.94 | 3.1 | 1.21 | 4.0 |
| 2.0 | 0.97 | 3.2 | 1.25 | 4.1 |
| 2.1 | 1.00 | 3.3 | 1.29 | 4.2 |
| 2.2 | 1.03 | 3.4 | 1.33 | 4.4 |
| 2.3 | 1.07 | 3.5 | 1.37 | 4.5 |
| 2.4 | 1.10 | 3.6 | 1.41 | 4.6 |
| 2.5 | 1.13 | 3.7 | 1.45 | 4.8 |
| 2.6 | 1.17 | 3.8 | 1.49 | 4.9 |
| 2.7 | 1.20 | 3.9 | 1.53 | 5.0 |
| 2.8 | 1.23 | 4.0 | 1.57 | 5.2 |
| 2.9 | 1.26 | 4.1 | 1.61 | 5.3 |
| 3.0 | 1.30 | 4.3 | 1.65 | 5.4 |
| 3.1 | 1.33 | 4.4 | 1.70 | 5.6 |
| 3.2 | 1.36 | 4.5 | 1.76 | 5.8 |
| 3.3 | 1.39 | 4.6 | 1.82 | 6.0 |
| 3.4 | 1.43 | 4.7 | 1.88 | 6.2 |
| 3.5 | 1.46 | 4.8 | 1.94 | 6.4 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 1.02 | 3.3 | 1.37 | 4.5 |
| 1.6 | 1.06 | 3.5 | 1.43 | 4.7 |
| 1.7 | 1.11 | 3.6 | 1.48 | 4.9 |
| 1.8 | 1.16 | 3.8 | 1.54 | 5.1 |
| 1.9 | 1.21 | 4.0 | 1.60 | 5.2 |
| 2.0 | 1.25 | 4.1 | 1.66 | 5.4 |
| 2.1 | 1.30 | 4.3 | 1.73 | 5.7 |
| 2.2 | 1.35 | 4.4 | 1.81 | 5.9 |
| 2.3 | 1.39 | 4.6 | 1.90 | 6.2 |
| 2.4 | 1.44 | 4.7 | 1.99 | 6.5 |
| 2.5 | 1.49 | 4.9 | 2.08 | 6.8 |
| 2.6 | 1.53 | 5.0 | 2.17 | 7.1 |
| 2.7 | 1.58 | 5.2 | 2.26 | 7.4 |
| 2.8 | 1.63 | 5.3 | 2.36 | 7.7 |
| 2.9 | 1.67 | 5.5 | 2.45 | 8.0 |
| 3.0 | 1.72 | 5.6 | 2.55 | 8.4 |
| 3.1 | 1.77 | 5.8 | 2.65 | 8.7 |
| 3.2 | 1.81 | 5.9 | 2.76 | 9.1 |
| 3.3 | 1.88 | 6.2 | 2.86 | 9.4 |
| 3.4 | 1.95 | 6.4 | 2.97 | 9.7 |
| 3.5 | 2.01 | 6.6 | 3.08 | 10.1 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 1.37 | 4.5 | 1.99 | 6.5 |
| 1.6 | 1.44 | 4.7 | 2.13 | 7.0 |
| 1.7 | 1.51 | 5.0 | 2.27 | 7.4 |
| 1.8 | 1.58 | 5.2 | 2.41 | 7.9 |
| 1.9 | 1.65 | 5.4 | 2.56 | 8.4 |
| 2.0 | 1.72 | 5.6 | 2.71 | 8.9 |
| 2.1 | 1.79 | 5.9 | 2.87 | 9.4 |
| 2.2 | 1.87 | 6.1 | 3.03 | 9.9 |
| 2.3 | 1.97 | 6.5 | 3.20 | 10.5 |
| 2.4 | 2.08 | 6.8 | 3.37 | 11.1 |
| 2.5 | 2.19 | 7.2 | 3.55 | 11.6 |
| 2.6 | 2.29 | 7.5 | 3.73 | 12.2 |
| 2.7 | 2.41 | 7.9 | 3.91 | 12.8 |
| 2.8 | 2.52 | 8.3 | 4.10 | 13.5 |
| 2.9 | 2.64 | 8.7 | 4.29 | 14.1 |
| 3.0 | 2.76 | 9.1 | 4.49 | 14.7 |
| 3.1 | 2.88 | 9.4 | 4.69 | 15.4 |
| 3.2 | 3.01 | 9.9 | 4.90 | 16.1 |
| 3.3 | 3.14 | 10.3 | 5.11 | 16.8 |
| 3.4 | 3.27 | 10.7 | 5.32 | 17.5 |
| 3.5 | 3.41 | 11.2 | 5.52 | 18.1 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 1.53 | 5.0 | 2.40 | 7.9 |
| 1.6 | 1.62 | 5.3 | 2.58 | 8.5 |
| 1.7 | 1.70 | 5.6 | 2.75 | 9.0 |
| 1.8 | 1.78 | 5.8 | 2.94 | 9.6 |
| 1.9 | 1.88 | 6.2 | 3.13 | 10.3 |
| 2.0 | 1.99 | 6.5 | 3.33 | 10.9 |
| 2.1 | 2.12 | 7.0 | 3.53 | 11.6 |
| 2.2 | 2.24 | 7.3 | 3.74 | 12.3 |
| 2.3 | 2.37 | 7.8 | 3.95 | 13.0 |
| 2.4 | 2.50 | 8.2 | 4.17 | 13.7 |
| 2.5 | 2.64 | 8.7 | 4.40 | 14.4 |
| 2.6 | 2.78 | 9.1 | 4.63 | 15.2 |
| 2.7 | 2.93 | 9.6 | 4.87 | 16.0 |
| 2.8 | 3.07 | 10.1 | 5.11 | 16.8 |
| 2.9 | 3.23 | 10.6 | 5.36 | 17.6 |
| 3.0 | 3.38 | 11.1 | 5.59 | 18.3 |
| 3.1 | 3.55 | 11.6 | 5.82 | 19.1 |
| 3.2 | 3.72 | 12.2 | 6.07 | 19.9 |
| 3.3 | 3.89 | 12.8 | 6.31 | 20.7 |
| 3.4 | 4.07 | 13.4 | 6.56 | 21.5 |
| 3.5 | 4.25 | 13.9 | 6.81 | 22.3 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 1.95 | 6.4 | 3.46 | 11.4 |
| 1.6 | 2.11 | 6.9 | 3.73 | 12.2 |
| 1.7 | 2.28 | 7.5 | 4.02 | 13.2 |
| 1.8 | 2.45 | 8.0 | 4.31 | 14.1 |
| 1.9 | 2.62 | 8.6 | 4.61 | 15.1 |
| 2.0 | 2.81 | 9.2 | 4.92 | 16.1 |
| 2.1 | 3.00 | 9.8 | 5.25 | 17.2 |
| 2.2 | 3.20 | 10.5 | 5.55 | 18.2 |
| 2.3 | 3.40 | 11.2 | 5.86 | 19.2 |
| 2.4 | 3.62 | 11.9 | 6.18 | 20.3 |
| 2.5 | 3.84 | 12.6 | 6.50 | 21.3 |
| 2.6 | 4.07 | 13.4 | 6.83 | 22.4 |
| 2.7 | 4.31 | 14.1 | 7.18 | 23.6 |
| 2.8 | 4.56 | 15.0 | 7.52 | 24.7 |
| 2.9 | 4.81 | 15.8 | 7.88 | 25.9 |
| 3.0 | 5.07 | 16.6 | 8.24 | 27.0 |
| T (p.u.) | Phase-to-ground exposure | Phase-to-phase exposure | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| m | ft | m | ft | |
| 1.5 | 3.16 | 10.4 | 5.97 | 19.6 |
| 1.6 | 3.46 | 11.4 | 6.43 | 21.1 |
| 1.7 | 3.78 | 12.4 | 6.92 | 22.7 |
| 1.8 | 4.12 | 13.5 | 7.42 | 24.3 |
| 1.9 | 4.47 | 14.7 | 7.93 | 26.0 |
| 2.0 | 4.83 | 15.8 | 8.47 | 27.8 |
| 2.1 | 5.21 | 17.1 | 9.02 | 29.6 |
| 2.2 | 5.61 | 18.4 | 9.58 | 31.4 |
| 2.3 | 6.02 | 19.8 | 10.16 | 33.3 |
| 2.4 | 6.44 | 21.1 | 10.76 | 35.3 |
| 2.5 | 6.88 | 22.6 | 11.38 | 37.3 |
| Notes to Table 14 through Table 21: | ||||
| 1. The employer must determine the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, through an engineering analysis, as required by § 1910.269(l)(3)(ii), or assume a maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage, phase-to-ground, in accordance with Table R-9. | ||||
| 2. For phase-to-phase exposures, the employer must demonstrate that no insulated tool spans the gap and that no large conductive object is in the gap. | ||||
| 3. The worksite must be at an elevation of 900 meters (3,000 feet) or less above sea level. |
Appendix C to § 1910.269—Protection From Hazardous Differences in Electric Potential
I. Introduction
Current passing through an impedance impresses voltage across that impedance. Even conductors have some, albeit low, value of impedance. Therefore, if a “grounded” 1 object, such as a crane or deenergized and grounded power line, results in a ground fault on a power line, voltage is impressed on that grounded object. The voltage impressed on the grounded object depends largely on the voltage on the line, on the impedance of the faulted conductor, and on the impedance to “true,” or “absolute,” ground represented by the object. If the impedance of the object causing the fault is relatively large, the voltage impressed on the object is essentially the phase-to-ground system voltage. However, even faults to grounded power lines or to well grounded transmission towers or substation structures (which have relatively low values of impedance to ground) can result in hazardous voltages. 2 In all cases, the degree of the hazard depends on the magnitude of the current through the employee and the time of exposure. This appendix discusses methods of protecting workers against the possibility that grounded objects, such as cranes and other mechanical equipment, will contact energized power lines and that deenergized and grounded power lines will become accidentally energized.
1 This appendix generally uses the term “grounded” only with respect to grounding that the employer intentionally installs, for example, the grounding an employer installs on a deenergized conductor. However, in this case, the term “grounded” means connected to earth, regardless of whether or not that connection is intentional.
2 Thus, grounding systems for transmission towers and substation structures should be designed to minimize the step and touch potentials involved.
II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution
A. Voltage-gradient distribution curve. Absolute, or true, ground serves as a reference and always has a voltage of 0 volts above ground potential. Because there is an impedance between a grounding electrode and absolute ground, there will be a voltage difference between the grounding electrode and absolute ground under ground-fault conditions. Voltage dissipates from the grounding electrode (or from the grounding point) and creates a ground potential gradient. The voltage decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the grounding electrode. A voltage drop associated with this dissipation of voltage is a ground potential. Figure 1 is a typical voltage-gradient distribution curve (assuming a uniform soil texture).
B. Step and touch potentials. Figure 1 also shows that workers are at risk from step and touch potentials. Step potential is the voltage between the feet of a person standing near an energized grounded object (the electrode). In Figure 1, the step potential is equal to the difference in voltage between two points at different distances from the electrode (where the points represent the location of each foot in relation to the electrode). A person could be at risk of injury during a fault simply by standing near the object.
Touch potential is the voltage between the energized grounded object (again, the electrode) and the feet of a person in contact with the object. In Figure 1, the touch potential is equal to the difference in voltage between the electrode (which is at a distance of 0 meters) and a point some distance away from the electrode (where the point represents the location of the feet of the person in contact with the object). The touch potential could be nearly the full voltage across the grounded object if that object is grounded at a point remote from the place where the person is in contact with it. For example, a crane grounded to the system neutral and that contacts an energized line would expose any person in contact with the crane or its uninsulated load line to a touch potential nearly equal to the full fault voltage.
A. Definitions. The following definitions apply to section III of this appendix:
Bond. The electrical interconnection of conductive parts designed to maintain a common electric potential.
Bonding cable (bonding jumper). A cable connected to two conductive parts to bond the parts together.
Cluster bar. A terminal temporarily attached to a structure that provides a means for the attachment and bonding of grounding and bonding cables to the structure.
Ground. A conducting connection between an electric circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounding cable (grounding jumper). A cable connected between a deenergized part and ground. Note that grounding cables carry fault current and bonding cables generally do not. A cable that bonds two conductive parts but carries substantial fault current (for example, a jumper connected between one phase and a grounded phase) is a grounding cable.
Ground mat (grounding grid). A temporarily or permanently installed metallic mat or grating that establishes an equipotential surface and provides connection points for attaching grounds.
B. Analyzing the hazard. The employer can use an engineering analysis of the power system under fault conditions to determine whether hazardous step and touch voltages will develop. The analysis should determine the voltage on all conductive objects in the work area and the amount of time the voltage will be present. Based on the this analysis, the employer can select appropriate measures and protective equipment, including the measures and protective equipment outlined in Section III of this appendix, to protect each employee from hazardous differences in electric potential. For example, from the analysis, the employer will know the voltage remaining on conductive objects after employees install bonding and grounding equipment and will be able to select insulating equipment with an appropriate rating, as described in paragraph III.C.2 of this appendix.
C. Protecting workers on the ground. The employer may use several methods, including equipotential zones, insulating equipment, and restricted work areas, to protect employees on the ground from hazardous differences in electrical potential.
1. An equipotential zone will protect workers within it from hazardous step and touch potentials. (See Figure 3.) Equipotential zones will not, however, protect employees located either wholly or partially outside the protected area. The employer can establish an equipotential zone for workers on the ground, with respect to a grounded object, through the use of a metal mat connected to the grounded object. The employer can use a grounding grid to equalize the voltage within the grid or bond conductive objects in the immediate work area to minimize the potential between the objects and between each object and ground. (Bonding an object outside the work area can increase the touch potential to that object, however.) Section III.D of this appendix discusses equipotential zones for employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines.
2. Insulating equipment, such as rubber gloves, can protect employees handling grounded equipment and conductors from hazardous touch potentials. The insulating equipment must be rated for the highest voltage that can be impressed on the grounded objects under fault conditions (rather than for the full system voltage).
3. Restricting employees from areas where hazardous step or touch potentials could arise can protect employees not directly involved in performing the operation. The employer must ensure that employees on the ground in the vicinity of transmission structures are at a distance where step voltages would be insufficient to cause injury. Employees must not handle grounded conductors or equipment likely to become energized to hazardous voltages unless the employees are within an equipotential zone or protected by insulating equipment.
D. Protecting employees working on deenergized and grounded power lines. This Section III.D of Appendix C establishes guidelines to help employers comply with requirements in § 1910.269(n) for using protective grounding to protect employees working on deenergized power lines. Paragraph (n) of § 1910.269 applies to grounding of transmission and distribution lines and equipment for the purpose of protecting workers. Paragraph (n)(3) of § 1910.269 requires temporary protective grounds to be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential. 3 Sections III.D.1 and III.D.2 of this appendix provide guidelines that employers can use in making the demonstration required by § 1910.269(n)(3). Section III.D.1 of this appendix provides guidelines on how the employer can determine whether particular grounding practices expose employees to hazardous differences in electric potential. Section III.D.2 of this appendix describes grounding methods that the employer can use in lieu of an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by § 1910.269(n)(3). The Occupational Safety and Health Administration will consider employers that comply with the criteria in this appendix as meeting § 1910.269(n)(3).
3 The protective grounding required by § 1910.269(n) limits to safe values the potential differences between accessible objects in each employee's work environment. Ideally, a protective grounding system would create a true equipotential zone in which every point is at the same electric potential. In practice, current passing through the grounding and bonding elements creates potential differences. If these potential differences are hazardous, the employer may not treat the zone as an equipotential zone.
Finally, Section III.D.3 of this appendix discusses other safety considerations that will help the employer comply with other requirements in § 1910.269(n). Following these guidelines will protect workers from hazards that can occur when a deenergized and grounded line becomes energized.
1. Determining safe body current limits. This Section III.D.1 of Appendix C provides guidelines on how an employer can determine whether any differences in electric potential to which workers could be exposed are hazardous as part of the demonstration required by § 1910.269(n)(3).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 1048-2003, IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines, provides the following equation for determining the threshold of ventricular fibrillation when the duration of the electric shock is limited:
where I is the current through the worker's body, and t is the duration of the current in seconds. This equation represents the ventricular fibrillation threshold for 95.5 percent of the adult population with a mass of 50 kilograms (110 pounds) or more. The equation is valid for current durations between 0.0083 to 3.0 seconds.
To use this equation to set safe voltage limits in an equipotential zone around the worker, the employer will need to assume a value for the resistance of the worker's body. IEEE Std 1048-2003 states that “total body resistance is usually taken as 1000 Ω for determining... body current limits.” However, employers should be aware that the impedance of a worker's body can be substantially less than that value. For instance, IEEE Std 1048-2003 reports a minimum hand-to-hand resistance of 610 ohms and an internal body resistance of 500 ohms. The internal resistance of the body better represents the minimum resistance of a worker's body when the skin resistance drops near zero, which occurs, for example, when there are breaks in the worker's skin, for instance, from cuts or from blisters formed as a result of the current from an electric shock, or when the worker is wet at the points of contact.
Employers may use the IEEE Std 1048-2003 equation to determine safe body current limits only if the employer protects workers from hazards associated with involuntary muscle reactions from electric shock (for example, the hazard to a worker from falling as a result of an electric shock). Moreover, the equation applies only when the duration of the electric shock is limited. If the precautions the employer takes, including those required by applicable standards, do not adequately protect employees from hazards associated with involuntary reactions from electric shock, a hazard exists if the induced voltage is sufficient to pass a current of 1 milliampere through a 500-ohm resistor. (The 500-ohm resistor represents the resistance of an employee. The 1-milliampere current is the threshold of perception.) Finally, if the employer protects employees from injury due to involuntary reactions from electric shock, but the duration of the electric shock is unlimited (that is, when the fault current at the work location will be insufficient to trip the devices protecting the circuit), a hazard exists if the resultant current would be more than 6 milliamperes (the recognized let-go threshold for workers 4 ).
4 Electric current passing through the body has varying effects depending on the amount of the current. At the let-go threshold, the current overrides a person's control over his or her muscles. At that level, an employee grasping an object will not be able to let go of the object. The let-go threshold varies from person to person; however, the recognized value for workers is 6 milliamperes.
2. Acceptable methods of grounding for employers that do not perform an engineering determination. The grounding methods presented in this section of this appendix ensure that differences in electric potential are as low as possible and, therefore, meet § 1910.269(n)(3) without an engineering determination of the potential differences. These methods follow two principles: (i) The grounding method must ensure that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time, and (ii) the grounding method must ensure that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible.
Paragraph (n)(3) of § 1910.269 does not require grounding methods to meet the criteria embodied in these principles. Instead, the paragraph requires that protective grounds be “placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner that the employer can demonstrate will prevent exposure of each employee to hazardous differences in electric potential.” However, when the employer's grounding practices do not follow these two principles, the employer will need to perform an engineering analysis to make the demonstration required by § 1910.269(n)(3).
i. Ensuring that the circuit opens in the fastest available clearing time. Generally, the higher the fault current, the shorter the clearing times for the same type of fault. Therefore, to ensure the fastest available clearing time, the grounding method must maximize the fault current with a low impedance connection to ground. The employer accomplishes this objective by grounding the circuit conductors to the best ground available at the worksite. Thus, the employer must ground to a grounded system neutral conductor, if one is present. A grounded system neutral has a direct connection to the system ground at the source, resulting in an extremely low impedance to ground. In a substation, the employer may instead ground to the substation grid, which also has an extremely low impedance to the system ground and, typically, is connected to a grounded system neutral when one is present. Remote system grounds, such as pole and tower grounds, have a higher impedance to the system ground than grounded system neutrals and substation grounding grids; however, the employer may use a remote ground when lower impedance grounds are not available. In the absence of a grounded system neutral, substation grid, and remote ground, the employer may use a temporary driven ground at the worksite.
In addition, if employees are working on a three-phase system, the grounding method must short circuit all three phases. Short circuiting all phases will ensure faster clearing and lower the current through the grounding cable connecting the deenergized line to ground, thereby lowering the voltage across that cable. The short circuit need not be at the worksite; however, the employer must treat any conductor that is not grounded at the worksite as energized because the ungrounded conductors will be energized at fault voltage during a fault.
ii. Ensuring that the potential differences between conductive objects in the employee's work area are as low as possible. To achieve as low a voltage as possible across any two conductive objects in the work area, the employer must bond all conductive objects in the work area. This section of this appendix discusses how to create a zone that minimizes differences in electric potential between conductive objects in the work area.
The employer must use bonding cables to bond conductive objects, except for metallic objects bonded through metal-to-metal contact. The employer must ensure that metal-to-metal contacts are tight and free of contamination, such as oxidation, that can increase the impedance across the connection. For example, a bolted connection between metal lattice tower members is acceptable if the connection is tight and free of corrosion and other contamination. Figure 4 shows how to create an equipotential zone for metal lattice towers.
Wood poles are conductive objects. The poles can absorb moisture and conduct electricity, particularly at distribution and transmission voltages. Consequently, the employer must either: (1) Provide a conductive platform, bonded to a grounding cable, on which the worker stands or (2) use cluster bars to bond wood poles to the grounding cable. The employer must ensure that employees install the cluster bar below, and close to, the worker's feet. The inner portion of the wood pole is more conductive than the outer shell, so it is important that the cluster bar be in conductive contact with a metal spike or nail that penetrates the wood to a depth greater than or equal to the depth the worker's climbing gaffs will penetrate the wood. For example, the employer could mount the cluster bar on a bare pole ground wire fastened to the pole with nails or staples that penetrate to the required depth. Alternatively, the employer may temporarily nail a conductive strap to the pole and connect the strap to the cluster bar. Figure 5 shows how to create an equipotential zone for wood poles.